大学英语四级阅读精选

(第 2 版)

主 编 闫传海
副主编 袁 森 范 新德

西 北 工 业 大 学 出 版 社
1998 年 2 月
( 陕 ) 新登字 009 号

【内容 简介】 本 书是 根据 《大学 英语 教 学大 纲》, 《大 学英 语 四 级 考试 大

纲》 和 目前 考试新 题型的 要求 , 以及 对现 行大学 英语 四级 考 试试 题 的分 析 而精
选的一 本阅 读教材 。作者 对初 版的 《大学 英语四 级考 试阅 读 精选》 作了 大 量修
改后 , 在每 个单元 都增加 了相 应的英 译汉 练习。 同时 书后 新 增有 短 文、 回 答问
题、阅 读练 习。本 书内容 题材 丰富 , 所选 文章和 问题 设置 具 有相 当 的难 度 和深
度 , 极 有利 于读者 锻炼独 立思 考能力 。故 本书是 大学 英语 四 级考 试 前的 理 想强
化教材 。

大学英语四级阅读精选
(第 2 版 )
主 编 闫传海
责任编辑 傅高明
责任校对 李 杰
*
○
C 1998 西北工业大学出版社出版发行
(710072 西安市 友谊西 路 127 号 电话 8493844)
陕西省新华书店经销
西北工业大学出版社印刷厂印装
ISBN 7 5612 1024 8/ H・84
*
开本 787× 1092 毫米 1/ 32 印张 : 1 2 . 2 5 字数 : 2 5 8 千字
1998 年 2 月第 2 版 1998 年 2 月 第 5 次 印刷
印 数 : 34 001 —44 000 册 定价 : 13. 00 元

购 买本社 出版 的图书 , 如 有缺页 、错页 的 , 本社发 行部 负责调 换。

 第 2 版前言

《大学英语四级应试系 列丛书》 1996 年 一经 推出 , 就 受

到广大读者的欢迎 , 前后多次重印 , 仍供不应求 , 各地书店
和读者纷纷求购。为满足广大读者的要求 , 我社根据国家教
委 《大学英语教学大纲》 规定的要求和全国大学英语四、六
级考试委员会公布的最 新题 型 , 组织 作者 进行 了 全面 修订 ,
以飨读者。

西北工业 大学出版 社
1998 年 1 月
 前 言

大学英语阅读是大学英语教学的核心组成部分。作为对
《大学英语教学大 纲》 的 集中体 现 , 阅 读在各 种 大学 英语 教
材或四级英语统考中都占有相当的比重。为了促使学生在大
学英语学习最后阶段阅读能力有突破性的提高 , 亦为学生在
准备国家四级统考前提供一本较为实用的教材 , 我们从自己
多年使用的各种自编自 选阅读 材料 中选编 出这 本 阅读 教材 ,
供学生在大学英语最后阶段作为强化教材使用。
本书有如下六个特点 :
一、在词汇控制与注释方面 , 根据大学英语教学大纲最
新词表 , 本书词汇注释仅就影响对整篇主题思想理解和对重
点细节理解的 重 点 词汇 进 行 注 释。文 章 中 保 留部 分 超 纲 词
汇 , 甚至部分难词旨在锻炼学生从篇章层次上的阅读推理能
力。事实上 , 对众多中国英语学习者来讲 , 英语词汇的掌握
总是存在一定局限性。对 不同 程度的 英语 学习 者 和使 用者 ,
如何避开或减少非重要词汇的干扰而不影响对文章总体的理
解亦是英语学习技能中的组成部分之一。
二、在长度控制方面 , 我们根据多年组织四级考试的教
学经验和对四 级 试 题阅 读 部 分 的 分析 , 本 书 以单 元 形 式 编
排。全书共 30 个 单元 , 每一 单 元由 4 篇 文 章 20 个 问 题 组
成。4 篇文章主体词汇 量平 均为 1 200 个单 词。全书 文章 阅
读量不低于 3. 5 万单词。这个阅读量的书无论是作为四级英
语考前主导强化教材或作为课堂辅助阅读教材均较适宜。
三、在文体选择方面 , 我们根据教学实践和阅读教学理
论 , 发现论述性、分析性文章的理解难度要明显大于一般叙
述性文章难度。作为大学英语教学最后阶段的强化教材 , 所
选择的文章本身应具有一定的难度 , 从而有利于学生的阅读
能力在最后阶段有突破性的提高。为此 , 论述性、分析性文
章的数量多于普通叙述性文章是本书的显著特点之一。
四、在问题设 置 方面 , 根据 美 国教 育 学 家 B. Bloom 对
教育目标的分类 , 教育目标分为从低到高 6 个层次 , 它们依
次是知识、理解、应用、分析、综合和评估。这 6 个层次中
每个较高层次都包括较低层次的内容。以阅读理解问题设置
来讲 , 就事实理解的问题和对文章具体点回答的问题明显比
分析性问题容易。根据上述理论 , 本书各篇文章绝大部分问
题多侧重于文章的内在结构 , 内在结构间相互关系以及从文
章内在结构进行推理分析。本书问题设置强调从文章篇章语
言着手是本书最主要的特点。由于本书文章所设置的问题多
具有一定难度 , 它有助于学生从更深层次上理解文章的内涵
意义。从整体上讲 , 本书试题从文章体材选编到问题设置更
能反映当前试题发展的新趋势。故本书亦适合作为托福、英
语水平考试前的阅读强化教材。
五、本书在每篇阅读文章中划了一句较有代表性句子供
读者作翻译练习 , 以利于读者英译汉能力的提高 , 同时 , 也
有利于读者对难句的理解。在书后附有相关译文以供参考。
六、本书的短 文 阅 读 及 问 题 回 答 练 习 , 有 30 篇 短 文 ,
每篇之后就短文相关内 容提 出有 关问 题 , 共 60 题 , 以帮 助
读者从多方面 提 高 其语 言 应 用 能 力。书 后 附 有相 应 参 考 答
案。
本书的选编由西安石油学院外语教研室老师集体合作而
成。其中闫传海负责全书框架设定 , 前言撰写和全书编辑汇
总。全书文章最后选定由闫传海、袁森、范新德负责。所选
文章具体分工如下 : U nit 1 ～ 4 闫 传 海 ; U nit 6～ 9 张 梅娟 ;
U nit 10～ 13 祝延 秀 ; U nit 14～ 17 施文霞 ; U nit 18 ～ 21 袁
森 ; U nit 22～ 25 刘 博 华 ; U nit 27～ 30 范 新 德 ; U nit 5 , 26
薛广历。
由于编者水平所限 , 错误难免 , 望同行及使用者不吝赐
教。

编 者
1995 年 1 月
 目 录

U nit 1 ………………… 1 U nit 18 ……………… 181

U nit 2 ………………… 11 U nit 19 ……………… 190
U nit 3 ………………… 20 U nit 20 ……………… 199
U nit 4 ………………… 32 U nit 21 ……………… 208
U nit 5 ………………… 41 U nit 22 ……………… 217
U nit 6 ………………… 51 U nit 23 ……………… 226
U nit 7 ………………… 61 U nit 24 ……………… 236
U nit 8 ………………… 70 U nit 25 ……………… 246
U nit 9 ………………… 80 U nit 26 ……………… 257
U nit 10 ……………… 91 U nit 27 ……………… 268
U nit 11 ……………… 103 U nit 28 ……………… 278
U nit 12 ……………… 114 U nit 29 ……………… 289
U nit 13 ……………… 125 U nit 30 ……………… 300
U nit 14 ……………… 136 短文阅读与问题回答
U nit 15 ……………… 147 ………………………… 310
U nit 16 ……………… 159 参考答案 ……………… 355
U nit 17 ……………… 170
 Unit 1

Passage A

F ollowing a re comments about t he behavior t hat people

in the U nited States usually expect in various social sit ua-
tion s .
In troductions and Conversation . Men u sually shake
hands with each ot he r w hen t hey meet for t he fir st time , bu t
shake hands wit h women only if t he woman extends he r
hand fir st . Women do no t usually shake hands wit h each
o t her .
A fter t he first meeting , shaking hands is no t customa-
ry . H owever , if som eone offers his or her hand in a s ubse-
quen t encoun ter , one is expected t o shake it . In general,
people in t he U nited States avoid physical con tact wit h each
o t her , since p hy sical contact frequen tly connotes① sexual at-
t raction or aggressivenes s② .
Alt hough , as has been noted , first na mes ar e used
more frequen tly in t he U nit ed States t han elsew her e,
t his practice is gove rned by ce rt ain gene rally accepted rules of

① conno t e〔k ’n u t〕 意味 着
② aggr es si ven ess〔 ’gr esi vn is〕 过 分 ( 的 ) , 放肆 ( 的 )

・1・
etiquette ① . T hus , while it is appropria te for the foreign
studen t t o address people of his or her ow n approximate age
and sta tu s by t heir first na me, the student w ou ld be expec-
ted to use " M r ." , " M rs ." , " Miss" or " Ms ." and t he pe rson
’s last nam e in addr es sing anot he r individual w ho is clea rly
older t han t he st uden t . ( on t he ot her hand , the older pe rson
will probably addr ess t he st uden t by his or her first name
from t he begin ning .) If t he ot he r per son being addressed
has a title such as " A mbas sador " or " Dean " , t he st uden t
should use t hat title and t he last nam e . F or exa mp le , Sena-
t or Ed ward Kennedy w ou ld be addressed as "Senat or Kenne-
dy" . A ny facult y me mber can be addressed as " Professor , "
rega rdless of whet her he or she holds t he r ank of Assistan t
P rofes sor , As sociate Professor , or fu ll Professor . Equally
accept able are " M r ." , " M rs ." , etc .
1. F rom t he passage above , it can be infe rred t hat in t he U-
nited States .
( A) it is impos sible for woman to shake hands with
man
(B ) it is impos sible for w om an to shake hands wit h t he
sa me sex
( C) it is not common t hat w om en shake hands with t he
sam e sex
(D) w oman alway s shake hands wit h t he sa me sex

① et ique t t e〔e ti’k et〕 礼仪

・2・
2. If the m an you m eet for t he second time wan t to shake
hands with you , you j ust .
(A ) t ell him that it is no t good for men t o shake hands
again w hen t hey m eet second tim e
(B ) refuse his hand shaking
( C) smile but t hen r efuse
(D) t ake his hand
3. If you meet a man w hose nam e is Joh n Smit h and who is
much older t han you , it is bet ter for you to call him
.
( A) John ( B) M r .John
( C) M r .Smit h ( D) Smit h
4. If your clas smate’s na me is John Smit h , it is better for
you t o call him .
( A) John ( B) S mit h
( C) M r .Smit h ( D) M r .Joh n Smith
5. The word "addr es s" in t he last par agraph most probably
m eans
.
( A) w rite t he address on the envelope
(B ) w rite a letter t o
( C) ask som ebody to give you his address
(D) speak t o

Passage B

A growing world’s pop ulation and t he discoveries of sci-

・3・
ence may alte r t his pat tern of dist ribu tion in t he fut ure . As
men slowly learn t o master diseases , con t rol floods , pr even t
fa mi nes ① , and stop war s , fewer people die every year ; and
in consequence t he population of t he world is steadily in-
c reasi ng . In 1925 t her e were abou t 2 000 million people in
t he w orld ; by t he end of t he cen t ury t her e may well be ove r
4 000 million .
When numbe rs rise, t he ex t ra mou th s must be fed .
N ew lands must be brough t under cultivation , or land al-
r eady farmed made t o yield larger crops . In som e a reas t he
accessible land is la rgely so i ntensively cu ltivated that it will
be difficult t o make it provide mor e food . In some ar eas t he
population is so dense t hat the land is parcelled ou t in units
t oo tiny t o allow for much improvement in fa rming m et h-
ods . Wer e a large par t of t his fa rming population dr aw n off
int o industrial occupations , t he land migh t be farmed much
more productively by mode rn met hods .
T her e is no w a r ace for science , technology , and i ndu s-
t ry t o keep t he out pu t of food rising faste r t han t he numbe r
of peop le t o be fed . New st rains of crops ar e being devel-
oped w hich will t hrive in unfavour able climates: t he re are
no w farm s beyond t he A rctic Circle i n Siberia and N ort h A-
m erica; irrigation and dry farming met hods bring a r-

① f amin e〔’f min〕 饥 荒

・4・
id ① lands unde r t he plough , da ms hold back t he wate rs of
gr ea t rive rs t o ens ure wate r for the fields in all season s and
t o provide elect ric pow er for new indu st ries; industrial
chemist ry provides fer tilize rs t o suit par ticular soils; aero-
p lanes spray crops to dest roy locusts and many plan t disea-
ses . Every year some new mean s is devised to incr ease or t o
pro tect the food of t he world .
6. The au t hor says t hat t he world’s popu lation is growing
becau se .
( A) ther e a re m any rich valleys and fe rtile plain s
(B ) t he pat tern of distri bution is being alt ered
( C) people are living longer
(D) new land is being brough t under cultivation
7. The au thor says t hat in densely populated ar eas t he land
migh t be more productively fa rmed if .
( A) the plo ts we re subdivided
(B) a la rge pa rt of t he people moved to a different par t
of t he coun t ry
( C) indust rial met hods were used in farming
(D) t he units of land we re m ade much large r
8. We ar e told t hat t here are now farm s beyond the Ar citic
Circle . This has been m ade pos sible by .
( A) produci ng new st rains of crops
(B ) irrigation and dry fa rming m et hods

① a ri d〔’ rid〕 干旱的

・5・
 ( C) providing fer tillize rs
(D) dest roying pests and diseases
9. If a large pa rt of farming population a re employed in in-
dust ry , t he land may be cultivat ed .
( A) by moder n met hods ( B) w or se
( C) by old met hods (D) bet ter
10. Which of t hese words is nea rest in m eaning t o t he word
‘ st r ains’?
( A) t ypes ( B) sizes
( C) seeds (D) ha rvests
11. T his pas sage focuses on .
( A) population
( B) food production
( C) cont rol of diseases
( D) developmen t of science and technology
12. T he au t hor’s m ain purpose is to .
( A) argue a belief ( B) describe a p henomenon
( C) be en ter taining (D) propose a conclu sion

Passage C

H ydrogeology is a science dealing with t he prope rties ,

dist ribu tion , and circulation of water on t he surface of t he
land , in t he soil and under lyi ng rock s , and in t he at mos-
phere . The hydrologic cycle, a major topic i n t his science , is
t he complete cycle of phenomena t hrough w hich wa ter pas-
ses , begi nning as at mosphe ric wat er vapor , passing in to liq-
・6・
uid and solid form as pr ecipitation , t hence along and in to t he
ground s urface , and finally again r et ur ning to t he form of
at mospheric wa ter vapor by m eans of evaporation and t ran-
s pir ation .
T he te rm " geohydrology " is sometimes erroneously
used as a synonym for " hydrogeology " . Geohydrology is
conce rned wit h underground wate r . There a re many forma-
tion s that con tain wate r bu t ar e no t par t of the hydrologic
cycle becau se of geologic changes that have isolated t he m
undergrou nd . These system s ar e prope rly ter med geohydro-
logic bu t not hydrogeologic . O nly w hen a system possesses
nat ural or a r tificial bounda ries t hat as sociate the wate r wit h-
in it wit h t he hydrologic cycle may the en tire system prope r-
ly be termed hydrogeologic .
13. T he au t hor’s prima ry purpose is most probably to
.
( A) pr esen t a hypot hesis
( B) r efu te an a rgumen t
( C) corr ect a misconcep tion
( D) pr edict an occurrence
14. It can be inferred t hat w hich of t he followi ng is most
likely to be the s ubject of st udy by a geohydrologist ?
( A) Sof t , porous rock being worn away by a wat er-
fall .
( B) Wate r depositing minerals on t he bank s of a gorge
t hrough w hich t he wat er runs .
・7・
 ( C) The t rapping of water in a sealed underground
rock cavern through the action of an ear t hquake .
( D) Wate r becoming unfit t o dri nk th rough t he release
of pollu tants i nt o it from a m anufact uring plan t .
15. T he au t hor refer s to " many formations " ( line 11 ) pri-
m arily in order to .
( A) clarify a distinction
( B) in t roduce a subject
( C) emphasize a si mila rit y
( D) r esolve a conflict

Passage D

A n i mpor tan t new indust ry , oil r efining , grew af ter t he

Civil War . Crude oil, or pet roleum ( a dark , t hick ooze ①
from t he ea r th ) had been kno wn for hundreds of years . Bu t
little use had ever been made of it . In the 1850’s Sa muel M .
Kie r , a manufact ur er in western Pennsylvania , began collec-
ting t he oil from local seepages ② and refini ng it in to kero-
sene ③ . Refining , like s melting , is a proces s of re moving im-
purities from a r aw m aterial .
Ke rosene was u sed to ligh t lamps . It was a cheap s ub-
stit ute for w hale oil, which was becomi ng harder to get .

① ooze〔u∶z〕 渗 出( 物)
② seep age〔’si∶ p id 〕 油苗
③ ke rosen e〔’ke r si∶ n〕 煤 油

・8・
Soon ther e was a large dem and for kerosene . People began
t o sear ch for new supplies of pet roleum .
T he fir st oil well was drilled by E .L .Dr ake, a retir ed
railroad conductor . In 1859 he began drilli ng in Tit usville,
Pennsylvania . The whole ven t ure seemed so impractical and
foolis h t hat on looke rs called it " Drake’s F olly" . But w hen he
had drilled dow n abou t 70 feet ( 21 m et ers ) , Drake st ruck
oil . His well began t o yield 20 ba rrels of crude oil a day .
N ews of Dr ake’s succes s brough t oil prospect ors t o t he
scene . By t he ea rly 1860’s t hese wildcatt ers we re drilling for
" black gold " all over weste rn Pennsylvania . T he boom ri-
valed ① t he California gol d rush of 1848 in its excitem en t and
Wild West at mospher e . A nd it brough t far mor e wealt h t o
t he prospect ors than any gol d ru sh .
Crude oil could be refi ned int o m any products . F or
some yea rs kerosene con tinued to be the principal one . I t
was sold in grocery st or es and door to door . In t he 1880’s
and 1890 ’s refine rs learned how t o make ot he r pet roleum
products such as waxes and lubricati ng oils . Pet roleum was
no t t hen used t o make gasoline or heatig oil .
16. It can be infe rred from t he passage t hat kerosene was
prefer able to whale oil becau se w hale oil was too .
( A) expensive (B ) t hick
( C) hot (D) pollu ted

① ri val〔’r aiv l〕 竞争

・9・
17. Accordi ng to t he pas sage, m any people i nitially t hough t
that E .L .D rake had made a mistake by .
( A) going on a w haling expedition
( B) moving to Pennsylvania
( C) sear ching for oil
( D) r etiring from his job
18. Accordi ng to t he pas sage, w hat is " b lack gold" ?
( A) Whale oil ( B) Gold or e
( C) Stolen money ( D) Crude oil
19. Why does t he aut hor men tion t he California gold rush ?
( A) To explain t he need for an i ncreased supply of
gol d
(B) To indicate t he extent of U nited States miner al
wealt h
(C) To describe the mood when oil was first discov-
e red
( D) To argue that gold was more val uab le t han oil
20. T he aut hor men tion s all of t he followi ng as possi ble
products of crude oil EXCEP T .
( A) wax ( B) gasoline
( C) kerosene ( D) lubricator

・ 10 ・
 Unit 2

Passage A

In approxim ately 260 A .D ., a m as sive volcanic① erup-

tion ② buried som e highlands of Cen t ral A merica in ash ,
forcing t he M ayan people t o abandon t his area for decades
and up t o tw o cen t uries in t he w or st hit a reas . T he e ruption
was swif t; it occurr ed in only two identifiable stages , with
almost no int erval in between . As a result of t he lava ③ ou t-
let rou te being under water , stea m exp losion s con trib uted t o
t he violence of t he erup tion , and t he r apid cooling of mag-
m a④ t o tephra ( ash and ot her materials ) by t he lake waters
created very s mall pa rticles , wh ich t he wind ca rried long
dist ances . T he m agnitude of t he erup tion can be calculat ed
from t he t hr ee foot deep ashfall for ty - five miles from
t he sour ce . O ne small ar ea in t his region was struck by
t hr ee additional eruptions in t he years that followed . T hese
va riou s e ruptions diffe red in ter ms of t he size of the ar ea
devast ated and t he nat ure of t he tephra blasted in to t he air ,

① volca nic〔v l’k n ik〕 火山的

② e rup tion〔i’r p n〕 喷 发 , 爆发
③ la va 〔′la∶ v 〕 熔岩
④ mag ma〔′m gm 〕 岩浆

・ 11 ・
but in each instance people s ho wed a dogged det ermination
t o r eoccupy the land s affect ed , t her eby t aking obvious risks
but also reapi ng t he less obviou s benefits of volcanic activi-
ty .
1. Mayan s in the area had to leave .
( A) for abou t 10 year s
(B ) for about 260 yea rs
( C) in tw o st ages
(D) for as long as 200 years
2. It can be inferr ed t hat the explosion was par ticu la rly
st rong becau se .
( A) the eruption was swif t
(B ) t he escape rou te for the lava was under wa ter
( C) t he m agma cooled rapidly t o teph ra
(D) t he ash for ty five miles from t he source was t hr ee
feet deep
3. The magma was cooled quick ly t o tephr a t hank s t o
.
( A) ash and ot he r materials
(B ) very small par ticles
( C) t he wind
(D) t he water of t he lake
4. The size of t he eruption can best be gauged by t he fact
t hat .
(A ) t here was deep ash a great distance from t he erup-
tion itselfp
・ 12 ・
 (B ) t he wind carried par ticles a gr eat distance
( C) t he lava ou tlet rou te was under water
(D) t hr ee additional erup tions occurred
5. A sequel w hich all t hree additional e ruptions men tioned
in t he passage had in common was .
( A) the size of the area devasta ted
(B ) t he type of tephr a gener ated
( C) t he r etur n of t he i nhabitan ts t o affect ed ar eas
(D) t he obvious ris ks of volcanic activity
6. The volcanic eruption in 260 A .D . was probably
.
( A) swifte r t han t he o thers men tioned
(B ) la rger t han t he ot hers m en tioned
( C) tw o cen t uries befor e the ot hers m en tioned
(D) later t han t he ot he rs mentioned
7. The inhabitan ts of the a rea w hich had been hit by t he ad-
ditional e ruptions .
( A) gai ned some advan tages
(B ) did not take obvious risks
( C) differed in term s of t he ar eas affected
(D) we re dete rmined to keep t heir dogs on the land af-
fected

Passage B

F or nea rly a cent ury befor e there was s uch a t hing as a

space progsam , a view of s pace was pos sible . People cou ld
・ 13 ・
see detailed views of t he Moon , explore M ars , and st udy t he
geomet ric beau ty of Sat urn’s rings . All of t his was m ade
pos sible by a s mall group of a rtist ast ronomers ① w ho m ade
a ca reer of illust rating ho w o t her w or lds in space migh t
look .
Lucien Rudaux , a Fr ench ar tist , w as t he fir st to com-
bine his a r tistic talen ts with his knowledge of astronomy .
H is paintings s how a mix t ure of s killed observations , bril-
liant imagi nation , and painstak ing attention t o det ail . As a
res ult many of his works have come surprisingly close to ac-
t ual conditions on distan t planets . His Pain ti ng of M ars ② in-
cluded moonlike crate rs t hat were first pho tograp hed by t he
M ariner 4 probe i n 1965 . H is 1930 pain ting of a du st st orm
looks rem arkably like a pho tograph of a st orm taken by O r-
biter 2 in 1976 .
T he a rtist astronom ers , including Rudaux , sti mulat ed
inte rest in ou te r space by painting w hat even t ually t urned
ou t t o be precise port raits of t he planets .
8. What is t he main idea of t he passage ?
( A) T he am azing accuracy of s pace ar tists .
(B ) T he popular success of Lucien Rudau x .
( C) The imaginations of great a rtists .
(D) T he similarities of t he Moon t o Ma rs .

① ast ronome r〔 s’tr n m 〕 天 文学 家

② Ma r s〔ma∶z〕 火星

・ 14 ・
9. For how m any yea rs have people been able to see pain t-
ings showing t he appea rance of o ther planets ?
( A) Nea rly five . ( B) A bou t fif teen .
( C) A bou t fif ty . (D) Almost a hu ndr ed .
10. Accordi ng t o t he passage, ar tist ast ronome rs spen t
their lives .
( A) exploring t he planets
( B) st udyi ng geom etry
( C) creating images of space
( D) producing rockets for space tr avel
11. Accordi ng to t he passage, the w or ks of Lucien Rudaux
repr esen t a combination of .
( A) ast ronomy and m athem atics
( B) phot ogr aphy and ill ustr ation
( B) gener alizations and specifics
( D) fact and fiction
12. Accordi ng to t he pas sage w hat did t he space probes do ?
( A) Created abnormal conditions on t he planets .
( B) Confirmed the s pace ar tists w ork .
( C) P roduced new occupa tions for a rtists .
( D) Promoted in ter est in ou te r space .

Passage C

O ne ar ea of linguistics , t hat is , t he scien tific study of

・ 15 ・
language, is morphology ① , w hich - among ot he r t hings -
deals wit h w ord-coinage rules . T hese rules are language
specific and are alw ays obeyed w hen new words ent er a lan-
guage .In English , t he results of such proces ses a re term ed
compounds , acronyms , blends , and clippings or abbrevia-
tion s . Compounds ar e formed by st ringig w ords t ogether .
F or exa mple, from t he words " boy " and " frined" , t hrough
compounding , t he word boyfriend is de rived . Acronyms ar e
w ords formed from t he initial sounds of each word in a
phrase . For example, from t he phrase N or t h A tlan tic Tr ea-
t y Organization , t he acronym NA T O is derived . O r , t o use
a mor e recent and r ather popu la r ac ronym , T GI F simply
means " T hank God , I t’s F riday !" Blend s ar e words formed
from pa rts of o t her w ords . Motel, for example, is form ed
from a combina tion of the w ords mo tor and hotel; bru nch ,
from br eakfast and lunch , etc . Finally , clippings stem from
regular w ord s t hat have been ab br eviated . M at h , phone,
ad , and bike - to men tion just a few - a re now widely ac-
cep ted and have almost t otally rep laced ( orally , at least )
t heir longer ver sions of mat hematics , telephone, adver tise-
m en t, and bicycle .
13. DJ , which stands for disk jockey , is
( A) a compound . ( B) a clipping .
( C) an ac ronym . ( D) a blend .

① morphol ogy 〔′m ∶ f l d i〕 词 法

・ 16 ・
14 . According to t he passage , words like prof ( profes sor )
or teach ( teache r) are more likely to
(A) be found in written reports .
( B) be hea rd in conve rsa tions .
( C) appear in legal documents .
( D) be taugh t in A merican schools .
15. Which of t he follo wing stat ements is t rue ?
( A) English , unlike ot he r languages , is equipped with
t he linguistic m eans to expand its word stock .
( B) All languages have a set numbe r of r ules ( na mely
four) wit h w hich t hey form w ords .
( C) Word coinage r ules a re op tional rules .
( D) T her e a re set processes t hat allo w addition of new
w ords int o a language .
16. An ac ronym for a " self-con tained unde rwate r breat hing
appar at us" is
( A) scuba . ( B) sebra .
( C) cuba . (D) none of the above .

Passage D

Statistics have show n t hat t he aver age Am erican college

gr aduat e will t ravel abroad about five times i n h is lifeti me .
O nly t wo of t hese visits will be leisurer elated . The r emain-
de r will be work-orien ted . Even w hen vacationing , howev-
er , middle-income A me rican graduates ar e mor e inclined t o

・ 17 ・
for eign t r avel for socalled "education " t han for sheer ① p leas-
ur e .
T hese sa me statistics show t hat t he favorite destination
of t hese A merican t ravele rs , outside of N ort h Am erica, is
t he U nited Kingdom . Ove r 75 per cent of those Am ericans
w ho have visited Europe have incl uded England on t heir itin-
era ry . F urt hermor e, t he st opover in t his coun t ry averages
ou t to at least one week longe r t han visits to o t her European
count ries . T he t ours taken in England ar e over whelmingly
education-r elated . Trips t o Shakespear e ’s birt hplace in
Str atford-on-A von , and visits t o museums , galle ries , and
palaces substan tially ou tnumber tours gea red t owards rec-
r eational and/ or spor ting holidays .
O nly a small per cen tage of Am ericans feel secure e-
nough t o t ravel outside t heir ow n coun t ry wit hout t he aid of
organized t ours . Recen tly , tours designed for specific pur-
poses , such as a r eligious tour of t he Middle E ast , and a r-
chaeological tour of G reece, or a phot o safari i n A frica have
becom e ext re mely popular .
M any of t hese t ours a re no t sponsor ed by profes sional
t ravel agencies , b ut r at he r by local organizations such as re-
ligious or civic group s .
17. O n t he w hole, Am erican t ravele rs
( A) spend twice as much time in England t han in any

① sh ee r 〔′i 〕 完 全的

・ 18 ・
 o ther European coun try .
( B) visit England more of ten t han Canada .
( C) spend an ave rage of seven days more i n England
t han in any ot her European coun t ry .
( D) would r at her visit museums t han palaces .
18. Which of t he follo wing stat ements is t rue ?
( A) All Am erican graduates tr avel .
( B) Most college graduates will t ravel abroad during
t heir lifetim es .
( C) A me rican graduates dislike England .
( D) A me ricans must t ravel five times before gr adua-
tion .
19. Which of t he follo wing stat ements is t rue ?
( A) A mericans t ravel for pleasure only .
( B) A mericans tr avel for bu siness only .
( C) A me ricans t ravel for busines s and p leasure .
( D) A mericans tr avel les s for business t han for p leas-
ure .
20. Accordi ng to the passage , w ho w ou ld be t he least likely
to t ake a t rip to Europe ?
( A) A n A merican h igh school teacher .
( B) A n A m erican execu tive .
( C) A n A merican teenage r .
( D) A n Am erican ministe r of a local chur ch .

・ 19 ・
 Unit 3

Passage A

T elevision was no t inven ted by any one person . N or did

it spring int o being over nigh t . It evolved gradually , over a
long period , from t he ideas of m any people——— each one
building on t he w ork of t heir predecessors . The process be-
gan in 1873 , w hen it was accidentally discover ed t ha t the e-
lect rical resistance of t he element selenium varied in propor-
tion t o t he i ntensity of the ligh t sh ining on it . Scien tists
quickly recognized t hat t his provided a way of t ransforming
ligh t va riations int o elect rical signals . Almost immediately a
number of schemes were proposed for sending pict ures by
wire ( it was , of course, before r adio) .
O ne of t he ear liest of t hese sche mes was pat terned on
t he hum an eye . S uggested by G .R . Carey in 1875 , it envi-
sioned a mosaic of selenium cells on w hich the pict ur e t o be
t ransmitted w ou ld be focused by a len s system . A t t he re-
ceiving end t he re w ould be a si mila rly arranged mosaic m ade
up of electric ligh ts . Each selenium cell w ould be connect ed
by an individual wire to t he similarly p laced ligh t in t he re-
ceiving mosaic . Ligh t falling on t he selenium cell w ou ld
cause t he associated elect ric ligh t to s hine in propor tion .
T hus t he mosaic of ligh ts w ould reproduce t he origi nal pic-
・ 20 ・
t ure .H ad the neces sa ry a mplifiers and the righ t kind of
ligh ts been available, this syste m w ou ld have worked . But it
also would have r equir ed an impr actical number of connect-
ing wires . Carey recognized th is and in a second schem e pro-
posed t o " scan " t he cells——— tr ans mit ti ng t he singal from
each cell t o its as sociated ligh t, in turn , over a single wir e .
If t his were done fast enough , t he retentive po wer of t he eye
w ou ld cause t he resultan t im age t o be seen as a comp lete
pictur e .
1. Which of t he following is t he best title for t he passage ?
( A) T he A r t of Television
(B ) T elevision in the Elect ronic Era
( C) Ha rmful Effects of T elevision Viewing
(D) First Steps in t he Invention of T elevision
2. In line 2 of t he pas sage, t he word " being" could best be
r eplaced by w hich of t he following ?
( A) place ( B) existence
( C) cr ea tur e ( D) subsistence
3. A n impor tant discovery in ea rly television was t he elect ri-
cal resistance of .
( A) mosaic ( B) t he human eye
( C) lenses ( D) t he ele men t selenium
4. Which of t he following is N O T given as a reason w hy t he
fir st sche me for television t hat is deseribed in the passage
was abandoned ?
( A) T he over all expen se was prohibitive .
・ 21 ・
 (B ) T he proper lights wer e unavailable .
( C) The numbe r of wir es needed was t oo large .
(D) T he neces sa ry amplifier s we re unavailable .

Passage B

A r ticle Ⅱ , Section 2 of t he U .S .Constitu tion defi nes

t he President’s respon sibilities as follo ws:
1. The Pr esident shall be Commander-in-Chief of t he A rmy
and Navy of the U nited Stat es and of t he militia of t he
seve ral sta tes when called in to t he actual service of t he
U nited States . H e may require t he opinion in w riti ng of
t he principal officer in each of t he execu tive depa rt ments
upon any subject r elating t o t he duties of their respective
offices and he shall have power t o gran t reprieves ① and
pardon s for offenses against t he U nit ed States excep t in
cases of impeach men t ② .
2. H e shall have po wer by and wit h the advice and consen t
of t he Senate to m ake t reaties provided tw o- t hirds of t he
Senators presen t concur ③ , and he shall nominate ④ and by
and wit h t he advice and consen t of the Senate s hall ap-
poi nt a mbassadors , o ther pub lic ministe rs and consu ls ,

① re prieve 〔ri′pri∶ v〕 减 , 缓 ( 刑期 )
② imp each me n t 〔im′pi∶ t m n t〕 控 告 , 指控
③ concu r〔k n′k ∶ n〕 赞成
④ nomi na te 〔′n mi neit〕 提名

・ 22 ・
 j udges of t he S upr eme Cour t , and o ther officer s of the U-
nited States w hose appoin t men ts a re not her ein o t her wise
provided for , and w hich shall be estab lished by law ; bu t
t he Congress may by law vest ① t he appoin t men t of such
inferior office rs as t hey t hink proper in the P residen t a-
lone , in t he cour ts of law , or in t he heads of depar t-
ments .
3. The Pr esiden t shall have po wer to fill up all vacancies
t hat m ay happen during t he r eces s of t he Senate by gran-
ti ng commis sions w hich s hall expire ② at t he end of t heir
nex t session .
5. According t o t he passage, w ho has t he respon sibilit y for
advising t he Pr esident ?
( A) T he Senate .
(B ) T he Suprem e Cour t .
( C) Pub lic ministe rs .
(D) Ambas sadors and consu ls .
6. The Pr esident m ay make t reaties with t he approval of
( A) two- t hirds of t he Senat or s present .
(B ) t wo- thirds of t he pr esen t Senat or s .
( C) t he pr esence of t wo- third s of t he Senate .
(D) t he Sena tors being presen t .
7. When choosing an ambas sador , t he P residen t requires

① v es t[ v es t] 授 于 , 授权… …于
② exp ir e〔ik s′pai 〕 期满 , 到 期

・ 23 ・
 ( A) the counsel and agreem en t of the Senate .
(B ) only t he advice of t he Senate .
( C) t he as sent of t he Supr eme Court .
(D) no ou tside advice or approval .
8. The P resident alone may appoin t an inferior officer ,
t hrough
( A) the approval of t he Senat e .
(B ) t he approval of t he Supre me Court .
( C) t he enact men t of a law by Congr es s .
(D) t he conven tion of Congress .

Passage C

Despite t he fact t hat times have changed , dati ng in t he

①
U nit ed States is still as ritualistic as it must have been in
our gr andpa ren ts’tim e . I t is still accep ted and expect ed t hat
a m an will m ake the fir st over tur e ② . This is no t t o say t hat
a young , fe male adu lt may not ask a m an for a date, bu t it
w ou ld be t he excep tion r at her t han the rule .
Today , perhaps even mor e so t han in t he past twent y
yea rs , dr es s codes seem to be comi ng back in to vogue, and
you w ould be expected t o wear som et hing nice or special as a
comp liment ③ t o your date . If you ar e a man , it would be u-

① ri t ua lis tic〔 rit ju ′listic〕 仪式 的 , 严守

② ove rt ur e〔 uv tj u 〕 序 曲 ; 建议
③ com plimen t〔 k mpl im n t〕 敬 意 ; 赞美 ; 恭 维

・ 24 ・
s ual for you t o pick ou t w her e to go and w hat to do . Such
t hings as tab le reservations at a r estauran t w ould be t he
man’s r esponsibility . Wom en a re no t normally expected t o
share t he expen ses on a first date alt hough going D utch
w ou ld be mor e t he norm if t he rela tionship were to develop .
I t’s advisable in a r estauran t t o let the man choose fir st and
for t he w om an to choose a dis h in the sam e price range .
Most young people ar e going to be un sure abou t t he
et hics and etiquette surroundi ng sex on a first date . Al-
t hough t here ar e no hard and fast rules , it w ou ld be good t o
rem ember t ha t you a re not expected to have sex on a first
date , or at any ot he r time unles s you and your par t ner agr ee
t o it . H owever , no mat ter how t he r elations hip develops ,
safe sex is still of t he u tmost i mpor tance . T his is si mp ly an
ex ten sion of w hat is perhaps t he most impor tan t ru le in dat-
ing : Consider your date and don ’t get too w rapped up in
yourself .
9. The first move will usually be m ade by
( A) the female . (B ) a young adult .
( C) t he m ale . (D) a coed .
10. Dr es s codes t oday ar e
( A) less importan t .
( B) more importan t t han in the last twent y yea rs .
( C) found in m agazines .
( D) very informal .
11. Which of t he follo wi ng w ould be expected from a
・ 25 ・
 w oman on the fir st dat e ?
( A) To reserve a table in a restaurant .
( B) To pay for t he meal .
( C) To let t he man choose from t he menu first .
( D) To go Du tch .
12. Which of t he follo wing stat ements is stated in t he text ?
(A) A first date should always be spen t in a r estau-
rant .
( B) The Du tch never pay t heir restauran t bills .
( C) In a romance , one s hou ld always be conside rate of
one’s pa rt ner .
( D) Expensive restaurants a re more roman tic t han
cheap ones .

Passage D

Since t he Haw aiian Islands have never been connect ed

t o o t her land m as ses , t he gr eat variety of plan ts in H awaii
must be a result of t he long distance dispersal of seeds , a
proces s that r equires bot h a met hod of t ranspor t and an e-
quivalence bet ween the ecology of t he source a rea and that of
t he recipient a rea .
T her e is some dispu te about t he met hod of t r anspor t in-
volved . Some biologists argue t hat ocean and air currents
ar e responsible for the t ransport of plan t seeds to H awaii .
Yet t he results of flo tation experim en ts and t he low temper-
at ures of air curr en ts cast doub t on t hese hypot heses . More
・ 26 ・
probable is bird t ranspor t , eit her ex ternally , by acciden tal
at tachmen t of the seeds to feat hers , or i nte rnally , by t he
swallowing of fruit and su bsequen t excr etion ① of t he seeds .
While it is likely t hat fewer va rieties of plan t seeds have
reached H awaii ex ternally than i nte rnally , mor e varieties
ar e know n to be adap ted to exte rnal t han to in ternal t ran s-
port .
13. T he au t hor of t he passage is prim arily concerned wit h
.
( A) discus sing different approaches biologists have
taken t o testing t heories about t he distri bution of
p lants i n H awaii
( B) discus sing diffe ren t theories abou t the t ranspor t of
p lant seeds to H awaii
( C) discus sing the ex ten t t o w hich air curr en ts ar e re-
sponsi ble for t he dispersal of plan t seeds t o H a-
waii
(D) resolving a dispu te abou t t he adap tabilit y of plan t
seeds to bird t r ansport
14. T he au t hor m en tions t he results of flotation experiments
on p lant seeds ( lines 8 10 ) most probably in orde r t o
.
( A) suppor t the claim t ha t t he dist ribu tion of plan ts in
H awaii is t he result of t he long distance dispersal

① ex cr e tion〔e ks kri∶ n〕 排泄物

・ 27 ・
 of seeds
( B) lend cr edibilit y t o t he t hesis that air currents pro-
vide a met hod of t ransport for plan t seeds t o H a-
w aii
( C) suggest that t he long distance dispe rsal of seeds
is a proces s that requires long periods of time
( D) challenge t he claim t hat ocean currents a re re-
sponsib le for t he t r ansport of plan t seeds t o H a-
waii
15. It can be infe rred from information in t he passage t hat
the existence in al pine r egion s of H awaii of a plan t spe-
cies t hat also grows in t he sout h weste rn U nited States
w ould justify w hich of t he following concl usions ?
( A) The ecology of t he sou t hw estern U nit ed States is
simila r in impor tan t respects t o the ecology of al-
pine regions of H awaii .
( B) The plan t species discover ed in H awaii mu st have
t raveled from the sou t h western U nit ed States only
very recently .
( C) The plan t species discover ed in Hawaii reached
t her e by at taching t o t he feat her s of birds migra-
ting from t he sou th western U nited States .
( D) The p lant species discover ed in H awaii is especial-
ly well adap ted to tr ans por t over long distances .
16. T he passage supplies information for an swe ring w hich
of t he following questions ?
・ 28 ・
 ( A) Why does successfu l long distance dispersal of
p lant seeds require an equivalence between t he e-
cology of t he sour ce area and t hat of t he r ecipien t
area ?
( B) Why ar e mor e varieties of plan t seeds adap ted t o
ex ternal r at her t han to in ternal bird tr an spor t ?
(C) What va rieties of plan t seeds ar e birds t hat fly
long distances most likely to swallow ?
(D) W hat is a reason for accepting t he long distance
dispersal of plan t seeds as an exp lanation for t he
origi n of Hawaiian flora ?

Passage E

A mysterious phenom enon is the abilit y of over wate r

migr an ts to t ravel on cour se . Birds , bees , and o t her species
can keep t rack of time wit hout any sen sory cues from t he
ou tside worl d , and s uch " biological clock s" clear ly con t rib-
u te t o t heir "compas s sen se" . F or example, t hey can use t he
position of the S un or sta rs , along wit h t he tim e of day , t o
find nor t h . But compass sense alone can no t explain how
birds navigate t he ocean : af ter a flock tr aveling east is
blow n far sou t h by a storm , it will assume the proper nor t h-
easterly course to compensate ① . Perhaps , som e scien tists
t hought , migr an ts determine t heir geogr aphic position on

① com pen sat e〔 k mpe nseit〕 补偿

・ 29 ・
Ear t h by celestial navigation , al most as hum an navigat ors
use star s and p lanets , bu t t his w ould demand of t he animals
a fan tastic map sen se .Researchers now know t hat som e spe-
cies have a m agnetic sen se , which migh t allow migrants t o
determine their geographic location by detecting variations
in t he st reng t h of t he Ear t h’s magnetic field .
17. T he main idea of t he passage is t hat .
( A) migr ation over land requir es a simp ler explanation
t han migration over water does
( B) t he means by which animals migrate over wate r
are comp lex and only pa rtly unde rstood
( C) t he ability of migran t anim als t o keep t rack of
tim e is r elated to t heir m agnetic sense
( D) knowledge of geogr aphic location is essen tial t o
migr an ts wit h little or no compas s sense
18. It can be infe rred from t he passage t hat if t he flock of
birds described in lines 6 9 we re navigating by compass
sense alone , they would , after t he storm , fly .
( A) east ( B) nor t h west
( C) sout h (D) sou t heast
19. In main taining t hat migra ting animals woul d need " a
fan tastic m ap sense" ( line 15 ) t o determine t heir geo-
gr aphic position by celestial navigation , t he au t hor in-
tends to expr es s .
( A) admiration for t he ability of t he migrants
( B) skepticism abou t celestial navigation as an exp la-
・ 30 ・
 nation
(C) cer tain ty that t he phenom enon of migration will
re main mysterious
( D) in ter est in a new m ethod of accounting for over
water migra tion
20. O f t he following descrip tions of migr ati ng ani mals ,
w hich most st rongly s uggests t hat t he animals are de-
pending on m agnetic cues to orien t t hemselves ?
(A) Pigeons can proper ly r eadjust t heir course even
w hen flying long distances th rough exceedingly
den se fogs .
( B) Bison ar e able t o r each t heir destination by pas sing
t hrough a land scape that has been pa rtially alter ed
by a recen t fire .
(C) Elephan ts ar e able t o find grounds that some
m embe rs of t he he rd have neve r seen before .
(D) Swallo ws ar e able to ret urn to a given spo t at t he
sam e tim e every yea r .

・ 31 ・
 Unit 4

Passage A

In what now seem like t he pr ehist oric times of compu t-

er hist ory , t he early post war er a, t here was a quite wide-
s pr ead concern t hat compu ters w ou ld take over t he w or ld
from man one day . Alr eady today , les s t han for ty years lat-
er , as compute rs ar e r elieving us of mor e and more of t he
rou tine tasks in busi nes s and in our personal lives , we are
faced wit h a les s dr amatic bu t also less for eseen problem .
People tend to be over tru sting of compu ter s and ar e r eluc-
tant to challenge t heir aut horit y . Indeed , t hey behave as if
t hey wer e hardly awa re t ha t wrong but tons m ay be pus hed ,
or t hat a comp ute r may simp ly m alfunction .
O bviously , ther e would be no poin t i n investing in a
compu ter if you had t o check all its answers , but people
should also r ely on t heir ow n in ternal compu ters and check
t he machine when they have t he feeling that som eth ing has
gone a wry . Q uestioning and rou tine doub le checks must
continue t o be as much a par t of good bu siness as t hey were
in pr e compute r days . Maybe each compu ter s houl d come
with t he follo wing war ni ng: for all t he help t his compute r
may provide, it should not be seen as a substit u te for funda-
m en tal t hinki ng and reasoning s kills .
・ 32 ・
1. What is t he main purpose of t his passage ?
( A) T o look back t o t he early days of compu ters .
(B ) To explain w hat technical prob lem s may occur with
compu te rs .
( C) To discourage un neces sa ry invest men t in compu t-
er s
(D ) To wa rn against a men tally lazy at tit ude t owards
compu ters .
2. According t o t he passage , initial concerns about compu t-
e rs were t hat t hey migh t .
( A) lead us in to t he post war e ra
(B ) be quite widespread
( C) take con trol
(D) t ake over rou ti ne tasks
3. The passage recommends t hose dealing wit h compu ters t o
.
( A) be reasonably skep tical about t hem
(B ) check all t heir an swe rs
( C) s ubstit u te them for basic t hinking
(D) use them for busines s purposes only
4. A n "i nte rnal compute r" is .
( A) a comp ute r used exclu sively by one company for it
ow n problems
(B ) a pe rson’s store of k no wledge and t he abilit y t o
process it
( C) t he most up to date in house compu ter a com-
・ 33 ・
 pany can buy
(D) a compu ter from the post wa r er a wh ich is very
reliable
5. The passage suggests t hat t he present day problem with
r ega rd t o compu ters is .
( A) challenging ( B) psychological
( C) dra matic (D) malfunctioning
6. It can be inferr ed from the passage t hat the aut hor w ou ld
disapprove of .
( A) compute r science courses in high schools
(B ) business men and women w ho use pocket calcula-
tors
( C) main tenance checks on compute rs
(D) companies w hich depend excl usively on compu ters
for decisionmaking

Passage B

T he first syn t hetic plastic was a thermoset ti ng r esin

called ebonite, paten ted in 1843 . Plastics a re divided int o
t wo broad categories , t hermosets and t he rmoplastics . T he
t hermosets are materials t hat , once heated , take on a pe r-
m anent form that cannot be changed by r eheating , while
t hermoplastics repeatedly soft en on hea ting and ha rden on
cooli ng .
Much of t he ear ly work on plastics was on t hermosets ,
and it m ay have been th is limitation t hat preven ted t he m
・ 34 ・
from becoming h igh ly accep table ma terials . A not her r eason
is t hat they wer e looked upon as substit u tes for existing ma-
terials , rat he r t han as new m aterials requiring new ideas in
design and usage . Par t of t his " s ubstit u te" outlook still s ur-
vives , wit h people dispar aging p lastics as second r ate ma-
terials . H o wever , wit h t he major advances in formu lation
and u se of plastics since t he Second World War . T his a tti-
t ude is now pas sing ou t of fashion .
7. What does t he passage main ly discus s ?
( A) The impor tance of plastics in t he Second Wor ld
War .
(B ) V arious uses for plastics .
( C) The early history of syn t hetic plastics .
(D) People’s at tit udes towa rd new materials .
8. According to t he pas sage, ma terials wh ich can repeatedly
be softened and hardened are called .
( A) thermoplastics ( B) ebonites
( C) t hemosets (D) sub stit ut es
9. According to the pas sage, w hy m ay plastics not have
been widely accept ed at first ?
( A) Initial r esea rch was on plastics wit h limited u tility .
(B ) A world war cau sed plastics to be in short s upply .
( C) Existing plastics wer e not sufficien tly heat resist-
ant .
(D) Some researcher s felt t hat plastics wer e dangerous .
10. Which of t he following w ou ld be LE AS T useful if it
・ 35 ・
 we re m ade from a thermoplastic ?
( A) A vase for flo wers ( B) A doorknob
( C) A tab le (D) A coffee cup
11. T he par agraph following t he pas sage most probably dis-
cus ses ?
( A) the cha racteristics of p lastics m ade in t he ea rly
1800’s .
( B) t he gr eate r accep tance of plastics since t he Second
World Wa r .
( C) t he r easons som e people consider plastics inferior
t o o ther ma terials .
( D) t he ab sence of plastics from t he w orld of fashion .

Passage C

During t he early yea rs of t his cent ury , w heat was seen

as t he very lifeblood of Western Canada . When t he crops
wer e good , t he economy was good ; when t he crop s failed ,
t here was depr es sion . People on cit y st r eets watched t he
yields and t he price of w heat wit h almost as much feeling as
if t hey we re growe rs . T he marketi ng of w heat beca me an in-
c reasi ng ly favorite t opic of conver sation .
Wa r set t he stage for t he most dram atic even ts in ma r-
keting t he wester n crop . For years , farm ers mistru st ed
speculative grai n selli ng as ca rried on t hrough t he Winnipeg
G rain E xchange . Wheat prices were gener ally lo w in t he au-
t umn , bu t fa rmer s could no t wait for markets to improve . I t
・ 36 ・
had happened too often t hat t hey sold t heir w heat soon afte r
ha rvest when fa rm deb ts we re coming due, only to see
prices rising and s pecula tors get ting rich . On va rious occa-
sions , producer group s asked for firm er con trols , bu t gov-
ernments had no wish t o become involved , a t least not until
wa rtime w heat prices t hreatened to run wild .
A nxious t o check inflation and rising living costs , t he
federal governm en t appoin ted a boa rd of gr ain supe rvisors t o
handle delive ries from t he c rops of 1917 and 1918 . G rain
Exchange t rading was suspended , and farm ers sold at prices
fixed by t he board . To handle t he crop of 1919 , t he gove rn-
m en t appoin ted the first Canadian Wheat Board , with full
au t horit y t o buy , sell, and set prices .
12. T he au thor u ses t he term "lifeb lood" ( li ne 2 ) to i ndicate
that w heat was .
( A) difficult t o produce in large quan tities
( B) s uscep tib le t o many pa rasites
( C) es sential t o t he healt h of the coun t ry
( D) expensive to gat her and t ransport
13. Accordi ng to t he passage , most fa rmers’ deb ts had to be
paid .
( A) w hen t he au tumn ha rvest had just been complet ed
( B) because w heat prices w ere high
( C) as soon as t he Winnipeg G rain Exchange deman-
ded payment
( D) w hen crop fail ure caused depression
・ 37 ・
14. Accordi ng t o t he passage , w heat prices beca me unman-
ageable because of conditions caused by .
( A) farm ers ( B) supervisors
( C) weat he r (D) war
15. In line 17 , t he w ord " check " cou ld best be r eplaced by
w hich of t he following ?
( A) con t rol ( B) investigate
( C) finance (D) reinfor ce
16. Accordi ng to t he passage , a prelimina ry step in t he cr ea-
tion of t he Canadian W heat Board was t he appoin t men t
of .
( A) t he Winnipeg G rain Exchange
( B) a board of supe rvisors
( C) several producer groups
( D) a new gover nmen t

Passage D

In t he seven teen t h cen t ury , people believed that mag-

gots ① ca me from decayi ng th ings . Bu t F rancesco Redi , a
scien tist , could no t believe t his . " H o w cou ld living t hings
come from dead t hings ?" he asked . Redi began t o believe
t hat all w orms found in the m eat were derived from t he
droppings of flies , and not from t he decaying m eat . T his , of
course , was a guess and no t a conclu sion . Scientists call a

① maggot〔 m g t〕 蛆

・ 38 ・
good guess like t his a " working hypo t hesis" becau se it gives
t he scien tist an idea of ho w and where t o star t his work .
T hen Redi began to ga ther and record facts to find ou t
if his hypot hesis was corr ect . H e did t his by carrying ou t
many experim en ts , w hich were designed to hel p him get t he
facts he needed .
Redi prepa red t hree jars with a piece of meat in each .
H e left one open ; anot he r was covered wit h cheeseclot h ;
and t he t hird was airtigh t . H e observed not once, bu t many
times , t hat t he flies flew to t he open jar and laid t heir eggs
on t he m ea t .
T hese eggs hatched in to maggots . Flies also flew to t he
ja r cover ed wit h cheeseclot h , alt hough t hey coul d no t get in-
t o t he jar t o lay t heir eggs on the m ea t . Flies ra rely flew t o
t he air tigh t ja r . F rom many such obse rvations , Redi concl u-
ded t hat m aggots came from flies eggs and not from t he
meat .
Redi was not satisfied wit h doing ju st one experiment .
Rather , he performed t his experim en t many times before a r-
riving at his conclusion . In t his manner he elimi nated t he
pos sibilit y t ha t his results were due to chance ( l uck ) .
17. In h is experim en t Redi left one jar open .
( A) becau se he had run out of lids and cheeseclot h
( B) so t hat the flies w ould have access to the m eat
( C) accidentally
( D) only once
・ 39 ・
18. Accordi ng t o t he pas sage, an es sential pa rt of prope r
scien tific expe rimen tal procedur e is t o .
( A) leave par t of t he experimen t open to the air
( B) ensur e that many varieties of a substance ar e used
(C) vary t he expe rimen tal conditions t o guaran tee
good res ults
( D) perform n umerous t rials to r educe t he in tr usion of
r andom effects
19. What would scien tist Redi probab ly commen t on t he
theory t hat life on Ear t h evolved from basic che micals
present in t he E ar th’s primitive at mosphe re and seas ?
( A) The t heory was very reasonable .
( B) The theory was ce rt ainly tr ue .
( C) Ot her theories of creation wer e pos sible .
( D) S uch developmen ts are highly unli kely .
20. Accordi ng to t he pas sage t he significance of a " w orking
hypo t hesis " is t hat it .
( A) gives t he scientist somet hing t o p lay wit h in his
mind
( B) provides a model of t he true univer se
( C) allows u seful st ruct uring of expe rimen ts
( D) provides e mployment for scien tists

・ 40 ・
 Unit 5

Passage A

As t he cost of gas and oil for hom e heating has gone

up , m any Am ericans have switched from t hese fuels t o w ood
for heating their hom es . In 1973 , approximat ely 200 000
w ood burning st oves , i ntended for hom e use , were sold in
t he U nited States; by 1979 , this figur e had reached one mil-
lion ; and by t he end of 1981 , there wer e as many as seven
million home ow ned w ood burning units in ope ration in
t he U .S . .
In addition t o low fuel bills , m any peop le choose t hese
stoves because t heir initial cost is very lo w ( t he prices r ange
from ＄ 50 kits to ＄5 000 t op of t he line models ) , and
because new technology has made w ood fir es mor e efficient ,
cleane r , and , t her efore , safer than ever before .
O ne new technological feat ure of t his t ype is the cata-
ly tic combustor w hich adds abou t ＄100 to ＄200 t o t he cost
of the st ove, but w hich causes much mor e complete combu s-
tion of the w ood and therefor e burns up mor e of t he pollu-
tants left by incomp lete combustion and produces more
heat .
A second cost saving innovation is a device w hich agi-
tates t he w ood , i ncreasing t he a moun t of oxygen that r ea-
・ 41 ・
ches t he cen ter of t he wood pile, and leading t o more effi-
cien t combustion . The real advan tage of t his device is that it
allows t he ow ner t o make use of cheap sources of wood such
as dir ty wood chips ( an indust rial by product ) t hat have al-
most no commer cial value , cost as little as ＄20 a t on , and
burn very inefficiently in fur naces wit hou t an agitat or .
1. According to the pas sage, t he number of w ood burning
st oves sold for home u se .
( A) w en t up five fold ove r a six year period
(B ) rose to seven million during t he seven ties
( C) multiplied t hir t y five tim es between 1973 and t he
beginning of 1981
(D) incr eased by 6 800 000 over an eigh t yea r period
2. According t o t he au thor , which of t he following is no t a
fact or in t he recen t incr ease i n popu la rit y of w ood burn-
ing st oves ?
( A) T heir gr eat er cleanliness t han in t he old days .
(B ) T he h igh cost of alternative heating fuels .
( C) The wide r ange of prices .
(D) T he r elatively cheap cost of t heir energy sour ce .
3. Which of t he following is an examp le of an innovation in
wood burning stoves ?
( A) Dir t y wood chips .
(B ) T he cataly tic combustor .
( C) ＄5 000 top of t he line models .
(D) Indust rial by products .
・ 42 ・
4. Which of t he following statem en ts is not t rue ?
(A ) Wood b ur ning st oves are safer and more efficien t
t han t hey used to be .
( B) No fact ories exist for t he p urpose of producing dir t-
y wood chips .
( C) Bot h catalytic combust or s and w ood agitators save
money in the long run .
(D) Wood burning st oves wit h catalytic combust ors
cost bet ween ＄100 and ＄200 .
5. The passage states that .
( A) many Am ericans have switched from hydrocarbon
based fuels t o w ood because t he price of t he latte r
has risen
( B) some w ood burning stoves cost up t o one hundr ed
tim es more t han ot he rs
( C) catalytic combustors incr ease t he amoun t of pollu-
tion caused by wood burning stoves
(D) agitat ors ar e a cheaper addition t o w ood burning
stoves t han catalytic comb ustors .

Passage B

O ne of t he gr eatest proble ms for t hose set tler s in Ne-

br aska i n t he last quar ter of t he previous cen tury was fuel .
Little of t he sta te was forested w hen t he first set tle rs a r-
rived and it is probable t hat by 1880 , only abou t one t hird
of t he originally forested a rea r emained , do wn t o a mer e 1
・ 43 ・
percen t of t he state’s 77 , 000 square miles . Wit h w ood and
coal ou t of the question , and wit h fuel needed year round
for cooking , and during t he harsh win ter mont h s for heat-
ing , some sol ution had t o be found .
Som ewhat improbably , t he buffalo provided t he an-
swer . Buffalo chip s wer e found to burn evenly , ho tly , and
cleanly , wit h little smoke and , in ter estingly , no odor .
Soon , collecting t hem beca me a way of life for t he settlers’
chil dr en who would pick t he m up on t heir way to and from
school, or take par t in competitions designed t o coun teract ①
t heir nat ur al r el uctance . Even a young man , seeking t o im-
pr es s the girl he wanted to marry , would arrive wit h a large
bag of chips rat her t han wit h a box of candy or a bunch of
flowe rs .
6. What is t he main t opic of t his passage ?
( A) T he solution t o t he Nebraskan set tle rs’ fuel prob-
le m .
(B ) Life in Nebraska in t he late ni neteen t h cent ury .
( C) The impor tance of t he A merican buffalo .
( D) Deforesta tion in Nebraska in t he late ni neteen th
cen tury .
7. Which of t he follo wi ng statem en ts is not t rue according
t o t he passage ?
( A) Nebr as ka was not a densely forested state even

① coun te r act〔 ka un t r k t〕 抵消 , 消 除

・ 44 ・
 befor e t he set tler s a rrived .
(B ) T he childr en enjoyed collecting t he buffalo chip s .
(C) T he children spent a lo t of time collecting t he
chip s .
(D) Buffalo chips were sa tisfactory as a fuel .
8. According to t he pas sage, how much of Nebraska was
forested w hen t he fir st settlers arrived ?
( A) Abou t 33 percen t ( B) Abou t 1 per cent
( C) A bou t 66 percep t (D) A bou t 3 pe rcent
9. The passage implies t hat buffalo ch ips wer e needed
.
( A) in greater amounts i n summer
(B ) in gr eater a moun ts in winte r
( C) only in summ er (D) only in win ter
10. Which of t he follo wing does t he au t hor not expr ess sur-
prise at ?
( A) The children needed competitions t o stimu late
t he m .
( B) The buffalo ch ips gave off no sm ell .
( C) Buffalo ch ips w ere t he answer t o t he set tle rs’ fuel
problem .
( D) Y oung men t ook bags of buffalo ch ip s t o t heir girl
friends .

Passage C

Scien tists at Sus sex U nive rsity appear to be on t he way

・ 45 ・
t o discove ring ho w t he mosquito ① , ca rrier of diseases such
as malaria and yello w fever , homes in on its target . T he
problem is t hat t hey have found t ha t t he best way to avoid
being bit ten is : stop breat hing , st op sweating , and keep
dow n the temper at ure of your imm ediate surroundings . U n-
for tunately t he first suggestion is impos sible and t he o thers
ve ry difficult .
Scien tists have found t hat t her e ar e t hree distinct stages
in a mosquito’s assault ② . St age one is at fift y feet away ,
w hen t he i nsect first smells a m an or animal t o bite . Stage
t wo is t hough t t o com e int o ope ration about t wen ty five
feet from t he target , when t he insect becomes guided by t he
ca rbon dioxide br eathed ou t by t he in tended victim . Stage
t hr ee is when t he mosquito is only a matt er of inches from
its pr ey t he warm t h and moist ure given off by t he victim is
t he final clue .
T he resea rchers then examined how r epellen ts ③ int er-
fere wit h its t hree stage a ttack . T hey found repellents act
more sub tly t han by just giving off a nasty smell . A Canadi-
an r esea rcher says t hat repellents appea r t o confu se mosqui-
t oes fir st w hen it is following the carbon dioxide and second
duri ng t he final approach , where t he warm t h and moist ure

① mosqu it o〔m s’ki∶ t u〕 蚊子

② as sau lt〔 ’s ∶ l t〕 攻击 , 袭击
③ re pell en t〔ri p el n t〕 驱虫剂

・ 46 ・
ar e t he in sect’s guide .
Air pervaded by one of the many chemical repellents
stops t he mosquit o reacting to t he victim’s carbon dioxide,
and t he r epellen t seem s to affect the tiny hairs wit h w hich
t he in sect senses moist ure in t he air . The sensors are
blocked so t hat the insect does no t know w hen it is flying
t hrough a moist current , or t he sensors are made to send t he
w rong signals .
11. Which of t he follo wing is nearest in m eaning t o " homes
in on" li ne 3 ?
( A) takes aim at ( B) finds its way t o
( C) att ack s (D) fasten s on t o
12. T he " proble m" ( line 3 ) is t hat .
( A) scien tists ar e not completely sur e how a mosquit o
homes in on its ta rget
( B) mosquit oes ca rry seve ral kinds of disease
( C) it is difficult to hold one’s breat h
( D) t he best way t o avoid bei ng located by a mosquit o
is impos seble or impractical
13. T he main idea of t he second par agragh is t hat .
(A) a mosquito uses t hr ee met hods of at tacking its
prey
( B) s mell is t he mosquito’s st rongest sense
( C) mosquitoes at tack warm , moist t argets
( D) t her e a re th ree stages in t he mosquito’s approach
to its prey
・ 47 ・
14. T he w ord‘ its’( line 16 ) refer s to t he .
( A) mosquit o ( B) repellent
( C) mosquito’s at tack ( D ) victim
15. T he w rit er says t hat repellents .
( A) also w ork i n t hree ways
( B) do no t give off a nasty smell
( C) inte rfer e wit h t he fir st and second stages
( D) in terfer e wit h t he second and t hird stages
16. T he repellen ts , as w e a re tol d , do not me rely give off a
nasty s mell: t hey w ork more .
( A) indir ectly ( B) effectively
( C) strongly (D) suitably

Passage D

By t he end of t he year 2000 , t he National Syst em of In-

ter st ate and Defense High ways s houl d be al most completed ,
with approximt ely 60 , 000 miles open t o t r affic . At a cost of
nearly 100 billion , t his 84 , 000-mile netw ork of high-s peed
supe r roads will be financed near ly en tirely by the feder al
government . States will have con tribu ted less t han 10 pe r-
cen t of t he cost . T his system , which will cover t he nation ,
will connect 90 percen t of t he cities with pop ulations of ove r
45 , 000 and t housands of sm alle r communities . By t he yea r
2000 , t his netw ork will be carrying 50 percen t of t he to tal
2 , 124 billion vehicle miles of tr avel for t hat year . It is also
estima ted t hat , apa rt from cu tting driving tim e, around 16 ,
・ 48 ・
000 lives will be saved annually .
Because of t he s uperior safet y design e mp loyed , and be-
cau se drive rs will be able t o tr averse the states at h igh
speeds wit hout stopping for t raffic ligh ts , it is estimat ed
t hat in terstat e communication s will improve gr eatly . This
system , apa r t from t he safety and speed aspects , s hou ld
open up a range of subsidia ry ① indust ries i ncluding mo tels ,
restaurants , gar ages , and service st ations . The cost of
main taining the syste m is projected at over 2 .5 billion a
yea r , bu t t his will be offset by the state revenues accrued
from t he at tendant indu st ries and t he high way taxes levied
on mot orists .
When t he syste m was first envisaged i n 1966 , t he envi-
ronmental fact or was not fully t aken i nt o accoun t , bu t now
t he project must also com e to te rms wit h ecological ques-
tion s t hat have been raised by various environm en tal in ter est
groups . One of the main objection s , for exa mple, is t he
effect that such high ways migh t have on t he migra tory hab-
its of ce rtain endangered species . U pon completion , t he pro-
ject will have employed over 25 000 full- tim e personnel and
gene rated over 3 billion in income .
17. Which of t he follo wing is t rue ?
( A) In 1966 , the environm en tal problems we re no t
fully appreciat ed .

① sub si dia ry〔s b’sidj ri〕 辅助的 , 附 属的

・ 49 ・
 (B) In 1966 , environmen tal is sues were less impor-
tan t .
(C ) In 1966 , t her e were no environmen tal in ter est
groups .
( D) Migrat ory group s were not an endanger ed species
in 1966 .
18. Which of t he follo wing indust ries is not mentioned ?
( A) Gasoli ne sta tions . (B) Mot el indust ry .
( C) Trucking indust ry . (D) Restauran t services .
19. Which of t he following w ou ld you not expect t o see on
the high way ?
( A) A motel . (B) A service station .
(C) A t raffic light . (D) A highway pat rol-
m an .
20. What has changed since t he system was first designed ?
( A) Road taxes .
( B) Motel indust ry .
( C) E nvironmen tal awa renes s .
( D) Projected cost .

・ 50 ・
 Unit 6

Passage A

P roc rastinators ar e people w ho have a chronic habit of

put ti ng t hings off , usually until t he last minu te and some-
times un til it is t oo late altoget he r . T he most common r ea-
son that procr astinat ors themselves give for t heir habit ,
w hich t hey a re usually quit e willing to talk abou t even if no t
willing t o change, is t hat t hey a re lazy . Ot her t ypical excu-
ses are t hat t hey ar e undiscip lined, brilliant bu t disorgan-
ized , or very poor at organizing their time .
Som e proc rastinators , ho wever , al most against t heir
ve ry nat ure, act ually get as far as t rying to do somet hing a-
bout t heir prob le m and seek help . Recent r esea rch wit h such
people see ms t o suggest t hat t heir difficulties a re much more
comp lex than t he procrastinators t hemselves t hink . T he
gene ral conclu sion s ar e t hat such people have a vulne rable
sense of self w or t h , are par ticu la rly fearfu l of fail ure, and
deli ber ately pu t t hings off precisely so t hat t hey never leave
t hemselves tim e to produce t heir best work . The r eason for
t heir delaying tactics is t hat , since t hey do everyt hing at t he
last mom en t and u nder pres sure , the procrastinators can re-
tain t heir illusion of brilliance wit hou t ever having t o pu t it
t o t he t est .
・ 51 ・
1. The main idea in t he first par agrap h is .
( A) the nat ur e of proc rastination
(B ) t he undisciplined character of proc rastinators
(C) t hat disorganization is t he procr astinat or ’s main
proble m
(D) t he reason s proc rastinators give for their behavior
2. The main idea in t he second paragraph is .
( A) how proc rastinators have an illu sion of brilliance
(B ) how procr astina tors seek help
( C) resea rch findings r ega rding procrastinat or s
(D) that procrasti nat ors always leave everyt hing until
the last momen t
3. A suitable title for t his pas sage migh t be .
( A) T he Chronic H abit of Procr astination
(B ) P rocrastination : Excuses and Realit y
(C) Disorganization : T he Tr ue Cause of Procr astina-
tion
(D) Procrastination : N ever Do T oday W hat Y ou Can
Pu t off until Tomorrow
4. With which of t he following w ou ld t he aut hor be most
likely t o agr ee ?
(A) P rocrasti nat ors ar e usually unawar e of t he t rue
causes of t heir pr edicament .
(B ) Lazines s , lack of discipline, and poor organization
of time ar e t he major causes of proc rastination .
( C) O ne t hing most proc rastinators do is seek help for
・ 52 ・
 t heir prob lem .
(D) A procr astinat or w ou ld aut omatically fail any real
test of h is brilliance .
5. All of t he following ideas appea r in t he passage . Which
do you thi nk t he au thor at t ributes most import ance to ?
( A) Some procrastinat or s seek help for t heir prob lem .
(B ) P rocrastinators , in gene ral, pu t off thi ngs deliber-
ately so as t o avoid a real test .
( C) Procr astina tors usually t hink t hat they are very bad
at organizing t heir tim e .
(D) P rocrastinators som eti mes put off t hings un til it is
t oo late .

Passage B

A bat tery driven bu s , w hich is no t only quiet and pol-

l ution free bu t competitive wit h the conven tional bus on
cost and perform ance, has been developed by a group of
British companies .
T he prot ot ype ① , a fift y passenger single deck veh i-
cle , is t o go in t o ope ration in M anchester s hor tly , and dis-
cussions wit h t he Depar tm en t of the Environmen t are expec-
ted to lead t o a fur t her batch of twen t y going in t o regu la r
passenger service in Manchester wit hin tw o yea rs , and pos-
sibly in ot he r cities , including London .

① p rot oy t pe〔 pr u t t aip〕 原型

・ 53 ・
 U nlike t he small government sponsored ba ttery bus
no w undergoing t rials in provincial cities , w hose low s peed
and r ange effectively limits it t o cit y cent r e oper ation , t he
new Silen t Ride r , wit h a range of 40 miles between cha rges
and a s peed of 40 m .p .h ., will take its p lace wit h diesel bu-
ses for normal urban and suburban services .
I ts capital cost is higher ( abou t ￡20 000 compared with
￡13 500 ) but lo wer maintenance and fuel costs bring it
dow n to a fully competitive cost wit h the diesel bus ove r a
t hir teen yea r life, wit hou t taking in t o accoun t the environ-
m en tal benefits . T he Chloride batt ery group , which is de-
veloping it in par t ner ship wit h SE LN EC ( Sou t h E ast Lan-
cashire and N or t h E ast Chesh ire Passenger T ranspor t A u-
t horit y) is confident of a market potential of 400 vehicles a
yea r by 1980 .
T he pro to type weighs 16 t ons , of w hich t he batte ries
and pas sengers accoun t for 4 each . It has a single set of bat-
teries , w hich take t hree and a half hour s to r echa rge, a-
gainst t he norm al eigh t hour s of pas senger t raffic .
A larger , Ma rk Ⅱ ver sion is being designed wit h tw o
sets of bat teries w hich can be changed in under a minu te .
T hat will allow low cost nigh t cha rgi ng and greater opera-
tional flexibilit y .
6. What had been t he main fact or preven ti ng t he develop-
ment of bat tery buses ?
( A) T heir limited range . ( B) T heir high cost .
・ 54 ・
 ( C) Their heavy weigh t . (D) Their loud noise .
7. Bat tery buses have some advan tages over conven tional
bu ses . Which of t hese advan tages is not m en tioned in t he
text ?
( A) T hey u se less fuel .
(B ) T hey make less noise .
( C) They produce less pollu tion
(D) T hey cost les s t o produce .
8. The Ma rk Ⅱ model will have a number of advantages o-
ver t he prot ot ype . Which of t hese is no t one of t he m ?
( A) It will carry more passenger s .
(B ) I t will have a wider r ange .
( C) It can be used all t hrough t he day .
(D) I t will cost less t o r echarge .
9. H ow many of t he new Silen t Riders a re in regular service
at t he mom en t ?
( A) none ( B) twen t y
( C) one ( D ) fift y
10. Why will ba ttery bu ses cost les s than conventional buses
in the long run ?
( A) They will spread t he capital cost over a long pe ri-
od .
( B) They will be st ronger and last longer .
( C) They will use less fuel and cost less t o main tain .
( D) T hey will be charged at night w hen elect ricit y
costs les s .
・ 55 ・
Passage C

A relatively new feat ure of r adio broadcasts in t he U nit-

ed States is the call in t herapy ① shows , in w hich callers get
t he oppor tunit y t o air prob le ms , however in tim ate, while
t he hosts offe r t hem free, and immediate, advice . They
star ted , like so m any o t her self help p sychology ideas , in
California in t he ea rly 1970’s , but now t hey have s pr ead t o
many ot he r par ts of the coun try and enjoy conside rab le pop-
u larit y . This phenomenon cer tainly does not please all psy-
chologists and t he shows have become a mat ter of some con-
cern to t heir professional as sociation , t he A PA .
P resent AP A guidelines mer ely prohibit psychologists
from diagnosing problems , or from offe ring psycho ther apy
on t he radio , w hile t he earlier ones had prohibited all giving
of advice ou tside t he t raditional t herapist patient relation-
s hip . This prohibition fails t o satisfy many psychologists .
Som e consider all giving of psychological advice over t he ra-
dio t otally unaccep table , bu t t here a re o thers w ho believe
t here should be even more of it .
T he former are t ypified by a H asti ng s Cen ter p sychia-
t rist , w ho describes t he activit y as " disgu sting" . O n one oc-
casion , he backed up his view by wal king out of a radio pro-
gra m w hen t he host insist ed he an swe r listeners’ calls . Bu t

① t he r apy〔 e r pi〕 治疗〔法〕

・ 56 ・
radio t herapy hosts , who are mostly att ractive , youngis h and
qualified women , ar e fully capable of backing up t heir s , and
do so charmingly and effectively , as migh t be expected from
professionals combining psychological exper tise wit h ent er-
tainmen t know how .
11.‘ t hey’( line 4) r efers to .
( A) problems
( B) call in in therapy shows
( C) caller s ( C) hosts
12.‘ t his phenomenon’( line 7) refe rs to .
( A) t he fact t ha t t he shows sta r ted in California
( B) t he fact t hat calle rs air in tim ate problems
( C) t he fact t hat t he shows star ted in the ea rly 1970’s
( D) t he fact t hat t he shows enjoy con sider able popu-
larity
13.‘ t heir’( line 8 ) refers t o .
( A) t he rapy sho ws
( B) self help p sychology ideas
( C) t he hosts
( D) psychologists
14.‘ t his prohibition’( line 13 ) refers t o .
(A) t ha t no advice be given ou tside t he t raditional
t he rapist patient relationsh ip
( B) t hat psychologists do no t diagnose proble ms or of-
fer psycho t her apy on t he radio
( C) t hat no t all psychologists a re p leased
・ 57 ・
 ( D) t hat it is a mat ter of some concern to t he A PA
15.‘ t he form er’( line 17) r efers t o .
(A ) psychologists who ob ject to call in ther apy
sho ws
( B) psychologists w ho advocate more advice giving
ove r t he radio
( C) t he APA’s present proh ibitions
( D) dispensi ng p sychological advice
16.‘ he’( line 18 ) refer s t o .
( A) a Hastings Cen ter p sychia trist
( B) t he host
( C) a listener (D) t he forme r
17.‘ t heirs’( li ne 22 ) refers t o .
( A) activit y
( B) r adio t herapy progr ams
( C) listeners (D) views

Passage D

T he w riters of t he U nited Sta tes Constit u tion , in fact ,

had no t been empower ed ① to create a new political system .
T hey has been convened ② by Congress only to consider some
improvements in the A r ticles of Confede ration . Some , like
Pat rick H enry of Virginia, r efused t o at tend . Rhode Island

① empow er〔im’pa u 〕 授权 , 授 予职 权
② conven ed 〔k n’vi∶ n〕 召 集 ( 开会 )

・ 58 ・
never sent a repr esen tative , and T hom as Jefferson was in
Pa ris acting as minist er to F rance . George Washing ton at-
tended and r efused t o accep t t he title of ki ng . Ja mes Madi-
son w as t he first t o arrive at t he conven tion . Benja min
F ranklin , who was 80 yea rs old and c ripp led by gou t , was
ca rried to t he m eeting on a chair by four convicts .
T he aver age age of t he 55 delega tes was 42 . T went y-
nine of t hem were college graduates ; more t han half were
law yer s; t he nort herner s wer e shippers , m anufact ure rs ,
and st atesm en ; and t he sou t herners we re p lante rs , schol-
ars , and st atesm en . T hey spen t eigh t week s reviewing
ancient and mode rn hist ory in sear ch of a model form of gov-
ernment .
Collectively , they had tw o st rong prejudices - one was
t he British monar chy and t he o ther , a standing army . They
labor ed t hroughout t he summer of 1787 and on Sep tembe r
17 t hey finally hamme red out t he 4 400- word documen t . A t
t he tim e the Constit ution was writt en , t here were 3 million
A me ricans . There have been 5 000 a mendments proposed
but only 26 have been m ade .
18. Which of t he follo wing stat ements in t rue ?
( A) The writer s of t he Constit u tion wer e e mpowe red
t o create a political syste m .
( B) The w riters of t he Constit u tion met on Sep tembe r
17 , 1787 .
( C) All states sen t a r epresent ative .
・ 59 ・
 ( D) The writer s of t he Constit u tioon had been called
toget her by Congress .
19. What w ould be a good title for t he above pas sage ?
( A) Eigh t Weeks One Summ er
( B) A mendments t o t he Constitu tion
( C) The A merican Constit u tion and Its W rite rs
( D) Pr ejudices of t he A me rican Constitu tion .
20. Which of t he follo wing , accordi ng t o the pas sage, were
not r epresent ed at the Con stit utional Conven tion ?
( A) Shipper s . ( B) Schola rs .
( C) Plan ters . (D) Educators .

・ 60 ・
 Unit 7

Passage A

T he‘standard of living’of any count ry means t he aver-

age person’s shar e of t he goods and services which t he coun-
t ry procduces . A coun t ry’s standa rd of living , therfore , de-
pends fir st and for emost on its capacit y t o produce wealt h .
‘Wealt h’in th is sense is no t money , for we do not live on
money bu t on t hings t hat money can buy ‘
: goods’s uch as
food and clot hing , and‘ services’s uch as t ran spor t and en-
ter tainmen t .
A coun try’s capacit y t o produce w ealt h depends upon
many fact or s , most of which have an effect on one ano ther .
Wealth depends to a gr eat ex ten t upon a count ry’s na tur al
resources , s uch a coal , gold , and ot her minerals , wate r
supply and so on . Som e regions of t he worl d are well sup-
p lied with coal and miner als , and have a fe rtile soil and a fa-
vour able climat e; o ther regions possess pe rhap s only one of
t hese th ings , and some r egions pos sess none of t he m . T he
U .S .A . is one of t he wealt hiest regions of t he world be-
cau se she had vast nat ural resour ces wit hin her border s , he r
soil is fer tile, and her climate is va ried . The Sahara Dese rt ,
on t he o ther hand , is one of t he least wealthy .
N ex t t o nat ural r esources com es t he abilit y t o t urn t he m
・ 61 ・
t o use . China is perhaps as well off as t he U .S .A . i n nat u-
r al resources , bu t suffer ed for m any year s from civil and ex-
ternal wars , and for t his and o ther reason s was unable t o
develop her r esources . Sound and stable political conditions ,
and fr eedom from foreign invasion , enab le a count ry t o de-
velop its natur al resour ces peacefu lly and steadily , and t o
produce more wealt h t han ano ther count ry equally well
se rved by nat ure but les s well ordered . A no t her impor tan t
factor is t he t echnical efficiency of a count ry’s peop le . Old
count ries t hat have, through m any cen t uries , tr ained up nu-
m erou s s killed craf tsmen and tech nicians ar e bett er placed t o
produce wealth t han coun tries w hose workers ar e largely
unskilled . Wealth also produces wealt h . As a coun t ry be-
comes wealt hier , its people have a la rge margin for saving ,
and can pu t t heir savings int o fact ories and m achines w hich
will help workers to t urn ou t mor e goods in t heir w orking
day .
1. A coun try’s wealth depend s upon .
( A) its standard of living
(B ) its money
( C) its ability t o provide goods and services
(D) its ability to provide t ranspor t and en ter tainm en t
2. The word‘ foremost’means .
( A) most impor an tly ( B) fir stly
( C) largely ( D) for the most par t
3. The main idea of t he second pa ragraph is t ha t .
・ 62 ・
 ( A) a count ry’s wealt h depends on many factors
(B ) t he U .S .A . is one of t he wealt hiest count ries in
t he world
( C) t he Sahar a Deser t is a very poor region
( D) nat ur al resources ar e an i mpor tan t fact or in t he
wealt h or pover ty of a coun t ry
4. The word‘civil’refer s t o wa rs t hat a re .
( A) long lasting
(B ) fough t betw een one par t of a coun t ry and anot he r
( C) s hor t but fr equen t
(D) carried ou t according to the in ternational laws
5. The t hird pa ragr aph discus ses t he impor tance of the abili-
ty of a count ry t o make use of what nat ural r esources it
has , and m en tions some of t he advan tages w hich one
coun t ry may have over ano t her in t his respect . H ow
m any such advant ages a re m en tioned in t his par agrap h ?
( A) 2 ( B) 3
( C) 4 ( D) 5
6. The second sen tence in paragrpah 3 is .
( A) the main idea of the pa ragrpah
(B ) an example suppor ting the main idea of t he pa ra-
graph
( C) t he conclusion of t he pa ragr aph
(D) not related t o t he par agraph

・ 63 ・
Passage B

Let us t ake look at the chief t hing i n t he story—t he h u-

m an body itself . A h uman body appear s t o be r ather soft
and delicate , compared wit h that of a wild animal, but it is
act ually surprisingly strong . Indeed , its very soft ness and
looseness is an advan tage ; it makes man good at moving a-
bout and falling about in safet y . Man is t he most sk ilfu l in
movem en t of all living t hings of his ow n size , because he can
do so many differ en t t hings wit h his limb s . M an’s ga mes
show how he can cont rol his ow n body . No o t her land cr ea-
t ure can swim as s kilfu lly as m an ; none has s uch varied
gr ace; very few live as long as he : none is so strong in its
nat ural r esistance to disease . The refore man has a gr eat ad-
vantage in his bat tle against the risks of da mage and death
t hat t hreaten him . It is difficu lt t o kill him so long as he is
fed and in good healt h . Yet every day t housands of people
die needles sly , even t hough m an is natur ally strong , be-
cau se t hose tw o killers , disease and starvation , with t he
bat tle .
Old age ? N o one can live for ever , so one migh t suppose
t hat quite a large numbe r of old people would com e to t he
end of t heir days eve ry year . T her e is , howeve r , anot he r
t hing t o r eme mber . D uring the time it has t aken you to r ead
t his page, a considerable number of babies have been born
somewher e in the world— one is born every one and a qua r-
・ 64 ・
ter seconds ! Of t hese babies , one group can be expected t o
have a good long life of abou t seven ty year s , becau se t hey
wer e lucky enough t o be born in coun t ries w her e living
standa rds a re high .
T he deadliest of all killer s ar e starvation and disease .
We cannot be con ten t until we have master ed t hem . To do
so is one of t he most importan t tasks of our times .
7. The sof t nes s and looseness of man’s body is an advan tage
becau se it .
( A) makes him st rong
(B ) makes him resistant to diseases
( C) help s him to avoid in jury
(D) keeps him in good healt h
8. The words‘ va ried grace’r efe r t o man’s .
( A) sof tnes s and delicacy
(B ) ability to swim well
( C) st rengt h
(D) abilit y t o pe rform many differ en t move men t easily
and skilfully
9. Why is t he word‘ different’underlined ?
( A) Because it is not impor tant .
(B ) To make it easie r t o r ead .
( C) To m ake it clea r t o see .
(D) F or emphasis .
10. T he sentence t hat cou ld be considered the t opic sen tence
begin s .
・ 65 ・
 ( A) Let us take a look…
( B) A human body appea rs to be…
( C) Indeed , its very sof t nes s…
( D) Man is t he most skilful…
11. T he w rit er tells u s t hat .
(A) there ar e mor e old people dying t han t her e are
new babies being born
( B) there ar e mor e new babies being born t han t here
a re old people dying
( C) t he number s of old people dying and babies born
ar e abou t the sam e
( D) N one of t he above an swe rs is righ t
12. What according t o t he writer is one of t he most impor-
tan t tasks of our time ?
( A) To keep people from agi ng
( B) To pr actise bir t h con t rol
( C) To make people still st ronger
( D) To do away wit h sta rvation and disease

Passage C

In orde r to qualify for a single room in a univer sit y dor-

mitory , you must be a full tim e studen t who has complet ed
t he necessary number of hours t o be r anked as an uppe r-
class man . A pp lican ts for such univer sity housing ar e re-
quired t o submit completed application s t o the O ffice of
Studen t H ousing no later t han t he second w eek of t he se-
・ 66 ・
m ester pr eceding t he se meste r for wh ich they a re requesting
such hou sing . St uden ts will be notified regarding t he stat us
of t heir applica tion by the six t h week of clas ses . Private
dorm rooms will be as signed t o qualified studen ts on a first
come, first served basis .
13. Accordi ng to t he passage , private dorm room s ar e re-
served for .
( A) fr es hmen and sophomores
( B) juniors and seniors
( C) office workers (D) high clas s men
14. Accordi ng to t he pas sage, st udents canno t have i ndivid-
ual living quar ters if t hey .
( A) do not ca rry a fu ll load
( B) are going t o gr adua te soon
( C) apply t oo early
( D) do no t want to shar e a room
15. What kind of st udent will most probab ly get one of t he
rooms r efe rred to in the pas sage ?
( A) O ne w ho applies in t he four t h week of clas ses .
( B) O ne who comes to t he office and serves on t he
st udent council .
( C) O ne w ho no tifies t he top advisor of his or her in-
ter est in private houses .
( D) One who applies on tim e .
16. What is t he m ain topic of t his announce men t ?
( A) A pplying t o t he universit y .
・ 67 ・
 ( B) Con struction job s available for st uden ts .
( C) O bt aining a one person college residence .
(D ) Meeting r equirem en ts for being a full time
st udent .
17. Wher e w ould this pa ragraph most likely be seen ?
( A) In a priva te dormitory room .
( B) On a univer sity bulletin board .
( C) In a st uden t’s house .
( D) Ou tside a new apar tm en t building .

Passage D

M an , said A rist otle, is a social animal . T his sociabilit y

requires peaceful congregation , and t he hist ory of mankind
is m ainly a movement t hrough tim e of hum an collectivities
t hat range from migrant t ribal bands to la rge and comp lex
civilizations . Survival has been due to t he abilit y to create
t he means by which men i n groups retain t heir unity and al-
legiance to one anot her .
O rder was caused by the need and desir e to s urvive t he
challenge of t he environment . This orderly condition came
t o be called the " state" , and t he rules t hat main tained it ,
t he " law " . Wit h time t he par t ner t o t his t ranquillity , man
mar ched ac ros s t he cen t uries of his evol ution t o the brink of
exp loring t he bounda ries of his ow n galaxy . Of all living or-
ganisms , only m an has the capacit y to in terpret his ow n evo-
l ution as progress . As social life changed , the wor t h and
・ 68 ・
righ ts of each me mber in t he larger group , of w hich he was
a par t , increased . As t he groups gr ew from clans to civiliza-
tion s , t he val ue of t he individual did no t diminish , b ut be-
cam e instead a guide to t he ru les that govern all men .
18. T he best expression of t he main idea of th is a rticle is
.
( A) oppression and societ y
( B) t he evol ution of m an
( C) man’s animal in stincts
( D) t he basis for social order
19. T he au thor w ou ld expect the gr ea test attention to indi-
vidual righ ts and values t o be found i n .
( A) farming communities
( B) s mall villages
( C) pr ehist oric families
( D) modern cities
20. Accordi ng to t he a rticle , man’s uniqueness is at t ribut ed
to t he fact t hat he is .
( A) evolving from a simple r t o a more complex being
( B) a social anim al
( C) capable of no ting his ow n progress
( D) capab le of inflicti ng in jury and causing violence

・ 69 ・
 Unit 8

Passage A

T he eyes of hum an beings a re not sensitive to all light ,

but only t hat bet ween wavelengt hs of 380 and 760 millimi-
c rons . This fact prevents us from being awar e t ha t our
bodies e mit electromagnetic waves . These waves ar e mostly
longer t han we ar e sensitive t o , bu t t he rmograp hic tech-
niques can t ran slate t hem in t o ex tr aordi nary color pict ures .
Because they ar e constan tly in mo tion , at oms gene rate
infra red rays and t he wa rmer t he at oms are t he mor e active
t hey become . T his results in t hermogr aphic pict ur es revea-
ling differ en t par ts of t he body in different color s: black and
blue for t he col d par ts , green and yellow for t he cool or
sligh tly warm ones , and or ange and red for t hose w hich are
hot .
All t his has a healt h app lication , for such problems as
t umor s , ar t hritis , and cance r a re show n up as isolated r ed
ar eas on t he t hermographic por t raits .
1. According t o t he a rticle .
(A) t he eyes of hum an beings a re not all sen sitive t o
ligh t
(B ) light waveleng th s va ry bet ween 380 and 760 milli-
microns
・ 70 ・
 ( C) some ligh t cannot be seen by the hum an eyes
(D) some peop le’s bodies emit elect romagnetic waves
2. A toms gener ate r ays of ligh t .
( A) because they a re infr ar ed
(B ) if they a re active
( C) due t o t heir constan t motion
(D) w hen they becom e warm
3. The majority of elect rom agnetic waves emitted by t he h u-
man body .
( A) a re above 760 millimic rons in lengt h
(B ) vary between 380 and 760 millimicrons in leng t h
( C) tr an slate in to t hermogr aphic tech niques
(D) a re below 380 milli micron s in leng th
4. Thermogr aphic por tr aits sho w t he body i n differ en t col-
or s
.
( A) only if t he patient is suffering from tumors or canc-
er
(B ) according t o the activit y of atoms in t he differ en t
par ts
( C) because some par ts ar e black and bl ue and o thers
orange and red
(D) w hen the atoms are active
5. The a toms in t umors or cancerous areas a re .
( A) prob lem s ( B) isolated
( C) red (D) very active
・ 71 ・
Passage B

Sound t r avels waves in t hrough t he air like waves

t hrough t he water , t he higher the wave , t he gr eate r its
po wer . The waves are alternat e rings of compr essed and
rar efied air moving away from a cen t ral source at a constan t
speed . As each wave of fir st compr ession and t hen ra refica-
tion encoun ter s an ob ject , it exe rts a force——— a push and
t hen a pull——— on the object . That is w hy sound can break a
glass or cause a screen to vibrate .
T he gr eater t he number of waves a sound has , t he gr ea-
ter its frequency is . The st reng t h or in ten sit y of sound ,
sound level, is measured in decibels ( dB) . The deci bel unit
is na med af ter Alexander G raha m Bell , the invent or of t he
telephone and an import an t r esea rcher in to the natur e of
sound . Because hea ring varies widely , w hat may seem loud
t o one pe rson may not to anot her . Alt hough loudness is a
personal judgment , precise meas urem en t of sound is m ade
pos sible by u se of t he decibel scale . This scale of Sound
Levels and H um an Response meas ures sou nd press ure or
energy according to in ternational standards .
6. It can be inferred from t he passage that a sound m easur ed
at 100 decibels is louder t han .
( A) any o ther sound eve r meas ured
(B ) a sound m easured at 110 decibels
( C) a sound meas ur ed at 80 decibels
・ 72 ・
 (D) t he machine measuring it
7. It can be concluded from t he passage t hat .
( A) sound waves can be m easured scien tifically
(B ) sound has no physical effect on any object
( C) everyone judges loudnes s the sam e way
(D) t he decibel scale is a purely subjective device
8. Sound waves move out ward from a cent r al point at
.
( A) varying speeds
(B ) a speed of 1 181 kilometer s per hour
( C) greater and greater speeds
(D) a steady , continuous s peed
9. During a loud t hunderstorm , a windo w may rattle be-
cause .
( A) ligh t ning stri kes t he glas s wit h for ce
(B ) t he sound of t he rai n is hea rd t hrough t he glass
( C) t he air is colder on one side of t he glas s t han on t he
o ther
(D) t he claps of th under cr ea te powerful sound waves
t hat exer t pressure on t he glass
10. T he te rm‘ decibel’com es from .
( A) t he int ensit y of twelve bells
( B) t he i nvent or of t he telephone
( C) t he inven tor of t he hea ring aid
( D) a term for rar efied air

・ 73 ・
Passage C

Even t he best of fa milies have an occasional falling-out ,

and t he sa me is t rue of t he r elations hip bet ween the A me ri-
can s and t he British . To most outsiders , superficially , t here
don’t seem t o be t oo m any differences . Afte r all , t hey share
a common language, legal system , lite rary history, and , t o
all in tents and purposes , a common standard of ethics .① Of
course , t hings have no t always gone t hat smoot hly . They’
ve had t heir ups and do wn s .
British and A me rican high school studen ts are going t o
have varying perspectives on s uch i ncidents as the Bost on
T ea Par ty . You will have t o make up your ow n mind whet h-
er a gang of i ngr ates broke the law or a group of pat rio ts de-
fended t heir civil liber ties . Most Englis hmen react wit h sur-
prise on being informed t hat t he Britis h crow n suppor ted t he
Sout he rner s in t he A merican Civil War , th us giving tacit ap-
proval t o slavery . In much t he sa me vein , t he aver age A-
m erican would probab ly be shocked t o realize t ha t up until
t he War of Independence, an Englis h mona rch ② was the he-
r edit ary ③ King of A merica . Of course , t he ordinary A me ri-
can citizen , w hile taki ng enormous pride in his pr esiden tial

① et hic〔’e ik〕 伦理 , 道 德
② mona r ch〔’m n k〕 君主 , 国王
③ he r edi ta ry〔hi’re dit e ri〕 世 袭的

・ 74 ・
democracy , has an enduring love affair wit h t he British royal
fa mily .
Bot h the A merican s and t he English shar e popular mis-
concep tions of each o t her’s count ries . N ot every Englis h-
m an lives in A nne H at hway’s cot tage, and plen ty of A me ri-
can s have yet to ow n a hom e wit h a swimming pool . But one
t hing is under st ood by bo th : the bond between t hese tw o
count ries , in an almost mystical way , goes far beyond lin-
guistics .
11. Which of t he follo wing w ou ld make t he best title for t he
passage ?
( A) Britis h and A merican English
( B) The H istory of England and Am erica
( C) The U p s and Dow ns of Ang lo- A merican Relation-
s hips
( D) Britis h Misconcep tions abou t t he Am erican Way
of Life .
12. Accordi ng to t he pas sage,
( A) all A merican s get on well wit h the English .
( B) t he A nglo- Am erican relationsh ip has no t always
been harmonious .
( C) A me rican fa milies have British relatives .
(D) t he liter at ure of Eng land and Am erica is t he
sa me .
13. U n til t he Am erican Wa r of Independence, t he King of
England was
・ 75 ・
 ( A) also pr esiden t of t he U nited Sta tes .
( B) an A merican citizen .
( C) head of state in A me rica .
( D) chosen by t he A me rican people .
14. We can understand from t he passage t hat duri ng t he U .
S .Civil Wa r , t he Britis h
( A) sided wit h the N or t h .
( B) abolished slavery .
( C) assisted t he Sout h .
( D) took pa rt in t he figh ting .
15. Which of t he follo wing is not t rue ?
( A) The U nited States and England have similar judi-
cial systems .
( B) The U nited States and England have the sam e lit-
er ary t r aditions .
( C) The U nited Sta tes and England once s ha red mon-
archs .
( D) The U nited States and England unde rstand each
o ther’s cult ur es comp letely .
16. Accordi ng t o t he passage , t he U nited States and Eng-
land
( A) ar e linked by t radition .
( B) are liked by language as well as by o t her fact ors .
(C) ar e, in fact , in no way linked to each ot he r be-
yond language .
( D) indul ge in mysticis m t hat crosses all cu ltur al ba r-
・ 76 ・
 rie rs .

Passage D

T he gr eat power of t ronadoes is almost u ni maginable .

T he speed of this whir ling ① funnels haped ② wind may be
more t han 800 kilometer s pe r hour . It can t ea r up tr ees ,
ca rry b uildings away , and can even lift large t ruck s off t he
highway . The tornado is like a gian t vaccum sweeper t hat
sucks up any th ing in its pat h . Expe rts believe t hat t he most
violent for ce of a t ornado is found inside the funnel, w here a
vacuum is cr eated becau se of a very low air pressure . When
t his vacuum moves over a building w hich is filled wit h air
under normal pressur e, t he differ ence between t he air pres-
s ure in side t he building and t ha t ou tside causes t he b uilding
t o explode . T he la rgest tornado on r ecord had a funnel tw o
kilometer s wide .
T her e a re many in ter esting stories abou t t he str ange
t hings t hat t ornadoes have done i n t he w or ld . Common
w heat st raw has been driven sever al cen timeter s on to posts
and t rees . Buildi ng s have been t urned completely around on
t heir foundations and have r emained as a w hole . People and
ani mals have been ca rried h undr eds of m eters , of ten suffer-
ing no physical ha rm . Feathers have been removed from

① whirle〔w ∶l〕 旋转
② funn el〔’f n l〕 漏斗

・ 77 ・
chickens . Cars , tr ucks , and even whole freight tr ains have
been carried away .
A few year s ago in Japan , t hree people we re wal king
int o a b uilding just as a t ornado st ruck . Tw o walked up t he
steps in t o t he building and t he t hird per son went dow n int o
t he basemen t . In t hat momen t , t he building was ca rried a-
way and t he tw o per son s upstairs we re killed . The one in
t he basemen t w as no t h urt .
F or t unat ely , a t ornado does not last long , abou t 20 t o
30 minutes on t he aver age . Us ually , it dest roy s an ar ea a-
bout 26 kilometer s long , and the great da mage t hat it does
in one p lace lasts only about 30 seconds . T ornadoes norm al-
ly occur on ho t, humid days bu t not necessarily in t he s um-
m er . The biggest and most dest ructive tornado in t he U nit-
ed States struck on Mar ch 18 , 1925 . Roa ring along at a
speed of 96 kilometer s per hour , it swept clean a pa th tw o
kilometer s wide across t he count ry . In its 354-kilomete r
long journey , the tornado killed 689 peop le .
More t han 200 t ornadoes st rike in t he U nited States ev-
ery yea r . I t is not possible t o predict w hen a t ornado will
strike alt hough t he U .S . Weat her Bureau gives st orm wa rn-
ings w hen conditions ar e right to cau se a tornado . T he sa-
fest place t o be if a tornado seems likely is in som e unde r-
ground area such as a base men t .
17. Accordi ng t o t he passage , a t ornado may destroy a t ruck
by
・ 78 ・
 ( A) b lowing it upside-do wn .
( B) s ucking it up and t hen dropping it do wn .
( C) pr es sing it very hard .
( D) cut ting it in to very small pieces .
18. T he re ar e m any in ter esting st ories abou t t he str ange
thi ng s t ha t tornadoes have done in the U nited States .
F or example,
( A) common wheat str aw has been driven several kilo-
met ers away .
( B) buildings have been t urned comp letely int o
bricks .
( C) people and anim als have been ca rried hundreds of
cen tim eters , on ly sligh tly injured .
( D) fea thers have been pulled away from chicken s .
19. T he biggest and most destructive t ornado in t he U nit ed
States killed 689 people
( A) in m any cities .
( B) in some t ow ns .
( C) along a public pat h t hat is 354-kilomet er long .
( D) in its journey acros s t he coun try .
20. T he au t hor t hink s t hat it is
( A) impossible t o predict climatic changes .
( B) amu sing to hea r t he stories abou t t he damages
made by t ornadoes .
( C) compara tively safe if you st ay in a base men t w hen
a t ornado seems likely .
・ 79 ・
 ( D) pos sible t o make use of t ornadoes in freigh t t ran s-
porta tion .

・ 80 ・
 Unit 9

Passage A

Ins ur ance is t he sharing of risk s . Near ly everyone is ex-

posed t o risk of some sor t . The hou seow ner , for example,
knows that his proper t y can be da maged by fir e; t he shipo-
w ner k no ws t hat his ves sel m ay be lost at sea; the bread-
winner k no ws t hat he may die at an early age and leave his
fa mily the poorer . O n t he ot he r hand , no t every hou se is
dam aged by fir e nor eve ry vessel lost at sea . If t hese per sons
each put a small sum int o a pool , t here will be enough t o
meet the needs of the few w ho do s uffe r loss . In ot he r
w ords , the los ses of t he few a re m et from t he cont ribu tions
of t he many . This is t he basis of in surance . T hose w ho pay
t he con tribu tion ar e know n as‘ insur ed’and t hose w ho ad-
ministe r t he pool of con tribu tion s as‘ insure rs .’
N ot all risk s end t he mselves t o bei ng cove red by in sur-
ance . Broadly speaking , t he ordina ry risks of busi nes s and
speculation cannot be cover ed . T he risk t hat buyers will no t
buy goods at t he prices offered is no t of a ki nd t hat can be
statistically estimated——— and risk s can only be insur ed a-
gainst if they can be so estima ted .

・ 81 ・
 T he legal basis of all in surance is t he‘ policy ① ’. Th is is
a prin ted form of con tr act on st out pape r of t he best quality .
I t states t hat i n ret urn for the regu lar paymen t by t he in-
s ured of a na med sum of money , called t he‘ premium ’,
w hich is us ually paid every year , t he insur er will pay a s um
of money or compen sation for los s , if t he risk or even t in-
s ured again st act ually happens . T he w ording of policies ,
par ticular ly in mari ne insur ance, often seems very old
fashioned , but t her e is a sound r eason for t his . O ver a large
number of yea r many law casses have been brough t to clea r
up t he meanings of doub tful phr ases in policies . The law
courts , in t heir judge men ts , have given t hese phr ases a defi-
nite and indispu table m eaning , and to avoid fu t ure dispu tes
t he phrases have con tinued to be used in policies even w hen
t hey have passed ou t of normal use in speech .
1. According t o t his passage , insur ance is possible because
.
( A) eve ryone at some time suffe rs los s
(B ) only a s mall propor tion of t he insur ed suffer los s
( C) nea rly everyone suffe rs los s
(D) on ly i nsured peop le suffer loss
2. The‘ basis of insur ance’refers t o .
( A) the s ha ring of risk s
(B ) t he admi nistr ation of cont ribu tion s

① policy〔’p lisi〕 保 险单

・ 82 ・
 ( C) t he paymen t of con t ribu tions
(D) exposur e to risk s
3. By‘t he pool of con tri butions’t he w riter means .
( A) money paid by the in sured
(B ) money paid by t he ins ur ers
( C) t he cost of administ ering insur ance
(D) t he a moun t of each pr emium
4. The ins urance of ordinay busines s risk s is not possi ble
becau se .
( A) busines smen will not buy i nsurance
(B ) t he risk s a re t oo high
( C) t he risks can no t be estimated
(D) t he pre miums would be t oo high
5. Old fash ioned wording is sometim es used i n in surance
policies because .
( A) insur ance is ol d fashioned
(B ) insur ance has existed for a long time
( C) it enables ordina ry peop le t o u nderstand it
(D) t he meaning of such w ording has been agreed upon
6. The writer of t his pas sage seem s t o t hink t hat in surance
is .
( A) a form of gamb ling
(B ) a way of making money quick ly
( C) old fas hioned
(D) useful and neces sary

・ 83 ・
Passage B

Because helicop ters can go almost any where , t hey have

been specially useful to explore rs . In t he jungles ① of Sou th
A me rica t hey have helped explore rs , looking for new places
t o sink oil wells . First of all t he helicopte rs lif t t he geolo-
gists and mine ralogists in to the hear t of the jungle, t rying
first one a rea and t hen ano ther , and w hen they find a p lace
t hat seems likely to yield oil, the helicop ters can bring in
drilling equipment . They can bring i n huts i n pieces , and
ve ry nea rly every th ing t hat may be needed . If a telephone is
needed from t he jungle out post back t o the m ain base , t hen
t he wir es t hem selves can be laid across t he jungle t reetops .
All t he helicop ter had to do is t o fly close over the tr ees un-
r eeling the cab le from a big drum as it goes .
I t is ve ry comforting for explorer s in such places t o
know t hat if t hey ar e injur ed or fall ill, t hey can be flow n
back t o hospital in a few hour s . O nly t wen ty years ago a
sick man prospecting in t he hear t of the jung le m agh t have
faced a jour ney of sever al week s , t ravelling pa rt of t he way
on a bumping st retcher ca rried by natives , and par t of t he
way in a slow moving canoe .
Big helicop ters can lift loads up to abou t ten t ons . As
t hey can go any w her e and can hover ove r any chosen spot ,

① jung le〔’d g l〕丛 林 , 密林

・ 84 ・
t hese helicop ter s make excellen t flying cranes . Befor e t he
days of helicop ters , t he tas k of building a radio station on
t op of a high mou ntain might have m eant building a road or
a cable r ailway first . Bu t a helicop ter can carry all the b uild-
ing mate rials and t he w orkm en up i nt o position quite easily .
P u tting a new top on a high structur e like a ligh t house
used t o mean t ha t a scaffolding even higher t han t he ligh t-
house had t o be built fir st of all . Now a helicopt er can be
used t o fly over and lowe r t he par t gen tly in to position . A
helicopt er has been used to lower a new cros s on to t he spire
of a church in t he sa me way .
H elicop te rs have saved thousands of peop le from t he
sea and t hey have saved peop le from moun tain tops . They
ar e alr eady doi ng all k inds of useful t hings , bu t t heir story
has hardly begun .
7. Par agraph 1 implies b ut does no t directly say , t hat
.
( A) in oil exploration , the work sites a re us ually fa r
apar t from each o ther
(B ) phelicopt ers can go almost anyw here
( C) helicop ter s ar e very useful t o explore rs
(D) helicop ters can t ransport people
8. H ow m any uses according to Par agrap h 1 can a helicopte r
pu t t o in oil exp lor ation ?
( A) 2 ( B) 3
( C) 5 (D) 4
・ 85 ・
9. The word‘ prospecting’means .
( A) tr avelling in t he j ungle
(B ) suffering
( C) falling ill
(D) sea rching for oil or valuable mine rals
10. T he w rit er mentions two forms of t ransport available in
Sout h A merical jungles before helicop ter s we re u sed .
What ar e t hey ?
( A) st r etcher and horse car t
( B) st retcher and canoe
( C) canoe and bike
( D) canoe and car
11. An example of how a helicop te r can save time and mon-
ey is using it to .
( A) ca rry a cr ane to t op of a radio station
( B) lo wer a cross on to the s pir e of a church
( C) put scaffolding on a ligh t hou se
( D) build a road up a moun tain
12. T he last sen tence of th is passage t ries to convey a mood
of .
( A) brigh t pros pect ( B) gr ea t happines s
( C) gr eat concern (D) sincerit y

Passage C

People from many coun t ries find it difficu lt to unde r-

stand how t he m ajorit y of A me ricans live confortable lives
・ 86 ・
withou t the suppor t of a pu blic welfa re system . Medical care
in the U nited States is expensive ; unive rsity education can
cost ＄20 , 000 pe r year ; living well afte r a worker r etir es re-
quires more money than will be paid t hrough t he Social Se-
curit y system . Most A mericans pr epa re for t hese needs by
saving a par t of t heir sala ries in savings banks; ot hers invest
in indust ries or service corpor ations in hopes of r eceiving
gr ea ter profits .
Most A m ericans also buy insurance . Private companies
sell insurance of many kinds . In buying ins urance , a w ork-
ing pe rson agr ees t o pay a set s um of money every mont h or
at ot he r regu la r in tervals . In exchange , he or she r eceives
money w hen needed . Life insur ance gua rantees a sum of
money t o survivors of t he person in case of deat h . Medical
and hospital insurance guar an tees paymen t of large medical
and hospital bills . T her e is also den tal in surance and in sur-
ance t hat pays money w hen a hom e burns do wn . A n A me ri-
can can also ins ure a car , furnitur e or ot her personal belong-
ings .
Ot her benefits for working A mericans a re provided by
t he companies t hey w ork for or the labor unions to w hich
t hey belong .
All large busines ses and m any smaller ones offer t heir
w orkers benefits . These benefits can incl ude free or low-
cost medical insur ance and life ins ur ance . Many companies
also have retire men t plans . T he companies pu t money aside
・ 87 ・
t o pay t heir workers w hen t hey r etir e . T her e ar e also profit-
sharing plans t hrough w hich ex t ra money is pu t aside for
w orkers w hen t he company makes a great deal of money in
any one year .
M any labor union s also have special funds from w hich
w orkers can r eceive mont h ly checks w hen t hey r etir e or if it
t hey become disabled and cannot w ork . Som e unions also
pay for medicine t hat t he worke rs need bu t which may no t
be purchased by m edical in surance . Som e pay w orkers a
small amoun t of money if t hey lose their jobs .
T he cost of highe r education is us ually paid by a combi-
nation of private savings , incom e from a par t- time job held
by t he st uden t , and low in ter est loans or gr an ts of money
given t o needy st uden ts by t he feder al governm en t b ut ad-
ministe red by the univer sit y .
13. T he au t hor m en tions all of t he following kinds of in sur-
ance excep t
( A) childr en insur ance . ( B) den tal insur ance .
( C) fire in surance . (D) life ins urance .
14. An ins ur ance syst em is t hat you pay a cer tain sum of
money at regu la r inte rvals and you get paid
( A) also at regular i nte rvals .
( B) befor e you pas s away .
( C) in case of t he right need .
( D) w hen t he hospit al bills a re large .
15. When a w or ker becomes ol d or disabled in t he U SA , he
・ 88 ・
 may get a sm all sum of money from
( A) h is company . ( B) t he governm en t .
( C) a welfa re agency . (D) his labour union .
16. T he expenses of higher education is paid by
( A) personal savings .
( B) lo w-in ter est loans .
( C) income from a par t-time job .
( D) a combina tion of t he above t hree .

Passage D

Cer tain animals and plan ts develop char acte ristics t hat
help them cope wit h t heir environm en t bet ter than ot hers of
t heir kind . This nat ural biological proces s is called adapta-
tion . Among the supe rior char acte ristics developed t hrough
adap tation are t hose t hat may help i n getting food or s hel-
ter , i n providi ng pro tection , and in producing and pro tecting
t he young . T hat results in the evolu tion of mor e and more
organisms t ha t are bet ter fitted t o t heir environm en ts .
Each living t hing is adap ted to its way of life in a gener-
al way , bu t each is adap ted especially to its ow n distinct
clas s . A plan t , for examp le, depends upon its roo ts to fix
itself firmly and t o absorb wa ter and inorganic che micals . I t
depends upon its green leaves for using t he su n’s energy t o
make food from inorganic chemicals . These a re gener al ad-
ap tation s , common t o most plan ts . In addition , t her e are
special adaptations t hat only ce rtain kinds of plan ts have .
・ 89 ・
 M any animals have adap tation s t hat help t hem escape
from t heir enemies . Som e insects ar e h idden by t heir body
color or s hape, and many look like a leaf or a lit tle branch .
T he coats of deer a re color ed t o mix wit h the s urroundings .
M any animals have t he ability t o rem ain comp letely still
w hen an enemy is nea r .
O rganisms have a gr eat va riet y of ways of adap ting .
T hey may adapt in t heir st ructur e, function , and genetics ① ;
in t heir development and production of the young ; and in
o t her res pects . A n organism may cr eate its o wn environ-
m en t , as do wa rm-blooded ma mmals ② , w hich have t he abil-
it y t o adjust body heat exactly t o maintain t heir ideal t em-
perat ur e despite changing weat her . Us ually adap tations are
an advantage, but som eti mes an organism is so well adapt ed
t o a par ticular environmen t t ha t, if conditions change, it
finds it difficult or impos sible to readap t t o t he new condi-
tion s .
17. Some plan ts and anim als develop superior cha racteristics
so t hat t hey may
(A) help o t her s of t heir kind get food , shelte r and
o ther t hings needed .
( B) get in to t he biological process of adap tation .
( C) become bet ter adap ted to t he environments t han

① g en et ics〔d i’n et ik s〕 遗 传素 质
② mam mal〔’m m l〕 哺 乳动物

・ 90 ・
 o thers of t heir k ind .
( D) lead t o t he evol ution and production of more and
more organisms .
18. Some animals have colored and spot ted coa ts so t hat
they may
( A) appear frigh tening t o t he enemies .
( B) look like leaves or branches .
( C) keep motion less w hen an ene my is coming .
( D) mix wit h t he surroundings for safety .
19. All of t he following adapta tions of living t hings are
mentioned in t he pas sage except t hat in t heir
( A) st ruct ure .
( B) ways to develop t he survival skills of t he young .
( C) production of the young .
( D) working syste m of t he body .
20. Which of t he follo wing sta tements abou t t he wa rm-
blooded mamm als is t rue according to the tex t ?
( A) They can change their environments .
( B) They can adju st body heat t o keep their ideal t em-
perat ure .
( C) They can make food from che micals .
( D) T hey get most of t heir heat from t he environ-
m en t .

・ 91 ・
 Unit 10

Passage A

T he People in t he News st udio is a hive ① of activit y

duri ng t he hours and minu tes leadi ng up to its deadline .Re-
ports ar e arriving righ t up t o t he time t he progra mme goes
on the air——— repor ts from EBC corres pondents , from t he
pr es s agencies , telephoned repor ts from EBC men and
w om en on t he spot all over t he world , and pr es s releases
from commer cial organizations . T he production team sorts
t hrough t his‘ moun tain’ of news and decides w hich items
ar e to be i ncluded in the progra mme and how long each ite m
is to take .
Because most of the progra mme con sists of int erviews
with t he people in t he news , a great deal of time is spen t
getting t hese people int o t he st udio and running t hrough
each int erview . T he i nte rviews ar e always t ran smit ted live .
M any people need a lot of help when t hey are being i nte r-
viewed——— not the‘ profes sionals’, li ke politicians and fil m
stars , bu t ordina ry people w ho have been in t he news . F or
example, t hey may have their answer s prepar ed befor e t he
live broadcase .

① hiv e〔hai v〕 蜂箱 , 喧 闹而繁 忙的 场所

・ 92 ・
 T he producer is t he co ordi nat or of all th is activit y be-
h ind t he scenes . I t’s the producer’s job t o make sure every-
one i n t he team does his or he r fair s har e of t he w ork and
t hat t he programm e is ready t o go on the air at t he scheduled
time . Si nce People in t he News is a live show , t her e is al-
ways a complete r ehear sal befor e t he broadcast . Each me m-
ber of t he team has to feel confiden t about exactly w hat he
or s he is t o do in t he progr amm e .
Since it first wen t on t he air in Janua ry 1981 , People in
t he News has been one of the most popu la r EBC pro-
gra mmes . This is pa r tly t hanks to its forma t of linking re-
ports wit h in terviews and par tly to its live element : t hings
can and do go wrong in a live broadcast and par t of enjoy-
m en t the audience gets is t he feeling that‘any t hing can hap-
pen’. Members of t he progra mme team , even t he ‘ old
hands’, do get ne rvous befor e and during t he broadcast bu t
w hen mistakes are made t hey all have to ca rry on unruffled ①
and must definit ely not panic !
1. According t o t he first par agraph , w hich of t he following
st atements is NO T T RU E ?
( A) T he peop le working in t he news st udio a re kep t
busy on ly a few hours before the programm e goes
on t he air .
(B ) T he sour ces of t he N ews ar e va ried and supply t he

① un ruffled〔’ n’r fld〕 平静的 , 沉着的

・ 93 ・
 st udio wit h a lot of news .
( C) N ot all news will be included in t he news pro-
gramm e .
(D) EBC is a broadcasting corpora tion .
2. In the first sen tence of t he first par agraph the Peop le in
News r efe rs to .
( A) the people working in t he st udio
(B ) t he title of a progr amm e
( C) t he peop le who will be broadcasted in news pro-
gra mme
(D) t he people who will broadcast t he news
3. By usi ng t he word " professional " in the second pa ra-
graph , t he au t hor wan ts to imply t hat .
( A) politicians and film st ars a re sk ilful in their respec-
tive fiel ds
( B) politician s and film sta rs are sophisticated profes-
sional men and w omen
( C) politicians and films stars a re differ en t from ordina-
ry peop le because t hey ar e profes sionals
(D) peop le like politicians and films sta rs a re expe ri-
enced inte rviewees , t he refore need no help
4. The popu la rit y of the news progra mme is pa r tly a tt ribu-
ted to its live element because .
(A) t he audience is delight ed wit h t he mist akes it
makes sometimes
(B ) the aduience feels it mor e enjoyable if t he pro-
・ 94 ・
 gr amme makes mistakes som etim es
( C) it gives t he audience a sen se of realit y when t hey
know it will go w rong at any tim e, t her efore it
gives them mor e enjoymen t
(D) t he audience likes to listen to t he mistakes m ade in
t he progr amme
5. Which of t he following statem en ts is NO T T RU E ?
( A) Every m embe r of t he progr amme has to get well
prepar ed befor e t he broadcast .
(B ) EBC runs many o ther progr ammes , t oo .
( C) The " old hand" of ten makes mistakes .
(D) Even w hen peop le make mistakes , t hey must go on
wit h t he progr amm e undist urbed .

Passage B

T he secr et to t he conquest of t he Na tive A merican of

t he G reat Plains ultimately lay no t so much in milita ry str at-
egy conducted against t he Native A me rican nations by t he
government of the newly formed U nited States as in t he wa r
of att rition ① t ha t was mindlessly waged against t he buffalo
by the fron tier smen . The nom adic t ribes had follo wed t he
buffalo in yearly cycles . Indeed , t he buffalo was an in t rinsic
par t of these N ative Am ericans’existence , offering t hem fa r
more t han a source of food : The hides were u sed for clo t h-

① a t triti on〔 ’tri n〕 磨 擦 , 消耗

・ 95 ・
ing and housing ; t he bones wer e m ade in to tools and weap-
ons , t he guts ① , w hen dried , were used for t he st rings in a
brave’s bo w . T he buffalo also ente red in to the spirit ual life
of t he Na tive A m ericans of t he Plains , a fact w hich is no t
surprising con sidering t hat t he buffalo w as t he most tangi ble
source of life t ha t t hese ever-shifting people knew .
Most school children are fa miliar wit h t he pictur e of a
N ative A merican m edicine man wea ring a buffalo head while
chan ti ng ② his incan tations ③ and casting spells t hat were be-
lieved to bring healing . The very size and po wer of t he ani-
m al filled the Native A m ericans wit h awe . The buffalo was
t reated by the Native A me ricans wit h t he respect accorded a
w or t hy opponen t . The idea of killing for spor t was unknow n
t o t hem .
So dependen t upon the buffalo were t hese Native A m er-
icans t hat t hey had developed no o ther form of livelihood .
T he slaugh ter of t he great buffalo herds was the single most
impor tan t fact or in t he demise ④ of t he N ative A merican
t ribes of t he Plai ns as great warrior nations . I t is estimat ed
t hat in t he first few yea rs of t he 1870s , ove r 9 million buffa-
lo were hun ted do wn for sport by the w hite man . Today ,

① gu t〔g t〕 肠子
② ch an t〔’t a n t〕 歌颂 , 赞美
③ in can t at ion〔 ink n’t ei n〕 咒 语 , 符咒
④ d emise〔di’maiz〕 死亡 , 终止

・ 96 ・
t hese anim als , w hich once roa med A merica in t he millions ,
ar e an endanger ed species , not unlike t hat ot her symbol of
A me rican veneration , t he bald eagle .
6. Which of the following titles w ou ld best describe the pas-
sage ?
( A) T he Demise of the Native A me rican Na tions and
Its Effect on t he Buffalo H e rd s
(B ) T he Demise of t he Buffalo and Its Effect on t he N-
ative Am erican Nations
( C) Native A merican Cult ural and Religious Myt h s
(D) Buffalo H un ting and t he Wild West
7. What does t he passage say abou t the use of milita ry pow-
er ?
( A) It was not used .
(B ) I t was out dated .
( C) It helped conque r t he Native Am erican nations .
(D) I t was a secondary fact or in the ultimat e defeat of
t he Native A merican t ribes of t he G reat Plains .
8. The Native A merican s of t he G reat Plains wer e
( A) shifting cu ltivat or s .
(B ) wandering tri bes .
( C) agrarian by na tur e .
(D) wa rlike .
9. Which of the following stat emen ts most accurately de-
scribes the import ance of t he buffalo to the Native A me ri-
cans ?
・ 97 ・
 ( A) T he buffalo was t he m ain source of survival .
(B) T he buffalo provided t he Native Am ericans with
food .
( C) The buffalo gave bones t o be used as tools .
(D) Buffalo hides were used t o make teepees .
10. T he passage i mp lies t hat a Native A merican medicine
man was
( A) a nur se .
( B) a Native Am erican chief .
( C) a br ave .
( D) a religious figure .

Passage C

In t he 1800s , t rains roa red int o sta tions . They were

symbols of progr es s and expansion . They played as much of
a role in A merica’s hist ory as pr esiden ts and gene rals .
T he fir st A merican r ailroads were built in t he late 1820
’s . The early r ail roads provided cheap t ranspor tation for
shippe rs and tr aveler s . To encourage the r ail roads to expand
int o unset tled lands , P residen t Milla rd Fillmore signed a se-
ries of landgran t acts in t he 1850’s . These acts gave t he r ail-
roads ow ners hip of land that r an along t he r ailways . In re-
t urn for t he land , t he railroads carried government t r affic at
reduced r ates . T he railroads sol d much of their land t o
fa rmers and cattlemen , w ho t hen shipped t heir goods on t he
t rains .
・ 98 ・
 T he import ance of t he r ail roads becam e clea r during t he
Civil Wa r . During t he wa r , t rains ca rried t roops , a rms , and
supplies . One reason t hat t he N or t h w on t he war is t ha t it
had more use of t he r ailroads .
Bet ween 1865 and 1900 , r ailroads grew r apidly . T he
first tr anscontinent al rou te was completed in 1869 . This
t rack m ade it easier for pioneers t o cross t he Rocky
Moun tain s and set tle the West . A nd the railroads brough t
new people to t he West even befor e t he t rains sta rted run-
ning . T housands of Chi nese and Irish immigr an ts helped t o
lay dow n t he t racks .
11. Which of t he following BES T expr es ses t he main idea of
the passage ?
( A) Trains brough t progr es s and expansion to t he U .
S .
(B ) Railroads helped pionee rs to cross t he Rocky
Moun tains .
( C) Railroads tr anspor ted livest ock and grai n .
( D) Railroads gr ew r apidly bet ween 1865 and 1900
12. Accordi ng t o t he passage , w hich of t he following state-
m en ts does NO T describe a r es ult of t he land gr an t
acts of t he 1850’s ?
( A) The railroads expanded i nt o unset tled territ ory .
( B) Farm ers and settlers r eceived free land .
( C) T he government received reduced r ates from t he
railroad .
・ 99 ・
 (D) The r ailroad m ade money from set tle rs w ho
s hipped goods on t rains .
13. It can be inferred t hat t he au t hor believes t hat t he r ail-
roads .
( A) rui ned the West
( B) provide t he most import an t form of t ranspor tation
t oday
( C) cheated t he governm en t
( D) improved life in Am erica
14. As it is used in the pas sage, the w ord " tr anscontinen-
tal" ( paragr aph 4) m eans .
( A) ca rrying ( goods , people, etc ) from one p lace t o
ano ther
( B) moving officially from one p lace , job , etc t o an-
ot he r
( C) spanning or cros sing a con tinent
( D) span ni ng or crossi ng an ocean
15. Which of t he follo wing st atements abou t railroad s CA N-
N O T be concl uded from t he passage ?
(A ) Railroads carried N or t he rn supplies during t he
Civil War .
( B) Railroads provided fa rmer s and cat tlem en wit h an
easie r way t o get goods to t he m arket .
( C) Railroads charged t he government to ship gove rn-
men t s upplies .
( D) Railroads did not bring new settlers t o t he west .
・ 10 0 ・
Passage D

T her e is at least one respect , Wa rsaw radio recen tly la-

m en ted ① , in w hich Poland leads the rest of Europe : ciga-
r ette smoki ng . The average Pole smokes seven cigar ettes a
day . T hat is well over twice as many as in 1950 . O nly Nor th
A me ricans and t he Japanese smoke more . It is small comfor t
t o P olish an ti smoki ng ca mpaigners t ha t o ther east Europe-
ans notably Bulga rians , w ho have no obvious excuse———
ar e also hooked .
In easte rn Europe and t he Soviet U nion , t he rapid post-
war i ncrease in cigar et te consump tion does at last seem t o be
levelling off, bu t t he re are ot he r w orrying tr ends . More
w om en a re tak ing to ciga ret tes , and of Poland’s 12 m habit u-
al smokers ( a th ird of the popula tion) nea rly half ar e yound
people .
Doctors and healt h officials in easte rn Europe have ten-
ded no t t o draw a tten tion t o t he hazards of smoking , par tly
because they wer e t ryi ng ha rd to pers uade peop le to drink
less . In Poland , H ungary and t he Soviet U nion , alcoholism
has long been t he public health ene my number one . People
ar e no w being told of s moking’s dangers too, though t he
ca mpaign is j ust beginning . Cigar ette prices have been
raised , packets carry healt h warnings , and s moking is being

① lame n t〔l ’men t〕 悲 痛 , 哀悼 , 伤 心

・ 10 1 ・
banned i n m any offices and on buses . The an ti smoking
ca mpaign has also reached t he Soviet U nion : smoking was
recen tly banned ① in Red Squa re .
16. F rom t he sen tence , " T he re is at least one respect , Wa r-
saw radio r ecen tly lam en ted , in which P oland leads t he
rest of Europe : cigaret te smoking , " We k no w t hat
.
(A) Wa rsaw radio r epor ted chee rfully t hat Poland was
t he first coun try in Europe in cigaret te s moking .
( B) Poland goes fir st in cigar ette m aking in Europe .
(C) Poles smoke as heavily as t he people in ot he r
coun t ries in Europe .
( D) Poles smoke most heavily in Europe .
17. Why do we say " it is small comfor t t o Polish anti
smoking campaigners " ?
( A) Because N ort h A me ricans and t he Japanese smoke
mor e .
( B) Because o t her east Europeans a re also t aking t o
ciga rettes .
(C) Because its neighbor coun t ry gro ws and exports
tobacco .
( D) Because they have no obvious excuse for an ti
smoking .
18. T he ve rbal p hrase‘ levelling off’in t he passage means

① b a n〔b n〕 禁止

・ 10 2 ・
 .
( A) keeping rising
( B) st opping rising
(C) st opping rising higher and con ti nuing at a fixed
level
( D) keeping on rising and st opping a t a fixed level
19. In t he past, doct ors and health officials in easte rn Eu-
rope tended to .
( A) dr aw attention t o t he dangers of drinking
( B) draw at ten tion t o t he hazards of s moking
( C) pers uade people to smoke less
( D) persuade people t o consume less
20. Accordi ng to t he pas sage, in order t o compaign against
smoking people do all the t hings below excep t one
.
( A) r aising t he ciga rett e prices
( B) forbiddi ng smoking in offices and on buses
( C) pers uading people not to smoke in Red Squar e
( D) pu tting healt h wa rning on t he packets

・ 10 3 ・
 Unit 11

Passage A

Lowe r wage increases and t he indu st ry’s poor image are

driving trucker s off t he road and in to ot her professions .
M andat ory ① drug testing policies and government regula-
tion s t hat will require driver s t o u se a national license in-
stead of carrying multip le state licenses ar e also expected t o
take driver s from behind the w heel . In all, the A merican
Trucking Associations predicts t he ranks of t he nation’s 2 .5
million drive rs will decline by som e 20 percen t in t he nex t 10
yea rs . A t t he sa me time, t he expanding indust ry will need
500 000 more driver s t han a re working now . T he r es ult : a
shortage that cou ld exceed 1 million drivers by t he late
1990 s .
A n A T A task force defines t he problem in economic
te rms . Since 1979 wages in t he U nited States have risen 50
percen t , while t ruck drive rs have seen on ly a 20 pe rcen t in-
c rease in pay, says Rober t P .Lynch , a policy analyst with
t he indust ry group . T he t rucker image, t hat of a r enegade
cow boy , also needs t o be improved , he adds . To address in-
dust ry is sues , t he t ask force has begun a wide r ange of initi-

① mand at ory〔’m nd t ri〕 强 制性 的

・ 10 4 ・
atives to encour age r ecruit men t , especially among women
and minorities , t o improve safet y tr aining and to develop
progra ms that give drivers mor e days off to spend wit h t heir
fa milies .
A t A r t hur H .Fu lton Inc ., a 300 driver t rucking firm
in Stephens Cit y , Va ., recruit men t has become a mainstay .
A mong long haul ca rrier s it is not uncommon t o have a
drive r t run ove r ra te of 100 pe rcen t or more annually , says
Brenda Legge, hir ed in 1985 as F ulton’s first vice presiden t
for hum an r esources , " N ot on ly do I have to r eplace people
t hat have left , bu t I need to recruit driver s for t he 63 new
t rucks we have added t o t he fleet ." T hree fu ll tim e recruit-
ers help her wit h t he hiri ng . To retain driver s it does bring
aboa rd , Fu lton is rapidly adding dispatch terminals in its 36
state territory . H aving more t erminals , says t he vice pres-
iden t, allo ws drive rs to w ork closer to home .
1. The reason why mor e and more truch drive rs give up
driving and seek for o t her professions is t hat .
( A) t he wages of drivers incr ease slowe r t han t hose of
t he ot her s
(B ) t he image of drive rs is poor
( C) t he driver s a re required to use a national license in-
stead of ca rrying multiple state licen ses
(D) all of t he above
2. Which of t he following statem en ts is TR U E ?
( A) At present t he w hole coun try has 2 .5 million driv-
・ 10 5 ・
 ers .
(B) The number of drive rs has decreased abou t 20 pe r-
cen t recen tly .
(C) In the nex t ten year s , a t otal number of 500 000
drivers will be needed .
(D) A bout one million drivers will have been e mployed
by t he la te 1990s .
3. The figures provided by Robe rt P .Lynch .
(A ) show t he diffe rences between tr uck drivers and
o t her driver s
(B ) indicat e the lo w wage incr eases of t ruck drive rs
( C) s ho w t he wage differences bet ween 1979 and 1988
(D) poi nt ou t t he significance of t he disparity bet ween
50 pe rcent and 20 per cen t .
4. We may infe r from t he con tex t t he word " t urnover "
m eans .
( A) an act of tur ni ng over
(B ) t he a moun t of bu siness done in a par ticular pe riod
( C) the numbef of driver s t hat are hired by F ult on t o
rep lace t he drivers w ho have left every yea r
(D) t he a moun t of money gained by Fu lton eve ry year
5. The best title for t his pas sage is:
( A) Am erican D rivers: Today and T omorro w .
(B ) H ard Task A head for Driver Recruiters .
( C) Fu lton In Difficulty .
(D) A T A’s Ba rgain for its Tr ucke rs .
・ 10 6 ・
Passage B

Readi ng t o oneself is a modern activity w hich was al-

most unk no wn to t he scholar s of t he classical and medieval
( between AD 1100 and 1500 ) world s , w hile during t he fif-
teen t h cen tury the term " reading" undoubtedly meant read-
ing aloud . O nly during the nineteen t h cen t ury did silen t
reading becom e commonplace .
O ne should be ca reful, however , in as suming that si-
len t r eading cam e abou t simply because reading aloud is a
dist r action t o o thers . Exa mination of factors r elated to t he
historical development of silen t reading reveals t ha t it be-
cam e the u sual mode of r eadi ng for most adult reading tasks
main ly because t he tas ks t hemselves changed in char acte r .
T he last cen t ury saw a steady gradual increase in lit era-
cy ① , and t hu s in t he numbe r of r eader s . As r eaders in-
c reased , so t he n umber of po ten tial listeners decr eased , and
t hu s t he re w as some reduction i n t he need t o r ead aloud . As
reading for t he benefit of listeners gr ew less common , so
ca me t he flourishi ng of r eading as a private activit y in such
public places as libra ries , r ailway ca rriages and offices ,
w he re r eading alound would cau se dist raction to o ther r ead-
ers .
To wards t he end of the cent ury ther e was still consider-

① li te r acy〔’lit r si〕 识 字、有文 化

・ 10 7 ・
able argument ove r w het her books should be used for infor-
m ation or t reated respect fu lly , and ove r whet her t he r eading
of material such as newspape rs was in som e way m en tally
weakening . Indeed t his argument r emains wit h us still in ed-
ucation .H o wever , w hatever its vir t ues , t he old s har ed lit er-
acy cult ur e had gone and was r eplaced by t he prin ted mass
media on t he one hand and by book and m agazines for a spe-
cialised reade rship on t he ot he r .
By t he end of t he cen t ury st uden ts wer e being r ecom-
m ended to adopt at tit udes to books and to use skills in read-
ing them which we re inappropriate, if no t impossib le , for
t he oral r eader . The social, cultur al, and technological
changes in t he cen tury had gr ea tly alte red what t he term "
reading" implied .
6. Why was reading aloud common before t he ni neteen th
cen t ury ?
( A) Silen t reading had not been discover ed .
(B ) T he re we re few places available for privat e read-
ing .
( C) Few peop le cou ld read for t he mselves .
(D) People relied on r eadi ng for ente rt ainment .
7. The developmen t of silent r eading during the ni neteen th
cen t ury indicated .
( A) a change in t he stat us of lite rate peop le
(B ) a change in t he nat ure of r eading
( C) an incr ease in the number of books
・ 10 8 ・
 (D) an increase in t he average age of readers
8. Educationalists ar e still a rgui ng about .
( A) the importance of silen t r eading
(B ) the amoun t of inform ation yielded by books and
newspape rs
( C) t he effects of reading on healt h
(D) t he value of different types of reading mate rial
9. The em ergence of t he mass m edia and of specialised read-
ing mate rial sho wed t hat .
( A) standards of liter acy had gone dow n
(B ) reade rs’ in ter ests had become va ried
( C) prin ti ng techniques had i mproved
(D) educationalists’ attitudes had changed
10. What is t he w rite r of t his pas sage attemp ting t o do ?
(A) Explain ho w pr esen t day reading habits devel-
oped .
( B) Change peop le’s attitudes to r eading .
( C) Show how reading met hods have improved .
( D) Encourage t he grow t h of r eading .

Passage C

O ne of t he teacher’s r ewards is t hat he is usi ng his mind

on val uab le sub jects . All over t he world people a re spending
t heir lives eit her on doing jobs wher e t he mind must be kep t

・ 10 9 ・
numb ① all day , or else on highly rewa rded activities w hich
ar e tedious . O ne can get accust om ed to ope rating an adding
m achine for five and a half days a week , or t o writing ad-
ver tisements t o per suade t he pub lic t hat one br and of ciga-
r ettes is better t han ano ther .Yet no one w ou ld do eit her of
t hese th ings for its ow n sake . O nly t he money makes t he m
t ole rab le . Bu t if you really unde rstand an import an t and in-
ter esting s ubject, like t he st ruct ure of t he human body or
t he hist ory of t he t wo World Wa rs , it is a genuine happiness
t o explai n them t o ot he rs , to welcome eve ry new book on
t hem , and to lea rn as you teach .
Wit h t his ano ther r ew ard of teaching is very closely
linked . That is t he happiness of m aki ng som et hing . When
t he pupils com e to you , t heir minds are only half formed ,
full of black spaces and vague notion s and ove rsimplifica-
tion . Y ou do not me rely inser t a lo t of facts , if you teach
t hem properly . I t is no t like injecting 500 CC . of serum ② ,
or givi ng a year ’s dose of vit amins . Y ou take t he living
mind , and moul d it . I t resists sometimes . I t m ay lie passive
and appa rently r efuse t o accep t any t hing you print on it .
Som eti mes it t akes t he mould t oo easily , and t hen seems t o
melt agai n and becom e feat ureles s . But oft en it comes int o
firmer shape as you w ork , and gives you t he incompa rable

① nu mb〔n m〕 麻 木的
② ser um〔’si r m〕 血浆

・ 11 0 ・
happi nes s of helping t o create a human being . To teach a
boy t he difference between tr ut h and lie in prin t , to star t
him t hin king abou t t he meaning of poet ry or pat riotis m , t o
hear him hamm ering back at you wit h the facts and a rgu-
m en ts you have helped him t o find , sharpened by himself
and fit ted to his ow n po wers , gives the sor t of satisfaction
t hat an ar tist has when he makes a pict ure out of blan k can-
vas and chemical colourings , or a doctor when he hear s a
sick pulse pick up and carry the energies of new life unde r
his hands .
11. What m akes people t oler an t of tedious jobs is .
( A) t he job itself
( B) t he money
( C) t he significance of t he job
( D) t he fact t hat it can keep t he mi nd numb
12. Accordi ng to t he au t hor , it is a genuine happines s
.
( A) t o ea rn a lot of money
( B) to do highly rewarded jobs w he re t he mind must
be kep t numb .
(C) t o spend one’s life on operating an adding ma-
chine
( D) to use one’s mind on valuab le subjects
13. T eaching a pupil prope rly .
( A) m eans taking and moulding t he living mind
( B) is just t o inse rt a lot of facts in t he mind
・ 11 1 ・
 ( C) is just li ke in jecting 500 CC . of serum
( D) shou ld be t he sa me as giving a yea r’s dose of vita-
mins
14. Which of t he follo wing is N O T implied in the pas sage ?
(A) The teache r is an " engineer " who mould s t he
mind as he works
( B) P upils are always r eady to accept w hat you teach
t hem .
( C) A teacher help s to create a human being .
( D) Teaching is no t a ki nd of easy work .
15. T he au t hor r efers t o an a ritst and a doctor .
( A) because an ar tist can make a pict ure and a doct or
can hear sick pulse
( B) in order to make people know how a t eacher feels
when he s ucceeds in cr ea ting a human being
( C) because bot h t he ar tist and t he doct or wer e once
st udents
( D) in orde r t o show t he fact t hat st uden ts can become
good doct ors and ar tists

Passage D

According to t he best historical and a rchaeological evi-

dence , it is estim ated that it t ook about 800 t housand to 1
million years for t he ear t h’s population to reach t he 250 mil-
lion to tal w hich existed at t he end of t he first cen tury afte r
Christ . F or some time after t hat , disease, fa mine , and wa r
・ 11 2 ・
kep t t he popu lation incr ease do wn to a fraction of 1 percen t
a year so t hat mor e t han 15 cen t uries pas sed befor e t he pop-
u lation r eached 500 million . Bu t in the next 250 years , up t o
1850 , t he population of the w or ld s hot up t o t he 1 billion
mark and today it had r eached 3 billion . It is predicted by
U nit ed N ations investigations t hat in the nex t 35 yea rs t he
population of t he worl d will double, r eaching almost 7 bil-
lion by the year 2000 .
When exper ts ar e asked w hat t he most effective meas-
ur e wh ich overpop ulation poses , t hey reply t hat at least
t hr ee measur es can be con sider ed :
( A ) incr easing sources and supply of food for unde r
developed cou nt ries;
( B) increasing the indust rialization of unde r developed
count ries;
( C) r egulati ng bir t hs and concep tion .
T he expe rts add , howeve r , t hat none of t he proposed
measur es can be effective by itself, t hat all must be com-
bined int o an integrated progr am . T hey also agr ee t hat
withou t some regu lation of conceptions and bir t hs , any o t h-
er meas ures ar e doomed t o fail ure .
16. O ur information abou t t he population of t he ea rt h before
the fir st cen t ury after Christ com es mai nly from
.
( A) estimates based on curren t popu lation grow t h
( B) r efe rences in liter at ure and myt hology
・ 11 3 ・
 ( C) estima tes based on pr evious population growt h
( D) writ ten records and cult ural re main s
17. T he population of the w or ld doub led between t he yea r
.
( A) 1850 and today
( B) 100 and t he yea r 1600
( C) 100 and t he year 1400
( D) 1 and t he yea r 100
18. By t he yea r 2000 , the ear th’s population will probably
exceed its present popu lation by .
( A) 1 billion ( B) 3 billion
( C) 2 billion (D) 7 billion
19. P op ulation grow th was most r est ricted in t he period
from .
( A) 100 B .C . to A .D 100
( B) A .D .1 00 t o A .D . 1600
( C) A .D .1600 t o A .D .1850
( D) A .D .1850 to t he pr esen t
20. Which of t he following w ould be most likely t o discove r
" archaeological evidence" ?
( A) an arch itect ( B) an exp lor er
( C) a physician (D) a physicist

・ 11 4 ・
 Unit 12

Passage A

Y ou will discover t hat exams com e in all shapes and si-

zes . We hope you will be ab le to adap t t o most of them .
N one of them is pa rticula rly p leasant , and all of t hem set
ou t t o do t he sa me th ing-nam ely , test your abilit y to retain
knowledge and to r eproduce it analytically during a given
time period . Y our ability t o come to te rms with exa ms will
most cer tainly affect your success during your academic ca-
r ee r . Even t he best-prepar ed st uden ts can be t hrow n if t hey
have not mastered w hat’s know n as "exam technique" .
Perhap s t he most common exa m , alt hough less so now
t han , say , 30 yea rs ago , is t he essay exam . H ere you will
be required to w rite full es say answers on given t opics , u su-
ally t hree to four wit hin a t wo-t o t hree-hour period . This
kind of exa m suits you if you are fl uen t in w riting , and it
provides you with an opport unity to display your k no wledge
and linguistic skill .
T he multiple-choice test is obviou sly less taxing ① lin-
guistically and , t herefor e, les s de manding . All you need t o
do , pr esum ably , is to understand t he question and be able

① t a xing〔’t ksi 〕 负担 重的

・ 11 5 ・
t o circle a let ter . Bu t t his kind of exa m calls for to tal unde r-
standing of t he subject because t he diffe rence between a
w rong and a righ t answer is often very sligh t .
①
O ral exam s , w hich ar e not quite so prevalen t , have
②
t heir ow n pa rticula r pitfalls . No t only do you have t o know
your s ubject bu t you must also overcome any nat ural reti-
cence i n public s peaking . Fi nally , you may have t he falla-
cious idea that t he op timum exa m t o w rite is the " take-
hom e" . Th is type of exam , however , wh ile allo wing you
t he l uxury of time , is invariably graded much more st rictly .
Mid terms and finals can take any of t he above forms . It’s
up t o you t o lear n t o m aste r t hem all .
1. The word reticence( paragraph 4 , line 4 ) means
( A) disabilit y . ( B) hat red .
( C) self-awa renes s . ( D) r eserve .
2. Exams test a st uden t’s ability to
( A) stor e knowledge and recall it in a system atic way .
(B ) w ork under pleasan t condition s .
( C) reflect upon t heir success .
(D) adap t exam techniques .
3. Which of t he following exa ms is not men tioned i n t he
pas sage ?
( A) O ral exa ms . ( B) T ake-home exa ms .

① p re vale n t〔’pr ev l e n t〕 流 行的
② p itf all〔’pi tf l〕 圈套 ; 料 想不 到的危 险 ( 或困 难 )

・ 11 6 ・
 ( C) True-fales exa ms . ( D) E ssay exams .
4. According t o t he passage , in which of t he following ex-
a ms would a native s peaker pres umab ly do bette r t han a
foreigner ?
( A) T ake-home exam . ( B) Or al exam .
( C) Midte rm exam . ( D) O bjective exam .
5. The passage states that multiple-choice exam s ar e
( A) les s in dem and .
(B ) less demanding .
( C) linguistically les s dem anding .
(D) shor ter .

Passage B

Sophy Br en t ca me t o visit me nearly every day . S he ir-

ritated m e unbea rably most of t he time . She smoked inces-
san tly and never used an as ht ray . She followed me in to t he
kitchen w hile I m ade tea or coffee or supper and helped he r-
self to t he ch ildren’s orange juice . She made a great h it with
my tw o year old daugh te r Flor a, who w ou ld hang abou t
her for hours and refer t o her lovingly as " Sofa" , and she
was alway s tal king abou t my hus band and as king me w here
he was .
I cou ld not decide w hy she chose my company , al-
t hough I realised t hat nobody else paid her very much atten-
tion . H er situation was very difficu lt in t hat she was
str aigh t out of dra ma school and only nineteen , but being
・ 11 7 ・
required to play a leading pa r t in a company of fairly distin-
guis hed and experienced act or s . T hey w ou ld not have liked
her much even if s he had been good , and as , from all ac-
coun ts , she was no t good t hey t ook every opport unity t o r un
her dow n . I t hink she t hough t t hat I was t he only per son a-
round w ho was bot h unconnect ed wit h t he t heat re and t oler-
ably s mar t . T o as sociate wit h me was not , a t any r ate, t o
step do wn t he scale . A nd for my par t , alt hough I was irri-
tated by her I did not dislike he r . Ther e was somet hing gen-
uinely discerning in her effusiveness ① , and she had such
physical cha rm t hat wit h me she could get away wit h any-
t hing . She was nice t o have a round , like flowers of a bo wl
of fruit .
6. When Sop hy Bren t ca me t o visit he r , t he w rite r .
( A) w as envious of her
(B ) t hought sophy was in t oler ab ly rude
( C) disliked Sopy’s influence ove r Flora
(D) fou nd Sophy’s habits aggravati ng
7. H ow did Flora react to Sophy ?
( A) She preferr ed he r t o her o wn mot her .
(B ) She liked to hold he r hand .
( C) She took a gr ea t liking to he r .
(D) She li ked t he games Sophy p layed wit h her .
8. Before joi ni ng t his t heat re company Sophy had .

① effusiv en es s〔ifj’u∶ sivn is〕 n . 感 情洋 溢

・ 11 8 ・
 ( A) neve r acted profes sionally in he r life
(B ) received no profes sional t raining
( C) belonged to a leadi ng company
(D) acted profes sionally in on ly one play
9. The ot her actors of ten criticise Sophy because .
( A) t hey t hough t s he was too young for t he pa rt she
played
(B ) t hey didn’t li ke her arrogan t behaviou s
( C) t hey didn’t liking listening to he r conve rsa tion
(D) t hey didn’t t hink t hat she was ve ry compet en t
10. T he w rit er t hought Sophy ca me t o see her because she
.
( A) wanted t o visit t he writes’s young daugh ter
( B) liked visiting som eone else involved in the t heat re
( C) liked visiting someone accept able w ho was no t in-
volved in t he theatr e
( D) wanted t o m eet the w rite r ’s husband and often
as ked about him

Passage C

T he science of meteorology is concerned wit h t he study

of t he st ruct ure , stat e, and behavior of t he at mospher e .
T he subject m ay be approached from sever al dir ection s , bu t
t he scene cannot be fully appreciated from any one van tage
poin t . Different views must be int egrated t o give pe rspective
t o t he w hole pict ure .
・ 11 9 ・
 O ne may con sider t he condition of t he at mophere a t a
given moment and at temp t t o predict changes from t ha t con-
dition over a period of a few hours t o a few days ahead . This
apparoch is cove red by t he branch of the science called syn-
optic m eteorology .
Synop tic meteorology is t he scien tific basis of t he tech-
nique of wea ther forecasting by m eans of t he preparation and
analysis of weat her m aps and aerological diagr ams . T he
pr actical importance of t he numerous app lications of weat he r
for ecasting canno t be overesitm ated . On serving t he needs
of shipping , aviation , agricult ure , i ndu st ry , and m any ot he r
inte rests and field s of human activit y wit h accur ate weat he r
wa rnings and professional for ecast advice, great benefits are
reaped i n t he form of saving of hum an life and prope rt y and
in economic advan tages of va rious ki nd s . One impor tan t
purpose of the science of meteorology is constan tly to st rive,
t hrough advanced study and resea rch , t o incr ese our kno wl-
edge of t he at mosphere wit h t he aim of improving t he accu-
r acy of weat he r for ecasts .
T he t ools needed to advance our knowledge in t his way
ar e the disciplines of m athem atics and physics applied t o
solve met eorological problems . T he use of these tools forms
t hat br anch of t he science called dynamic meteorology .
11. Which of t he follo wing is t he best title for the pas sage ?
( A) The limitations of Meteorological F or ecasting .
( B) New A dvances in Synop tic Meteorology .
・ 12 0 ・
 ( C) A pproaches to t he Science of Meteorology .
( D) The Basics of Dyna mic Meteorology .
12. T he pr ediction s of synoptic m eteorologists a re directly
based on t he .
( A) application of t he physical sciences
( B) prepar ation and st udy of weat he r map s
( C) an ticipated needs of indust ry
( D) observation of commercial airline pilots
13. Which of t he following is not referred to by t he aut hor
as a field w hose needs ar e served by weat her forecas-
ting ?
( A) Tr anspor tation ( B) m anufact uring
( C) Fa rming ( D) Spor ts
14. T he au t hor imp lies t hat increased accuracy in weat he r
for ecasting will lead to .
( A) more funds allocated to meteorological resea rch
( B) greater pro tection of hum an life
( C) a h igher number of professional forecaster s
( D) less specialized form s of synop tic meteorology
15. Which of t he following state men ts best describes t he or-
ganization of t he th ird paragraph of t he pas sage ?
( A) A procedure is exp lai ned and its impor tance is
emphasized
( B) T wo cont rasting views of a problem a re present ed
( C) Recent scien tific advance men ts ar e ou tlined in or-
der of impor tance
・ 12 1 ・
 ( D) A prob le m is examined and possib le solu tion s are
given

Passage D

Living with chil dr en is one of t he few sit uations w here

vir t ue is rewarded . Parents w ho t hink first w hat’s best for
t he children really do have an easier , mor e comfor tab le life
t han t hose who do what t hey like and m ake t he children fit
in .
T he key decision is: s hou ld bot h par en ts go out t o
w ork ? If a mo ther r ealizes how vital her ca re is to a small
baby it may m ake it easier for her to decide t hat t he ex t ra
money she migh t earn , or t he satisfaction she migh t receive
from an outside job , is no t so import an t after all .
T he evidence is , as usual , mor e confused . All research
agr ees on con sisten t loving car e and a high level of sti mula-
tion as an essen tial componen t in ideal child development .
Bu t t her e’s incr easing doubt t hat the 24 hours a day , seven
days a week mum is t he best way t o provide it .
T wo r ecen t London st udies have quite i ndependen tly
come up wit h t he sam e r es ult : 40 percen t of mot hers w ho
stay at home wit h children under five a re clinically de-
pr es sed , although the depr es sion is not necessarily caused
by staying at hom e . T he t wo doct ors have show n t hat de-

・ 12 2 ・
pr es sed mot he rs produce depressed , neurotic ① and backwa rd
chil dr en . Ther e a re many ot her mot hers w ho, wit hou t being
depressed , a re oppressed by t he unending r epetitive② tas k of
ca ring for a sm all baby , and so get less pleasure from t heir
chil dr en t han t hey migh t .
As suming t he still - normal situation - mot her at home
- t her e a re ways to guard again st t he imprisoned feeling .
F or in stance, once a week , a completely free day and eve-
ning during w hich t he mot her is r elieved of all r esponsibili-
t y . S he can visit friends , or go to a museum , s pend all
morning buying a pair of shoes and needn’t come back until
she feels like it .
A nyone wit h a baby k no ws how he will play happily
w hile you cook , wash up or m ake beds , bu t no sooner do
you sit dow n wit h a book , pick up a complica ted piece of
knitting or take out your violin t han he becom es demanding
and tiresom e . In our house "Mum’s writing an a r ticle" is a
signal for unu sual gloom , w her ees " Mum ’s off for t he
weekend" is excellen t new .
16. We can conclude from t he passage t hat to create a fa-
vour ab le sit ua tion for children’s gro wt h , par en ts s hou ld
( A) do w ha t t hey like for t heir childr en .
( B) offe r t heir children as much as possible .

① n eu rot ic〔nij ’rot ik〕 神经过 敏的

② re pe ti tiv e〔ri’pe t tiv〕 重复的

・ 12 3 ・
 ( C) t hink first w hat’s best for t heir childr en .
( D) m ake their children fit in t heir patt ern of life .
17. In paragraph 3 the last word it r efe rs to
( A) t he previou s sent ernce .
( B) "essen tial component" .
( C) "consisten t loving ca re" .
( D) "ideal child developmen t" .
18. It can be concl uded from t he recen t London st udies t hat
for mo thers t o stay at home wit h children
( A) can provide t heir chil dr en wit h much better edu-
cation .
( B) is a vital par t in t heir children’s development .
( C) will make mot hers feel depressed or oppr es sed .
( D) m ay not neces sa rily be a vital par t in ideal chil-
dren’s grow th .
19. Accordi ng to t he pas sage, w hat is s uggested as the best
way t o r elieve a mo ther from t he imprisoned feeling at
home ?
( A) Try to give he r a day off every week .
( B) Let her do whateve r she likes som etim es .
( C) Of ten give her a hand i n t he housew ork .
( D) Let her see t he ou tside w or ld occasionally .
20. Accordi ng to the pas sage, babies will play happily by
themselves when t heir mo t her s
( A) do t he rou tine hou sework .
( B) do t he t hings t hey ar e in terested in .
・ 12 4 ・
( C) eit he r r ead a book or write an ar ticle .
( D) play a musical inst rument .

・ 12 5 ・
 Unit 13

Passage A

I t is well know n t hat w hen an individual joins a group

he t ends to accept the group’s standa rds of behaviour and
t hinki ng . Many ill ustr ation s could be given of t his from eve-
ryday life , bu t what is of pa rticula r in ter est to psychologists
is t he ex ten t t o w hich people’s judgements and opinion s can
be changed as a result of group press ure . Asch and o thers
no ticed t ha t peop le in a group will agr ee t o state men ts t hat
ar e con tr ary t o the evidence of t heir senses . It would be a
mistake t o t hink t hat on ly par ticular docile people a re chosen
t o take par t in expe rimen ts of t his type . Usually highly in-
telligen t and independent people a re used .
In a t ypical expe rimen t , t his is w hat may happen . T he
experimente r asks for volun teers t o join a group w hich is in-
vestigating visual pe rception . The victims a re not , there-
fore , awar e of t he real purpose of the expe rimen t . Each vol-
un teer is taken t o a room wher e he finds a group of abou t
seven people w ho ar e collaborating wit h t he experim en ter .
T he group is sho wn a standard ca rd w hich con tains a single
line . They a re t hen asked to look at a second ca rd . This has
t hr ee lines on it . O ne is obviously longer t han t he line on
t he first card , one is short er and one t he sam e lengt h . They
・ 12 6 ・
have t o say w hich li ne on t he second ca rd is t he sa me leng th
as t he line on the standa rd card . The o ther membe rs of t he
group answer first bu t w hat t he volu nteer does no t know is
t hat t hey have been told t o pick one of t he w rong lines .
When h is t urn com es he is faced wit h t he unanimous opinion
of t he rest of t he group———all the o t her s have chosen line A
but he quite clearly sees line B as correct . What will he do ?
According to Asch , more than half of t he victims chosen
will change t heir opinion . What is equally surprising is t hat ,
w hen in terviewed about t heir answers , most explai ned t hat
t hey know the group choice was incorrect bu t t hat they yield
t o the pres sure of t he group because t hey t hough t t hey must
be suffering from an op tical ill usion , or because t hey wer e a-
fr aid of bei ng different .
1. The psychologists a re par ticular ly in ter ested i n .
( A) the changes i n t he at tit udes of t he people
(B ) t he degr ee of changes of people’s opinions
( C) t he r esu lt of the experi men t
(D) t he difference in people’s cha racters
2. People w ho ar e us ually chosen to take pa r t in t he expe ri-
ments ar e .
( A) st ubborn and independent
(B ) t ractable
( C) ignor an t and docile
(D) capable of r easoning
3. Which of t he following statem en ts is TR U E ?
・ 12 7 ・
 ( A) The experim en ter and all the m embe rs of the group
excep t t he victim know t he purpose of t he expe ri-
men t .
(B ) All of t hem know the purpose of t he experiment .
( C) O nly t he experimente r k no ws t he purpose of t he
experiment .
(D) O nly the victim knows t he purpose of the expe ri-
m en t .
4. Decide w hich ca rd is used as t he second card .
st anda rd ca rd

second card
( A) ( B) ( C) ( D)

5. More t han half of the victims changed t heir opinion be-

cause .
( A) someone in t he group changed their opinion
(B ) t hey t hought t heir eyes must be deceived
( C) t hey though t t he group choice was corr ect
(D) t hey had been told abou t the answer
・ 12 8 ・
Passage B

O ur generation has made such immense discoveries and

achieved such undreamed enrichmen ts of t he outside of life,
t hat it has lost touch wit h t he inside of life . I t has forgo tten
t he t rue riches and beau ties of its spirit ual inhe ritance: rich-
es and beau ties t hat go far beyond our modern chat ter abou t
values and ideals . The mind’s sea rch for mor e br eadt h has
obscured the hear t’s craving for more dep t h . O nce agai n man
has become t he dupe of his o wn cleve rnes s . A nd because it
is difficult t o at tend t o more than a few th ings at a time , we
leave ou t a great range of experiences w hich com es in by an-
ot her rou te and tells u s of ano ther kind of life . O ur in ter est
rushes ou t to t he fa rt hest limits of t he univer se , but we sel-
dom take a sounding of t he ocean beneat h our restless keels .
We get , t her efore, a queer feeling t hat we ar e leaving some-
t hing ou t . K nowledge has grow n ; but wisdom , savoring t he
deep w onder and myste ry of life , li ngers far beh ind . Thus
t he life of t he hum an spirit , w hich ough t t o mai ntain a bal-
ance bet ween t he w orl d visible and t he w or ld invisible , is
t hrow n out of gea r .
6. The title t hat best expresses t he ideas of t his passage is:
( A) Man’s need for wisdom
(B ) T he hear t and mind of man
( C) The invisible world
(D) T he grow th of kno wledge
・ 12 9 ・
7. The au t hor of t his passage imp lies his concern over man’s
.
( A) inhum anity to ot her men
(B ) emphasis on t he mate rialistic in life
( C) exploration s in the far t hest limits of t he unive rse
(D) lack of k no wledge of t he visi ble w or ld
8. The m eaning of t he word’sounding’ in t his passage is
.
( A) significance
(B ) mak ing a sound
( C) giving an impression
(D) means uring t he dep t h
9. The au thor of t his passage imp lies that .
( A) the soul of m en is r estless
(B ) people spend t oo much time in idle talk
( C) man is t oo conce rned wit h t hings of t he spirit
(D) man should sea rch for mor e bread t h in his life
10. T he au t hor suggests t hat m an needs t o .
( A) spend more time in t ravel
( B) learn to do more t han one t hing at a time
( C) give more at ten tion to the s pirit
( D) become more social

Passage C

H e slep t for a good six hour s , and t he sun was h igh

w hen he awoke . As he sat up and yaw ned a pair of strong
・ 13 0 ・
hands seized his shoulders , and in a momen t his wrists were
tied tigh tly t oget her behind his back . H e turned and star ed
int o Branko’s hairy face . " Wha t’s t his ?" he said . T he old
man tested t he knots befor e answeri ng " Orders , Black Pete r
’s changed his mind . U n til we can check on you ."
M ar tin sw or e loudly , t hen asked if he could t al k t o
Black Pete r . Branko shook his head . " H e’s bu sy ." M ar tin
was seized by despair . N ow all his plan s migh t fail unless he
could gain t he confidence of Black Peter .
A fter som e t hought he st ood up and wal ked t o t he
mou t h of t he tunnel . Branko followed . The gr as sy hollo ws
wer e alive with men busy wit h t heir various du ties . There
must have been a str eam somew her e nearby , for a long line
of m en w ere taking t heir hor ses to t he wa ter ; o t her s were
set ti ng up ten ts and ligh ting fires . Immediately opposite was
ano ther tun nel at t he ent rance of w hich st ood t wo guards
arm ed wit h guns . Behind t hem Mar tin made out t he gian t
form of Black Peter . " Ther e he is , " he said . " I must talk t o
him ." Branko t ried to stop him , bu t he pushed him aside,
walked t o t he mou t h of t he t unnel and called ou t: " Black Pe-
ter ! I mu st talk to you ."
T he leade r of t he W hit e E agles was sea ted on a w ooden
box , deep in coversation with t wo rough looking men . "
What is it ?" he said . " Why are you checki ng up on me ?"
M ar tin replied . " I need to be sure abou t you , " said Black
Peter . " There’s too much t o lose ." H e point ed in t o t he t un-
・ 13 1 ・
nel , and Mar tin saw t he w ooden boxes t hat he gues sed must
contain t he gold bars . " Is t hat the tr easur e ?" he as ked .
Black Pete r stood up , st ruggling betw een h is desire for se-
c recy and an obvious pride i n the success of his p lans . "
Yes , " he said at last .
11. Mar tin’s night’s rest .
( A) was dist ur bed
( B) last ed less t han si x hours
( C) lasted for more t han six hour s
( D) was sudden ly cu t shor t
12. What happened as soon as M ar ti n w oke up ?
( A) Branko st ruck him
( B) He was m ade a prisone r
( C) Branko checked t hat he was still tied up
( D) H e was taken off to speak to Black Peter
13. T he success of Mar tin’s p lans now depended on his
.
( A) escaping from the t unnel
( B) finding t he t reas ure
(C) discovering w ho t he leader of t he Wh ite Eagles
was
( D) persuading Black Pete r t hat he cou ld be t rusted
14. When he got t o t he mou t h of the t unnel, Ma rtin saw
men .
( A) in fair ly la rge numbers
( B) fetching wa ter from t he st ream
・ 13 2 ・
 ( C) packing up ca mp and getting ready t o leave
( D) r esting in small groups
15. Black Pet er finally admit ted that the boxes con tained
gol d becau se .
( A) he was so satisfied wit h what he had done
( B) he had decided to t rust Ma rtin
( C) he saw that he could no longe r keep it a secret
( D) he knew t hat Ma rtin could no t escape

Passage D

T he advan tages of some form of in ternational language

in t he modern world a re obviou s . T hanks to mode rn m et h-
ods of t ransport , we can t ravel every wher e more easily and
more quickly t han ever before , b ut t he language proble m
still rem ains . Wit hou t a common language , misunder st and-
ings a rise and t he re can be no real contact betw een people of
differ en t nationalities .
T her e a re t wo possib le solu tions t o t his problem : eit he r
we choose one of t he existing m ajor languages of t he world ,
or we make up an a rtificial one . But neit her solu tion is sim-
p le becau se no existi ng m ajor language will be accep tab le t o
everyone and because an ar tificial language , such as Espe-
r an to , has no lite rat ure and would be t hough dully by many
lear ners .
I t is often said t hat English is quickly becoming a w or ld
language . It is cer tainly t he most widely used language in
・ 13 3 ・
t he w orld , and second only t o Chinese i n its numbe r of n-
ative speakers , bu t t he re are cert ain dangers in choosing
Eng lish as an i nte rnational language .
First of all , o wi ng to political r easons and national
pride, English is no t accep table t o everyone as a world lan-
guage . Many dislike its influence; they see it as a form of
inte rfe rence , per hap s even domination . English words ente r
t heir languages and t his t oo causes ange r . In F rance , a new
w ord - fr anglais— has been inven ted to descri be t he results .
Alt hough English is being taugh t in more and more schools
abroad , t he proces s is not always popular . N ot every nation
is prepar ed t o accept t he dominant position of a foreign lan-
guage in t heir educational system .
A not her danger is t hat differences in standa rd English
arise from its use th roughout t he w or ld . It cou ld break up ,
with languages developing from dialects of Englis h . Already
Indian teacher s and Nige rian st udents have been unable t o
understand each ot her’s Englis h . The dialects of West Afri-
ca and t he Cari bbean a re no t normally understood by users
of any of t he standa rd forms of English .
I t has also been said t hat the choice of English will
make native speakers unwilling t o lear n ot he r languages , as
a r esu lt of their satisfaction wit h t heir o wn . Bu t , for bette r
or worse, it is Englis h w hich is being taught most widely
t hroughou t t he worl d . Indeed som e w ou ld say it has already
becom e the world language .
・ 13 4 ・
16. T he au t hor t hink s
( A) English s hou ld become t he world language .
( B) English as t he w or ld language will be replaced by
Chinese in the fu t ure .
( C) E sper an to can be used as a world language .
( D) English is t he most widely used language in t he
world .
17. Which of t he follo wing stat ements is T RU E ?
( A) People lea rn t o speak several diffe ren t languages
(B) A n a rtificial language s hou ld be inven ted to re-
place any existi ng language as t he in ter national
language
(C) We choose one m ajor existing language as t he
world language
( D) The aut hor makes no defi nite suggestion in t he
pas sage .
18. English is not accep table to everyone as a world lan-
guage because
( A) it is not a language spoken by most people
( B) t her e a re t oo many dialects of Englis h
( C) I t is difficu lt to learn
( D) m any people dislike t he political influence of Eng-
lish on t heir nations .
19. T he dialect of West A frica
( A) is a standa rd form of English .
( B) has no difference from t hat of t he Cari bbean .
・ 13 5 ・
 ( C) is not Englis h at all .
( D) can hardly be unde rstood by u ser s of standa rd
English .
20. If English becam e a world language its native speakers
might o t her languages .
( A) feel sorry abou t ( B) feel happy t o learn
( C) no t want to lea rn ( C) look dow n upon

・ 13 6 ・
 Unit 14

Passage A

Bot h late sleepe rs and ea rly risers find the fixed hours
of a nine t o five work day a problem . No w t here is an an-
swer t ha t seem s to please t he m bot h . Employees of over 500
businesses , organiza tions and gove rnmen t agencies in t he U-
nited States are adap ting t heir work hours to suit t heir indi-
vidual needs . I t ’s called " flexi ble time " ( flex tim e ) and it
means , for example, t hat employees can sta rt working at
any time during the fir st thr ee hour s t heir office is open and
leave aft er completing t heir r equired daily working ti me .
Ear ly riser s can begin w ork at seven a .m ., finish at t hr ee
and still have dayligh t ti me for shopping , picki ng up chil-
dren at school, or recreation . Late sleepers need no t r epor t
for w ork un til 10 a .m .— but t hey must stay on t heir job un-
til six in t he evening .
Says a Bost on , Mas sachu set ts , bank official: " O ur em-
p loyees like t he syst em , and t ardiness ① has been virt ually e-
liminated . Fewe r people are absen t , t urnover ② has dropped

① t a rdi nes s〔’t a∶ di nis〕 迟缓 ; 拖 沓

② t u rnov er〔’t ∶ n’ uv〕 ( 一 定时 间内的 ) 替 工人 数 , 代工 ( 因 正式 工 人缺
勤 ) 人数

・ 13 7 ・
markedly , and productivit y and morale have risen ."
1. Workers w ho eit he r enjoy sleeping la te or rising ear ly re-
act in w hat way to a flexib le work hour schedu le ?
( A) depr es singly ( B) angrily
( C) happily (D) apat hetically
2. The normal Am erican work day schedule is .
( A) eigh t hours ( B) five hours
( C) si x and one half hours( D ) flexib le
3. What is one of the benefits of t he flexible work schedule ?
( A) T he time passes by mor e quickly .
(B ) T her e is more time for l unch .
( C) Ha rdly anyone is eve r la te for w ork .
(D) Late sleepers have plent y of sleep .
4. What is t he earliest possib le time someone can get ou t of
work on an eigh t hour schedule ?
( A) 2 ∶30 p .m . ( B) 1 p .m .
( C) 3 p .m . (D) 4 p .m .
5. Select t he sentence w hich best completes t he above pas-
sage :
( A) Many business organizations i n t he U nited States
have never hea rd of flexib le w ork hours .
(B ) Emp loyees shouldn’t be forced to adhe re t o a flexi-
b le work hour schedule .
( C) I wouldn’t be surprised if most bu sinesses adop t
flexible work hours in t he near fu t ure .
(D) Flexib le work hours is a te rrible idea .
・ 13 8 ・
Passage B

T he key t o t he world of geoloey is changing ; no t hing

rem ains t he sa me . Life has evolved from simple combina-
tion s of molecules in t he sea t o comp lex combinations in
man . T he land , too, is changing , and ea rt hquakes a re daily
reminde rs of t his . Ear t hquakes r es ult w hen movements in
t he ear t h twist rock s until t hey break . Som etim es this is ac-
companied by visible sh ifts of t he ground surface; oft en t he
shifts canno t be seen , bu t they are t he re; and everyw here
can be found sca rs of ea rlier breaks once deeply buried . To-
day’s ear t h ’s r estles sness is presently concen tr ated , bu t
scars of t he past s how t hat t here is no par t of the ear t h t hat
has not had t hem .
T he effects of ear t hquakes on civilization have been
widely publicized ① , even overe mphasized . The role of an
ear t hquake in sta rting the dest ruction of w hole cities is t re-
m endously fright ening , bu t fir e may act ually be t he princi-
pal agen t in a pa rticu la r disaste r . Supe rstition has often
blended wit h fact t o color r epor ts .
We have lea rned from ear t hquakes much of w hat we
no w know abou t t he ear t h’s int erior , for t hey send waves
t hrout h t he ear t h w hich eme rge wit h informa tion abou t t he
materials t hrough w hich t hey have tr aveled . T hese waves

① pub licize〔’p blisaiz〕 使…引 人注 目 , 宣传

・ 13 9 ・
have show n t hat 1 , 800 miles below the s urface a liquid core
begins , and t hat it , i n t urn , has a solid inne r core .
Ear t hquakes origi nate as far as 400 miles below t he sur-
face, bu t t hey do no t occur at greater dep t hs . T wo un solved
myste ries ar e based on t hese facts . ( 1) As far dow n as 400
miles belo w t he surface t he material shoul d be hot enough t o
be plastic and adjust itself to twisting forces by sluggish ①
flow rat her t han by br eaking , as rigid surface rock s do . ( 2)
If ea rt hquakes do occur at such dep t hs , w hy no t deeper ?
K nowledge gained from st udying ear thquake waves has
been applied in various fields . In t he sear ch for oil and gas ,
we m ake simila r waves unde r cont rolled conditions wit h dy-
namite ② and learn from t hem w here t he re ar e buried rock
structur es favor able to t he accumulation of t hese resources .
We have also developed tech niques for recognizi ng and loca-
ting underground u nclea r tests t hrough t he waves in t he
ground w hich t hey generate .
6. According t o t he passage, ear t hquakes ar e daily r emind-
e rs of
( A) the evolu tion of the life systems .
(B ) t he invisible world of geology .
( C) t he changing of t he land .
(D) t he visible s hif ts of t he ground surface .

① sluggish〔’sl gi 〕 缓慢 的 , 迟钝的
② dynam tie〔’k ain mait〕 炸药

・ 14 0 ・
7. In the last line of the first pa ragr aph , t he word " t he m "
r efers to
( A) scar s . (B ) shifts .
( C) belts . (D) earlier br eaks .
8. Af ter the beginning of an ea rt hquake i n t he cities , w hich
of t he follo wing wou ld most likely be responsible for cau-
sing t he disaster ?
( A) Superstition . (B ) Fire .
( C) The news repor ts .
(D) T he government agencies .
9. We have now learned from ea rt hquakes much about t he
ea rt h’s in terior in t hat they
( A) e merge as fa r as 400 miles below t he s urface .
(B ) cause t he release of ene rgies t hat a re sen t for t h in
waves .
( C) occur wit h t he t wisting forces and t he mate rials
1 , 800 miles below the s urface .
(D) generat e waves wit h information abou t t he mate ri-
als inside t he ea rt h .
10. What does t he last paragraph of t he pas sage chiefly dis-
cus s ?
(A) The application s of what we have lea rned from
ear thquake waves .
( B) The effor ts t o search of oil and gas through imita-
ti ng ea rt hquake waves .
( C) The techniques for detecting and iden tifying un-
・ 14 1 ・
 derground nuclea r tests .
( D) T he buried rock struct ures advan tageous t o t he
t raveling of ear t hquake waves .

Passage C

P rolonging hum an life had increased t he size of the h u-

m an popu lation . M any people alive today w ou ld have died of
chil dhood diseases if t hey had been born 100 years ago . Be-
cau se more people live longer , ther e ar e mor e people around
at any given tim e . In fact , it is a decrease i n death rates , no t
an incr ease in bir thr ates , t hat has led to t he popu lation ex-
p losion .
P rolonging human life has also incr eased t he dependen-
cy load . In all societies , people w ho ar e disab led or t o young
or too old t o work ar e dependen t on t he rest of society t o
provide for t he m . In hun ting and gat hering cult ures , old
people w ho could no t keep up migh t be lef t behi nd t o die . In
times of fa mine, infan ts might be allo wed to die because
t hey could not survive if t heir pa ren ts starved , w hereas if
t he par en ts survived they could have anot he r ch ild . In most
conte mpora ry societies , people feel a mor al ob ligation t o
keep people alive whet her t hey can work or no t . We have a
gr ea t m any peole today who live past t he age at wh ich t hey
want to work or are ab le t o work ; we also have rules w hich
require people t o r etir e at a ce rt ain age . U nles s t hese people
wer e able t o save money for t heir retire men t , som ebody else
・ 14 2 ・
must suppor t t hem . In t he U nited Sta tes many retired peo-
p le live on social securit y checks w hich are so little t ha t t hey
must live in near pove rt y . Ol der people have more illness
t han young or middle - aged peop le ; un less t hey have wealth
or private or governm en t i nsurance, t hey must often " go on
welfa re" if t hey have a serious illness .
When olde r people become old or t oo weak and ill t o
ca re for themselves , t hey create grave problems for t heir
fa milies . In t he past and in som e tr aditional cu ltur es , t hey
w ou ld be cared for at home until t hey died . Today , with
most members of a household working or in school, t here is
often no one at home w ho can ca re for a sick or weak pe r-
son . T o meet t his need , a great many nur sing homes and
convalescen ① hospitals have been built . T hese ar e often
profit - mak ing organizations , alt hough som e ar e spon sor ed
by religious and ot her nonprofit groups . While a few of
t hese institu tion s a re good , most of t hem are simply " dump-
ing ground s" for t he dying in w hich "care" is given by poor-
ly paid , over worked , and undersk illed per sonnel .
11. T he au t hor believes that t he popula tion exp losion re-
sults from
( A) an increase in bir t hrat es .
( B) t he i ndu st rial development .
( C) a decr ease in deat h rates .

① convalescen t〔 k nv ’lesn t〕 康复 的 , 恢复 期的

・ 14 3 ・
 ( D) h uman beings’cu lt ur al advances .
12. It can be infe rred from t he pas sge that in hun ting and
gat he ring cult ures
( A) it was a moral responsibility for t he families t o
keep alive t he aged people who could not work .
( B) t he survival of infan ts was less impor tan t t han
t hat of t heir par en ts in ti mes of sta rvation .
( C) old people was given t he task of impar ti ng t he cu l-
tur al wisdom of t he t rible to new generations .
( D) death was celebr ated as a time of r ejoicing for an
individual fr eed of t he hards hips of life .
13. Accordi ng t o t he passage , w hich of t he following state-
m en ts abou t t he old people in t he U nited States is true ?
( A) They may live on personal wealt h , and private or
government insur ance .
( B) A minority of them re main in a state of near pov-
er t y after t heir retirem en t .
( C) When t hey reach a cert ain age , comp ulsory retire-
m en t is necessary and beneficial .
( D) Wit h t he growing inflation , t hey must s uffe r
mor e unbea rable burdens t han ever .
14. In paragraph t hree , the phr ase "t his need" r efe rs to
( A) prolonging t he dying old people’s lives .
( B) r educing t he problems caused by the r etir ed peo-
ple .
( C) mak ing profits t hrough caring for t he sick or weak
・ 14 4 ・
 persons .
( D) taking ca re of t he sick or weak people .
15. Which of t he follo wing best describes the au t hor’s a tti-
t ude t owa rd most of t he nursing homes and convalescen t
hospitals ?
( A) Sympat hetic . (B ) A pproving .
( C) O ptimistic . (D) Critical .

Passage D

T he tr ees a rrived by post , a half open pa rcel, t hey

wer e th in and str aigh t , ra ther like arrows but wit h shiny
leaves a t one end and muddy roo ts at the ot he r . Te rry and
his fat her took them dow n the garden and plan ted t hem in
t heir prepar ed places . T erry had great hopes of t he middle
t ree, now set in t he holy s po t w here H enry , his cat , being
run over , had been laid to rest a year before . T he nine t rees
made an avenue do wn one side of t he garden , w he re t here
was alr eady a fifteen foo t stone wall between t he garden
and t he back ya rds of t he Jenkins str eet houses .
" W hy do we want a row of t r ees as well as a wall ?"
T erry asked his fat her .
H is fat her said , " For privacy , t hese tr ees grow very
t hickly ."
H is fat her ’s love of privacy of ten puzzled T erry , w ho
was no t one t o keep himself t o himself , bu t he could see
par t of t he poin t he re . The houses in Jenking St r eet were on
・ 14 5 ・
higher ground . His friend Leslie lived in number twelve,
and Leslie had only to stand on a box t o see righ t over t he
wall .
" Will t he t r ees grow highe r t han t he wall ?" T erry
asked t hen .
" Oh yes , t wice as high if no t more . It ’ll take a few
yea rs bu t t hey’ll gro w ."
So they were going t o have nine t rees t hir ty feet t all, t o
keep t hem from bei ng over looked . T erry wonder ed why t his
was so desirable . H e said , " Our garden is very pr ett y . Why
can’t we let the people ove r t he wall see it ? T hat w ou ldn’t be
showing off , would it ?"
" No , I don’t t hink it would be , " his fat her said , " Yet
some people migh t feel a bit les s happy if t hey can always
see a good t hing that isn’t theirs . We don’t wan t t o be t he
cause of any jealousy if w e can help it ."
T his consideration for ot her people’s feelings mu st be a
grow n up t hing , T erry t hough t . It was not his idea of how
t o run t hings . H e said . " These t rees—it seems a lot of t rou-
b le t o go t o just t o st op people bei ng jealous of us ."
16. H ow do we know t hat T erry’s father was expecting t he
tr ees ?
( A) H e though t t hey wou ld grow tall and t hick .
( B) He expected t he m because t hey arrived by post .
( C) H e and T erry had dug holes for t hem .
( D) T he pa rcel was half open , so he cou ld see t hey
・ 14 6 ・
 we re t rees .
17. Pa rt of the ga rden is called a holy spot because .
( A) a cat was buried t here
( B) Henry had been t urn over just t here
( C) T erry’s o wn t ree was p lanted i n t hat spot
( D) it was righ t in fron t of Leslie’s house
18. T erry’s fat her was a man who .
( A) was proud of his ga rden and li ked s ho wi ng it off
( B) was ve ry sociable t owa rds his neighbours
( C) pr eferred t o keep himself t o h imself
( D) felt jealous of t he people in Jenkin s Str eet
19. Why were t he tr ees plan ted in fron t of the wall ?
( A) Because t hat was ther e they w ould gro w best .
( B) To i mprove t he appear ance of the wall .
( C) To hide t he ugly sigh t of Jenkin s St reet .
( D) To stop people look ing i nt o t he garden .
20. What did T erry disapprove of ?
( A) Let ting ou tsider s see t he garden .
( B) The height of t he house in Jenkens St reet .
( C) His fa ther’s concern for people’s feelings .
( D) The way Leslie managed t o look ove r t he w all .

・ 14 7 ・
 Unit 15

Passage A

A n Englishman cam e to Tokyo wit h a con t ract t hat

gave him t wo weeks paid holiday a yea r . H e took t he fir st .
T he second , he was warned in none t oo sub tle ① way ,
w ou ld incur t he company’s dis pleasure .
H e doggedly ② per sisted wit h t ravel p lans . O n t he eve
of his planned depa rt ur e he found his desk piled high with
ex t ra w ork a s uggestion from manage men t he s hou ld st ay
and work .
A ugust may be holiday tim e in t he Western capitals of
t he w orld , bu t w hile London , R om e and N ew York are a-
bandoned to tourists , in Tokyo it is b usiness almost as u su-
al .
N ot only do Japanese companies give t heir staff fewe r
paid holidays than t hose in o ther developed coun tries , most
Japanese do no t even take off all the days t hey ar e allowed .
T he t hree or four week holidays common in Europe and
N ort h A merica rem ain a distan t prospect for most Japanese

① none too sub t le 是 合成词 , 意 为“ 明显 的 ; 明白 的”。 sub t le〔’s tl〕

微妙 的 ; 难以捉 摸的
② dogg edl y〔’d g idli〕 固 执地 ; 执 迷地

・ 14 8 ・
w orkers , who regard t he " workaholic" nick nam e t hey were
given a decade ago by an irat e European Community ① ｏｆｆｉｃｉａｌ
ｗｉｔｈ ｍｉｘｅｄ ｐｒｉｄｅ ａｎｄ ｆｒｕｓｔｒａｔｉｏｎ .
1. Ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｓｔａｔｅ ｍ ｅｎｔ ｉｓ ｔｒｕｅ ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｐａｓｓａｇｅ ?
( Ａ) Ｗ ｈｅｎ ａｎ Ｅ ｎｇｌｉｓｈ ｍ ａｎ ｃａ ｍ ｅ ｔｏ Ｔ ｏｋｙｏ ｔｏ ｗ ｏｒｋ , ｈｅ
ｔｏｏｋ ｈｉｓ ｈｏｌｉｄａｙ ｆｉｒｓｔ .
(Ｂ) Ｗ ｈｅｎ ａｎ Ｅ ｎｇｌｉｓｈ ｍ ａｎ ｗ ａｓ ｅ ｍ ｐｌｏｙｅｄ ｂｙ ａ Ｔ ｏｋｙｏ
ｃｏ ｍ ｐａｎｙ , ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｔｈｉｎｇ ｆｏｒ ｈｉｍ ｔｏ ｄｏ ｗ ａｓ ｔｏ ｇｏ
ｏｎ ａ ｈｏｌｉｄａｙ .
( Ｃ) Ｗ ｈｅｎ ａｎ Ｅ ｎｇｌｉｓｈ ｍ ａｎ ｗ ａｓ ｇｉｖｅｎ ａ ｔｗ ｏ ｗ ｅｅｋ ｈｏｌｉ-
ｄａｙ ｂｙ ｈｉｓ Ｊａｐａｎｅｓｅ ｅ ｍ ｐｌｏｙｅｒ, ｉｔ ｗ ｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ａｄｖｉｓａ-
ｂｌｅ ｆｏｒ ｈｉｍ ｔｏ ｔａｋｅ ｈａｌｆ ａｓ ｍ ｕｃｈ .
(Ｄ) Ｎ ｏ ｓｏｏｎｅｒ ｈａｄ ａｎ Ｅ ｎｇｌｉｓｈ ｅ ｍ ｐｌｏｙｅｅ ｃｏ ｍ ｅ ｔｏ Ｔ ｏｋｙｏ
ｔｈａｎ ｈｅ ｅｎｊｏｙｅｄ ａ ｔ ｗ ｏ ｗ ｅｅｋ ｈｏｌｉｄａｒｙ ｇｉｖｅｎ ｂｙ ｈｉｓ
ｅ ｍ ｐｌｏｙｅｒ .
2. Ｉｔ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｃｏｎｃｌｕｄｅｄ ｔｈａｔ .
( Ａ) ｔｈｅ ａｖｅｒａｇｅ Ｊａｐａｎｅｓｅ ｉｓ ｍ ｏｒｅ ｏｂｓｅｓｓｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｗ ｏｒｋ
ｔｈａｎ ｈｉｓ ｃｏｕｎｔｅｒｐａｒｔｓ ｉｎ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｄｅｖｅｌｏｐｅｄ ｎａｔｉｏｎｓ
(Ｂ ) Ｊａｐａｎｅｓｅ ｗ ｏｒｋｅｒｓ ａｒｅ ｌｅａｓｔ ｒｅｌｕｃｔａｎｔ ｔｏ ｔａｋｅ ｈｏｌｉ-
ｄａｙｓ
( Ｃ) Ｊａｐａｎｅｓｅ ｅ ｍ ｐｌｏｙｅｅｓ ａｒｅ ｍ ｏｓｔ ｅａｇｅｒ ｔｏ ｐｌｅａｓｅ ｔｈｅｉｒ
ｂｏｓｓｅｓ
(Ｄ) ｔｈｅｒｅ ａｒｅ ｓｏ ｍ ａｎｙ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｃｏ ｍ ｐｅｔｉｎｇ ｆｏｒ ｊｏｂｓ ｉｎ Ｊａ-

① Ｅ ｕｒｏｐｅａｎ Ｃ ｏ ｍ ｍ ｕｎｉｔｙ 即 欧 洲 经 济 共 同 体 ( Ｅ ｕｒｏｐｅａｎ Ｅ ｃｏｎｏ ｍｉｃ Ｃｏ ｍ -

ｍ ｕｎｉｔｙ) , 亦 称“ 共同 市场”(ｔｈｅ Ｃｏ ｍ ｍ ｏｎ Ｍ ａｒｋｅｔ)

・ 14 9 ・
 ｐａｎ
3. Ｈ ｏ ｗ ｄｏ Ｊａｐａｎｅｓｅ ｗ ｏｒｋｅｒｓ ｒｅａｃｔ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｎｉｃｋｎａ ｍ ｅ ｇｉｖｅｎ ?
( Ａ) Ｔ ｈｅｙ ｆｅｅｌ ｉｎｓｕｌｔｅｄ .
(Ｂ ) Ｔ ｈｅｙ ａｒｅ ｏｖｅｒ ｗ ｈｅｌ ｍ ｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｃｏｎｆｌｉｃｔｉｎｇ ｆｅｅｌｉｎｇｓ .
( Ｃ) Ｔ ｈｅｙ ｔｈｉｎｋ ｔｈｅｙ ｄｅｓｅｒｖｅ ｔｏ ｂｅ ｃａｌｌｅｄ ｗ ｏｒｋ ｆｒｅａｋｓ .
(Ｄ) Ｔ ｈｅｙ ｂｅｃｏ ｍ ｅ ｆｕｒｉｏｕｓ .
4. Ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏ ｗｉｎｇ ｓｔａｔｅ ｍ ｅｎｔｓ ｉｓ Ｎ Ｏ Ｔ ｔｒｕｅ ?
( Ａ) Ｒ ｏ ｍ ｅ ｉｓ ｓ ｗ ａｒ ｍｉｎｇ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｏｕｒｉｓｔｓ ｉｎ Ａ ｕｇｕｓｔ .
(Ｂ) Ｅ ｕｒｏｐｅａｎｓ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｗ ｈｏｌｅ ｗ ｏｎ’ｔ ｄｅｎｙ ｔｈｅ ｍ ｓｅｌｖｅｓ ｔｈｅ
ｐｌｅａｓｕｒｅ ｏｆ ｅｎｊｏｙｉｎｇ ｐａｉｄ ｈｏｌｉｄａｙｓ .
( Ｃ) Ａ ｎ Ｅ ｕｒｏｐｅａｎ ｅ ｍ ｐｌｏｙｅｅ ｉｎ Ｊａｐａｎ ｍｉｇｈｔ ｂｅ ｈｉｎｄｅｒｅｄ
ｆｒｏ ｍ ｇｏｉｎｇ ｏｎ ａ ｌｏｎｇ ｈｏｌｉｄａｙ .
(Ｄ) Ｓｅｌｆ ｄｉｓｃｉｐｌｉｎｅ ａｎｄ ｌｏｙａｌｔｙ ｍ ａｋｅ ｔｈｅ Ｊａｐａｎｅｓｅ ｈｅａｔ
ｒｅｓｉｓｔａｎｔ .
5. Ｔ ｈｉｓ ｐａｓｓａｇｅ ｍ ａｙ ｌｅａｄ ｕｓ ｔｏ ｉｎｆｅｒ ｔｈａｔ .
( Ａ) ｍ ｏｒｅ ｍ ａｒｒｉａｇｅｓ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｒｅａｋ ｕｐ ｉｎ Ｊａｐａｎ ｂｅｃａｕｓｅ ｈｕｓ-
ｂａｎｄｓ ａｒｅ ｓｐｅｎｄｉｎｇ ａｌｌ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｔｉｍ ｅ ａｎｄ ｅｎｅｒｇｙ ｗ ｏｒｋ-
ｉｎｇ
(Ｂ ) ａ ｔｒａｄｉｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｈａｒｄ ｗ ｏｒｋ ａｎｄ ｌｏｙａｌｔｙ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｇｒｏｕｐ ,
ｆｏｓｔｅｒｅｄ ｂｙ Ｊａｐａｎｅｓｅ ｃｏ ｍ ｐａｎｉｅｓ, ｉｓ ｐａｒｔｌｙ ｒｅｓｐｏｎｓｉ-
ｂｌｅ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｌｕｃｔａｎｃｅ ｔｏ ｔａｋｅ ｈｏｌｉｄａｙｓ
( Ｃ) Ｊａｐａｎｅｓｅ ｗ ｏｒｋｅｒｓ ｅｎｊｏｙ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｌｌｅｎｇｅ, ｔｈｅ ｅｘｃｉｔｅ-
ｍ ｅｎｔ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｏｐｐｏｒｔｕｎｉｔｙ ｆｏｒ ｇｒｏ ｗｔｈ ｔｈａｔ ｔｈｅｉｒ
ｗ ｏｒｋ ｐｒｏｖｉｄｅｓ
(Ｄ) ｔｈｅｙ ａｒｅ ｎｏｔ ａｃｔｕａｌｌｙ ｗ ｏｒｋｉｎｇ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｓｔｅａｋ . Ｉｔ’ｓ ｔｈｅ
ｓｉｚｚｌｅ ｔｈａｔ ｆａｓｃｉｎａｔｅｓ ｔｈｅ ｍ
・ 15 0 ・
Ｐａｓｓａｇｅ Ｂ

Ｗ ａｓｈｉｎｇｔｏｎ , Ａ ｐｒｉｌ 4 ( Ａ Ｐ ) — Ｔ ｈｅ Ｕ ｎｉｔｅｄ Ｓｔａｔｅｓ ｈａｓ

ｍ ｏｒｅ ｔｈａｎ 90 ｍｉｌｌｉｏｎ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄｓ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｆｉｒｓｔ ｔｉｍ ｅ, ｂｕｔ ｅａｃｈ
ｃｏｎｔａｉｎｓ ｆｅ ｗ ｅｒ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｏｎ ａｖｅｒａｇｅ ｔｈａｎ ｅｖｅｒ, ｔｈｅ Ｃｅｎｓｕｓ Ｂ ｕ-
ｒｅａｕ ｒｅｐｏｒｔｅｄ ｔｏｄａｙ .
Ｔ ｈｅ 90 031 000 ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ Ｕ ｎｉｔｅｄ Ｓｔａｔｅｓ ａｖｅｒ-
ａｇｅｄ 2 .64 ｍ ｅ ｍ ｂｅｒｓ ｅａｃｈ ａｓ ｏｆ ｌａｓｔ Ｊｕｌｙ 1 .
" Ｔ ｈｅ ｒｅａｓｏｎ ｉｓ, ｉｎ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ, ｃｈａｎｇｅｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ａｇｅ ｓｔｒｕｃ-
ｔｕｒｅ , " ｅｘｐｌａｉｎｅｄ Ｃａ ｍ ｐ ｂｅｌｌ Ｇｉｌｂｓｏｎ , ａ ｐｏｐｕｌａｔｉｏｎ ｓｐｅｃｉａｌｉｓｔ
ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｒｅａｕ .
Ｍ ｏｓｔ Ａ ｍ ｅｒｉｃａｎｓ ｂｏｒｎ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｂａｂｙ ｂｏｏ ｍ ａｆｔｅｒ Ｗ ｏｒｌｄ
Ｗ ａｒ Ⅱ ａｒｅ ｎｏ ｗ ｉｎ ｔｈｅｉｒ 20’ｓ ａｎｄ 30’ｓ ａｇｅｓ ｗ ｈｅｎ ｔｈｅｙ ａｒｅ
ｍ ｏｓｔ ｌｉｋｅｌｙ ｔｏ ｓｅｔ ｕｐ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄｓ, ｈｅ ｓａｉｄ .
Ｔ ｈｅ ｆａｃｔ ｔｈａｔ ｍ ａｎｙ ａｒｅ ｄｏｉｎｇ ｓｏ ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅｄ ｔｈｅ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒ
ｏｆ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄｓ ｆｒｏ ｍ 80 .4 ｍｉｌｌｉｏｎ ｉｎ 1980 ｔｏ 88 .8 ｍｉｌｌｉｏｎ ｉｎ
1986 ａｎｄ ｐａｓｔ ｔｈｅ 90 ｍｉｌｌｉｏｎ ｍ ａｒｋ ｌａｓｔ ｓｕ ｍ ｍ ｅｒ .
Ａ ｔ ｔｈｅ ｓａ ｍ ｅ ｔｉ ｍ ｅ, ｔｈｅ ａｖｅｒａｇｅ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｐｅｒ
ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄ ｄｅｃｌｉｎｅｄ ｆｒｏ ｍ 2 .7 5 ｉｎ 1935 ｔｏ 2 .65 ｉｎ 1986 ａｎｄ
ｔｈｅｎ ｔｏ 2 .64 , Ｍ ｒ Ｇｉｂｓｏｎ ｓａｉｄ .
Ｂ ｙ ｃｏ ｍ ｐａｒｉｓｏｎ , ｔｈｅ 1970 Ｃｅｎｓｕｓ ｆｏｕｎｄ ｔｈｅ ａｖｅｒａｇｅ
ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄ ｃｏｎｔａｉｎｅｄ 3 . 14 ｐｅｏｐｌｅ . Ｈ ｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄｓ ａｖｅｒａｇｅｄ
ｍ ｏｒｅ ｔｈａｎ ｆｏｕｒ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｉｎ 1930 ａｎｄ ｍ ｏｒｅ ｔｈａｎ ｆｉｖｅ ｉｎ 1880 .
Ｔ ｈｅ ｇｒｏ ｗｉｎｇ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｅｖｅｒ ｓ ｍ ａｌｌｅｒ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄｓ ｃｏｎ-
ｔｉｎｕｅｓ ａ ｔｒｅｎｄ , ｂｕｔ Ｍ ｒ Ｇｉｂｓｏｎ ｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ ｏｕｔ ｔｈａｔ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄ
ｇｒｏ ｗ ｔｈ ｗ ａｓ ｎｏｔ ｏｕｔｐａｃｉｎｇ ｐｏｐｕｌａｔｉｏｎ ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅｓ ａｓ ｆａｓｔ ａｓ ｉｔ
・ 15 1 ・
ｗ ａｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ 1970’ｓ .
Ｔ ｈｅ ｓａ ｍ ｅ ａｇｅ ｆａｃｔｏｒｓ ｔｈａｔ ａｒｅ ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒ ｏｆ
ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄｓ ａｌｓｏ ｏｃｃｕｒｒｅｄ ｔｈｅｎ , ｂｕｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ 1970’ｓ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｏｐｏｒ-
ｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄｓ ｉｎ ｅａｃｈ ａｇｅ ｇｒｏｕｐ ｗ ａｓ ａｌｓｏ ｇｒｏ ｗｉｎｇ .
Ｔ ｈａｔ ｈａｓ ｎｏｔ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ 1980’ｓ ｆｏｒ ａ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒ ｏｆ
ｐｏｓｓｉｂｌｅ ｒｅａｓｏｎｓ, Ｍ ｒ Ｇｉｂｓｏｎ ｓａｉｄ .
Ｆ ｏｘ ｅｘａ ｍ ｐｌｅ, ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｄｅｃａｄｅ ｍ ｏｒｅ ｙｏｕｎｇ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｈａｖｅ
ｃｈｏｓｅｎ ｔｏ ｒｅ ｍ ａｉｎ ｈｏ ｍ ｅ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｐａｒｅｎｔｓ ｉｎｓｔｅａｄ ｏｆ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
ｕｐ ｈｏｕｓｅｋｅｅｐｉｎｇ ｏｎ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｏ ｗ ｎ , ａｓ ｍ ａｎｙ ｈａｄ ｄｏｎｅ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ
1970’ｓ . Ｔ ｈｉｓ ｃｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ ｃａｕｓｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｉｎｇ ｃｏｓｔ ｏｆ ｈｏｕｓ-
ｉｎｇ , ｈｅ ｓａｉｄ .
Ｄｅｌａｙｓ ｉｎ ｍ ａｒｒｉａｇｅ ｗ ｈｉｌｅ ｙｏｕｎｇ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｐｕｒｓｕｅ ｃａｒｅｅｒｓ
ａｎｄ ｓｃｈｏｏｌ, ｈａｖｅ ａｌｓｏ ｂｅｅｎ ｗｉｄｅｌｙ ｒｅｐｏｒｔｅｄ ａｓ ａ ｆａｃｔｏｒ, ｂｕｔ
Ｇｉｂｓｏｎ ｃａｕｔｉｏｎｅｄ ｔｈａｔ ｉｔ ｗ ａｓ ｔｏｏ ｓｉｍ ｐｌｉｓｔｉｃ ｔｏ ａｔｔｒｉｂｕｔｅ ａｌｌ ｏｆ
ｔｈｅ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄ ｃｈａｎｇｅｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｉｓ .
6. Ｔ ｈｅ ｓ ｍ ａｌｌｅｓｔ ｆｉｇｕｒｅ ｏｆ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄｓ ｒｅｐｏｒｔｅｄ ｈｅｒｅ ｉｓ
.
( Ａ) 1980 (Ｂ ) 80 400 000
( Ｃ) 2 .6 4 (Ｄ) 90 ｍｉｌｌｉｏｎ
7. Ｈ ｏ ｗ ｄｉｄ Ｍ ｒ Ｇｉｂｓｏｎ ｅｘｐｌａｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｒｅａｓｏｎ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅ ｉｎ
ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄｓ ?
( Ａ) Ａ ｂｏｕｔ 0 .96 ｍｉｌｌｉｏｎ ｎｅ ｗ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄｓ ｈａｖｅ ｂｅｅｎ ｓｅｔ
ｕｐ ｓｉｎｃｅ 1980 .
(Ｂ ) Ａｌｌ ｔｈｅ ｂｉｇ ｆａ ｍｉｌｉｅｓ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｓｐｌｉｔ ｉｎｔｏ ｓ ｍ ａｌｌｅｒ ｏｎｅｓ .
( Ｃ) Ｔ ｈｅｒｅ ｉｓ ａ ｇｒｅａｔ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｙｏｕｎｇ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｗ ｈｏ ａｒｅ
ｎｅ ｗｌｙ ｍ ａｒｒｉｅｄ .
・ 15 2 ・
 (Ｄ) Ｔ ｈｅｒｅ ｗ ａｓ ａ ｇｒｅａｔ ｅｘｐｌｏｓｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｂｉｒｔｈｓ ｄｕｒｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ
2ｎｄ Ｗ ｏｒｌｄ Ｗ ａｒ .
8. Ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏ ｗｉｎｇ ｉｓ Ｎ Ｏ Ｔ Ｔ Ｒ Ｕ Ｅ ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ
ｒｅｐｏｒｔ ?
(Ａ) Ｔ ｈｅ ａｖｅｒａｇｅ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒ ｐｅｒ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄ ｎｏ ｗ ｉｓ ａｂｏｕｔ
ｈａｌｆ ｏｆ ｔｈａｔ ａ ｃｅｎｔｕｒｙ ａｇｏ .
(Ｂ ) Ｗ ｈｉｌｅ ｔｈｅ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｆａ ｍｉｌｉｅｓ ｈａｓ ｂｅｅｎ ｇｒｏ ｗｉｎｇ ,
ｔｈｅ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｆａ ｍｉｌｙ ｍ ｅ ｍ ｂｅｒｓ ｈａｓ ｂｅｅｎ ｇｏｉｎｇ
ｄｏ ｗ ｎ .
( Ｃ) Ｔ ｈｅ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄ ｇｒｏ ｗ ｔｈ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ 1970’ｓ ｗ ａｓ ｆａｓｔｅｒ ｔｈａｎ
ｔｈｅ ｐｏｐｕｌａｔｉｏｎ ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅｓ .
(Ｄ) Ｈ ｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄ ｉｎ ｅａｃｈ ａｇｅ ｇｒｏｕｐ ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅｄ ａｔ ｔｈｅ ｓａ ｍ ｅ
ｓｐｅｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ 1970’ｓ
9. Ｗ ｈａｔ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｒｅｐｏｒｔｅｒ’ｓ ａｔｔｉｔｕｄｅ ｔｏ ｗ ａｒｄ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔ ｓｉｔｕａ-
ｔｉｏｎ ?
( Ａ) Ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｇｅｔ ｍ ａｒｒｉｅｄ ａｔ ａ ｌａｔｅｒ ａｇｅ .
(Ｂ ) Ｔ ｈｅ ｉｄｅａｌ ａｖｅｒａｇｅ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄ ｍ ｅ ｍ ｂｅｒｓ ｉｓ
2 .64 .
( Ｃ) Ｗ ｅ ｄｏｎ’ｔ ｋ ｎｏ ｗ .
(Ｄ) Ｙ ｏｕｎｇ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｓｈｏｕｌｄ ｓｅｔ ｕｐ ｈｏｕｓｅｋｅｅｐｉｎｇ ｏｎ ｔｈｅｉｒ
ｏ ｗ ｎ , ａｓ ｍ ａｎｙ ｈａｄ ｄｏｎｅ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ 1970’ｓ
10. Ｆｒｏ ｍ ｔｈｅ ｌａｓｔ ｐａｒａｇｒａｐｈ ｗ ｅ ｍ ａｙ ｉｎｆｅｒ ｔｈａｔ .
( Ａ) ｄｅｌａｙ ｉｎ ｍ ａｒｒｉａｇｅ ｗｉｌｌ ｎｏｔ ｃｏｎｔｒｉｂｕｔｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｄｅ-
ｃｒｅａｓｅ ｏｆ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄｓ
( Ｂ) ｄｅｌａｙ ｉｎ ｍ ａｒｒｉａｇｅ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｍ ａｊｏｒ ｆａｃｔｏｒ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｈｏｕｓｅ-
ｈｏｌｄ ｃｈａｎｇｅｓ
・ 15 3 ・
 ( Ｃ) ｍ ａｎｙ ｙｏｕｎｇ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｎｏ ｗ ｄｅｌａｙ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｍ ａｒｒｉａｇｅｓ, ｓｏ
ｔｈｅ ａｕｔｈｏｒ ｆｅｅｌｓ ｇｒａｔｅｆｕｌ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｍ
( Ｄ) ｔｈｅｒｅ ｍ ｕｓｔ ｂｅ ｓｏ ｍ ｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｆａｃｔｏｒｓ ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｈａｖｅ ｌｅｄ
ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｌｏ ｗ ｅｒ ｈｏｕｓｅｈｏｌｄ ｇｒｏ ｗ ｔｈ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ｄｅｃａｄｅ

Ｐａｓｓａｇｅ Ｃ

Ｓｃｉｅｎｔｉｓｔｓ ｒｅｃｅｎｔｌｙ ｒｅｖｅａｌｅｄ ａｎ ｉｎｓｔｉｎｃｔ ｉｎ ｗ ｏ ｍ ｅｎ ｕｎａｆ-

ｆｅｃｔｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ａｇｅ ｏｆ ｔｅｃｈｎｏｌｏｇｙ . Ｇｌａｎｃｉｎｇ ｔｈｒｏｕｇｈ ｓｏ ｍ ｅ ａｒｔ
ｂｏｏｋｓ Ｌｅｅ Ｓａｌｋ ｎｏｔｉｃｅｄ ｔｈａｔ ｆｏｕｒ ｔｉｍ ｅｓ ｏｕｔ ｏｆ ｆｉｖｅ Ｍ ａｒｙ ① ｉｓ
ｄｅｓｃｒｉｂｅｄ ｈｏｌｄｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｉｎｆａｎｔ Ｊｅｓｕｓ② ａｇａｉｎｓｔ ｈｅｒ ｌｅｆｔ ｂｒｅａｓｔ .
Ｔ ｈｅ Ｍ ａｄｏｎｎａ ③ ｓｐａｒｋｅｄ ｏｆｆ ④ ａ ｓｅｒｉｅｓ ｏｆ ｅｘｐｅｒｉ ｍ ｅｎｔｓ ａｎｄ ｏｂ-
ｓｅｒｖａｔｉｏｎ ｔｏ ｄｅｔｅｒ ｍｉｎｅ ｏｎ ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｓｉｄｅ ｗ ｏ ｍ ｅｎ ｈｏｌｄ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｂａ-
ｂｉｅｓ ａｎｄ ｗ ｈｙ .
Ｆｉｒｓｔ ｈｅ ｄｅｔｅｒ ｍｉｎｅｄ ｔｈａｔ ｍ ｏｄｅｒｎ ｍ ｏｔｈｅｒｓ ｓｔｉｌｌ ｔｅｎｄ ｔｏ
ｈｏｌｄ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｂａｂｙ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｅｆｔ . Ｏｆ 255 ｒｉｇｈｔ ｈａｎｄｅｄ ｍ ｏｔｈｅｒｓ,
83 % ｈｅｌｄ ｔｈｅ ｂａｂｙ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｅｆｔ ⑤ . Ａ ｎｄ ｏｕｔ ｏｆ 32 ｌｅｆｔ ｈａｎｄｅｄ
ｗ ｏ ｍ ｅｎ , 78 % ｈｅｌｄ ｔｈｅ ｂａｂｙ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｅｆｔ . Ａ ｓ ａ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ⑥ ,
ｗ ｏ ｍ ｅｎ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｗ ａｔｃｈｅｄ ｅ ｍ ｅｒｇｉｎｇ ｆｒｏ ｍ ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔｓ ｃａｒｒｙｉｎｇ
ｂａｂｙｓｉｚｅｄ ｐａｃｋａｇｅｓ ; ｔｈｅ ｂｕｎｄｌｅｓ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｈｅｌｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｎｏ ｓｉｄｅ

① Ｍ ａｒｙ 圣母玛 丽亚 ( 耶 稣的 母亲 )
② Ｊｅｓｕｓ 耶稣
③ Ｍ ａｄｏｎｎａ 圣母 的画像
④ ｔｏ ｓｐａｒｋ ｏｆｆ: ｔｏ ｌｅａｄ ｔｏ , ｂｅ ｔｈｅ ｉｍ ｍ ｅｄｉａｔｅ ｃａｕｓｅ ｏｆ
⑤ ｏｆ 255 … ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｅｆｔ 在 255 位 使用 右 手做 事 的母 亲 中 , 有 83 % 是 用左
手抱 婴儿的
⑥ ａｓ ａ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ 作 为对照 , 对 比 ; ａ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｇｒｏｕｐ 一个 对照组

・ 15 4 ・
ｐｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ .
Ｔ ｈｅｎ , ｄｅｎｔａｌ ｐａｔｉｅｎｔｓ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｇｉｖｅｎ ａ ｌａｒｇｅ ｒｕｂｂｅｒ ｂａｌｌ ｔｏ
ｈｏｌｄ ｄｕｒｉｎｇ ｔｒｅａｔ ｍ ｅｎｔ . Ｔ ｈｅ ｍ ａｊｏｒｉｔｙ ｃｌｕｔｃｈｅｄ ｔｈｅ ｂａｌｌ ｔｏ ｈｅｒ
ｌｅｆｔ ｓｉｄｅ, ｅｖｅｎ ｗ ｈｅｎ ｉｔ ｉｎｔｅｒｆｅｒｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｄｅｎｔｉｓｔ’ｓ ａｃｔｉｖｉ-
ｔｉｅｓ . Ｔ ｈｉｓ ｓｕｇｇｅｓｔｅｄ ｔｈａｔ ｉｎ ｔｉｍ ｅｓ ｏｆ ｓｔｒｅｓｓ ｏｂｊｅｃｔｓ ａｒｅ ｈｅｌｄ
ａｇａｉｎｓｔ ｔｈｅ ｌｅｆｔ ｓｉｄｅ .
Ａ ｇａｉｎ 115 ｍ ｏｔｈｅｒｓ ｗ ｈｏ ｈａｄ ｂｅｅｎ ｓｅｐａｒａｔｅｄ ｆｒｏ ｍ ｔｈｅｉｒ
ｂａｂｉｅｓ ｆｏｒ 24 ｈｏｕｒｓ ａｆｔｅｒ ｂｉｒｔｈ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｏｂｓｅｒｖｅｄ ｆｏｒ ｈｏｌｄｉｎｇ ｒｅ-
ｓｐｏｎｓｅ ① . Ｔ ｈｅ ｅｘｐｅｒｉｍ ｅｎｔｅｒｓ ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔｅｄ ｔｈｅ ｂａｂｙ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｌｙ ｔｏ
ｔｈｅ ｍｉｄ ｌｉｎｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｍ ｏｔｈｅｒ’ｓ ｂｏｄｙ , ａｎｄ ｎｏｔｅｄ ｈｏ ｗ ｓｈｅ ｈｅｌｄ
ｔｈｅ ｂａｂｙ . 53 % ｐｌａｃｅｄ ｔｈｅ ｂａｂｙ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｅｆｔ ａｎｄ 47 % ｏｎ ｔｈｅ
ｒｉｇｈｔ .Ａ ｎｄ ｉｔ ｗ ａｓ ａｌｓｏ ｎｏｔｅｄ ｔｈａｔ ｔｈｅ ｍ ｏｔｈｅｒｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｇｒｏｕｐ
ｗ ｈｏ ｈａｄ ｈｅｌｄ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｂａｂｙ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｅｆｔ ｈａｄ ａｌｒｅａｄｙ ｈａｄ ａ ｂａｂｙ
ｆｒｏ ｍ ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｔｈｅｙ ｈａｄ ｎｏｔ ｂｅｅｎ ｓｅｐａｒａｔｅｄ ａｆｔｅｒ ｂｉｒｔｈ .
Ｔ ｈｅ ａｕｔｈｏｒ ｓｕｇｇｅｓｔｓ ｔｈａｔ " ｔｈｅ ｔｉｍ ｅ ｉｍ ｍ ｅｄｉａｔｅｌｙ ａｆｔｅｒ
ｂｉｒｔｈ ｉｓ ａ ｃｒｉｔｉｃａｌ ｐｅｒｉｏｄ ② ｗ ｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｈｏｌｄｉｎｇ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｂａｂｙ ｒｅｌｅａ-
ｓｅｓ ａ ｃｅｒｔａｉｎ ｍ ｏｔｈｅｒｌｙ ｒｅｓｐｏｎｓｅ" . Ｔ ｈａｔ ｉｓ ｔｏ ｓａｙ , ｓｈｅ ｓｅｎｓｅｓ
ｔｈｅ ｂａｂｙ ｉｓ ｂｅｔｔｅｒ ｏｆｆ ｏｎ ｈｅｒ ｌｅｆｔ .
Ｌｅｆｔ ｈａｎｄｅｄ ｈｏｌｄｉｎｇ ｅｎａｂｌｅｓ ｔｈｅ ｂａｂｙ ｔｏ ｈｅａｒ ｔｈｅ
ｈｅａｒｔｂｅａｔ . Ｉｎ ｏｒｄｅｒ ｔｏ ｄｉｓｃｏｖｅｒ ｗ ｈｅｔｈｅｒ ｈｅａｒｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｈｅａｒｔ

① … ｗ ｅｒｅ ｏｂｓｅｒｖｅｄ ｆｏｒ ｈｏｌｄｉｎｇ ｒｅｓｐｏｎｓｅ 可译 为 : 观察她 们怀 抱婴儿 时作

出 的选择
这 儿的 ｆｏｒ 有“ 等待…”的意思 , 又 如 :
Ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｐｏｔ ｄｉｃｔａｔｉｏｎ ｅｘｅｒｃｉｓｅ, ｏｎｅ ｈａｓ ｔｏ ｌｉｓｔｅｎ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｗ ｏｒｄｓ
ｔｈａｔｈａｖｅｂｅｅｎ ｔａｋｅｎ ｏｕｔ ｆｒｏ ｍ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｎｔｅｎｃｅｓ .
② ａ ｃｒｉｔｉｃａｌ ｐｅｒｉｏｄ 关 键的时 期

・ 15 5 ・
ｈａｓ ａ ｂｅｎｅｆｉｃｉａｌ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｂａｂｙ , ｔｈｅ ｓｏｕｎｄ ｏｆ ａ ｈｕ ｍ ａｎ
ｈｅａｒｂｅａｔ ｗ ａｓ ｐｌａｙｅｄ ｔｏ 102 ｂａｂｉｅｓ ｉｎ ａ Ｎ ｅ ｗ Ｙ ｏｒｋ ｎｕｒｓｅｒｙ
ｆｏｒ 4 ｄａｙｓ . Ａ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｇｒｏｕｐ ｏｆ ｂａｂｉｅｓ ｗ ａｓ ｎｏｔ ｅｘｐｏｓｅｄ ｔｏ
ｈｅａｒｔｂｅａｔｓ . Ｔ ｈｅ ｂａｂｉｅｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｂｅａｔ ｇｒｏｕｐ ｇａｉｎｅｄ ｍ ａｒｋｅｄｌｙ
ｍ ｏｒｅ ｗ ｅｉｇｈｔ ａｎｄ ｃｒｉｅｄ ｆａｒ ｌｅｓｓ ｔｈａｎ ｔｈｅ ｂａｂｉｅｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ
ｇｒｏｕｐ .
11. Ｌｏｏｋｉｎｇ ａｔ ａｒｔ ｂｏｏｋｓ ｉｎｓｐｉｒｅｄ Ｌ ｅｅ Ｓａｌｋ ｔｏ ｉｎｖｅｓｔｉｇａｔｅ
.
( Ａ) ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅｓ ｏｆ Ｍ ａｒｙ ａｎｄ Ｊｅｓｕｓ
( Ｂ) ｔｈｅ ｗ ａｙ ｍ ｏｔｈｅｒｓ ｈｏｌｄ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｂａｂｉｅｓ
( Ｃ) ｔｈｅ ｗ ａｙ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｈｏｌｄ ｏｂｊｅｃｔｓ ｉｎ ｔｉｍ ｅｓ ｏｆ ｓｔｒｅｓｓ
( Ｄ) ｔｈｅ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｈｕ ｍ ａｎ ｈｅａｒｔｂｅａｔ ｏｎ ｂａｂｉｅｓ
12. Ｈ ｅ ｆｏｕｎｄ ｔｈａｔ .
( Ａ) ｌｅｆｔ ｈａｎｄｅｄ ｗ ｏ ｍ ｅｎ ｔｅｎｄ ｔｏ ｈｏｌｄ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｂａｂｉｅｓ ｏｎ
ｔｈｅ ｒｉｇｈｔ
( Ｂ) ｏｎｌｙ ｒｉｇｈｔ ｈａｎｄｅｄ ｗ ｏ ｍ ｅｎ ｔｅｎｄ ｔｏ ｈｏｌｄ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｂａ-
ｂｉｅｓ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｅｆｔ
( Ｃ) ｍ ｏｒｅ ｒｉｇｈｔ ｈａｎｄｅｄ ｗ ｏ ｍ ｅｎ ｔｈａｎ ｌｅｆｔ ｈａｎｄｅｄ
ｗ ｏ ｍ ｅｎ ｔｅｎｄ ｔｏ ｈｏｌｄ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｂａｂｉｅｓ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｅｆｔ
( Ｄ) ｗ ｏ ｍ ｅｎ ｗ ｈｏ ｈｏｌｄ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｂａｂｉｅｓ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｅｆｔ ａｒｅ ｎｅａｒ-
ｌｙ ａｌｌ ｒｉｇｈｔ ｈａｎｄｅｄ
13. Ｗ ｈｙ ｄｉｄ ｈｅ ｗ ａｔｃｈ ｗ ｏ ｍ ｅｎ ｃｏ ｍｉｎｇ ｏｕｔ ｏｆ ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔｓ ?
( Ａ) ｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｔｈｅ ｍ
( Ｂ) ｔｏ ｓｅｅ ｈｏ ｗ ｔｈｅｙ ｃａｒｒｉｅｄ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｂａｂｉｅｓ
( Ｃ) ｔｏ ｓｅｅ ｉｆ ｗ ｏ ｍ ｅｎ ｃａｒｒｉｅｄ ｐａｒｃｅｌｓ ａｎｄ ｂａｂｉｅｓ ｄｉｆｆｅｒ-
ｅｎｔｌｙ
・ 15 6 ・
 ( Ｄ) ｔｏ ｓｅｅ ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｗ ｏ ｍ ｅｎ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｒｉｇｈｔ ｈａｎｄｅｄ ｏｒ ｌｅｆｔ
ｈａｎｄｅｄ
14. Ｗ ｈｙ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｄｅｎｔａｌ ｐａｔｉｅｎｔｓ ｇｉｖｅｎ ａ ｒｕｂ ｂｅｒ ｂａｌｌ ｔｏ ｈｏｌｄ ?
( Ａ) ｔｏ ｈｅｌｐ ｔｈｅ ｍ ｏｖｅｒｃｏ ｍ ｅ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｓｔｒｅｓｓ
( Ｂ) ｔｏ ｈｅｌｐ ｔｈｅ ｄｅｎｔｉｓｔ’ｓ ａｃｔｉｖｉｔｙ
( Ｃ) ｂｅｃａｕｓｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｅｘｐｅｒｉｍ ｅｎｔ
( Ｄ) ｔｏ ｓｅｅ ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｓｉｄｅ ｔｈｅｙ ｈｅｌｄ ｉｔ ｏｎ
15. Ｔ ｈｅ ｔｉｍ ｅ ｊｕｓｔ ａｆｔｅｒ ｂｉｒｔｈ ｉｓ ｉｍ ｐｏｒｔａｎｔ: ｔｈｉｓ ｉｓ ｗ ｈｅｎ
.
( Ａ) ｂａｂｉｅｓ ｍ ｕｓｔ ｎｏｔ ｂｅ ｓｅｐａｒａｔｅｄ ｆｒｏ ｍ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｍ ｏｔｈｅｒｓ
( Ｂ) ｔｈｅ ｂａｂｙ’ｓ ｒｅｓｐｏｎｓｅ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｍ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｉｓ ｒｅｌｅａｓｅｄ
( Ｃ) ｔｈｅ ｍ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｈａｄ ａｎ ｉｎｓｔｉｎｃｔｉｖｅ ｔｅｎｄｅｎｃｙ ｔｏ ｈｏｌｄ ｔｈｅ
ｂａｂｙ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｅｆｔ
( Ｄ) ｔｈｅ ｂａｂｙ ｃａｎ ｈｅａｒ ｔｈｅ ｍ ｏｔｈｅｒ’ｓ ｈｅａｒｂｅａｔ

Ｐａｓｓａｇｅ Ｄ

Ｔ ｈｅｒｅ’ｓ ｏｎｅ ｔｈｉｎｇ ａｂｏｖｅ ａｌｌ ｗｒｏｎｇ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｎｅ ｗ Ｂｒｉｔｉｓｈ

ｐｏｓｔａｌ ｃｏｄｅｓ: ｎｏｔ ｅｖｅｒｙｏｎｅ ｈａｓ ｔｈａｔ ｓｏｒｔ ｏｆ ｍ ｅ ｍ ｏｒｙ . Ｓｏ ｍ ｅ
ｏｆ ｕｓ, ｏｆ ｃｏｕｒｓｅ , ｆｏｒｇｅｔ ｅｖｅｎ ｈｏｕｓｅ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒｓ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔ
ｐｏｓｔａｌ ｄｉｓｔｒｉｃｔｓ, ｂｕｔ ｔｈａｔ ｍ ａｔｔｅｒｓ ｌｅｓｓ ｗ ｈｅｎ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｉｓ ａ ｈｕ ｍ ａｎ
ｂｅｉｎｇ ａｔ ｅｖｅｒｙ ｓｔａｇｅ ｔｏ ｓｐｏｔ ｔｈｅ ｍｉｓｔａｋｅ . Ｗ ｈｅｎ ａｌｌ ｔｈｅ ｓｏｒ-
ｔｉｎｇ ｉｓ ｄｏｎｅ ｉｎ ｏｎｅ ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｂｙ ａ ｍ ａｎ ｓｉｔｔｉｎｇ ａｔ ｍ ａｃｈｉｎｅ,
ｔｙｐｉｎｇ ｓｐｅｃｉａｌ ｍ ａｒｋｓ ｏｎｔｏ ａｎ ｅｎｖｅｌｏｐｅ, ｏｎｅ ｓｌｉｐ ｏｎ ｙｏｕｒ ｐａｒｔ
ｃｏｕｌｄ ｓｅｎｄ ｙｏｕｒ ｌｅｔｔｅｒ ｗ ａｙ ｏｕｔｓｉｄｅ ｔｈｅ ａｒｅａ ｗ ｈｅｒｅ ｔｈｅ ｌｏｃａｌ
ｐｏｓｔ ｍ ａｎ ｏｒ ａ ｆｒｉｅｎｄｌｙ ｎｅｉｇｈｂｏｕｒ ｋｎｏ ｗ ｓ ｙｏｕｒ ｎａ ｍ ｅ .
Ｏｔｈｅｒ ｗｉｓｅ ｔｈｅ ｎｅ ｗ ｃｏｄｅｓ ａｒｅ ａｌｌ ｔｈｅ Ｐ ｏｓｔ Ｏｆｆｉｃｅ ｃｌａｉｍ ｓ .
・ 15 7 ・
Ｔ ｈｅｙ ａｒｅ ｔｈｅ ｍ ｏｓｔ ｃａｒｅｆｕｌｌｙ ｄｅｓｉｇｎｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｗ ｏｒｌｄ , ｉｄｅａｌ ｆｏｒ
ｃｏ ｍ ｐｕｔｅｒｓ . Ｔ ｈｅｙ ｃｌａｓｓｉｆｙ ａ ｌｅｔｔｅｒ ｎｏｔ ｏｎｌｙ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｃｉｔｙ ｗ ｈｅｒｅ
ｉｔ ｉｓ ｇｏｉｎｇ ｂｕｔ ｒｉｇｈｔ ｄｏ ｗ ｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｒｏｕｎｄ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒｔｉｃｕｌａｒ
ｐｏｓｔ ｍ ａｎ ｗ ｈｏ ｉｓ ｔｏ ｃａｒｒｙ ｉｔ, ａｎｄ ｅｖｅｎ ｔｏ ａ ｇｒｏｕｐ ｏｆ ｈｏｕｓｅｓ ｏｒ
ａ ｓｉｎｇｌｅ ｂｉｇ ｂｕｉｌｄｉｎｇ . Ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｌｏｎｇ ｒｕｎ , ｔｈｉｓ ｗｉｌｌ ｓｐｅｅｄ ｔｈｅ
ｍ ａｉｌ ａｎｄ ｃｕｔ ｃｏｓｔｓ .
Ｔ ｈｅ ｌｏｎｇ ｒｕｎ ｉｓ 10 ｙｅａｒｓ ａ ｗ ａｙ , ｔｈｏｕｇｈ . Ｉｎ ｆａｃｔ ｔｈｅｒｅ
ａｒｅ ｏｎｌｙ 12 ｐｏｓｔ ｏｆｆｉｃｅｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｕｎｔｒｙ ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｈａｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｒｉｇｈｔ
ｍ ａｃｈｉｎｅｓ ｆｕｌｌｙ ｗ ｏｒｋｉｎｇ , ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅ ｍ ｃａｎｎｏｔ ｗ ｏｒｋ ａｔ ｆｕｌｌ
ｅｆｆｉｃｉｅｎｃｙ ｕｎｔｉｌ ｉｔ ｉｓ ｎａｔｉｏｎ ｗｉｄｅ . Ｙ ｅｔ ｔｈｅ Ｐｏｓｔ Ｏｆｆｉｃｅ ｗ ａｎｔｓ
ｕｓ ｔｏ ｓｔａｒｔ ｕｓｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｄｅｓ ｎｏ ｗ , ｓｏ ｔｈａｔ ｗ ｅ ｓｈａｌｌ ｂｅ ｔｒａｉｎｅｄ
ｗ ｈｅｎ ｔｈｅ ｍ ａｃｈｉｎｅｓ ａｒｅ ｒｅａｄｙ .
Ｂ ｕｔ ｗｉｌｌ ｗ ｅ ? Ａ ｂｕｓｉｎｅｓｓ ｍ ａｎ Ｉ ｍ ｅｔ, ｐｒａｉｓｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｖｉｒｔｕｅｓ
ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｎｅ ｗ ｓｙｓｔｅ ｍ , ｅｘｐｌａｉｎｅｄ ｔｈａｔ ｌａｒｇｅ ｃｏ ｍ ｐａｎｉｅｓ ｌｉｋｅ ｈｉｓ
ｃｏｕｌｄ ｈａｖｅ ｃｏｄｅｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｏ ｗ ｎ . Ｗ ｈａｔ ｗ ａｓ ｈｉｓ ｃｏｄｅ ? " Ｏ ｈ ,
ｄｅａｒ ｍ ｅ . Ｎ ｏ ｗ ｙｏｕ’ｖｅ ｇｏｔ ｍ ｅ . Ａ ｗ ｆｕｌｌｙ ｓｏｒｒｙ . Ｈ ｏｌｄ ｏｎ ａ ｍｉ-
ｎｕｔｅ ｗ ｈｉｌｅ Ｉ ｆｉｎｄ ａ ｓｈｅｅｔ ｏｆ ｍ ｙ ｈｅａｄｅｄ ｎｏｔｅｐａｐｅｒ ." Ｔ ｈｅｎ ｈｅ
ｒｅａｄ ｐａｉｎｆｕｌｌｙ , ａｓ ｉｆ ｓｐｅｌｌｉｎｇ ｏｕｔ ａ ｗ ｏｒｄ ｉｎ ａ ｆｏｒｅｉｇｎ ｌａｎ-
ｇｕａｇｅ, " Ｗ 1 Ｘ 6 Ａ Ｂ" .
16. Ｔ ｈｅ ｍ ａｉｎ ｐｒｏｂｌｅ ｍ ｗｉｔｈ ａｎｙ ｐｏｓｔａｌ ｃｏｄｅｓ, ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ
ｔｈｅ ｐａｓｓａｇｅ, ｉｓ ｔｈａｔ .
( Ａ) ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｍ ａｙ ｆｏｒｇｅｔ ｔｈｅ ｍ
( Ｂ) ｙｏｕｒ ｆｒｉｅｎｄｓ ｍ ａｙ ｗ ｒｉｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｍ ｉｎｃｏｒｒｅｃｔｌｙ
( Ｃ) ｐｏｓｔ ｍ ｅｎ ｍ ａｙ ｍ ａｋｅ ｍｉｓｔａｋｅｓ
( Ｄ) ｍ ａｃｈｉｎｅｓ ｍ ａｙ ｇｏ ｗ ｒｏｎｇ
17. Ｔ ｈｅ Ｂｒｉｔｉｓｈ Ｐｏｓｔ Ｏｆｆｉｃｅ ｐｒａｉｓｅｓ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｄｅｓ ａｓ .
・ 15 8 ・
 ( Ａ) ｇｉｖｉｎｇ ａｎ ｅｆｆｉｃｉｅｎｔ ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ
( Ｂ) Ｂｅｉｎｇ ｎｅ ｗ ａｎｄ ｉｍ ｐｒｏｖｅｓ
( Ｃ) ｂｅｉｎｇ ｑｕｉｃｋ ｔｏ ｕｓｅ
( Ｄ) ｂｅｉｎｇ ｅａｓｙ ｔｏ ｕｓｅ
18. Ｔ ｈｅ Ｂｒｉｔｉｓｈ ｃｏｄｅｓ ａｒｅ ｄｅｓｃｒｉｂｅｄ ａｓ ｂｅｉｎｇ .
( Ａ) ｌｅｔｔｅｒｓ ｓｐａｃｅｄ ｏｕｔ
( Ｂ) ｓｅｔｓ ｏｆ ｌｅｔｔｅｒｓ ａｎｄ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒｓ
( Ｃ) ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒｓ ｉｎ ｏｒｄｅｒ
( Ｄ) ｌｅｔｔｅｒｓ ａｎｄ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒｓ ｓｅｐａｒａｔｅｌｙ
19. Ｔ ｈｅ ｓｙｓｔｅ ｍ ｉｓ ｎｏ ｗ ｂｅｉｎｇ ｕｓｅｄ .
( Ａ) ｔｈｒｏｕｇｈｏｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｕｎｔｒｙ
( Ｂ) ｉｎ ａｌｌ ｐｏｓｔ ｏｆｆｉｃｅｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｍ ａｃｈｉｎｅｓ
( Ｃ) ｉｎ ａｌｌ ｐｏｓｔ ｏｆｆｉｃｅｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｒａｉｎｅｄ ｓｔａｆｆ
( Ｄ) ｉｎ ｓｏ ｍ ｅ ｐｏｓｔ ｏｆｆｉｃｅｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｍ ａｃｈｉｎｅｓ
20. Ｔ ｈｅ ａｕｔｈｏｒ’ｓ ａｔｔｉｔｕｄｅ ｔｏ ｗ ａｒｄｓ ｔｈｅ ｎｅ ｗ Ｂｒｉｔｉｓｈ ｐｏｓｔａｌ
ｃｏｄｅｓ .
( Ａ) ｉｓ ｎｏｔ ｅｖｉｄｅｎｔ
( Ｂ) ｉｓ ｏｎｅ ｏｆ ａｇｒｅｅ ｍ ｅｎｔ
( Ｃ) ｉｓ ｏｎｅ ｏｆ ｄｉｓａｇｒｅｅ ｍ ｅｎｔ
( Ｄ) ｉｓ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ

・ 15 9 ・
 Ｕ ｎｉｔ 16

Ｐａｓｓａｇｅ Ａ

Ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｖｅｒｙ ｅａｒｌｙ ｄａｙｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ａｕｔｏ ｍ ｏｂｉｌｅ, ａ ｄｒｉｖｅｒ ｈａｄ ｔｏ

ｂｅ ａ ｂｒａｖｅ ｍ ａｎ ｗ ｈｏ ｃａｒｅｄ ｌｉｔｔｌｅ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｅ ｏｐｉｎｉｏｎｓ ｏｆ ｈｉｓ ｎｅｉｇｈ-
ｂｏｒｓ ｏｒ ｆｏｒ ｈｉｓ ｏ ｗ ｎ ｆａｔｅ . Ｔ ｈａｔ, ａｔ ｌｅａｓｔ, ｗ ａｓ ｔｈｅ ｃａｓｅ ｉｎ
ｓｏ ｍ ｅ ｓｅｃｔｉｏｎｓ ｏｆ Ｐｅｎ ｎｓｙｌｖａｎｉａ .
Ａ Ｃｌｙ ｍ ｅｒ ｍ ｏｔｏｒ ｈａｎｄｂｏｏｋ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｃｅｎｔｒａｌ ｐｕｂｌｉｃ ｌｉｂｒａｒｙ’ｓ
ｃｏｌｌｅｃｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ ｍ ａｔｅｒｉａｌ ｏｎ ａｕｔｏ ｍ ｏｂｉｌｅｓ ｔｅｌｌｓ ｏｆ " ｒｕｌｅｓ " ａｎｄ
ａｉｍ ｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ Ｆ ａｒ ｍ ｅｒ’ｓ Ａ ｎｔｉ Ａ ｕｔｏ ｍ ｏｂｉｌｅ Ｓｏｃｉｅｔｙ ｉｎ Ｐｅｎｎｓｙｌ-
ｖａｎｉａ . Ｏ ｎ ｓｕｎｄａｙｓ, ｆｏｒ ｉｎｓｔａｎｃｅ, ｔｈｅ ｒｕｒａｌ ａｕｔｏ ｈａｔｅｒｓ ｗ ｅｒｅ
ｕｒｇｅｄ ｔｏ "ｃｈａｓｅ ａｕｔｏ ｍ ｏｂｉｌｅｓ, ｓｈｏｕｔｉｎｇ ａｎｄ ｓｈｏｏｔｉｎｇ ａｔ ｄｒｉｖ-
ｅｒｓ, ａｎｄ ｔｈｒｅａｔｅｎｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｍ ｗｉｔｈ ａｒｒｅｓｔ" .
Ｔ ｈｏｓｅ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｔｈｅ ｄａｙｓ , ｏｆ ｃｏｕｒｓｅ , ｗ ｈｅｎ ｔｈｅｒｅ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｆａｒ
ｍ ｏｒｅ ｈｏｒｓｅｓ ｔｈａｎ ｃａｒｓ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ａｎｉ ｍ ａｌｓ ｏｆｔｅｎ ｇｏｔ ｅｘｃｉｔａｂｌｅ ｉｎ
ｔｈｅ ｐｒｅｓｅｎｃｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｒｉｖａｌｓ . Ｏ ｎｅ ｒｕｌｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｓｏｃｉｅｔｙ ｓｔａｔｅｄ
ｔｈａｔ ｉｆ ａ ｈｏｒｓｅ ｒｅｆｕｓｅｄ ｔｏ ｐａｓｓ ａ ｃａｒ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｒｏａｄ , "ｔｈｅ ｄｒｉｖｅｒ
ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｃａｒ ｍ ｕｓｔ ｔａｋｅ ｔｈｅ ｍ ａｃｈｉｎｅ ａｐａｒｔ ａｓ ｒａｐｉｄｌｙ ａｓ ｐｏｓｓｉｂｌｅ
ａｎｄ ｃｏｎｃｅａｌ ｔｈｅ ｐａｒｔｓ ｏｎ ｔｈｅ ｂｕｓｈｅｓ" .
Ｔ ｗ ｏ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｒｕｌｅｓ ｗ ｅｒｅ:
1. " Ａ ｕｔｏ ｍ ｏｂｉｌｅｓ ｔｒａｖｅｌｉｎｇ ｉｎ ｃｏｕ ｎｔｒｙ ｒｏａｄｓ ａｔ ｎｉｇｈｔ
ｍ ｕｓｔ ｓｅｎｄ ｕｐ ａ ｒｏｃｋｅｔ ｅｖｅｒｙ ｍｉｌｅ, ｔｈｅｎ ｗ ａｉｔ ｔｅｎ ｍｉｎｕｔｅｓ ｆｏｒ
ｔｈｅ ｒｏａｄ ｔｏ ｃｌｅａｒ . Ｔ ｈｅ ｄｒｉｖｅｒ ｍ ａｙ ｔｈｅｎ ｐｒｏｃｅｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｃａｕ-
ｔｉｏｎ , ｂｌｏ ｗｉｎｇ ｈｉｓ ｈｏｒｎ ａｎｄ ｓｈｏｏｔｉｎｇ ｏｆｆ Ｒ ｏ ｍ ａｎ ｃａｎｄｌｅｓ ａｓ
・ 16 0 ・
ｂｅｆｏｒｅ ."
2. "Ｉｆ ｔｈｅ ｄｒｉｖｅｒ ｏｆ ａｎ ａｕｔｏ ｍ ｏｂｉｌｅ ｓｅｅｓ ａ ｔｅａ ｍ ｏｆ ｈｏｒｓｅｓ
ａｐｐｒｏａｃｈｉｎｇ , ｈｅ ｉｓ ｔｏ ｓｔｏｐ , ｐｕｌｌ ｏｖｅｒ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｉｄｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｒｏａｄ ,
ａｎｄ ｃｏｖｅｒ ｈｉｓ ｍ ａｃｈｉｎｅ ｗｉｔｈ ａ ｂｌａｎｋｅｔ ｏｒ ｄｕｓｔ ｃｏｖｅｒ ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｉｓ
ｐａｉｎｔｅｄ ｏｒ ｃｏｌｏｒｅｄ ｔｏ ｂｌｅｎｄ ｉｎｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｓｃｅｎｅｒｙ ａｎｄ ｔｈｕｓ ｒｅｎｄｅｒ
ｔｈｅ ｍ ａｃｈｉｎｅ ｌｅｓｓ ｎｏｔｉｃｅａｂｌｅ ."
1. Ｔ ｈｅ ｒｕｌｅｓ ｄｉｓｃｕｓｓｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｉｓ ａｒｉｔｃｌｅ .
( Ａ) ｗ ｅｒｅ ｉｎ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ ａｌｌ ｏｖｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｕｒｔｒｙ
(Ｂ ) ｗ ｅｒｅ ｗｒｉｔｔｅｎ ｉｎ Ｐｈｉｌａｄｅｌｐｈｉａ
( Ｃ) ａｐｐｌｉｅｄ ｉｎ ｓｏ ｍ ｅ ｓｅｃｔｉｏｎｓ ｏｆ Ｐｅｎｎｓｙｌｖａｎｉａ
(Ｄ) ｗ ｅｒｅ ｃｏ ｍ ｍ ｏｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ Ｅａｓｔ Ｃ ｏａｓｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｅａｒｌｙ 1900’ｓ
2. Ｆａｒ ｍ ｅｒｓ ｉｎ Ｐｅｎｎｓｙｌｖａｎｉａ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｏｐｐｏｓｅｄ ｔｏ ａｕｔｏ ｍ ｏｂｉｌｅｓ
.
( Ａ) ｏｎ ｒｅｌｉｇｉｏｕｓ ｇｒｏｕｎｄｓ
(Ｂ ) ｂｅｃａｕｓｅ ｔｈｅｙ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｏｐｐｏｓｅｄ ｔｏ ｐｒｏｇｒｅｓｓ
( Ｃ) ｏｎｌｙ ｏｎ Ｓ ｕｎｄａｙｓ
(Ｄ) ｂｅｃａｕｓｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ ｏｎ ｈｏｒｓｅｓ
3. Ｏ ｎ ｓｕｎｄａｙｓ , ｆａｒ ｍ ｅｒｓ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｕｒｇｅｄ ｔｏ .
( Ａ) ｃｈａｓｅ ａｕｔｏ ｍ ｏｂｉｌｅｓ
(Ｂ ) ｓｈｏｏｔ ａｔ ｄｒｉｖｅｒｓ
( Ｃ) ｔｈｒｅａｔｅｎ ｄｒｉｖｅｒｓ ｗｉｔｈ ａｒｒｅｓｔ
(Ｄ) Ａ , Ｂ , ａｎｄ Ｃ
4. Ｔ ｈｅ ｓｏｃｉｅｔｙ ｒｅｑｕｒｉｅｄ ｔｈａｔ ａ ｄｒｉｖｅｒ, ｔｒａｖｅｌｉｎｇ ｏｎ ａ ｃｏｕｎｔｒｙ
ｒｏａｄ ａｔ ｎｉｇｈｔ, .
( Ａ) ｓｅｎｄ ｕｐ ａ ｒｏｃｋｅｔ ｅｖｅｒｙ ｔｅｎ ｍｉｌｅｓ
(Ｂ ) ｐｒｏｃｅｅｄ ｓｉｌｅｎｔｌｙ
・ 16 1 ・
 ( Ｃ) ｓｅｎｄ ｕｐ ａ ｒｏｃｋｅｔ ｅｖｅｒｙ ｍｉｌｅ
(Ｄ) ｂｏｔｈ Ａ ａｎｄ Ｂ
5. Ｉ ｍ ｐｌｉｅｄ ｂｕｔ ｎｏｔ ｓｔａｔｅｄ :
( Ａ) Ｆａｒ ｍ ｅｒｓ ｉｎ Ｐｅｎｎｓｙｌｖａｎｉａ ａｒｅ ｓｔｕｐｉｄ .
(Ｂ ) Ｉｎ ｔｈｏｓｅ ｅａｒｌｙ ｄａｙｓ, ｔｈｅｒｅ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｆａｒ ｍ ｏｒｅ ｈｏｒｅｓｅｓ
ｔｈａｎ ｃａｒｓ .
(Ｃ ) Ｎ ｅ ｗ ｉｎｖｅｎｔｉｏｎｓ ｓｏ ｍ ｅｔｉｍ ｅｓ ｍ ｅｅｔ ｏｐｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｆｏｒ
ｓｔｒａｎｇｅ ｒｅａｓｏｎｓ .
(Ｄ) Ｔ ｈｅ ｆａｒ ｍ ｅｒｓ ｉｎ Ｐｅｎｎｓｙｌｖａｎｉａ ｈａｄ ｎｏ ｇｏｏｄ ｒｅａｓｏｎｓ
ｆｏｒ ｏｐｐｏｓｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ａｕｔｏ ｍ ｏｂｉｌｅ .

Ｐａｓｓａｇｅ Ｂ

Ｇ ｕｌｆ Ａｒａｂ ｓｔａｔｅｓ , ｗ ｈｏｓｅ ｐｅｒ ｃａｐｉｔａ ① ｗ ａｔｅｒ ｃｏｎｓｕ ｍ ｐｔｉｏｎ

ｉｓ ａ ｍ ｏｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｈｉｇｈｅｓｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｗ ｏｒｌｄ , ａｒｅ ｕｒｇｉｎｇ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｔｏ
ｓｐｅｎｄ ｌｅｓｓ ｔｉｍ ｅ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｓｈｏ ｗ ｅｒ, ｗ ａｔｅｒ ｇａｒｄｅｎｓ ｍ ｏｒｅ ｓｐａｒｉｎｇｌｙ
ａｎｄ ｎｏｔ ｌｅａｖｅ ｔａｐｓ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ .
"Ｉｆ ｏｉｌｉｓ ｇｏｎｅ, ｗ ｅ ｗｉｌｌ ｐｒｏｂａｂｌｙ ｂｅ ｌｅｓｓ ｒｉｃｈ , ｂｕｔ ｉｆ ｗ ａ-
ｔｅｒ ｃａｎｎｏｔ ｂｅ ｆｏｕｎｄ ｗ ｅ ｗｉｌｌ ｎｏ ｌｏｎｇｅｒ ｅｘｉｓｔ, " ｏｎｅ Ｇ ｕｌｆ ｗ ａｔｅｒ
ｏｆｆｉｃｉａｌ ｓａｉｄ .
Ｓｃｈｅ ｍ ｅｓ ｔｏ ｉｍ ｐｒｏｖｅ ｗ ａｔｅｒ ｒｅｓｏｕｒｃｅｓ ｈａｖｅ ｉｎｃｌｕｄｅｄ ａ Ｓａ-
ｕｄｉ Ａ ｒａｂｉａｎ ｐｒｏｐｏｓａｌ ｔｏ ｔｏ ｗ Ａ ｎｔａｒｃｔｉｃ ｉｃｅｂｅｒｇｓ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｋｉｎｇ-
ｄｏ ｍ . Ｏ ｎｅ ｓｕｇｇｅｓｔｉｏｎ ｈａｓ ｂｅｅｎ ｆｏｒ ｔａｎｋｅｒｓ ｔｒａｖｅｌｌｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ
Ｇ ｕｌｆ ｆｏｒ ｏｉｌ ｔｏ ｂｒｉｎｇ ｉｎ ｆｒｅｓｈ ｗ ａｔｅｒ .
Ｗ ｈｉｌｅ ｓｕｃｈ ｉｄｅａｓ ｓｏ ｆａｒ ｈａｖｅ ｆａｉｌｅｄ ｔｏ ｍ ａｔｅｒｉａｌｉｚｅ, Ｇ ｕｌｆ

① ｐｅｒ ｃａｐｉｔａ〔ｐ ∶’ｋ ｐｉｔ 〕 按人 口计算

・ 16 2 ・
ｇｏｖｅｒｎ ｍ ｅｎｔｓ ｈａｖｅ ｂｕｉｌｔ ｍ ｏｒｅ ｗ ａｔｅｒ ｄｅｓａｌｉｎａｔｉｏｎ ｐｌａｎｔｓ ａｎｄ
ｈａｖｅ ｃａ ｍ ｐａｉｇｎｅｄ ｔｏ ｃｏｎｖｉｎｃｅ ｔｈｅ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｔｈｅ ｔｈｉｎｇ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｏｉｌ
ｄｅｒｉｖｅｄ ｗ ｅａｌｔｈ ｃａｎｎｏｔ ａｆｆｏｒｄ ｉｓ ｗ ａｔｅｒ ｗ ａｓｔａｇｅ .
Ｇ ｕｌｆ ｏｆｆｉｃｉａｌｓ ｓａｙ ａｎ ａｆｆｌｕｅｎｔ ① ｌｉｆｅｓｔｙｌｅ ｉｓ ｂｌｅｅｄｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ
ｒｅｇｉｏｎ’ｓ ｈｅａｖｉｌｙ ｓｕｂｓｉｄｉｚｅｄ ｗ ａｔｅｒ ｓｕｐｐｌｉｅｓ .
Ｃｏｎｃｅｒｎ ｈａｓ ｍ ｏｕｎｔｅｄ ｏｖｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｖｕｌｎｅｒａｂｉｌｉｔｙ ② ｏｆ ｔｈｅ
ｐｌａｎｔｓ , ａｓ Ｉｒａｎ ｈａｓ ｔｈｒｅａｔｅｎｅｄ ｔｏ ａｔｔａｃｋ Ｇ ｕｌｆ Ａ ｒａｂ ｓｔａｔｅｓ ｆｏｒ
ｇｉｖｉｎｇ Ｉｒａｑ ｆｉｎａｎｃｉａｌ ｂａｃｋｉｎｇ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ 46 ｍ ｏｎｔｈ ｏｌｄ Ｇ ｕｌｆ
ｗ ａｒ .
6. Ａ ｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｐａｓｓａｇｅ , .
( Ａ) ｔｈｅ ｉｃｅｂｅｒｇｓ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ Ａ ｒｃｔｉｃ Ｏ ｃｅａｎ ｐｒｏｖｉｄｅ ｔｈｅ Ｇ ｕｌｆ
ｃｏｕｎｔｒｉｅｓ ｗｉｔｈ ａ ｇｏｏｄ ｓｕｐｐｌｙ ｏｆ ｗ ａｔｅｒ
(Ｂ ) Ｓａｕｄｉ Ａｒａｂｉａ ｉｓ ｔｈｅ ｏｎｌｙ Ｇ ｕｌｆ ｃｏｕｎｔｒｙ ｔｈａｔ ｈａｓ ｒｅ-
ｓｏｒｔｅｄ ｔｏ ｌａｒｇｅ ｍ ａｓｓｅｓ ｏｆ ｉｃｅ ｆｌｏａｔｉｎｇ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ Ａ ｎｔａｒｃ-
ｔｉｃ Ｏ ｃｅａｎ ｆｏｒ ｉｔｓ ｗ ａｔｅｒ ｓｕｐｐｌｉｅｓ
(Ｃ) ｓｏ ｍ ｅ ｏｔｈｅｒ Ｇ ｕｌｆ ｃｏｕｎｔｒｉｅｓ ｈａｖｅ ｍ ａｄｅ ｆｕｌｌ ｕｓｅ ｏｆ
ｆｏｒｅｉｇｎ ｔａｎｋｅｒｓ ｔｏ ｂｒｉｎｇ ｂａｃｋ ｆｒｅｓｈ ｗ ａｔｅｒ
(Ｄ) ｎｏｎｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅｓｅ ｓｔａｔｅ ｍ ｅｎｔｓ ａｒｅ ｔｒｕｅ
7. Ｇ ｕｌｆ Ａｒａｂｉａｎｓ .
( Ａ) ｕｓｅ ｆｒｅｓｈ ｗ ａｔｅｒ ｆｒｕｇａｌｌｙ
(Ｂ ) ｕｓｅ ｆｒｅｓｈ ｗ ａｔｅｒ ｌａｖｉｓｈｌｙ
( Ｃ) ｓｅｌｄｏ ｍ ｒｅｐａｉｒ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｌｅａｋｉｎｇ ｐｉｐｅｓ

① ａｆｆｌｕｅｎｔ〔’ ｆｌｕ ｎｔ〕 富裕 的 ; 富足 的

② ｖｕｌｎｅｒａｂｉｌｉｔｙ〔 ｖ ｌｎ ｒ ’ｂｉｌｉｔｉ〕 易 受 攻 击。 参 照 ｖｕｌｎｅｒａｂｌｅ, ｖｕｌｎｅｒａｂｌｙ
等词

・ 16 3 ・
 (Ｄ) ｔｈｉｎ ｋ ｗ ａｔｅｒ ｉｓ ｍ ｏｒｅ ｉｍ ｐｏｒｔａｎｔ ｔｈａｎ ｏｉｌ
8. Ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏ ｗｉｎｇ ｉｓ Ｎ Ｏ Ｔ ｍ ｅｎｔｉｏｎｅｄ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｐａｓｓａｇｅ ?
( Ａ) Ｗ ａｔｅｒ ｅｘｐｅｎｓｅｓ ａｒｅ ｐａｒｔｌｙ ｃｏｖｅｒｅｄ ｂｙ ｔｈｅ ｍ ｏｎｅｙ
ｆｒｏ ｍ ｔｈｅ ｇｏｖｅｒｎ ｍ ｅｎｔｓ .
( Ｂ) Ｇ ｕｌｆ Ａ ｒａｂｉａｎｓ ｒｅｌｙ ｏｎ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｏｉｌ ｒｅｓｏｕｒｃｅｓ ｆｏｒ ａ ｌｕｘｕ-
ｒｉｏｕｓ ｌｉｆｅ .
( Ｃ) Ｇａｒｄｅｎｓ ｔａｋｅ ｌａｒｇｅ ａ ｍ ｏｕｎｔｓ ｏｆ ｗ ａｔｅｒ .
(Ｄ) Ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｌｉｖｉｎｇ ｉｎ ｃｉｔｉｅｓ ｃｏｎｓｕ ｍ ｅ ｍ ｏｒｅ ｗ ａｔｅｒ ｔｈａｎ ｉｎ
ｒｕｒａｌ ａｒｅａｓ .
9. Ａ ｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｐａｓｓａｇｅ, ｗ ｅ ｍ ａｙ ｓａｆｅｌｙ ｃｏｎｃｌｕｄｅ ｔｈａｔ
.
( Ａ) Ｇ ｕｌｆ Ａ ｒａｂ ｓｔａｔｅｓ ａｒｅ ｕｓｉｎｇ ｓｏｐｈｉｓｔｉｃａｔｅｄ ｔｅｃｈｎｉｑｕｅｓ
ｔｏ ｒｅ ｍ ｏｖｅ ｓａｌｔ ｆｒｏ ｍ ｓｅａ ｗ ａｔｅｒ
(Ｂ ) Ｇ ｕｌｆ Ａ ｒａｂ ｓｔａｔｅｓ ｒｅ ｍ ａｉｎ ｎｅｕｔｒａｌ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ Ｇ ｕｌｆ ｗ ａｒ
( Ｃ) ｔｈｅｉｒ ｃｏｎｃｅｒｎ ｏｖｅｒ ｔｈｅ ｓａｆｅｔｙ ｏｆ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｐｌａｎｔｓ ｉｓ ｕｎ-
ｗ ａｒｒａｎｔｅｄ
(Ｄ) ｓｏ ｍ ｅ Ａ ｒａｂ ｓｔａｔｅｓ ｈａｖｅ ｂｅｅｎ ｍｉｌｉｔａｒｉｌｙ ｉｎｖｏｌｖｅｄ ｉｎ
ｔｈｅ Ｇ ｕｌｆ ｗ ａｒ
10. Ｔ ｈｅ ｔｉｔｌｅ ｂｅｌｏ ｗ ｔｈａｔ ｂｅｓｔ ｅｘｐｒｅｓｓｅｓ ｔｈｅ ｉｄｅａｓ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐａｓ-
ｓａｇｅ ｉｓ .
( Ａ) Ｇ ｕｌｆ Ｗ ａｒｎｉｎｇ : Ｗ ａｔｅｒ Ｄ ｅａｒｅｒ Ｔ ｈａｎ Ｏｉｌ
( Ｂ) Ｗ ａｔｅｒ Ｃ ｏｎｓｅｒｖａｔｉｏｎ
( Ｃ) Ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔ Ｓｃｈｅ ｍ ｅｓ ｔｏ Ｉ ｍ ｐｒｏｖｅ Ｗ ａｔｅｒ Ｒ ｅｓｏｕｒｃｅｓ
( Ｄ) Ｈ ｏ ｗ ｔｏ Ｔ ｕｒｎ Ｄ ｅｓｅｒｔｓ Ｉｎｔｏ Ｏ ａｓｅｓ

・ 16 4 ・
Ｐａｓｓａｇｅ Ｃ

Ａ ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔ ｉｓ ａ ｌａｒｇｅ, ｌｏ ｗ -ｃｏｓｔ, ｈｉｇｈ-ｖｏｌｕ ｍ ｅ, ｓｅｌｆ-

ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｄｅｓｉｇｎｅｄ ｔｏ ｓｅｒｖｅ ｔｈｅ ｃｏｎｓｕ ｍ ｅｒｓ’ ｔｏｔａｌ
ｎｅｅｄｓ ｆｏｒ ｆｏｏｄ , ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ , ａｎｄ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｕｓｅｆｕｌ ｐｒｏｄｕｃｔｓ . Ａ ｓｕ-
ｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔ ｓｔｏｒｅ ｃａｎ ｂｅ ｉｎｄｅｐｅｎｄｅｎｔｌｙ ｏ ｗ ｎｅｄ , ａｌｔｈｏｕｇｈ ｍ ｏｓｔ
ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔ ｓｔｏｒｅｓ ａｒｅ ｏｐｅｒａｔｅｄ ｂｙ ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔ ｃｈａｉｎｓ .
Ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔｓ ｈａｖｅ ｍ ｏｖｅｄ ｉｎ ｓｅｖｅｒａｌ ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎｓ ｔｏ ｆｕｒ-
ｔｈｅｒ ｂｕｉｌｄ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｓａｌｅｓ ｖｏｌｕ ｍ ｅ . Ｔ ｈｅｙ ｈａｖｅ ｏｐｅｎｅｄ ｌａｒｇｅｒ
ｓｔｏｒｅｓ, ｗｉｔｈ ｔｏｄａｙ’ｓ ｓｅｌｌｉｎｇ ｓｐａｃｅ ｏｃｃｕｐｙｉｎｇ ａｂｏｕｔ 18 , 000
ｓｑｕａｒｅ ｆｅｅｔ ａｓ ｃｏ ｍ ｐａｒｅｄ ｔｏ 11 , 7000 ｓｑｕａｒｅ ｆｅｅｔ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ 1950ｓ .
Ｍ ｏｓｔ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｃｈａｉｎｓ ｎｏ ｗ ｏｐｅｒａｔｅ ｆｅ ｗ ｅｒ ｂｕｔ ｌａｒｇｅｒ ｓｔｏｒｅｓ . Ｓｕ-
ｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔｓ ｃａｒｒｙ ａ ｌａｒｇｅ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒ ａｎｄ ｖａｒｉｅｔｙ ｏｆ ｉｔｅ ｍ ｓ . Ａ
ｔｙｐｉｃａｌ ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔ ｈａｎｄｌｅｄ 3 , 000 ｉｔｅ ｍ ｓ ｉｎ 1946 ａｎｄ ｎｏ ｗ
ｈａｎｄｌｅｓ ａｒｏｕｎｄ 8 , 000 .
Ｎ ｏ ｗ ｄａｙｓ , ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔｓ ｈａｖｅ ｂｅｅｎ ｈｉｔ ｈａｒｄ ｂｙ ａ ｎｕ ｍ -
ｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｃｏ ｍ ｐｅｔｉｔｏｒｓ ｍ ｅｅｔｉｎｇ ｂｅｔｔｅｒ-ｄｅｆｉｎｅｄ ｃｕｓｔｏ ｍ ｅｒ ｎｅｅｄｓ
ｗｉｔｈ ｒｅｓｐｅｃｔ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｖａｒｉｅｔｙ ｏｆ ｐｒｏｄｕｃｔｓ ａｎｄ ｐｒｉｃｅ ｌｅｖｅｌｓ . Ｓｏ
ｔｈｅｙ ａｒｅ ｔｒｙｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｉｍ ｐｒｏｖｅ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔｉｎｇ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｓ . Ｔ ｈｅ
ｍ ｏｓｔ ｉｍ ｐｏｒｔａｎｔ ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅ ｈａｓ ｂｅｅｎ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ ｎｕ ｍ ｂｅｒ ｏｆ ｎｏｎｆｏｏｄ
ｉｔｅ ｍ ｓ ｃａｒｒｉｅｄ - ｄｒｕｇｓ, ｂｅａｕｔｙ ａｉｄｓ, ｍ ａｇａｚｉｎｅｓ , ｂｏｏｋｓ , ｔｏｙｓ
- ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｎｏ ｗ ａｃｃｏｕｎｔ ｆｏｒ 8 ｐｅｒｃｅｎｔ ｏｆ ｔｏｔａｌ ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔ
ｓａｌｅｓ . Ｔ ｈｉｓ ｔｒｅｎｄ ｉｓ ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｉｎｇ , ａｎｄ ｍ ａｎｙ ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔｓ ａｒｅ
ｍ ｏｖｉｎｇ ｉｎｔｏ ｒｅｃｏｒｄｓ, ｓｐｏｒｔｉｎｇ ｇｏｏｄｓ, ｈａｒｄ ｗ ａｒｅ , ｇａｒｄｅｎ
ｓｕｐｐｌｉｅｓ , ａｎｄ ｅｖｅｎ ｃａ ｍ ｅｒａｓ, ｈｏｐｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｆｉｎｄ ｈｉｇｈｐｒｏｆｉｔ ｌｉｎｅｓ .
Ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔｓ ａｒｅ ａｌｓｏ ｉ ｍ ｐｒｏｖｉｎｇ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｊｏｂｓ ｔｈｒｏｕｇｈ ｍ ｏｒｅ
・ 16 5 ・
ｅｘｐｅｎｓｉｖｅ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎｓ , ｌａｒｇｅｒ ｐａｒｋｉｎｇ ｌｏｔｓ , ｌｏｎｇｅｒ ｓｔｏｒｅｈｏｕｒｓ
ａｎｄ Ｓ ｕｎｄａｙ ｏｐｅｎｉｎｇｓ , ａｎｄ ａ ｗｉｄｅ ｖａｒｉｅｔｙ ｏｆ ｃｕｓｔｏ ｍ ｅｒ ｓｅｒｖ-
ｉｃｅｓ, ｓｕｃｈ ａｓ ｃｈｅｃｋ ｃａｓｈｉｎｇ, ｒｅｓｔｒｏｏ ｍ ｓ, ａｎｄ ｂａｃｋｇｒｏｕｎｄ
ｍ ｕｓｉｃ .
Ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔｓ ｈａｖｅ ａｌｓｏ ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅｄ ｓｅｌｌｉｎｇ ｃｏ ｍ ｐｅｔｉｔｉｏｎ ｉｎ
ｔｈｅ ｆｏｒ ｍ ｏｆ ｈｅａｖｙ ａｄｖｅｒｔｉｓｉｎｇ , ｔｒａｄｉｎｇ ｓｔａ ｍ ｐｓ, ａｎｄ ｇａ ｍ ｅｓ ｏｆ
ｃｈａｎｃｅ .
Ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔ ｃｈａｉｎｓ ａｒｅ ｎｏ ｗ ｔｒｙｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｅｘｐａｎｄ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｓａｌｅｓ
ｖｏｌｕ ｍ ｅ ｉｎ Ａ ｓｉａｎ ｃｏｕｎｔｒｉｅｓ ｗ ｈｅｒｅ ｅｃｏｎｏ ｍｉｃ ｇｒｏ ｗ ｔｈ ｉｓ ｓｔｒｏｎ-
ｇｅｒ .
11. Ｉｔｅ ｍ ｓ ｓｏｌｄ ｉｎ ａ ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔ ａｒｅ ｔｈａｎ ｉｎ ｏｔｈｅｒ
ｋｉｎｄｓ ｏｆ ｓｔｏｒｅｓ .
( Ａ) ｍ ｕｃｈ ｍ ｏｒｅ ｅｘｐｅｎｓｉｖｅ ( Ｂ ) ｃｈｅａｐｅｒ
( Ｃ) ｂｅｔｔｅｒ (Ｄ) ｐｏｏｒｅｒ ｉｎ ｑｕａｌｉｔｙ
12. Ａ ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔ ｍ ａｋｅｓ ａ ｐｒｏｆｉｔ ｍ ａｉｎｌｙ ｂｙ
( Ａ) ｆｏｏｌｉｎｇ ｃｕｓｔｏ ｍ ｅｒｓ .
( Ｂ) ｏｆｆｅｒｉｎｇ ｍ ａｎｙ ｎｏｎｆｏｏｄ ｉｔｅ ｍ ｓ .
( Ｃ) ｓｅｌｌｉｎｇ ｍ ａｎｙ ｋｉｎｄｓ ｏｆ ｄｒｕｇｓ .
( Ｄ) ｂｕｉｌｄｉｎｇ ｓａｌｅｓ ｖｏｌｕ ｍ ｅ .
13. Ａ ｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｐａｓｓａｇｅ , ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏ ｗｉｎｇ ｓｔａｔｅ-
ｍ ｅｎｔｓ ｉｓ ｔｒｕｅ ? Ｎ ｏ ｗ ｄａｙｓ, ｍ ｏｓｔ ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔ ｃｈａｉｎｓ ｏｐｅｒ-
ａｔｅ
( Ａ) ｆｅ ｗ ｅｒ ｂｕｔ ｌａｒｇｅｒ ｓｔｏｒｅｓ .
( Ｂ) ｍ ｏｒｅ ｂｕｔ ｓ ｍ ａｌｌｅｒ ｓｔｏｒｅｓ .
( Ｃ) ｍ ｏｒｅ ａｎｄ ｌａｒｇｅｒ ｓｔｏｒｅｓ .
( Ｄ) ｆｅ ｗ ｅｒ ａｎｄ ｓ ｍ ａｌｌｅｒ ｓｔｏｒｅｓ .
・ 16 6 ・
14. Ａ ｔｙｐｉｃａｌ ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔ ｎｏ ｗ ｓｅｌｌｓ
( Ａ) 18 , 000 ｉｔｅ ｍ ｓ . (Ｂ) 11 , 700 ｉｔｅ ｍ ｓ .
( Ｃ) 8 , 000 ｉｔｅ ｍ ｓ . (Ｄ) 3 , 000 ｉｔｅ ｍ ｓ .
15. Ａ ｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｐａｓｓａｇｅ , ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｆｏｌｌｏ ｗｉｎｇ ｓｔａｔｅ-
ｍ ｅｎｔｓ ｉｓ ｎｏｔ ｔｒｕｅ ?
(Ａ) Ｓ ｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔｓ ｈａｖｅ ｉｎｃｒｅａｓｅｄ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｓａｌｅｓ ｖｏｌｕ ｍ ｅ
ｂｙ ｅｎｇａｇｉｎｇ ｉｎ ｎｏｎｆｏｏｄ ｉｔｅ ｍ ｓ .
( Ｂ) Ｓ ｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔｓ ｈａｖｅｎ’ｔ ｍ ｅｔ ａｎｙ ｃｏ ｍ ｐｅｔｉｔｏｒｓ .
(Ｃ ) Ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔｓ ａｒｅ ｉｍ ｐｒｏｖｉｎｇ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｊｏｂｓ ｔｈｒｏｕｇｈ
Ｓｕｎｄａｙ ｏｐｅｎｉｎｇｓ .
( Ｄ) Ｓｕｐｅｒ ｍ ａｒｋｅｔｓ ａｒｅ ｎｏ ｗ ｔｒｙｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｅｘｐａｎｄ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｓａｌｅｓ
ｖｏｌｕ ｍ ｅ ｉｎ ｆｏｒｅｉｇｎ ｃｏｕｎｔｒｉｅｓ .

Ｐａｓｓａｇｅ Ｄ

Ｉｆ ｓｏ ｍ ｅｏｎｅ ｗ ｅｒｅ ｔｏ ａｓｋ ｕｓ . " Ｗ ｈｙ ｄｉｄ ｈｕ ｍ ａｎ ｂｅｉｎｇｓ

ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｏ ｃｏｖｅｒ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｂｏｄｉｅｓ ｗｉｔｈ ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ ?" , ｍ ｏｓｔ ｏｆ ｕｓ ｗ ｏｕｌｄ
ａｎｓｗ ｅｒ, " Ｔ ｏ ｋｅｅｐ ｔｈｅ ｍ ｓｅｌｖｅｓ ｗ ａｒ ｍ , ｏｆ ｃｏｕｒｓｅ" .
Ｉｔ ｉｓ ｏｎｌｙ ｗ ｈｅｎ ｗ ｅ ｂｅｇｉｎ ｔｏ ｔｈｉｎｋ ａｂｏｕｔ ｉｔ ａ ｌｉｔｔｌｅ ｔｈａｔ
ｗ ｅ ｒｅａｌｉｚｅ ｔｈａｔ ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ ａｒｅ ｗ ｏｒｎ ｆｏｒ ａ ｇｒｅａｔ ｍ ａｎｙ ｒｅａｓｏｎｓ
ｔｈａｔ ｈａｖｅ ｎｏｔｈｉｎｇ ｔｏ ｄｏ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｃｌｉｍ ａｔｅ , ｏｒ ｗｉｔｈ ｏｕｒ ｎｅｅｄ
ｆｏｒ ｗ ａｒ ｍ ｔｈ , ａｔ ａｌｌ .
Ｆ ｏｒ ｉｎｓｔａｎｃｅ, ｗ ｅ ｗ ｅａｒ ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ ｔｏ ｓｏ ｍ ｅ ｅｘｔｅｎｔ ｉｎ ｏｒｄｅｒ
ｔｏ ｄｅｃｏｒａｔｅ ｏｕｒｓｅｌｖｅｓ…ｔｏ ｍ ａｋｅ ｏｕｒｓｅｌｖｅｓ, ｉｆ ｐｏｓｓｉｂｌｅ, ｌｏｏｋ
ｍ ｏｒｅ ｄｉｇｎｉｆｉｅｄ ｏｒ ｇｒａｃｅｆｕｌ ｏｒ ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅｓｑｕｅ ｔｈａｎ ｗ ｅ ａｒｅ . Ｅ ｖｅｎ
ｔｈｅ ｐｌａｉｎｅｓｔ ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ ｗ ｏｒｎ ｂｙ ｃｉｖｉｌｉｚｅｄ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｈａｖｅ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｂｕｔ-
ｔｏｎｓ, ｂｅｌｔｓ, ｃｏｌｌａｒｓ ａｎｄ ｓｏ ｆｏｒｔｈ ａｒｒａｎｇｅｄ ｉｎ ｓｕｃｈ ａ ｗ ａｙ ｔｈａｔ
・ 16 7 ・
ｔｈｅｙ ｆｏｒ ｍ ａ ｋｉｎｄ ｏｆ ｄｅｃｏｒａｔｉｏｎ , ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｍ ａｔｅｒｉａｌｉｔｓｅｌｆ ｉｓ ｏｆ ａ
ｋｉｎｄ ａｎｄ ｃｏｌｏｕｒ ｔｈａｔ ｗ ｅ ｔｈｉｎｋ ｓｕｉｔ ｕｓ, ａｎｄ ｉｓ ｃｕｔ ｏｒ ａｒｒａｎｇｅｄ
ｉｎ ａ ｗ ａｙ ｔｈａｔ ｗ ｅ ｔｈｉｎｋ ｌｏｏｋｓ ｎｉｃｅ—ｔｈｏｕｇｈ ｉｄｅａｓ ａｂｏｕｔ ｗ ｈａｔ
ｌｏｏｋｓ ｎｉｃｅ ｃｈａｎｇｅ ｖｅｒｙ ｍ ｕｃｈ ｆｒｏ ｍ ｔｉｍ ｅ ｔｏ ｔｉｍ ｅ .
Ｂｅｓｉｄｅｓ ｄｅｃｏｒａｔｉｎｇ ｕｓ ｏｕｒ ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ ｈａｖｅ ｔｏ ｌｉｎ ｋ ｕｓ ｕｐ
ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ａ ｍ ｏｎｇｓｔ ｗ ｈｏ ｍ ｗ ｅ ｌｉｖｅ . Ｗ ｅ ｆｅｅｌ ｕｎｃｏ ｍｆｏｒｔ-
ａｂｌｅ ｉｆ ｔｈｅｙ ｄｏ ｎｏｔ " ｌｏｏｋ ｒｉｇｈｔ" - ｉｆ ｔｈｅｙ ａｒｅ ｎｏｔ ｓｉｍｉｌａｒ ｔｏ
ｔｈｏｓｅ ｗ ｈｉｃｈ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｏｆ ｏｕｒ ａｇｅ, ｓｅｘ , ｃｏｕｎｔｒｙ ａｎｄ ｐｅｒｉ-
ｏｄ ａｒｅ ｗ ｅａｒｉｎｇ .
Ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ ｏｆ ａ ｓｐｅｃｉａｌ ｋｉｎｄ ａｒｅ ｏｆｔｅｎ ｗ ｏｒｎ ｔｏ ｓｈｏ ｗ ｔｈａｔ
ｔｈｅ ｗ ｅａｔｈｅｒ ｈａｓ ａｕｔｈｏｒｉｔｙ ｏｒ ｐｏ ｗ ｅｒ . Ｔ ｈｅ ｉｎｄｉｖｉｄｕａｌ ｗ ｅａｒｉｎｇ
ｔｈｅ ｍ ｉｓ ｔｒｅａｔｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｒｅｓｐｅｃｔ ｂｅｃａｕｓｅ ｈｅ ｏｃｃｕｐｉｅｓ ａ ｃｅｒｔａｉｎ ｏｆ-
ｆｉｃｅ . Ｔ ｈｅ ｊｕｄｇｅ ｉｎ ｔｈｅ Ｂｅｎｃｈ , ｆｏｒ ｉｎｓｔａｎｃｅ , ｍｉｇｈｔ ｌｏｏｋ ａ ｖｅｒ-
ｙ ｏｒｄｉｎａｒｙ ａｎｄ ｕｎｉｍ ｐｒｅｓｓｉｖｅ ｆｉｇｕｒｅ ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ ｈｉｓ ｗｉｇ ａｎｄ
ｇｏ ｗ ｎ . Ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ ａｒｅ ａｎ ｅｓｓｅｎｔｉａｌ ｐａｒｔ ｏｆ ａｌｌ ｃｅｒｅ ｍ ｏｎｉａｌ ｏｃｃａ-
ｓｉｏｎｓ , ｗ ｈｅｔｈｅｒ ｉｔ ｉｓ ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｒｅｌｉｇｉｏｎ , ｔｈｅ ｌａ ｗ , ｐａｒｌｉａ-
ｍ ｅｎｔ, ｒｏｙａｌｔｙ , ｔｈｅ ｆｉｇｈｔｉｎｇ ｆｏｒｃｅｓ, ｔｈｅ ｓｔａｔｅ, ｏｒ ｓｏ ｍ ｅ ｌｅｓｓ
ｉｍ ｐｏｒｔａｎｔ ｂｏｄｙ . Ｈ ｏ ｗ ｖｅｒｙ ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔ ｔｈｅ Ｑ ｕｅｅｎ’ｓ Ｃ ｏｒｏｎａｔｉｏ-
ｎ ① ｃｅｒｅ ｍ ｏｎｙ ｗ ｏｕｌｄ ｈａｖｅ ｌｏｏｋｅｄ ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ ｔｈｅ ｒｏｂｅｓ ａｎｄ ｃｏｒｏ-
ｎｅｔｓ, ｔｈｅ ｃｌｏｔｈ ｏｆ ｇｏｌｄ ａｎｄ ｔｈｅ ｅｒ ｍｉｎｅ .
Ｓｏ ｍ ｅｔｉ ｍ ｅｓ , ｅｖｅｎ ｉｎ ｃｉｖｉｌｉｚｅｄ ｃｏｕ ｎｔｒｉｅｓ, ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｗ ｅａｒ
ｓｏ ｍ ｅ ａｒｔｉｃｌｅ ｏｆ ｃｌｏｔｈｉｎｇ , ｏｒ ｓｏ ｍ ｅ ｊｅ ｗ ｅｌ ｏｒ ｃｈａｒ ｍ , ｂｅｃａｕｓｅ
ｔｈｅｙ ｂｅｌｉｅｖｅ ｔｈａｔ ｉｔ ｗｉｌｌ ｂｒｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ ｍ ｌｕｃｋ ｏｒ ｐｒｏｔｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｍ
ｆｒｏ ｍ ｅｖｉｌ ｏｒ ｉｌｌｎｅｓｓ, ｏｒ ｂｅｃａｕｓｅ ｉｔ ｉｓ ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅｉｒ ｒｅ-

① ｃｏｒｏｎａｔｉｏｎ〔ｋ ｒ ’ｎｅｉ ｎ〕 加 冕典礼

・ 16 8 ・
ｌｉｇｉｏｕｓ ｂｅｌｉｅｆｓ .
16. Ａ ｇｏｏｄ ｔｉｔｌｅ ｆｏｒ ｔｈｉｓ ａｒｔｉｃｌｅ ｗ ｏｕｌｄ ｂｅ .
( Ａ) Ｈ ｕ ｍ ｍ ａｎ Ｎ ｅｅｄｓ
( Ｂ) Ｗ ｈｙ Ｄ ｏ Ｗ ｅ Ｗ ｅａｒ Ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ ?
( Ｃ) Ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ Ｈ ａｖｅ Ｎ ｏｔｈｉｎｇ ｔｏ Ｄ ｏ ｗｉｔｈ Ｃｌｉｍ ａｔｅ
( Ｄ) Ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔ Ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ
17. Ｔ ｈｅ ｍ ａｉｎ ｉｄｅａ ｏｆ ｐａｒａｇｒｐ ｈ ｔｈｒｅｅ ｉｓ ｔｈａｔ .
( Ａ) ｗ ｅ ｗ ｅａｒ ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ ｔｏ ｋｅｅｐ ｏｕｓｅｌｖｅｓ ｗ ａｒ ｍ
( Ｂ) ｆａｓｈｉｏｎｓ ａｒｅ ｃｏｎｓｔａｎｔｌｙ ｃｈａｎｇｉｎｇ
(Ｃ) ｏｎｅ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｐｕｒｐｏｓｅｓ ｏｆ ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ ｉｓ ｔｏ ｉｍ ｐｒｏｖｅ ｏｕｒ
ａｐｐｅａｒａｎｃｅ
( Ｄ) ｔｈｅ ｍ ａｉｎ ｐｕｒｐｏｓｅ ｏｆ ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ ｉｓ ｔｏ ｐｒｏｔｅｃｔ ｕｓ ｆｒｏ ｍ
ｔｈｅ ｗ ｅａｔｈｅｒ
18. Ｂ ｙ " ｌｏｏｋ ｒｉｇｈｔ " ｔｈｅ ｗ ｒｉｔｅｒ ｍ ｅａｎｓ ｔｈａｔ ｗ ｅ ｌｉｋｅ ｏｕｒ
ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ ｔｏ .
( Ａ) ｂｅ ｓｉ ｍｉｌａｒ ｔｏ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ’ｓ ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ
( Ｂ) ｂｅ ｄｅｃｏｒａｔｉｖｅ
( Ｃ) ｂｅ ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔ ｆｒｏ ｍ ｏｔｈｅｒ ｐｅｏｐｌｅ’ｓ ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ
( Ｄ) ｌｏｏｋ ｃｏ ｍｆｏｒｔａｂｌｅ
19. Ｔ ｈｅ ｗ ｒｉｔｅｒ ｂｅｌｉｅｖｅｓ ｔｈａｔ ｓｐｅｃｉａｌ ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ .
( Ａ) ａｒｅ ｎｏｔ ｒｅａｌｌｙ ｎｅｅｄｅｄ ｏｎ ｃｅｒｅ ｍ ｏｎｉａｌ ｏｃｃａｓｉｏｎｓ
( Ｂ) ｍ ａｋｅ ｓｏ ｍ ｅ ｃｅｒｅ ｍ ｏｎｉａｌ ｏｃｃａｓｉｏｎｓ ｍ ｏｒｅ ｉｍ ｐｒｅｓｓｉｖｅ
( Ｃ) ａｒｅ ｖｅｒｙ ｎｅｃｅｓｓａｒｙ ｏｎ ｃｅｒｅ ｍ ｏｎｉａｌ ｏｃｃａｓｉｏｎｓ
( Ｄ) ａｒｅ ｕｎｉｍ ｐｒｅｓｓｉｖｅ
20. Ｔ ｈｅ ｗ ｒｉｔｅｒ ｓａｙｓ ｔｈａｔ ｓｐｅｃｉａｌ ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ ａｒｅ ｏｆｔｅｎ ｗ ｏｒｎ ｂｙ
.
・ 16 9 ・
 ( Ａ) ｐｏｌｉｃｅ ｍ ｅｎ
( Ｂ) ｃｌｅｒｋｓ
( Ｃ) Ｏｆｆｉｃｅ ｍ ａｎａｇｅｒｓ
( Ｄ) ｐｅｏｐｌｅ ｉｎ ｉ ｍ ｐｏｒｔａｎｔ ｏｆｆｉｃｉａｌ ｐｏｓｔｓ

・ 17 0 ・
 Unit 17

Passage A

T he elect rom agnet was i nvent ed in England by Willia m

Sturgeon ① , w ho t ook an iron rod and ben t it in to t he shape
of a horses hoe . T his " horseshoe" was coated wit h varnish
and a laye r of coppe r wire was w rapped a round it . A n elec-
t ric curren t was passed t hrough t he wire , t hus m aking t he
rod magnetic . The rod was now , because of m agnetic at-
t raction , ab le t o suppor t nine pounds of iron .
In t he U .S ., a scien tist named Joseph Henry improved
on St urgenon’s electromagnet by ins ula ting t he coppe r wire
with silk . H e was able t o wr ap many turn s of wire around
an iron core wit hou t danger of shor t circuits between t he
t urns . H is m agnet could hold 2 300 pounds .
T his experimen t prompted H enry t o t ry his hand at
conve rting magnetism in t o elect ricit y . Fir st he coiled some
insulated ② wire around an iron ba r , connecti ng bot h ends of
t he wir e t o a galvanometer ③ . The iron ba r was placed across
t he poles of t he electromagnet . T hen t he coil of t he elect ro-

① William St u rgeon〔 wil j m st ∶ d n〕 (1783 - 1850) 英国科 学家

② in su lat e〔 in sj ul eiti d〕 a . 绝 缘的
③ g alv anome te r〔 g lv n mi t 〕 n . 电流 计

・ 17 1 ・
m agnet was connected to a bat tery . T he galvanometer indi-
cated a voltage, t hen dropped to ze ro . H enry signalled his
assistan t to disconnect t he coil . The galvanometer sho wed
t hat once again a voltage had been produced , alt hough t his
time in t he opposite dir ection . The pri nciple of elect romag-
netic induction had th us been discovered . U nfor t unately for
Joseph H enry he did no t publis h his findings and someone
else ( Far aday) go t t he cr edit for t he discovery .
1. H enry’s elect rom agnet was .
( A) exactly like Sturgeon’s
(B ) an improvement over St urgeon’s
( C) mor e dangerous t han Sturgeon’s
(D) not as good as St urgeon’s
2. H enry was encouraged by h is experim en t .
( A) to insu late t he copper wire
(B ) t o change m agnetis m i nt o elect ricit y
( C) to conver t elect ricit y int o magnetis m
(D) t o avoid shor t circuits
3. H e connected the wir e to .
( A) a coil
(B ) a galvanom eter
( C) t he poles of the elect rom agnet
(D) an iron bar
4. The galvanomete r indicated .
( A) that H enry’s assist an t had connected t he wire
(B ) t hat H enry had been able to produce a voltage
・ 17 2 ・
 ( C) zero, wit h no volt age ever produced
(D) the iron bar had been placed across t he poles of t he
electromagnet
5. According t o w hat appeared in prin t at that time
.
( A) Joseph H enry discovered t he principle of elect ro-
m agnetic induction
(B ) Joseph H enry falsely t ried to claim credit for t he
discovery of t he princip le of elect romagnetic i nduc-
tion
( C) Far aday discover ed the princip le of elect romagnetic
induction
(D) H enry’s experiment wit h electromagnetic induction
was a fail ur e

Passage B

M en and women have talked abou t t heir dream s for cen-

t uries and cent uries , and the curious thi ng is that in spite of
t he st range nat ure of drea ms , people have per sisted i n be-
lieving t hat dr ea ms have go t a m eaning and t hat t hey a re sig-
nificant for our daily lives .
Dream s are of in ter est to all of us , because all of us
dr ea m . Some find t hem a musing , some w orrying , some t er-
rifying , som e regard t hem superstitiously , gypsies take
t hem as warnings , the superior s regard t hem as mer ely st u-
pid , w hile ot he rs , like t he p sychoanalysts st udy t hem scien-
・ 17 3 ・
tifically and m ake use of t hem in t he everyday t r eat ment of
neuro tic disorder s . Dreams have always fascinated m ankind ,
because t hey open up t o u s a r ealm of our per sonalit y w hich
we did not know existed . We ar e surprised at the th ings we
dr ea m abou t . St . Augustine than ked God he was not re-
s ponsi ble for h is drea ms ! T he mild pe ros n dreams of himself
standing up t o ot hers , t he humble per son of great achieve-
m en ts , the philosophe r dream s of doing t he most irrational
t hings , the calm and collected individual of being in a furi-
ous anger . Dr ea ms indeed seem to go by opposites . What
does it all m ean ? Is it all nonsense, or has it all a m eaning
for our lives ? At any rate , we cannot help bei ng fascinat ed
by the very st range products we find em erging from t he
dep th s of our pe rsonality , and which ar e t he products of our
o wn u ncon scious c reation .
F or nigh t after nigh t the most unimaginative of us go on
creating images and st ories so fant astic t hat we could neve r
produce them by any con scious effor t in our waki ng life,
however hard we were t o t ry . N ot on ly do we create t hese
stories , bu t we a re ourselves act or s in t hese fantasies we un-
consciously make up ; and reluctant as we a re t o admit it , we
ar e affected by t hem in daily life, and oft en troubled .
6. "… they a re significan t for our daily lives " ( in par agraph
1) m eans t hat dreams .
( A) for etell t he fut ure
(B ) recall som ethi ng t hat has happened t o us
・ 17 4 ・
 ( C) have som e m eaning in connection wit h our eve ryday
affairs
(D) have no useful m eaning
7. According t o the w riter drea ms m ay be of r eal use
.
( A) as a source of i nte rest
(B ) as wa rning
( C) as in ter esting t opics of conversation
(D) in telling us t he m eaning of our lives
8. What ki nd of people take least notice of dr ea ms ?
( A) people who worry .
(B ) gypsies .
( C) people w ho are supe rstitiou s .
(D) people w ho t hink they are better t han o t her peo-
ple .
9. "Dr ea ms i ndeed seem t o go by opposites " . Th is means
t hat .
( A) complet ely differ en t k inds of people have simila r
dreams
(B ) w hen you dr eam abou t a fu tur e event , t he opposite
happens
( C) in t heir dreams people a re of ten the opposite kind
of person to w hat t hey ar e in real life
(D) if a per son has a cer tain kind of drea m on one occa-
sion he will have a completely differ en t kind of
dream nex t time
・ 17 5 ・
10. In t he last par agraph we a re told .
( A) u ni maginative people dr ea m
( B) only imaginative people dream
( C) people dr ea m on ly w hen t hey ar e troubled
( D) only cr eative peop le dr ea m

Passage C

In many businesses , compu ter s have la rgely replaced

paperw ork , because t hey ar e fast , flexib le , and do not make
mistakes . As one banker said , " un like humans , compu ters
never have a bad day ." And t hey ar e honest . Many banks
adver tise t hat their tr ansactions ar e " un touched by human
hands " and ther efore safe from human temp tation . Obvious-
ly , compu ter s have no reason to steal money . But t hey also
have no conscience , and t he gro wing number of compute r
crimes sho ws t hey can be used t o st eal .
Comput er crimi nals don’t u se gun s . A nd even if t hey
ar e caugh t , it is hard t o p unish t he m because t her e ar e no
witnes s and of ten no evidence . A compu ter canno t r eme m-
ber w ho u sed it ; it si mp ly does what it is t old . T he head
teller at a New York City bank used a compu ter t o steal
more t han one and a half billion dollars in just four yea rs .
N o one noticed t his t hef t becau se he moved t he money from
one accoun t to anot her . Each time a cust om er he had robbed
questioned t he balance in his accoun t , t he teller claimed a
compu ter error , t hen replaced t he missing money from
・ 17 6 ・
someone else’s account . Th is man was caugh t only because
he was a gamb le r . When t he police broke up an illegal ga m-
b ling ope ration , his nam e was i n t he records .
Som e e mployees u se t he compute r’s powe r to get re-
venge on employer s t hey consider unfair . Recen tly , a large
insurance company fired its comput er-t ape librarian for r ea-
sons t hat involved her personal rat her t han her profes sional
life . She was given thir t y days’notice . In t hose t hir ty days ,
she er ased all the company’s compu terized records .
Most compu ter criminals have been minor employees .
N ow police wonder if th is is " t he tip of t he iceberg ." As one
official says , " I have a feeling t hat ther e is mor e crim e ou t
t here t han we are catching . What we are seeing now is all so
poor ly done . I w onde r w hat t he real exper ts a re doing - t he
one w ho really know how a compu ter work s ."
11. Which feat ur e of compute rs m akes compu ter t hef t possi-
ble ?
( A) They ar e fast , flexible and accur ate .
( B) They usually "feels good" .
( C) They have no conscience .
( D) They ar e honest .
12. It is hard to catch comput er criminals because
( A) compu ters forget who used them .
( B) compu ter criminals sel dom bea r wit ness or leave
evidence .
( C) compu ter criminals don’t use weapons .
・ 17 7 ・
 ( D) compu ters simply do what they a re told .
13. A cer tain head t eller a t a New Y ork City bank was ex-
posed w hen
( A) h is na me was found i n illegal ga mbling record s .
( B) he was r eplacing the missing money from someone
else’s accoun t .
( C) a custome r questioned t he balance in h is accoun t .
( D) t he police broke up an illegal gambling oper ation .
14. Accordi ng to t he pas sage, w hich of t he following migh t
explain the reasons for som e ot he r compute r crimes ?
( A) Personal jealousey . ( B) Revenge .
( C) P rofes sional jealou sy . ( D ) Thir ty days’no tice .
15. What concl usion can a reader dr aw from t he passage ?
( A) Comp ute r criminals ar e minor employees .
( B) Of all cri me, compu ter t hef t is but " t he tip of t he
iceberg" .
( C) Comput er crimes are all so poorly done .
(D) There is more compu ter c rime out t here commit-
ted by r eal expe rts .

Passage D

Occasional self medication has always been par t of

normal living . The m aking and selling of drugs has a long
history and is closely linked , like medical practice itself,
with belief i n magic . O nly during t he last hundred years or
so has t he developmen t of scien tific techniques m ade it pos-
・ 17 8 ・
sible for som e of t he causes of symp toms t o be unde rstood ,
so t hat mor e accur ate diagnosis has become possib le . T he
doctor is now able to follo w up t he correct diagnosis of many
ill nes ses wit h specific t reat men t of t heir cau ses . In many
o t her illnes ses , of which t he causes r emain unknow n , he is
still limited , like t he unqualified prescri ber , to t he t reat-
m en t of sympt oms . The doct or is tr ained to decide when t o
t reat sympt oms only and when t o att ack the cause: t his is
t he essen tial differ ence between medical prescribi ng and self
m edica tion .
T he advance of technology has brough t abou t much
progress in some fields of medicine , including t he develop-
m en t of scien tific drug t he rapy . In many count ries public
healt h organiza tion is improvi ng , and people ’s nu tritional
standa rds have risen . Parallel wit h s uch beneficial t rends are
t wo which have an adve rse effect . O ne is t he use of h igh
pr es sure adver tising by t he pha rmaceutical industry , w hich
has t ended t o influence bo th patients and doct or s and has led
t o t he ove r use of drugs gene rally . T he o t her is the eme r-
gence of t he seden tary ① society wit h its fault y ways of life:
lack of exer cise, over eating , uns uit able eating , insuffi-
cien t sleep , excessive smoking and dri nking . People with
disorde rs arising from fault y habits s uch as t hese , as well as
from unhappy humman relationsh ips , often resor t to self

① sede n ta ry〔 se dn t ri〕 静止 的

・ 17 9 ・
medication and so add t he taking pharm aceu ticals to t he list .
A dver tise rs go to great len th s to catch t his ma rket .
16. Which of t hese does t he w riter No t say ?
(A ) Peop le have always taken drugs from time t o
tim e .
( B) Medical practice has been linked with a belief in
magic .
(C) U p to a h undr ed years ago , all drugs we re use-
less .
( D) D rugs have been sold for a very long time .
17. Which of t he follo wing is nea rest in meani ng t o‘ symp-
t om’?
( A) The cau se of an illness .
( B) A ny k ind of drug .
( C) A change in t he body indicating an ill nes s .
( D) The pain produced by any kind of ill ness .
18. Which of t he follo wing is t rue ?
( A) Today t he causes of all symp toms ar e unde rstood .
( B) Today accurate diagnosis of all ill nes ses is possi-
be .
(C) When doct ors do no t understand t he cause of an
illness , t hey t reat the symp toms .
( D) Doctors never tr eat symp t om s unless t hey unde r-
stand t he causes of an illness .
19. Which of t he follo wi ng words could best replace‘ diag-
nosis’?
・ 18 0 ・
 ( A) t reat men t ( B) identification
( C) for ecast (D) prescrip tion
20. By " peop le’s nu t ritional standards have risen " the writ-
er means that people .
( A) ar e eating bett er food
( B) are eati ng less food
( C) ar e eating mor e food
( D) are healthier t han before

・ 18 1 ・
 Unit 18

Passage A

M r . Robin son had been t hinking abou t it for a long

time . Cou ld he afford it or couldn’t he ? His wife wan ted a
new wash ing m ach ine, t hough he couldn ’t see w ha t was
w rong wit h t he old one , so she w ould almost cer tain ly make
a fuss about him spending money on " expensive luxuries " .
H e coul d just hear her saying it . O n t he ot her hand , if he
waited much longe r , prices w ould go up again and he’d be e-
ven less ab le t o afford it . H e’d st udied t he catalogues and
brochures① and had a fairly clear idea of w hat he wan ted .
All righ t , he’d do it : he’d buy himself a hi fi ② ou tfit !③
So t he nex t Sat urday morning he walked i nt o his local
radio deale r’s , firmly pushing any though ts t hat he might be
mak ing a mistake t o t he back of his mi nd .
H e was greeted by smoot h looking gentleman in a
sma rt suit . M r . Robinson explained that he wan ted t o buy a
reasonable h i fi set not hing t oo expensive, bu t good e-
nough t o play r ecords wit h a fair degree of realism .
T he sales man s miled in a superior way and led M r .
Robinson t o seve ral shelves of glea ming record player s and

① b rochur e〔 br u u 〕 n . 小 册子
② hi fi〔 h ai f ai〕 a . 高保真 度的
③ ou tfi t〔 a u tfit〕 装备

・ 18 2 ・
amp lifie rs . M r . Robinson was ast ounded w hen he looked at
t he price t ags; it seem ed t hat he had under estimated by a
la rge ma rgin t he cost of all t he thi ng s he wan ted . T he sales-
m an lau nched in to a se ries of highly technical explanations
of t he m erits of va riou s pieces of equipmen t , none of w hich
M r . Robinson could follo w . M r . Robinson hesitan tly int er-
rup ted him , and as ked if t he re was perhaps som ethi ng a lit-
tle cheaper he could look at . The salesman sniffed , m ade
some dispa ragi ng ① rem ark s abou t sound quality , and took
his cust om er t o an obscure pa r t of t he shop wher e t here
wer e a lo t of boxes with knob s and switches . The salesman
indicated t hese , implied t hat t hey wer e all much t he sa me,
and left Mr . Robinson t o choose t he most impressive loo-
k ing box .
M r . Robin son par ted wit h ￡80 , looked regr etfu lly at
t he shelves of shini ng equipm en t he coun ldn’t afford , and
went home t o face his wife .
1. M r . Robinson had been th inking abou t .
( A ) buying a new washing machine for a long ti me
(B ) w ha t h is wife said for a long time
( C) buying himself a hi fi out fit for a long tim e
( D ) w hether t he old was hing machine coul d w or k for a
long time
2. M r . Robinson made up h is mind t o buy himself a hi fi
ou tfit .
( A ) because he was afraid that his wife migh t compel
him to buy a new washing machi ne

① d is pa r agi ng〔dis p ri d in〕 a。 贬低的

・ 18 3 ・
 (B ) because he was in great need for it
( C) because he was afr aid that prices would go up
(D) because he w as afr aid t hat his wife would make a
fus s abou t w hat he was going to buy
3. There was a change in t he sales man ’s at tit ude t owards
M r . Robinson because .
( A ) M r . Robinson asked too m any questions and he
lost h is patience
( B) M r . Robi nson did no t understand his highly tech ni-
cal explana tion
( C) M r . Robi nson i nte rrupted h im
( D ) M r . Robinson could no t afford t o buy somet hing
very expen sive
4. When Mr . Robinson left t he shop .
( A ) he regr et ed t hat he did not buy any t hing
(B ) he r egreted t ha t he lost ￡ 80
( C) he r egreted t hat he cou ld no t afford t o buy some-
t hing mor e expensive
( D ) he regr eted t hat h is wife might make a fus s abou t
w hat he bough t
5. The au thor of t his passage seem to be .
( A ) in favour of t he sales man
(B ) impar tial
( C) in favour of Mr . Robinson
( D ) critical of the salesman

Passage B
Summe rs with father we re always enjoyable . Swim-
ming , hiking , boa ting , fis hing—t he day s were not long e-
・ 18 4 ・
nough to contain all of our activities . The re neve r seemed t o
be enough tim e t o go t o church , wh ich dist urbed some
friends and relations . Accu sed of neg lecting t his pa rt of our
education , my fa ther instit u ted a summe r school for my
bro t her and me . H oweve r , t his summ er course i ncluded
ancient hist ory , w hich Papa felt our schools neglected , and
navigation , in w hich we first had a formal exa mination in
t he dining room , par t of w hich consisted of tying sever al
knots in a given time limit . Then we were each sepa rately
sent on w hat was referr ed t o as a cruise in my fat her’s 18
foot k nockabou t , s pending t he nigh t on board , and loaded
dow n , accordi ng t o my mo ther , wit h enough food for a
week . I r eme mber t hat on my cruise I was required to for-
m ally plot our course, using t he tide table, even t hough our
goal was an island I cou ld see quite clear ly across t he wate r
in t he distance .
6. What was t he original reason for holding t he summe r
school ?
(A ) Friends and relatives though t t hat t he children
should learn r eligion .
(B ) T he fat he r wanted t he ch ildren to lear n more abou t
religion .
(C ) T he childr en got poor grades in t heir regu la r
school .
( D ) T he regular school teache rs neglected the chil dr en .
7. The purpose of t he cruise men tioned in the pas sage was
to .
( A ) have fun
(B ) test t he aut hor’s sailing abilit y
・ 18 5 ・
 ( C) rewa rd t he aut hor for completing summer school
( D ) get t o t he island
8. Why did t he aut hor have t o plo t the course of her cruise ?
( A ) She had to demonstr ate her abilit y t o do so .
(B ) She was afr aid of getting lost .
( C) The coast was dangerou s
( D ) T he tides we re st rong
9. H ow long did t he aut hor’s cruise last ?
( A ) all summe r ( B) a week
( C) ove rnight ( D ) one day , morning till night
10. Apparently a knockabout is .
( A ) an island ( B) a cruise
( C) a boat ( D ) a sea man’s kno t

Passage C
T he ancien t Gr eeks wer e much int erested in speculating
on t he na tur e of t he w orld about t he m and consequen tly suc-
ceeded in evolving many fascinating t heories .
I t was two Gr eek th inke rs , Leucuppu s of Miletu s and
De mocrit us of Abdera , who first decided t hat su bstances
could no t be broken up indefinitely , t hat even t ually t he pa r-
ticles ob tai ned woul d be so s mall t hey could be divided no
fa rt her . They concluded t hat ther e wer e a number of varie-
ties of such par ticles , each making up a differ en t sub st ance;
by combining t hem i n diffe ren t ways , still o t her su bstances
w ou ld result . T he Gr eek w ord for " indivisible" is at omos ,
so t hey nam ed t he theoretically indivisib le par ticles at oms .
T heir t heory did not win favor among t he Gr eeks bu t it
was resurrected in 1803 by the British chemist John Dalton .
・ 18 6 ・
H e decided t hat the facts u ncove red by t he still new science
of chemist ry could best be exp lained by supposing each
chemical elem en t t o be formed of tiny indivisible pa rticles .
Each ele men t t hu s had its o w n characteristic t ype of par ti-
cle , and by va ryi ng t he manner of combination of t hese, all
existing su bstances could be constructed . F ollowing t he old
G reek t heory , Dalton called the par ticles at om s—and t his
time t he at omic t heory m et wit h approval .
In 1896 it was discovered t hat at om s a re not indivisible,
t hat cer tain complicated a toms br eak up spontaneously , lib-
erating par ticles far sm alle r t han at om s . T hen scien tists
lear ned ho w to br eak up a toms in t he laborat ory . Today
man’s w hole fu tur e hinges upon t he m anne r in which at oms
break up and fuse toget he r . But still t he nam e is at om—
"indivisible" .
11. T he passage sho ws t hat t he ancient Greek s were i nte r-
ested in t he .
( A ) origin of t he w or ld
( B) nat ur e of t he univer se
( C) nat ure of t he physical world
( D) nat ure and origin of life
12. T heir t heories wer e probab ly t he res ult of .
( A ) observation (B) speculation
( C) experimentation ( D ) boty ( A ) and ( B)
13. T he t wo G reeks concluded t hat .
( A ) only one type of indivisib le par ticle exists
( B) a numbe r of t ypes of indivisible pa rticles exist
( C) all s ubstances a re const ructed from t he same type
of pa rticle
・ 18 7 ・
 ( D) bo th ( A ) and ( C)
14. Dalt on believed t hat t he atomic t heory explained
.
( A ) t he facts uncovered by chemist ry
( B) t he r es ults of h is experim en ts
( C) w hy some atoms were not stab le
( D) none of t he above
15. T he au t hor says t hat man’s fu t ure hinges on how
.
( A ) atoms br eak up and fuse toget he r
( B) pa r ticles s maller than atoms br eak up
( C) at oms disin tegrate spontaneously
( D) che mical elements fuse int o new substances

Passage D

O ne of t he most fascinating th ings abou t television is

t he size of t he audience . A novel can be on t he " best seller"
list wit h a sale of fewer t han 100 , 000 copies , bu t a popu la r
T V s ho w migh t have 70 million viewers . T V can make any-
t hing or anyone well-know n over nigh t .
T his is t he pri nciple behind " quiz or " game " shows ① ,
w hich p ut ordinary people on T V to play a ga me for prizes
and money . A quiz show can make anyone a star , and it can
give away t housands of dolla rs just for fun . But all of t his
money can cr eate proble ms . F or instance , in t he 1950s , quiz
shows wer e ve ry popula r in the U .S . and al most eve ryone
watched t he m . Cha rles Van Doren , an Englis h inst ructor ,

① " quiz" or " game" shows : ( 美 ) ( 广播、电 视中的 ) 智 力竞 赛节目 。

・ 18 8 ・
beca me rich and fa mous af ter winning money on sever al
shows . H e even had a car ee r as a television pe rsonality . Bu t
one of t he lose rs proved t hat V an Doren was cheati ng . I t
t urned ou t t hat t he sho w’s producer s w ho were pulling t he
strings , gave t he answers to the most popular con testents
beforehand . W hy ? Because if t he audience didn’t like t he
person who w on t he game , they t urned t he show off . T he
res ult of t his cheating was a huge scandal . Based on his sto-
ry , a movie under t he title " Q uiz sho w" is on 40 years later .
V an Dor en is no longer involved wit h T V . Bu t game
shows are still her e, t hough t hey ar en’t taken as seriously .
In fact , some of t hem try t o be as ridiculous as pos sible .
T her e ar e sho ws t hat send st ranger s on vaca tion trips t o-
get her , t hat t ry t o cause newly-m arried coup les t o fight on
T V , or that punish losers by humiliating t he m . T he ent er-
tainmen t no w is to see what people will do just to be on T V .
People still win money , bu t t he real prize is t o be in fron t of
an audience of millions .
16. T he sale of novels a re talked abou t in comparison wit h
( A ) t he size of T Vs .
( B) t he number of T V viewer s .
( C) t he sale of " best seller s" .
( D) t he number of T V audiences .
17. In t he Char les quiz scandal, w ho , according t o the pas-
sage, is to be blamed most ?
( A ) O ne of the losers .
( B) The sho ws producers .
( C) Char les Van Doren himself .
( D) His audience .
・ 18 9 ・
18. Cha rles Van Doren was men tioned in order t o prove t hat
( A ) a quiz sho w coul d m ake anyone a star .
( B) ga me shows cheat audiences .
( C ) t he cheati ng of his quiz sho w r es ults in a huge
scandal .
( D) he became rich afte r winning money on sever al
sho ws .
19. In t he last pa ragr aph , t he word " seriously " can most
probably be replaced by
( A ) import an tly . ( B) honestly .
( C) solomn ly . ( D) formally .
20. T he w rit er look s upon game shows on T V
( A ) u nconcer nedly . ( B) hopefully .
( C) se riously . ( D) critically .

・ 19 0 ・
 Unit 19

Passage A
A British sociologist has advanced the t heory t hat many
w ork ing class children ar e un successfu l at school because
of t he nat ure of t heir language .They use w hat he terms a "
rest ricted " code of s peech , w her eas most teachers use an "e-
laborat ed" code, w hich is familiar to middle class chil dr en .
Working clas s language is a language of personal ex-
periece and direct comm and , r at her t han of rationalization
and distinction between s ubtleties . In school, howeve r , t he
la tter abilities are de manded of childr en . Middle clas s chil-
dren , who have been brough t up in such a way as t o enable
t hem to r espond t o argum en t and r easoning , are able to cope
with t he classroom sit uation much better than their w orking
clas s con temporaries , who a re fr equen tly at a loss t o un-
de rstand t he implica tion of w hat t heir teache r is saying .
So it seem s that working class childr en fail to take full
advantage of the educational syste m , not because t hey are
less brigh t t han middle class childr en , bu t because t he lan-
guage of the class room is alien to them .
1. What do you know from t he first par agrap h ?
( A ) Working clas s children do less well at school in
comparison wit h t he middle clas s children .
( B) Middle clas s children do as well as w ork ing class
children at school .
( C) School teachers and middle class children bea r
・ 19 1 ・
 les s simila rit y in language .
( D ) School teache rs and working clas s children bea r
mor e similarit y i n language .
2. Middle class ch ildren do bett er at school because
.
( A ) they have lea rned much more t han working class
children before t hey go t o school
(B ) t hey ar e brigh ter t han w orki ng class children
( C) school teache rs give them more hel p
( D ) they can under stand t heir teachers bet ter t han t he
working class chil dr en in class
3. The w ord‘ alien’i n t he last sent ence means .
( A ) difficu lt t o unde rstand (B) str ange
( C) new ( D) stupid
4. The gap between working class children and t heir teach-
e rs can be na rrowed only by .
( A ) giving t hem more hel p
(B ) giving them mor e time to review t heir lessons
( C) improving t heir language
( D ) giving them more homew ork t o do
5. The au thor’s m ain purpose in wirting t his a rticle is to
.
( A ) a rgue a belief
(B ) describe a phenomenon
( C) be ente rtaining
( D ) propose a solu tion

Passage B
U nder proper conditions , sound waves will be r eflect ed
・ 19 2 ・
from a hillside or ot he r such ob st ruction . Sound tr avels at
t he r ate of abou t one fif th of a mile pe r second .If t he hill is
eleven hundr ed feet away , it takes t wo seconds for t he
sound t o t r avel to t he hill and back . Thu s , by timing t he in-
terval bet ween a sound and its reflection ( t he echo ) , you
can estim ate t he distance to an ob st ruction .
During World War Ⅱ t he Britis h used a practical appli-
cation of t his princip le to det ect German plances on t heir
way t o bomb London long befor e the enemy was nea r t he
ta rget . They used radio waves instead of sound waves , si nce
radio waves can penet rate fog and clouds . The ou tn umber ed
Royal Air Force ( RAF ) always seem ed to t he puzzled Ge r-
m ans t o be lying i n wait at t he righ t tim e and never t o be
surprised . It was radio echoes more t han any t hing else t hat
w on t he Bat tle of Britain .
Since t he r adio waves we re used t o t ell t he direction in
w hich to send the RA F plances and t he distance to send
t hem ( t heir range of flight , in ot he r words) , t he device was
called radio directing and r anging , and from t he i nitials t he
w ord radar was coined .
6. Sound waves reflected from a hill can be used t o estimate
t he .
( A ) height of t he hill
(B ) speed of sound
( C) distance t o t he hill
( D ) in tensit y of sound
7. The estimate is based on t he .
( A ) direction of t he hill
(B ) accep ted speed of sound
・ 19 3 ・
 ( C) in terval bet ween sound and echo
( D ) bot h ( B) and ( C)
8. Pr actical app lication of t his principle r esu lted in .
( A ) new electronic in strum en ts for p lanes
(B ) a r adio dir ecting and r anging device
( C) new radio sets for RAF bombers
( D ) an elect ronic detecti ng device
9. Radar enabled t he Englis h t o .
( A ) detect German planes on t heir way t o London
(B ) dir ect the out numbered RAF planes effectively
( C) confuse German bomber pilots
( D ) bot h ( A ) and ( B)
10. T he British used radio waves becau se t hey .
( A ) wer e mor e exact t han sound waves
( B) could no t be detected
( C) could penetr ate fog and clouds
( D) wer e easier t o u se t han sound waves

Passage C

T hough the odds m ay be bar ely in t heir favor , every

coup le who goes t o t he alta r ① believes t hat t hey will make
t hat t rip only once in t heir lives . They want t he day to be
perfect , and t hey ar e as king for much more t han good
weat he r . T hey want t he most beau tiful clot hes , t he freshest
flowe rs , nor he r family w ho will foot t he bill—is in any
mood t o economize .
A quick look at any bride m agazine will r eveal t hat

① al te r〔’ l t 〕 祭坛 , ( 基 督教堂 ) 圣 坛

・ 19 4 ・
plent y of at tr active goods and services compet e for a shar e of
t he wedding budget . Besides t he obvious choices of rings ,
dr es ses , flo wers , and phot ographs , t her e a re t he less appa r-
en t expenses: a lavis h cake, a r ehea rsal dinner , a r ecep tion ,
music for bot h the cere mony and t he r ecep tion , tips , and e-
ven napkins and match books prin ted with t he couple ’s
nam es and t he wedding date .
As t he arr ange men ts are gene rally complicated , t here
ar e plen ty of services t hat can be hired t o help wit h the p lan-
ning and execu tion of t he every aspect of t he wedding : p lan-
ning t he phot ogr aphs , selecting t he wedding rings , choosing
t he flo wers , picki ng t he honeymoon spo t, and so on . O ne
magazine lists over 350 such pamphlets that can be had for
t he as king , pu blished of cour se by bu sinesses w ho have
somet hing t o offer . Con sidering t ha t weddings do more t han
12 billion dollars wor th of busines s ann ually in t he US a-
lone, such activit y isn’s surprising .
What is surprising , is t hat no one company dominates
t he indust ry . It seem s t hat w hen peop le plan for a day as
special to t hem as a wedding , t hey r esist standardization .
T hey turn instead to t he sm all local s upp lie rs k no wn t o
t hem or to t heir friends . Family members or friends often
se rve as phot ographe rs , catere rs and musician s . T his no t
only helps bring t he weddi ng cost dow n , it makes it more
personal .
What abou t t he couple t hat doesn’t wan t to take in t his
billion dolla r indust ry ? T hey can go t o cit y hall and get ma r-
ried for less t han t he price of ha mburger .
11. What does t he expression " t his billion dollar indust ry"
・ 19 5 ・
 refer to ?
( A ) The budgets of weddings .
( B) The busines s of weddings .
( C) The planning and execu tion of weddings .
( D) The high wedding expenses .
12. Which of t he follo wing is no t men tioned ?
( A ) Chur ches . ( B) Car s .
( C) Go wn s and suits . ( D ) Ri ng s .
13. Some couples don’t wan t to take in t his billion dollar in-
du st ry simply because
( A ) t hey r esist standardization .
( B ) t hey can’t afford more t han t he price of a ha m-
burger .
( C) t hey ar e not in favor of odds .
(D) t hey ar e surprised a t t he complicat ed arr ange-
m en ts .
14. In paragraph 3 , t he figure 350 refer s t o
( A ) how m any married couples ar e listed in a m aga-
zine .
(B ) ho w m any magazi nes a re pub lished to provide
wedding se rvices .
( C) how many services a re arr anged for weddings .
(D) how many publications a re in troduced by one
wedding magazine .
15. T he w riter ’s at tit ude to wards t he annual 12-billion-
dolla r busines s of wedding appea rs to be
( A ) positive . ( B) negative .
( C) indiffer en t . ( D ) fair .

・ 19 6 ・
Passage D
T he food we eat seems t o have profound effects on our
healt h . Alt hough science has m ade enormous steps in mak-
ing food mor e fit to eat , it has , at the sa me time , m ade
many foods unfit t o eat . Some resea rch has show n t hat per-
haps eigh t y percen t of all human ill nesses a re r elated to diet
and for ty per cent of cancer is related t o t he diet as well , es-
pecially cancer of t he colon . Diffe ren t cu lt ur es ar e mor e like-
ly to cause cer tain differ en t illnesses because of the food t hat
is cha racteristic in t hese cu lt ur es . That food is r elated t o ill-
nes s is not a new discovery . In 1945 , abou t 35 year s ago ,
government researcher s r ealized t hat nit rat es , commonly
used t o preserve color in m ea ts , and ot he r food additives ,
caused cance r . Yet , t hese car cinogenic additives r emain in
our food , and it becomes mor e difficult all t he time to know
w hich t hings on t he packagi ng labels of processed food are
helpful or harmful . The additives w hich we eat a re not all so
dir ect . Farm ers of ten give penicillin t o beef and living ani-
m als , and because of t his , penicillin has been fou nd in t he
milk of tr ea ted cows . Sometimes similar drugs ar e given t o
ani mals not for medical purposes , bu t for fi nancial r easons .
T he farm ers are simply trying to fat ten t he anim als in order
t o ob tain a higher price on t he ma rket . Alt hough t he F ood
and Dr ug A dminist ration ( FDA ) has t ried repeatedly t o con-
t rol t hese procedur es , t he practices con ti nue .
16. What is t he best possible title of the pas sage ?
( A ) Drug ( B) Cance r
( C) F ood ( D ) H ealth
・ 19 7 ・
17. Which of t he follo wing stat ements is N O T t rue ?
( A ) Drugs are always given t o anim als for medical r ea-
sons .
( B) Some of t he additives in our food ar e added t o t he
food itself and som e a re given t o t he living ani-
mals .
( C) Resear che rs have k no wn abou t t he potential dan-
ger s of food additives for over th irt y five yea rs .
( D) F ood m ay cause for ty percen t of cancer in t he
w or ld .
18. H ow has science done som eth ing harmful to mankind ?
( A ) Because of science, diseases caused by pollut ed
food have been vir tually eliminated .
( B) It has caused a lack of i nforma tion concerning t he
value of food .
( C) Because of t he application of science, some poten-
tially harmful substances have been added t o
food .
( D) The scien tists have preserved t he color of meats ,
b ut not of vegetab les .
19. What ar e nit rates used for ?
( A ) They preserve flavor in packaged foods .
( B) They pr eserve t he color of meats .
( C) They a re t he objects of resear ch .
( D) They cause the animals t o becom e fat ter .
20. T he w ord‘ ca rcinogenic’most nearly means‘
’.
( A ) t roub le making ( B) color r etaining
( C) money making ( D ) cancer causing
・ 19 8 ・
 Unit 20

Passage A
U ntil very r ecen tly , t he songs of colonial A merica were
know n only in small , isolated ar eas of the U nited States .
T hey we re handed dow n wit hin a fa mily circle , and t here
was no way for t he m t o become know n ove r the w hole coun-
t ry or t o be real par t of t he nation’s cu ltur e . Si nce each gen-
eration tended to rem embe r its o wn songs and to forget t he
older songs it once knew , much of t he nation’s song heritage
may have disappear ed .
T he fir st step to ward preserving Am erica’s song herit-
age was taken by schola rs , collect ors and resear che rs w ho
gat her ed and st udied songs; nex t , singers becam e in ter est-
ed , and soon folk songs coul d be heard nationlly on radio .
Finally , A me rica ’s rediscover ed musical heritage spread t o
t he schools , becoming par t of every child’s expe rience .
M any colonial songs were rediscover ed in t he soute rn
A ppalach ian Mountains . U nive rsities , t he Libra ry of Con-
gress and many individual collect or s added t o the t reasury of
song . In some par ts of t he nation old Sco ttish , Irish , Welsh
or English songs had not been pushed ou t of existence by
newer mu sic . T her e collect ors found t en , t wen ty , even
t hir ty ver sion s of t he sam e ballad———sometimes wit h a dif-
feren t t une or st ory , bu t always r ecognizable and alway s o-
rigination in t he sa me old song . In a few isolat ed places , t he
ballads still existed in what was probab ly t he form sung in
・ 19 9 ・
colonial days ; but si nce t he songs were t ransmitted orally ,
individual variations have probably c rep t in .
1. U ntil r ecen tly , colonial song s wer e preserved by
.
( A ) popu lar r adio broadcasts
(B ) recordings in t he Libr ary of Congr es s
( C) classes in schools
( D ) fa milies w ho pas sed t hem dow n
2. The first step in prese rving colonial songs was taken by
.
( A ) radio stations ( B) collectors r esea rchers
( C) si ngers ( D) old colonial families
3. Old ballads t hat managed t o s urvive were often found in
.
( A ) unrecognizab le ve rsions
(B ) exactly t heir original forms
( C) versions dealing wit h curr en t even ts
( D ) 20 t o 30 differ en t ve rsions
4. Many additional songs wer e found by .
( A ) universit y researcher s
(B ) Libr ary of Congres s collect ors
( C) individual collect or s
( D ) all of t he above
5. We canno t tell whet her any songs are exactly as t hey
wer e in colonial days because .
( A ) ther e a re m any versions of eve ry song
(B ) individual singers probably varied t he songs
( C) we have only t he modern versions
( D ) t he songs were w rit ten dow n in ve ry rough fashion
・ 20 0 ・
 Passage B
T he poin t of depa rt ure for an understanding of t he posi-
tion of t he working class fat her in h is home is t hat he is
‘ t he m aste r in his ow n house’. Th is he is by long r ecog-
nised custom , and neit her he nor his wife w ould wan t t he
cust om changed . S he will oft en r efe r to him before ot he rs as
‘ M r .W .’or‘ t he master’. This does not mean t hat he is an
ab solu te ru ler or that he gets or expects his ow n way i n eve-
ry th ing . Being the maste r often goes wit h a car efu lness t o
help and be con sider ate, to be‘ a good hu sband’. In t he lazy
or insen sitive, it m ay go wit h a marked selfis hness of near
cruelty . In eit her case, t here is likely t o be an obedience t o
him as t he m ain bread winner and heavy worker , as , even
t oday , he re mai ns the chief connection wit h t he out er w or ld
w hich brings the money in to t he house .
T her e is of ten a kind of roughness in his m anner w hich
a middle clas s wife w ould find unbearable . A wife will say
how w orried she is because somet hing is wrong , and becau-
ses‘ t he master will be mad’w hen he gets hom e; she kno ws
he may shou t at her severely or in a few cases may even beat
her , especially if he has had a couple of dri nks on t he way
from work . If middle aged wives say t o a you nger one,
‘ He’s good t o you , isn’t he ?’t hey mean t hat he is no t likely
t o become violen t in word or act , or t hat he does not leave
her alone almost every night , or t hat he will help her out if
she gets in to difficulties with t he housekeeping allo wance ① .

① all owa nce〔 la u ns〕 允许 , 津 贴

・ 20 1 ・
6. The views on w orking class h usband and wife rela-
tions hips described in t his passage seem to show t hat
.
( A ) hus bands and wives wish for change
(B ) only h usbands wish for change
( C) only wives wish for change
( D ) neit her husbands nor wives wis h for change
7. A w orking clas s wife may r efe r t o her husband as M r .
W because .
( A ) his nam e is Willia m
(B ) he likes to have h is ow n way
( C) t he title r eflects h is position in the family
( D ) t his is t he way she wan ts ot her peop le t o r efe r t o
him
8. The family is likely to do as t he fat he r says because
.
( A ) he is sometimes ra ther cr uel
(B ) of his unbea rab le manner
( C) it is usually he w ho earns t he money t o keep them
( D ) he is t he only one w ho works
9. The wife’s anxiet y may be caused by fear t hat .
( A ) somet hing has happened to annoy her hu sband
(B ) her husband has a rough manner
( C) her hus band s hou ts at her and beats her
( D ) he r husband gets drunk
10. A h usband w ho is considered‘ good’ .
( A ) gives his wife p lent y of housekeepi ng money
( B) does a lot of housework
( C) keeps h is wife company w hen he can
・ 20 2 ・
 ( D) does all he can for his wife becau se s he is so help-
les s

Passage C
T he economy of t he U nited States after 1952 was t he e-
conomy of a well fed , almost fully employed people . De-
s pite occasional ala rms , the coun t ry escaped any post war de-
pr es sion and lived in a state of boom . A n economic survey of
t he yea r 1955 , a typical year of the 1950’s , m ay be t ypical as
ill ustr ating t he r apid economic gro wt h of t he decade . T he
national ou t put was valued at 10 percen t above t ha t of 1954
( 1955 ou t put was estim ated a t 392 billion dolla rs ) . The pro-
duction of manufact urer s was about 40 percen t mor e t han it
had aver aged in t he yea rs immediately following World Wa r
Ⅱ . The coun try’s business s pen t about 30 billion dolla rs for
new factories and m ach inery . National income available for
spendi ng was almost a t hird greater t han it had been in
1950 . Con sumer s spen t abou t 256 billion dollars ; t ha t is a-
bout 700 million dolla rs a day , or about twent y five million
dolla rs eve ry hour , all a round t he clock . Sixt y five million
people held jobs and only a lit tle mor e t han t wo million wan-
ted jobs bu t cou ld no t fi nd t he m . Only agricu lt ur e com-
p lai ned t hat it was not s hari ng in t he boom . To some ob-
server s t his was an ominous echo of t he mid 1920’s . As
fa rmers’ shar e of t heir products declined , m arketi ng costs
rose . But t her e wer e, among t he obse rvers of t he national e-
conomy , a few who were no t as confiden t as t he majority .
T hose few seemed t o fea r that the boom could not last long
and would even t ually lead t o t he opposite——— depres sion .
・ 20 3 ・
11. What is t he best title of t he passage ?
( A ) The A gricult ural T rend s of 1950’s .
( B) The U ne mployment Rate of 1950’s
( C) U .S . Economy in the 50’s
( D) The Feder al Budget of 1952
12. In Line 3 , the word‘ boom’could best be r eplaced by
.
( A ) nea rby explosion
( B) t hunderous noise
( C) gene ral public support
( D) r apid economic growt h
13. It can be inferr ed from t he pas sage that most people in
the U nited States in 1955 viewed t he national economy
wit h an air of .
( A ) confidence ( B) confusion
( C) disappoin tm en t ( D) suspicion
14. Which of t he following were L E AST sa tisfied wit h t he
national economy in t he 1950’s ?
( A ) Economists ( B) Farm ers
( C) P olitician s ( D) St eelworke rs
15. T he pas sage states that income available for spending in
the U .S . was greater in 1955 t han in 1950 . H ow much
is it ?
( A ) 60 % ( B) 50 %
( C) 33 % ( D ) 90 %

Passage D
T hroughout her w orking life, a ship like a mot or car
must be serviced regular ly if she is t o rem ain efficient . Afte r
・ 20 4 ・
a period at sea she must be dry docked for survey and any
necessary repairs must be made . Ther e a re also i nstances
w hen a s hip mu st be conver ted from being one kind of ca rri-
er to anot her . Most of today’s oil, for exa mp le , is carried by
huge super tanker s . The sm alle r tanke rs , many of w hich
ar e still in good condition , can be conve rted i nt o bulk ca rri-
ers for the tr an spor t of s ugar , coal or ore .
Conversion or repair work is carried ou t in a dry dock ,
a h uge hole cu t int o t he ground and lined with concr et e . A t
one end a re large gates separ ating t he dock from t he rive r or
sea . When these gat es are opened , wate r pours in t o t he
dock and fills it . A ship can t hen en ter t he dock , wher e it is
ca refully secured in an uprigh t position .
When t he ship is positioned inside t he dock t he gates
ar e closed and the water is p umped ou t . The ves sel slowly
set tles on to w ooden block s . Wooden s hor es ar e put i n posi-
tion between t he ship and t he sides of t he dock to pr even t
her from rolling over . Gr eat car e is taken t o make s ure t hat
t he ship r ests evenly on t he keel block s t o preven t dam age
being done .
As soon as t he s hip is securely positioned , repair or
conve rsion w ork can begin on her hull ① or superst ructur e ② .
F or smaller ship s a less elabor ate procedure is pos sible .
T hey may be dry docked by wi nching t hem up ③ a slip way
int o a work shed .

① hull〔h l〕 船壳
② sup er str uct u re〔sjup s tr s tr k t 〕 船玄甲 板以 上部分
③ wi nch up〔win t 〕 v t . 吊起

・ 20 5 ・
16. In w hat way is a ship like a mo tor car ?
( A ) It needs t o be serviced in a dry dock .
( B) It requir es r egular maint enance .
( C) I t can be conver ted .
( D) It has a long working life .
17. Why have m any s maller tanker s been conver ted int o
bulk ca rrier s ?
( A ) They need frequen t servicing .
( B) Most oil is no w ca rried by supe rt ankers .
( C) Ther e is a s hor tage of oil .
( D) They have on ly a s hor t w ork ing life .
18. F rom w ha t you have read from the pas sage, w ha t do
you t hink happens t o a dry dock when t he repairs t o a
ship have been completed ?
( A ) The water is pumped ou t .
( B) The gates a re opened and t he wa ter pour s in .
( C) I t is float ed ou t t o sea .
( D) It is conve rted i nt o ano ther kind of dock .
19. H ow is a ship kep t uprigh t in a dry dock ?
( A ) It is filled wit h concr ete .
( B) The dock is lined wit h concr ete .
( C) I t is shored up wit h pieces of w ood .
( D) The keel block s a re r emoved .
20. T he word‘ service’in t his passage can be r eplaced by
.
( A ) r epair ( B) m end
( C) fill ( D) pain t

・ 20 6 ・
 Unit 21

Passage A
As t he pace of life con tinues to increase , w e ar e fast
losing t he ar t of r elaxation . O nce you ar e in t he habit of ru s-
h ing t hrough life , being on t he go from morning till night ,
it is ha rd t o slow dow n . But relaxation is es sential for a
healt hy mind and body .
Str es s is a nat ural par t of everyday life and t he re is no
way t o avoid it . In fact, it is no t t he bad t hing it is often
supposed to be . A cer tai n amoun t of st ress is vital to pro-
vide motivation and give purpose to life . It is only w hen t he
str es s gets ou t of cont rol t hat it can lead t o poor perform-
ance and ill health .
T he a moun t of st ress a person can wit hstand depends
ve ry much on t he i ndividual . Some people ar e not afraid of
str es s , and such char acte rs a re obviously prime material for
manage rial responsibilities . Ot hers lose hear t at t he first
signs of un usual difficulties . When exposed to st ress , in
w ha tever form , we react bot h che mically and physically . In
fact we m ake choice between " fligh t or fight " and in more
pri mitive days t he choices m ade the differ ence between life
or deat h . The crises we meet today ar e unlikely t o be so ex-
t rem e, bu t howeve r little t he st ress , it involves t he same re-
s ponse . I t is when such a reaction lasts long , t hrough con-
tinued exposure t o st ress , t ha t health becom es endange red .
Such se rious conditions as h igh blood press ure and hea r t dis-
・ 20 7 ・
eases have est ablished li nks with st ress . Since we canno t re-
move st res s from our lives ( it w ou ld be un wise t o do so even
if we could) , we need to find ways to deal with it .
1. People a re finding less and less tim e for r elaxing t he m-
selves because .
( A ) they do not know how to enjoy themselves
(B ) t hey do not believe t ha t r elaxation is impor tan t for
healt h
( C) t hey a re t ravelling fast all the time
( D ) t hey ar e becoming busie r with t heir w ork
2. According t o t he writer , t he most impor tant cha ract er for
a good manage r is his .
( A ) not feari ng st ress
(B ) knowing t he a rt of relaxation
( C) high sen se of responsibilit y
( D ) having con trol over pe rform ance
3. Which of t he following stat men ts is t rue ?
( A ) We can find some ways to avoid st r ess .
(B ) Str es s is always ha rmful to people .
( C) It is easy t o change t he habit of keeping oneself
busy wit h work .
( D ) Different people can wit hstand differ en t a moun t of
str es s .
4. In Pa ragr aph 3 , " such a r eaction " refers back t o
.
( A ) " m aking a choice between‘ fligh t or figh t’"
(B ) " r eaction to st ress bot h che mically and physically"
( C) " res ponding t o crises quickly"
( D ) " losing hear t at t he sign s of difficulties"
・ 20 8 ・
5. In t he last sen tence of the pas sage, " do so" refers to
.
( A ) " expose ourselves to st ress "
(B ) " find ways to deal wit h st res s"
( C) " remove st ress from our lives "
( D ) " establis h link s bet ween diseases and st ress "

Passage B
A re some peop le born clever , and ot hers born stupid ?
O r is in telligence developed by our environmen t and our ex-
periences ? St rangely enough , t he answer to bo th t hese ques-
tion s is yes . To some ex ten t our in telligence is given us at
birt h , and no amou nt of special education can make a genius
ou t of a child born wit h low i ntelligence . On the ot he r
hand , a child w ho lives in a boring environment will develop
his in telligence less t han one w ho lives in rich and varied
surroundings . Thus t he limits of a per son’s int elligence are
fixed at bir t h , bu t w het her or not he r eaches t hose limits
will depend on h is environment . T his view , no w held by
most exper ts , can be suppor ted in a numbe r of ways .
I t is easy to show that in telligence is t o some ex ten t
somet hing we ar e bor n with . The closer t he blood relation-
s hip between t wo people , t he closer they are likely to be in
intelligence . T hus if we take t wo unrelated people at ran-
dom from t he population , it is likely t hat their degrees of in-
telligence will be complet ely differ en t . If on t he o ther hand
we take two identical twins t hey will very likely be as intelli-
gent as each o ther . Relations like brot he rs and sisters , pa r-
en ts and childr en , u sually have similar int elligence, and t his
・ 20 9 ・
clea rly suggest t ha t in telligence depends on birt h .
Imagine now t hat we take t wo identical twins and pu t
t hem in differ en t environmen ts . We might send one, for ex-
ample, t o a universit y and t he o t her to a fact ory w here t he
w ork is boring . We woul d soon find diffe rences in intelli-
gence developing , and t his indica tes t hat environment as
well as birt h plays a par t . T his conclusion is also suggest ed
by t he fact t ha t peop le w ho love in close contact with each
o t her , b ut who are not rela ted at all, ar e likely to have simi-
lar degrees of in telligence .
6. Which of t hese sen tences best describes the w riter’s poin t
in Par agraph 1 ?
( A ) T o some ex tent , i ntelligence is given at bir th .
(B ) In telligence is developed by t he environmen t .
( C) Some people ar e born cleve r and o t her s born st u-
pid .
( D ) In telligence is fixed at bir t h , bu t is developed by
t he environmen t .
7. It is suggested in t his passage t hat .
( A ) unrela ted people ar e not likely t o have different in-
telligence
(B ) close relation usually have simila r intelligence
( C) the closer t he blood relationship between people,
the more differ en t t hey a re likely t o be in intelli-
gence
( D ) people w ho live in close contact wit h each ot he r are
not likely to have simila r degrees of i ntelligence
8. Bro t her s and sister s ar e likely t o .
( A ) have simila r int elligence
・ 21 0 ・
 (B ) have diffe ren t int elligence
( C) go t o t he sa me unive rsity
( D ) go to the sam e fact ory
9. In Pa ragr aph 1 ( line 6) , the word " s urroundings " means
.
( A ) in telligence ( B) life
( C) environments ( D) housing
10. T he best title for t his ar ticle woul d be .
( A ) O n In telligence
( B) W hat does In telligence M ean ?
( C) We ar e Born wit h In telligence
( D) Envirom en ts Play a Par t in Developing Intelli-
gence

Passage C
When Joh n West on awoke t hat morning , he r eme m-
bered t hat his mot her was going in to hospital . H e hadn’t
w orked out quite w ha t was w rong with her . H e knew ,
t hough , t hat she hadn’t been well for som e time now , and it
had become almost fa miliar to him to see he r eyes narro wed
in a sudden at tack of pai n , and her hand pressing against he r
hear t . Their ow n doctor , who she had finally gone to for
advice , had sen t her t o a specialist w ho k new all abou t t hese
t hings . H e had told he r t ha t just as soon as t here was a bed
for her , she would have to come in to his hospital w her e he
could look after her him self .
During t he week s since then t he pain s had com e eve r
more frequen tly , and t he narrowed eyes beca me an almost
permanent par t of her expression . A lways r at her sharp , she
・ 21 1 ・
 began losing her tempe r over lit tle t hings so t ha t John’s fa-
t he r kep t his t hough ts t o himself more and more . John , as
ready as pos sible to make allowances , tried t o t hink w hat it
w ou ld be like to have t oo thache all t he time and how bad
te mper ed t hat w ou ld make you .
So his mot her woul d go int o hospital for a few days .
H e was going t o stay wit h his A un t Daisy till she came
back , and his fat her would stay on at home by him self . Joh n
’s cou sin , Mona , was to come in and make t he bed and wash
t he pots and dust round no w and again . That was t he a r-
r ange men t , and John didn’t ca re much for it . A pa rt from
missing h is mot her ( and he was glad she was going away be-
cau se t hey woul d make her bet ter ) , he wasn’t very fond of
his A un t Daisy because s he was even more bad te mper ed
t han his mo t her .
11. M rs . Weston wen t t o see her doct or .
( A ) as soon as s he r ealized that somet hing was wrong
( B) only aft er he r husband advised he r t o
( C) a long time after t he t rou ble began
( D) w hen John as ked w hat was w rong wit h he r
12. What did M rs . West on’s ow n doct or decide to do ?
( A ) H e decided to get an exper t t o exa mine her .
( B) He decided to send her t o hospital .
( C) H e decided to t reat her hi mself .
( D) H e advised he r t o wait for a few week s .
13. M rs . Weston’s mor e frequent bad temper made her hus-
band .
( A ) become bad te mper ed , too
( B) spend les s and less time at hom e
・ 21 2 ・
 ( C) lose his temper mor e often with Joh n
( D) become more and more r eserved
14. H ow did John react t o his mot he r’s bad tempe r ?
( A ) H e tried to imagine himself in her place
( B) He t ried no t t o no tice it
( C) H e pret ended t hat he had t oo thache
( D) H e behaved himself as well as pos sible .
15. During M rs . Weston’s stay in hospital, .
( A ) John and his fat her we re t o look af ter themselves
( B) John’s cousin Mona was to look after him
( C) Joh n’s A unt Daisy was t o live wit h him and his fa-
t he r
( D) John’s cousin Mona was to look afte r t he house

Passage D

Social insects live in in tegrat ed ① communities w hich in

some ways a re simila r to human communities . In bot h t ypes
of communities t here is a division of labour . In insect socie-
ties cert ain insects are respon sible for reproduction ; t he
w orkers collect food while t he soldie rs defend the colony . In
t he same way h uman groups s uch as fa rmer s and s hopkeep-
ers have s pecialized functions in producing goods and provi-
ding services to t he community .
Insects and hum an societies ar e, also alike in t hat indi-
vidual m ember s of t he community work t ogether . Te rmite
( w hite ant ) w or ker s co ordinate t heir effor ts t o build
nests . Similar ly, in hum an societies engi neers , architects ,

① in t egr a te〔in t igveit〕 使一 体化

・ 21 3 ・
t ow n planners and const ruction workers unite t o buil d cit-
ies .
T he nests of social insects ar e as complex as a man
made cit y . In som e in sect nests special accommoda tion is
provided for the young and for food st or age . Many nests al-
so have devices for regulating t he temperat ure . So insect
nests ar e as functional as h uman houses .
I t is no t s urprising , ther efor e, t hat many analogies
have been m ade between social insects and human societies .
I t mu st not be forgo tten , however , t ha t insect social behav-
iour is det ermined by inna te ( pos sessed from birt h ) i nstinc-
tive mechanisms . Insects show no capacity for learning or
for developing a social tr adition based on learning .
16. Men tioned i n t he passage, t he functions performed by
social i nsects a re .
( A ) r eproduction , collecting food and building nests ,
etc
( B) reproduction of food , defending t he colony and
building nests . etc
( C) producing food , defending t he colony and b uilding
nests , etc
( D) producing food , providing se rvices and defending
t he colony , etc
17. T he second paragraph tells us t hat .
(A) engineer s , ar chitects , tow n p lanner s and con-
st ruction workers have t o work t ogether t o build
a societ y
( B) termite worke rs w ork toget he r in the same way as
const ruction w orkers do
・ 21 4 ・
 ( C) in bot h societies t he re is social co ordination
( D) termite workers unite in orde r t o build a nest
18. Which of t he follo wing stat ements is not t rue ?
( A ) There ar e different social fu nctions in bot h insect
and hum an societies .
( B) In bo th insect and hum an societies individual men-
mbers work toget he r .
( C) The nests of social insects are li ke t he cities of h u-
man societies .
( D) Insect social behaviour and human social behav-
iour a re dete rmined by the sam e factors .
19. H uman and in sect societies ar e diffe ren t in t hat .
( A ) differen t group s have diffe ren t functins
( B) insect social behaviour is determined by innate in-
stinctive mechanisms w hile hum an societies have
developed a social t radition based on lea rning
( C) human beings can make m any analogies
( D) h uman beings can make mechanis ms while insects
can’t
20. T he main idea of t his pas sage is .
( A ) t he simila rities betw een social in sects and human
societies
( B) t he complex nests of social i nsects
( C) t he functions performed by sociali nsects
( D) t he cause of i nsect social behaviour

・ 21 5 ・
 Unit 22

Passage A
When water is heated un til it boils , bubb les of gas ap-
pea r and rise t hrough t he ho t liquid . W hen an electric cur-
r en t passes t hrough wat er in a proces s called elect roly sis ,
bubbles of gas appear and rise through the liquid . Superfi-
cially , t he t wo events appea r t he same .
If t he gas from the boiling wate r is examined , its prop-
er ties are fou nd t o be the sam e as t hose of t he water . Thus
if t he stea m is cooled t o room te mpera tur e, a liquid is
form ed wh ich is indistinguishable from t he original water .
When , ho wever , t he gas from t he electrolysis equipmen t is
cooled t o room temperat ure , it r emains a gas rat her t han be-
coming a liquid . Nor will it , a t ze ro degrees cen tigr ade or
below , t urn t o solid , as will t he gas from boiling water .
T hese tw o proces ses , boiling and electrolysis , have clea rly
res ulted in products wit h quite different proper ties .
In boiling , t he gas does not repr esen t a new sub st ance,
but only a differ en t state of t he original sub st ance . Elect rol-
ysis , on the ot her hand , has gene rated a product w hich is a
new substance, or pos sibly a mix tur e of new substances . A
change in stat e as r epresented by going from a liquid t o a gas
withou t t he production of new substances is called a " physi-
cal change" , however , when a process takes place t hat pro-
duces new substances , t his is called a " chemical change" or
a " chemical reaction ." In a chemical r eaction , t he initial
・ 21 6 ・
substances are replaced by a new set of substances or prod-
ucts .
1. Which of t he following is t he best title for t his pas sage ?
( A ) Elect rolysis .
(B ) P hysical and Chemical Changes .
( C) Differ en t Types of Wa ter .
( D ) Water Te mpera tur es .
2. According t o t he passage , elect rolysis and boiling of wa-
ter look t he sam e because they bot h .
( A ) take place at t he sa me te mpera tur e
(B ) generate chemical reaction s
( C) result in new s ubstances
( D ) produce a gas from water
3. A t a tempe rat ure slightly above zero degr ees centigrade,
w hich of t he follo wing is true of the gas produced by elec-
trolysis ?
( A ) It does not become liquid .
(B ) I t can not be distinguished from wate r .
( C) It becomes a solid .
( D ) I t expands greatly .
4. According to t he passage, whet her a change is physical or
che mical depends on .
( A ) w hether che micals ar e added t o t he sub stance
(B ) w het her a new sub stance is produced
( C) t he amount of heat used in the change
( D ) t he ti me allowed for t he change
5. Which of t he following best illust rates a che mical reac-
tion ?
( A ) Cold water becoming ice th rough fr eezing .
・ 21 7 ・
 (B ) H o t wate r becoming steam t hrough boiling .
( C) Ice melting through heating .
(D) Water forming gas t hrough elect rolysis .

Passage B
M any people believe t he glare from snow cau ses snow-
b lindness . Yet , dar k glasses or no t, t hey find t he mselves
suffering from headaches and wate ring eyes , and even snow-
b lindness , w hen exposed t o several hours of " snow ligh t" .
T he U nited Sta tes Army has no w determi ned t hat glare
from snow does no t cause snow blindness in t roops in a snow
covered coun t ry . Rat her , a man ’s eyes frequen tly find
no t hing t o focus on in a broad expanse of barr en s no wcov-
ered te rrain .So his gaze continually s hif ts and jumps back
and for th ove r t he entire landscape in search of somet hing t o
look a t . Finding not hing , hour after hour , t he eyes neve r
stop sear ching and t he eyeballs becom e sore and t he eye
muscles ache . Nat ure offsets t his irritation by producing
more and more fl uid wh ich covers the eyeball . T he fluid
cove rs t he eyeball in inc reasi ng quan tit y until vision b lurs ,
t hen is obscured , and t he result is t otal, even t hough t em-
porary , snow blindnes s .
Experiments led t he A rmy to a simple met hod of ove r-
coming this prob lem . Scou ts ahead of a m ain body of troops
ar e t rained t o shake snow from eve rgr een bu shes , cr eating a
do tted line as they cros s completely snow cove red land-
scape . Even t he scou ts t hemselves t hrow ligh tweigh t , dark
color ed objects ahead on wh ich t hey too can focus . T he men
following can t hen see somet hing . Their gaze is arr ested .
・ 21 8 ・
T heir eyes focus on a bush and having found som eth ing t o
see, st op scouri ng the snow blanketed landscape . By focu-
sing their att en tion on one object at a time, the m en can
cross t he snow withou t becoming hopelessly snow blind or
lost . In t his way t he problem of crossi ng a solid w hit e t er-
r ain is overcome .
6. To prevent headaches , watering eyes and blindness
caused by t he glar e from snow , da rk glas ses a re .
( A ) indispensib le ( B) useful
( C) ineffective ( D ) availab le
7. The eyeballs become sore and the eye muscles ache be-
cause .
( A ) tea rs cover t he eyeballs
(B ) t he eyes are irrit ated by blinding sun light
( C) t he eyes ar e irritated by bli nding s no w
( D ) t here is not hing to focus on
8. Snow blindness m ay be avoided by .
( A ) concen tr ating on the solid w hite terrain
(B ) providing t he eyes wit h somet hing t o focus on
( C) sea rching for somet hing to look at in s no w cov-
er ed te rrai n
( D ) covering t he eyeballs wit h fl uid
9. The scouts shake snow from evergreen bushes in order t o
.
( A ) give the men behind som et hing t o see
(B ) beau tify t he landscape
( C) warm t hem selves in t he cold
( D ) prevent the m en behind from losing t heir way
10. A suitable title for this passage w ou ld be .
・ 21 9 ・
 ( A) Snow blindness and H ow t o O vercome It
( B) Nat ure’s Cur e for Snow blindness
( C) Soldier s in t he Sno w
( D) S no w Vision

Passage C
H o w do we get more young people t o i ncrease t heir
consump tion of iron-rich foods ? Many nurt ritionists a re ad-
vocating t he for tification ① of a n umber of food s . This many
help , bu t I con tend that we s houl d also in tensify our efforts
in nut rition educa tion a mong our young peop le . O nce an in-
telligen t person—and t his incl udes adolescen ts— unde r-
stands t he need for a healt hy diet . I t hink her or she will act
accordi ng ly . As for specific actions : I suggest t hat b lood he-
moglobi n ② s hou ld be checked as a routine par t of a young-
ste r’s yea rly physical . It should con tain at least 11 gr ams
per 100 millilite rs if blood for a gir l and at least 12 gram s for
a boy . If it is any lowe r , t he physician probably will pre-
scribe an easily ab sorbed iron supple men t .
A dolescen ts—and everyone else— shou ld cu t our h igh ly
proces sed foods and drink s , w hich may be low in iron and
o t her nu t rients . Read t he labels for iron con ten t . Especially
make s ure t hat all bakery products ar e made wit h enriched
flour or w hole grains . Try adding liver , chicken , beef,
veal ③ or any ot her va riet y t o t he week ly menu .

① fort ifica tion〔f tifi’fei n〕 ( 食 品 ) 强化

② hemogl ob in 〔 hi m u’g l ubi n〕 血 红蛋白
③ v eal〔vi l〕 小 牛肉

・ 22 0 ・
 Finally , even when you’r e t rying t o lose w eight , al-
ways eat a sensi ble , well-balanced diet made up of a va riet y
of fr es h or very ligh tly processed foods . T his way , you
stand a good chance of get ting not only enough iron , bu t al-
so adequate a moun ts of all t he o t her es sen tial nu t rien ts .
11. T he au t hor r ecommends t hat young prople .
( A ) check b lood hemoglobin yea rly
( B) be on a st rictly vegeta rian diet
( C) lose weigh t
( D) do som e mor e st udies on hemoglobi n
12. What kind of bakery products do young peop le have t o
eat ?
( A ) Bread made wit h good vegetab le oil .
( B) Br ead made wit h w heat .
( C) Bread made wit h enriched flour or w hole gr ains .
( D) Bread cont aining les s calories .
13. T he passage is mai nly abou t .
( A ) t he impor tance of diet
( B) t he need of iron
( C) adolescen ts’eati ng habits
( D) b lood hemoglobin
14. When t he au thor says t hat we should intensify our ef-
for ts in nu trition educa tion among our young peop le , he
mean s t hat we .
( A) should force young people t o eat well-balanced
meals
( B) should tell young prop le t o eat liver , chicken ,
beef , or veal
( C ) should t each adolescents about nu t rition in home
・ 22 1 ・
 economics clas s
( D) should try to change eating habits to get enough i-
ron and o ther essen tial nu t rien ts
15. T he aut hor says t hat the appropriate way to lose weigh t
is .
( A) t o cut out high ly processed foods and drinks
( B) to ea t a variet y of fr esh or ve ry ligh tly processed
foods
( C) t o eat vegetab les and eggs
( D) to eat food recomm ended by a physician

Passage D
T he advan tage and disadvan tage of a la rge popu lation
have long been a subject of discu ssion . I t has been argued
t hat t he s upp ly of good land is limited . To feed a large pop-
u lation , inferior land must be cultivated and t he good land
w orked i ntensively . T hus each per son produced less and t his
means a lowe r aver age incom e t han could be obt ained wit h a
small popula tion . Ot her economists have argued t hat a large
population gives more scope for specialization and t he devel-
opmen t of facilities such as ports , roads and railways , w hich
ar e not likely t o be built un less t here is a big de mand t o ju s-
tify t hem .
O ne of the difficulties in carrying ou t a world wide
birt h cont rol program lies i n the fact t ha t official attit udes t o
population grow th va ry from coun t ry t o count ry depending
on t he level of industrial developm en t and the availability of
food and raw mate rials . In t he developing count ry where a
vastly expanded population is pressing ha rd upon t he limits
・ 22 2 ・
of food , space and nat ural r esources . I t will be first conce rn
of governm en t t o place a limit on t he bir t hrate , whateve r
t he consequences may be . In a highly indust rialized societ y
t he prob le m may be more comp lex . A decreasing bir t hrate
may lead t o unemploymen t because it results in a declining
market for m anufact ured goods . When t he pressur e of pop-
u lation on housing declines , prices also decline and t he
building indust ry is weakened . Face wit h consider ations
such as t hese, t he governm en t of a developed coun try m ay
well pr efer to see a slo wly increasing pop ulation , rat he r
t han one w hich is stab le of decli nes .
16. Sm all population m ay mean .
( A ) h igher productivit y , bu t a lowe r aver age income
( B) lo wer productivit y , bu t a higher aver age i ncom e
( C) lower productivity and a lower aver age income
( D) higher productivit y and a higher average incom e
17. Accordi ng t o t he passage , a large popula tion will pro-
vide a chance for developing .
( A ) agricu ltur e ( B) t ranspor t system
( C) industry ( D) national economy
18. In a developed coun try , peop le will perhap s go ou t of
w ork if the bir t hrate .
( A ) goes up ( B) goes dow n
( C) rem ains stable ( D) is ou t cont rol
19. Accordi ng to t he pas sage, slowly rising birt hr ate per-
haps is good for .
( A ) a developing nation
( B) every nation wit h a high population
( C) a developed nation
・ 22 3 ・
 ( D) every nation with a small population
20. It is no easy job to carry out a gener al plan for bir t h con-
t rol throughout the world because .
( A ) t here ar e too m any underdeveloped coun tries in
t he world
( B) unde rdeveloped count ries have low level of i ndu s-
trial development
( C) differ en t governm en ts have different views of t he
question
( D) even developed coun tries have comp lex probl mes

・ 22 4 ・
 Unit 23

Passage A
T he combined sales of t he 100 la rgest foreign investing
companies in the U .S . incr eased by a stagge ring 40 % in t he
t wo yea rs bet ween 1977 and 1979 , and the numbe r has con-
tinued t o incr ease steadily . In 1980 Sou th Africa proved t o
be t he la rgest financial invest or in the U .S ., cont rolli ng a-
bout ＄ 19 .2 billion in sales . T he Net her lands and t he U .K .
follow as second largest invest ors and Germany next . New
t o t he list of the t op 100 foreign invest ors are 12 banking
and finance and ins urance companies t he largest , t he H ong
K ong Shanghai Banking Corp ., from H ong K ong . T he
number of L ati n A m erican companies engaged in business
her e is gro wing st eadly , of ten t hrough t hird cou nt ry holding
companies .
Why a re so many firms coming to t he U .S . ? T he re are
many r easons . O ne of t he gr eatest att ractions , of course, is
a m arket of ove r 200 million consum ers with a high aver age
per capital income . In addition , wit h t he devalued dolla r t he
cost of A merican labor has declined markedly relative t o
many foreign labor costs . Some firm s seeking t o avoid bu-
r eaucr atic and/ or political pr es sures a t hom e find t he U .S . a
politically stab le environm en t in w hich to work . Many hope
t o be able t o con tinue selli ng t o t he Am erican market even if
t he U .S . governm en t restricts imports fur t her , or if m ajor
price changes occur due t o currency fluct uations . Many for-
・ 22 5 ・
eigner s a re att racted by U .S . technology , its modern man-
age men t met hod s , its labor saving and m as s production tech-
niques .
1. In 1980 the largest for eign financial i nvestor in t he U .S .
was from .
( A ) H .K . ( B) U .K .
( C) Latin A merica ( D) Sou t h Africa
2. Which of t he following statem en ts is not t rue ?
(A ) Sout h Africa con t rolled abou t ＄ 19 . 2 billion in
sales in 1980 .
(B ) T her e were more and mor e Latin Am erican compa-
nies engagi ng in b usiness i n t he U .S . .
( C) In 1979 H ong Kong was t he largest foreign inves-
t or in t he U .S .
( D ) The combined sales of t he t op 100 foreign investing
companies incr eased steadily .
3. The most improtant r eason w hy so many companies come
t o t he U .S . is .
( A ) the environment is politically stable
(B ) t he ma rket in t he U .S . is very at t ractive
( C) t he labor cost there has been reduced
( D ) t he U .S . technolgy is advanced
4. w hich of t he following reasons for many firms comi ng t o
t he U .S . is no t m en tioned in t he passage ?
( A ) Skillful labor for ce i n t he U .S . .
(B ) Modern m anagem en t met hod .
( C) Rich cons umers .
( D ) Mass production t echniques .
5. The best title for t his pas sage would be .
・ 22 6 ・
 ( A) Foreign Investors i n t he U .S .
(B ) T he 100 Top La rgest Companies in the U .S .
( C) Foreign Busines s Is Gro wing Rapidly in t he U .S .
(D) Why Foreign Invest or s Like t he U .S .

Passage B
Readi ng is not t he only way t o acquir e k no wledge of
pr eceding work . There is anot her la rge rese rvoir w hich m ay
be called experience, and t he college st uden t will find t hat
every cr aftsman has som ethi ng he can teach and will gener-
ally teach g lad ly to any college st uden t who does no t look
dow n upon t hem wit h ill concealed disdain . T he informa-
tion from t hese quar ter s differ s from t hat i n text book s and
papers chiefly in t hat its t heor etical par t t he explanations
of w hy t hings happen is frequently quite fan tastic . Bu t t he
demonstr ation and report of w hat happens , and how it hap-
pens , a re sound even if the r eports a re in completely unsci-
en tific terms . P resen tly t he college st uden t will lear n , in
t his case also , what t o accep t and what to reject . O ne im-
port an t thi ng for a college st udent to r eme mber is that if A r-
ist otle coul d talk to t he fisherman , so can he .
A not her source of k no wledge is t he vast store of t r adi-
tional pr actices handed do wn from fat her t o son , or mot he r
t o daugh ter , of old count ry customs . of folklore . All t his is
ve ry difficult for a college studen t t o explor e, for much
knowledge and per sonal experience is needed her e t o seper-
ate good p lants from wild weed s . The college st udent s hou ld
lear n to realize and rem ember how much of r eal value science
has found in t his wide, confused wilde rness and how often
・ 22 7 ・
scien tific discoveries t urned out to be rediscoveries of what
had existed in t his wilde rness long ago .
6. In line 17 , t he phr ase " t his wide, confused wilderness "
r efers to .
( A ) per sonal experience
(B ) wild weeds a mong good p lants
( C) t he information from t he par en ts
( D ) t he vast st or e of t r aditional practices
7. Which of t he followi ng statem en ts is suppor ted by t he
pas sage ?
( A ) T he college st udents have trouble separ ati ng good
plan ts from wild weeds .
(B ) Cr aftsman’s experience is us ually unscientific .
( C) T he con temp t uous college st uden ts will r eceive no
inst ructions from c raftsm en .
( D ) T raditional pr actices a re as import an t as experience
for t he college studen t .
8. F rom t his passage we can infer that .
( A ) w e’ll invite t he cr aftsman to teach in t he college .
( B) schools and book s a re not t he on ly acces s to kno wl-
edge .
( C) scien tific discoveries ar e based on per sonal expe ri-
ence .
( D ) Discoveries and rediscoveries are t he most impor-
t an t sour ce of knowledge for a college st uden t .
9. The au thor advises t he college st uden t t o .
( A ) be ill concealed t owa rds t he cr aftsman
(B ) be patien t in helping the cr aft man wit h scientific
te rms
・ 22 8 ・
 ( C) learn t he craftsm an’s experience wit h a critical eye
( D ) ob tain t he cr aftsman’s experience withou t rejection
10. T he main idea of t his pas sage is abou t .
( A ) w hat to lea rn from t he par en ts .
( B) how to acquire kno wiedge
( C) w hy t o lear n craf ts man
( D) ho w to deal wit h experience

Passage C
T he oldest and simplest m ethod , then , of describing
differ ences in personality was t o classify people according t o
t ypes . S uch a system is called a Typology .
A fa mou s example of t his met hod was set for t h in
G reece about the yea r 400 B .C . A physician named Hippoc-
r ates t heorized t hat ther e we re four fluids , or humors , in
t he body , Corr esponding t o each humor , he believed , t here
exist ed a definite type of personality .
T he four humors were blood , yello w bile ( 胆汁 ) , black
bile, and ph legm ( 粘液 ) . A person i n whom all four homors
wer e in perfect balance had a ha rmonious( 和谐的 ) pe rsonali-
t y . If a per son had too much blood , he was called sanguine,
or cheerfu l and op timistic . Someone with too much yellow
bile was choleric, or irritable and easily ange red . Too much
black bile made a person m elancholy , or depres sed and pes-
simistic . A n over supply of ph legm caused a human being t o
be ph legm atic, or slow and unfeeling . Scientists have long
since discarded H ippoc rates’fluid t heory . Bu t t he na mes of
t he humors , corr esponding t o t hese t emper am en ts ( 气 质 ) ,
・ 22 9 ・
have s urvived and ar e still useful , t o some ex tent , in desc ri-
bing pe rsonality .
Ot her feat ures of people, such as their faces and phy-
siques , have also been used t o clas sify personality . Today ,
however , personalit y theories and clas sification s m ay also
incl ude fact ors such as he redity , t he environment , intelli-
gence , and emotional needs . Psychology , biology , and soci-
ology a re involved in t hese t heories . Because of t he com-
p lexit y of hum an personalit y , presen t day t heories a re of-
ten very different from one anot her . Psychologists vary in
t heir ideas about w hat is most importan t in dete rmining pe r-
sonalit y .
11. In t his pas sage, t he aut hor is focu sing on .
( A ) t he history of t he system of t ypology
( B) important fact or s in determini ng personality
( C) personalit y t heory and clas sification
( D) improtan t featur es of hum an beings
12. Accordi ng to H ippoc rates’fluid t heory , a pe rson wit h a
perfect balance of all t he four humors in him .
( A ) was humorous and good at singing
( B) had a pleasan t and agr eeable t emper ament
( C) w ou ld always be chee rful and op timistic
( D) seldom quarr elled or fough t wit h ot her s
13. Which of t he follo wing is N O T tr ue ?
( A ) People wit h t oo much yello w bile wer e easily an-
ger ed .
( B) The na mes of t he four fluids are still u sed today .
( C) People wit h an over supply of blood woul d easily
get excited .
・ 23 0 ・
 ( D) Many featur es of human bei ngs have been used t o
clas sify perosnality .
14. Mode rn personalit y t heories and classifications .
( A ) a re oft en very different because per sonalit y itself
is r ather complicated
( B) involve psychology , biology , and sociology
( C) are based only on heredit y , t he environm en t , in-
telligence , and emotional needs
( D) all of t he above
15. In t he fort h coming par agraphs , t he au thor is most
probably going t o talk about .
( A ) som e new in terpretations of the H ippocr ates’fluid
t heory
( B) different opinions of psychologists about t he fac-
tors in dete rmining personalit y
( C) various defi nitions of typology given by differ en t
psychologists
( D) t he compa rison between pr esen t day per sonalit y
t heories and ancien t personality t heories

Passage D
T her e is much discussion t oday abou t w het her economic
grow t h is desir ab le . A t an ear lier pe riod , our desir e for ma-
terial wealt h m ay have been justified . N ow , however , t his
desir e for more t han we need is causing se riou s proble ms .
Even t hough we have good int en tions , we may be producing
t oo much , too fast .
T hose who criticize economic gro wt h a rgue that we
・ 23 1 ・
must slo w dow n . They believe that societ y is approaching
ce rtain limits on grow t h . T hese include t he fixed supply of
nat ural resources , t he possible negative effects of indust ry
on t he nat ural environment , and t he continuing increase in
t he world’s population . As societ y r eaches these limits , eco-
nomic growt h can no longer continue , and t he quality of life
will dec rease .
People who wan t more economic gro wt h , on t he ot he r
hand , a rgue t hat even at t he present gro wt h r ate t her e are
still m any poor peop le in t he world . T hese proponents of e-
conomic growt h believe that only more grow t h can create
t he capital needed to improve t he quality of life i n t he world .
F ur thermore, t hey argue t hat only con tinued growt h can
provide the financial resources r equired t o pro tect our nat u-
r al surroundings from indust rialization .
T his debate ove r the desir abilit y of con tinued economic
grow t h is of vital importance to busines s and indust ry . If
t hose w ho a rgue against economic grow th a re correct, t he
problems t hey mention cannot be ignor ed . To find a solu-
tion , economists and t he busi nes s community must pay at-
ten tion to t hese problems and con tinue discussi ng them with
one ano t her .
16. Accordi ng to t hose w ho a rgue agai nst economic grow th
we must slo w dow n for t he following r easons EXCEP T
that .
( A ) our nat ural surroundings are in danger of being
dest royed by indust ry
(B ) t he fixed supply of natur al resour ces ma rks a
poin t beyond w hich economic growt h cannot con-
・ 23 2 ・
 ti nue
( C) t he w orld population is eve r increasing
( D) more effor ts should be made t o improve t he quali-
ty of our material life
17. T hose who want more economic grow th believe t hat
continued economic growt h .
(A) is es sential t o t he well being of societ y as a
w hole
(B ) can provide t he sol ution to many of our social
prob lem s t oday
( C) can pro tect our environm en t from being pollut ed
by indust ry
( D) can provide us wit h mor e nat ural resour ces for in-
dustrialization
18. We may infer from t he con tex t t ha t " proponen ts" ( Pa ra-
gr aph 3 ) most probably means .
( A ) arguments i n suppor t of som ethi ng
( B) disagreem en ts
( C) people w ho argue for som et hing
( D) peop le w ho argue against somet hing
19. T he passage is mai nly abou t .
( A) the cont radiction between economists and t he
busines s communit y
( B) t he pr esen t deba te on economic gro wt h
( C) t he advan tages and disadvan tages of economic
grow th
( D) t he impro tance of the debate on economic grow t h
20. We may infer from t he passage t hat .
( A ) t he aut hor describes the case as it is
・ 23 3 ・
 ( B) t he au t hor is for economic gro wt h
( C) t he aut hor is against con tinued economic gro wt h
( D) t he au t hor is very much worried about the prob-
lems caused by con ti nued economic grow th

・ 23 4 ・
 Unit 24

Passage A
A da m Smit h , w riting in t he 1770 s , was t he first pe rson
t o see t he impor tance of t he division of labour and to exp lain
par t of its advan tages . H e gives as an example t he process
by w hich pin s we re m ade i n E ng land .
" One m an draws ou t t he wir e, ano t her str engt hens it , a
t hird cu ts it , a four t h points it, a fift h grinds it at the t op t o
pr epa re it to r eceive t he head . To make t he head r equires
t wo or t hree distinct ope ration s . To pu t it on is a sepa rate
ope ration , t o polish t he pins is anot her . I t is even a tr ade by
itself t o pu t them in t o t he paper . A nd t he impor tan t busi-
nes s of m aking pi ns is , in t his manne r , divided in t o abou t
eigh teen distinct oper ation s , w hich in some fact ories a re all
performed by diffe ren t people, t hough in ot he rs t he same
man will som eti mes perform t wo or t hree of them ."
T en men , Smith said , i n th is way , turned ou t t welve
pounds of pins a day or abou t 4800 pins apiece . Bu t if all of
t hem had worked sepa rately and independen tly wit hou t divi-
sion of labour , they cer tai nly could no t each of t hem have
made t wen ty pins in a day and perhaps not even one .
T her e can be no doub t t hat division of labour , provided
t hat it is no t taken t oo fa r , is an efficient way of organising
w ork . Fewe r people can make more pins . A dam Smit h saw
t his but he also took it for gran ted t hat division of labour is
in itself r esponsib le for economic grow th and developmen t
・ 23 5 ・
and t hat it accounts for the difference bet ween expanding e-
conomics and t hose t hat stand still . Bu t division of labour
adds no th ing new, it only enables people t o produce more of
w ha t t hey alr eady have .
1. According to the passage , A da m S mit h was t he first pe r-
son to .
( A ) take advan tage of t he division of labour
(B ) int roduce t he division of labour int o E ng land
( C) unde rstand t he effects of t he division of labour
( D ) exp lain t he cau ses of t he division of labour
2. A dam Smit h saw t hat t he division of labour .
( A ) enabled each worke r to make pins more quickly and
more cheap ly
(B ) increased t he pos sible out pu t per worke r
( C) incr eased t he numbe r of people employed in facto-
ries
( D ) improved t he quality of pins produced
3. A dam Smit h m en tioned t he numbe r 4800 in order to
.
( A ) sho w t he advan tages of t he old cr aft system
(B ) emphasize ho w powe rful t he individual worke r was
( C) s ho w t he advantages of t he division of labour
( D ) emphasize t he impor tance of inc reased production
4. According to t he w riter , A dam Smit h’s mistake was in
believing t hat t he division of labour .
( A ) w as an efficien t way of organising work
(B ) was an improt an t developmen t in met hod s of pro-
duction
( C) inevitably led t o economic developm en t
・ 23 6 ・
 ( D ) incr eased t he production of existing goods
5. According t o t he w rit er , w hich one of t he follo wing is
NO T true ?
( A ) Division of labour can enable fewer peop le to make
mor e pins .
(B ) Division of labour only helps people t o produce
more of w hat t hey already have .
( C) Division of labour is by no means responsible for e-
conomic grow th .
( D ) Division of labour is an efficient way of organising
w or k .

Passage B
T he place of t he child in societ y has varied for t hou-
sands of years and has been affected by different cult ures
and religions . In ancien t times unwanted children we re occa-
sionally abandoned , pu t t o deat h , exp loited , or offe red for
religious sacrifices , and in any even t a la rge pe rcentage of
t hem didn’t survive t heir physically hazardou s existence t o a-
chieve mat urity .
I t Weste rn civiliza tion withi n t he last few hundr ed
yea rs , t here have been many changes in attit ude t oward t he
young . In agricult ural Europe, and lat er wit h t he beginning
of t he Indust rial Revolu tion , t he children of t he poor
w orked long hours for little or no pay, and t here was no
public concer n for t heir safety or welfar e . Punis hmen t cou ld
be bru tal and sever e, and sometimes r eligious passions were
expr es sed violen tly wit h a view t oward saving t he ch ild ’s
soul .
・ 23 7 ・
 By t he eigh teent h cent ury t he ha rsh and seve re met hods
began to show some change . Society slo wly accorded chil-
dren a role of more import ance . Books wer e writ ten ex-
pr es sly for them and gr adually laws wer e passed for t heir
pro tection .
In t he past few decades pa ren ts have becom e more at-
ten tive t o the needs of t heir children . Bette r healt h car e is a-
vailable and educa tions is no longer rese rved for a limit ed
few . Wit h so many no w able to go to college, m any educa-
t ors feel t hat we have t oo many st uden ts and t oo few quali-
fied teacher s . Some say t he pendulum in child r ea ring has
swung so far t oward permissivenes s t hat m any childr en are
growing up aliena ted from societ y and with no respect for
law or par en tal aut horit y .
T he tendency today is for teachers and pa rents to em-
phasize i ndividual responsibilit y and t o str es s t hat education-
al goals for students shou ld be ai med t owa rd s t heir fut ure
job s rat he r t han provide a gene ralized h igher educa tion .
6. What does t he a rticle say about children ?
( A ) T hey have alway s been t he hope of m ankind .
(B ) In cer tain period s of hist ory no one cared abou t
t he m .
( C) In t he mid eigh teen th cen t ury western at tit udes
t owa rd children began to change .
( D ) T he re were laws frobidding child labor during t he
Indu st rial Revolu tion .
7. What does the ar ticle say abou t children in ancient times ?
( A ) T hey were w or shipped as gods .
(B ) A t times t hey were offered for religiou s sacrifices .
・ 23 8 ・
 ( C) People w ho didn’t wan t childr en usually murder ed
t he m .
( D ) T hey were neglected or punis hed by t heir pa ren ts .
8. What changes have occurred in t he past few decades with
r ega rd t o t he chil d’s place in societ y ?
( A ) Child raising has become mor e permissive .
(B) P ublic healt h has improved so much through m edi-
cal advances t hat children now need no par ticu la r
healt h car e .
( C) Childr en a re becoming mor e in telligen t .
( D ) Children a re becoming more respectful t oward t heir
pa ren ts .
9. What is t he pr esen t tr end in child discipline and educa-
tion ?
( A ) T o give as many young people as pos sible a popu la r
gener alized college education .
(B ) To cr ea te mor e disciplines of t he individual .
( C) To teach children t o conform to severe rules .
( D ) To e mphasize individual r esponsibilit y .
10. O f t he following state men ts , wh ich is N O T t rue accord-
ing t o t his ar ticle ?
( A ) In cer tain period s of history peop le showed lit tle
conce rn for children .
( B) West ern societ y did no t change its at tit ude towa rd
children un til the eight eent h cen t ury .
( C) During the Indust rial Revolu tion , children in Eu-
rope had to work long hour s for little pay .
( D) N owadays many childr en disregard law .

・ 23 9 ・
Passage C
Because plan ts can no t move or speak , most people be-
lieve t hat t hey have no feelings and that t hey can no t receive
signals from ou tside, H owever , th is may no t be comp letely
t rue .
People w ho st udy plan ts have found ou t t hat plants ca r-
ry a sm all electrical charge . It is possible to measure t his
charge wit h a small piece of equipmen t called a " galvanome-
ter " . T he galvanomete r ① is p laced on a leaf of t he p lant , and
it regist ers any changes in the elect rical field of t he leaf .
H uman s have a similar field wh ich can change when we are
shocked or frigh tened .
A man called Backste r used a galvanometer for h is st ud-
ies of plan ts and was very surprised a t his results . H e found
t hat if he had tw o or mor e plan ts in a room and he begin t o
dest roy one of them— pe rhaps by pu lling off its leaves or by
pulli ng it out of its pot— then t he galvanometer s on t he leav-
es of t he ot he r plan ts s howed a change in the elect rical field .
I t seem ed as if t he p lants wer e signalli ng a feeli ng of shock .
T his happened not only when Backste r sta rted to destroy
plan ts , bu t also w hen he dest royed o t her livings such as in-
sects .
Back ste r said t hat the p lants also knew if someone had
dest royed a living t hing some distance away , because t hey
signalled when a man who had just cut dow n a tr ee en ter ed
t he room .

① g alv anome te r〔 g lv ’n mit 〕 电 流表

・ 24 0 ・
 A not her plan t specialist , nam ed Sauvin , achieved simi-
lar res ults to Backster’s . H e kep t galvanom eters fixed t o
his plan ts all the tim e and cheeked r egularly to see what t he
plan ts were doing . If he was ou t of the office, he telephoned
t o find ou t abou t t he signals t he plan ts wer e sending . In t his
way , he found t hat t he plan ts we re sendi ng ou t signals at
t he exact times w hen he felt st rong pleasur e or pain . In
fact , Sauvi n could cause a change in t he elect rical field of his
plan ts over a distance of a few miles simply by th inking a-
bout t he m .
A Japanese elect ronies specialist called Hashimo to said
t hat his plan ts cou ld talk . H e built equipmen t w hich
changed t he elect rical signals of plan ts in to sounds . T he
sound wer e different w hen differ en t t hings happened t o t he
plan ts ; for example, w hen t hey were water ed or moved t o a
new place . Dr H as himo to’s wife had conve rsa tions wit h t he
plan ts . When s he spoke t o a p lant , it answer ed wit h a signal
w hich she could hea r on D r . Hashi mo to’s equipment .
11. Most people believe t hat plan ts have no feelings because
.
( A ) t hey do no t move or speak
( B) t hey canno t r eceive signals from ou tside
( C) t his may not be comp letely t rue
( D) t his is unbelievable .
12. Back ster was s urprised a t t he r esu lts of his st udies be-
cause .
( A ) he destroyed an insect
( B) he destroyed a plan t by pulling off its leaves
(C ) he found t ha t p lants cou ld expr es s feelings of
・ 24 1 ・
 shock
( D) he found that plan ts coul d move and speak afte r
all
13. T he p lants sent out signals .
( A ) only when Backster st ar ted t o dest roy plan ts
(B) when Back st er dest royed plan ts or o ther living
th ings
( C) only w hen he destroyed t hing such as insects
( D) only w hen Backster p laced t he galvanom eter on
t he leaves of the plants
14. T he p lant s pecialist called Sauvin .
( A ) did not agr ee wit h Back st er’s ideas
( B) did not get t he sa me sor t of results as Back st er did
( C) found ou t som e of t he sa me th ings t hat Backste r
did
( D) got diffe ren t results from Back st er’s
15. When Sauvin was ou t of his office he .
( A ) sent signals t o his p lants
( B ) looked at t he plan ts r egularly to see what t hey
wer e doi ng
(C) telephoned to find out w hat signals t he plants
were sending
( D) r ecorded what signals t he plan ts we re sending

Passage D
A scien tist once said : " I have concl uded t hat t he ear t h is
being visited by in telligently con t rolled vehicles from oute r
space ."
If we t ake t his as a reasonable explanation for UF Os
・ 24 2 ・
( uniden tified flying objects ) , questions immediately come
up .
" W hy don’t t hey get in t ouch wit h us , t hen ? Why don’t
t hey land righ t on t he White H ouse law n and decla re t he m-
selves ?" peop le as ked .
In reply , scien tists say t hat , w hile t his may be w hat we
want , it may no t neces sa rily be w ha t t hey wan t .
" The most likely explanation , it see ms t o me, " said
Dr .M ead , " is t hat t he r esponsible society ou tside our sola r
system is keeping an eye on us t o see that we don’t set in
mo tion a chain reaction t hat might have unexpected effects
fa r ou tside our solar syste m ."
O pinion s from ot her scien tists might go like t his: " Why
should t hey want t o get in touch wit h u s ? They may wan t t o
observe us on ly and no t in terfere wit h t he developm en t of
our civilization ."
Som e scientists have also suggested that E ar th is a kind
of zoo or wildlife r eserve . Ju st as we set aside wil derness a r-
eas and wildlife r eserves t o allow anim als and growing
t hings t o develop nat urally w hile we ob serve t he m , so per-
haps Ear t h w as set aside ages ago for t he sam e purpose .
A re we bei ng observed by i ntelligen t bei ngs from ot he r
civilizations in t he unive rse ? A r e t hey watching our progr ess
in space tr avel ? Do we live in a gigantic " zoo " observed by
our " keepe rs" , bu t having no communication with t hem ?
N ow w e have to recognize t hat , among t he stars in t he
heavens , t he re m ay very well be worlds inhabited by beings
w ho ar e to us as we ar e to ants .
16. People w ho ask the question " W hy don’t t hey get in t ou-
・ 24 3 ・
 ch wit h us… and declare t hemselves ?" thi nk t hat
.
( A ) t he re are no such t hings as U FOs
( B) U FOs a re visit or s from solar syst em
( C) t here’s no reason for U FOs not t o land on Ea r th
( D) we are bound to see UF Os soone r or later
17. Accordi ng to Dr .Mead , t he a ttit ude of bei ng s from ou t-
er space to wards u s is one of .
( A ) u nfriendliness ( B) suspicion
( C) supe riority ( D) hostilit y
18. In line 23 , t he w ord " keepers " refers t o which of t he
following ?
( A ) persons w ho look aft er animals in a gigantic zoo .
( B) ast ronau ts tr avelling in t he m anned space ship .
( C) persons w ho ar e ob serving us .
( D) in telligen t beings observing us from out er space .
19. T he w rit er thi nks t hat .
( A ) in t he heavens t he re may be o t her worlds inhabit-
ed by in telligen t beings
( B) hum an beings ar e as supre me as t he in telligen t be-
ings in out er space
( C) maybe human beings are no t so supr eme as t he
beings from o ther civilizations in the unive rse
( D) bo t ( A ) and ( C)
20. T he t one of the writer is that of .
( A ) doubt ( B) war ni ng
( C) indiffer ence ( D) criticism

・ 24 4 ・
 Unit 25

Passage A

H er edit y is no t the only t hing t hat influences our color .

Where we live and how we live after we a re bor n are impor-
tant too . Our skin color depends t o a large ext en t on how
much s unshine we get .
During t he cold win ter mont hs , people keep t he mselves
cove red . A group of ligh t colored people will all see m t o be
pr ett y much t he sam e color in t hese mon t hs . Bu t when s um-
m er arrives and t hey go t o t he beaches , some will tan dar k-
ly , some will tan ligh tly and a few will not tan a t all . E ach
one has inherited a diffe ren t ability to tan .
Cen t uries ago , most of t he people in Europe we re peas-
an ts and had t o w ork in t he fields all day . Noblemen , on t he
o t her hand , did not have to work . T hey stayed i ndoor s and
rem ained pale . Y ou cou ld always tell a nobleman from a
peasan t because t he peasant had a tan .
During t he Industrial Revolu tion t hings changed .
Fa rmer s left t heir fields and wen t t o work in factories ,
mines , and mills . Work ing for long hours in dimly lit fac-
t ories and mines made t heir sk ins pale . Wealt hy people,
however , could afford t o t ravel t o sunny coun tries . They
had t he leis ur e to lie arou nd on t he beaches and get a tan .
・ 24 5 ・
H aving a tan beca me a sign of wealt h .
In Weste rn Europe and N or t h A merica pale skin is no
longer desirable . Instead of bleaching t he mselves w hite with
le mon juice, many women s pend t heir time under a s un-
lamp . The desire for a quick tan has led t o the invention of
pills and lotion s t hat darken t he skin a r tificially wit hout ex-
posur e to sunligh t . T hese pills and lotions can be bough t by
anyone at any drugstore . A rich man can spend hu ndr eds of
dolla rs on a vacation in t he sun ny West Indies and get his
sun tan ther e . But his lowest paid clerk can have what
looks like the sam e tan ou t of a bottle for a few cen ts .
So t he re a re t hree answers to t he question " Where does
our color come from ?" It comes from the genes we inhe rit .
I t com es from t he condition s in w hich we live . And it can
come from a bo ttle that we buy at t he drugst ore on t he cor-
ner .
1. According t o t he t ex t w hich of the followi ng statements
is t rue ?
( A) No waday s women do t heir best t o keep their sk in
as light as possi ble .
(B ) N owadays only rich people can have a tan .
( C) Before t he Industrial Revolution most w ork ing peo-
ple had an ou t door job .
(D) Everybody will get t he same tan if the conditions
a re righ t .
2. When summe r com es and t he light colored people go t o
・ 24 6 ・
 t he beaches , .
( A) all of t he m will tan dar kly
(B ) few of t he m will t an da rkly
( C) many of t hem will no t tan at all
(D) some of them will no t tan at all
3. According t o t he text w hich of the following m ay have an
influence on our color ?
( A) Exer cise . ( B) F ood .
( C) He redity . (D) Weigh t .
4. U sually a rich man gets his sunt an .
( A) by t ravelling t o sunny count ries
(B ) from a bot tle of lo tion
( C) by doing ou t door w ork
(D) in the fields
5. According t o t he au thor , our color doesn’t com e from
.
( A) the genes we inhe rit
(B ) t he diet we a re on
( C) t he condition in w hich we live
(D) t he lo tions we buy a t t he drugst or e

Passage B

Real policemen ha rd ly r ecognise any rese mblance be-

tween t heir lives and w hat they see on T V—if t hey ever get
hom e i n time . T her e a re similarities , of cour se , bu t t he
cop s don’t th ink much of t hem .
・ 24 7 ・
 T he first diffe rence is t hat a policeman’s r eal life re-
volves round t he law . Most of his t raining is in criminal
law . H e has to know exactly w ha t action s ar e crimes and
w ha t evidence can be used t o prove t hem in cour t .H e has t o
know nearly as much law as a professional law yer , and what
is mor e, he has to apply it on his feet , in the dark and r ain ,
running dow n an alley af ter someone he wants t o talk t o .
Little of his tim e is spent in chat ting t o scan tly clad
( 穿衣不多的 ) ladies or in dra matic confron tations wit h des-
perate criminals . H e will spend most of his working life t yp-
ing millions of w ords on thousands of forms about hundreds
of sad , unimpor tan t people w ho are guilt y or no t of st u-
pid , pett y crimes .
Most television crim e dra ma is abou t finding t he crimi-
nal : as soon as he’s arr ested , the story is over . In r eal life,
finding c rimi nals is seldom much of a proble m . Excep t in
ve ry serious cases like murders and terrorist attacks w here
failure t o produce results r eflects on the standing of t he po-
lice lit tle effor t is spen t on sea rching .
H aving made an arr est , a det ective really sta rts t o
w ork . H e has to prove his case in cour t and t o do t hat he of-
ten has to gat he r a lot of differ en t evidence . So , as well as
being overw orked , a detective has to be ou t at all hours of
t he day and night in terviewing his wit nesses and pe rsuading
t hem , usually against t heir ow n best inte rests , t o help him .
6. It is es sen tial for a policem an t o be t rained in cri mi nal law
・ 24 8 ・
 .
( A) so t hat he can ca tch criminals in t he st reets
(B ) becau se many of t he c riminals he has to catch are
dangerous
( C) so that he can justify his arrests in cour t
(D) because he has to know nearly as much abou t law
as a profes sional law yer
7. The everyday life of a policeman of detective is .
( A) exciti ng and glamorous
(B ) full of danger
( C) devoted mostly t o rou tine m atte rs
(D) wasted on unimpor tan t mat ters
8. When murders and terrorist attack s occur t he police
.
( A) prefer t o wait for t he criminal t o give himself a way
(B ) spend a lo t of effor t on trying t o t rack do w n t heir
man
( C) t ry to make a quick arr est i n order to keep up t heir
r epu tation
(D) usually fail to produce r esu lts
9. Which of t he following is tr ue according to t he passage ?
( A) Gener ally t he detective’s work is over once t he a r-
rest has been made .
(B ) P olicemen feel that t he image of t heir lives s how n
on T V is not accurate .
( C) Peop le ar e usually willing t o give evidence .
・ 24 9 ・
 (D ) Policem en and detectives spend little at t he type-
writer .
10. could be a suitab le title for the pas sage .
( A) Police men and Detectives
( B) Detectives’Life———Fact and Fan tasy
( C) The Realit y of Bei ng a Detective
( D) D ram a and Realit y

Passage C

I t is difficult t o imagine what life w ou ld be like wit hou t

memory . The m eanings of t hou sands of everyday percep-
tion s , t he bases for t he decisions we m ake, and t he roots of
our habits and skills a re t o be fou nd in our past experiences ,
w hich ar e brought in to t he pr esen t by me mory .
M emory can be defined as the capacity t o keep informa-
tion available for later use . I t includes no t only " re membe-
ring " t hings li ke arit hmetic or historical facts , but also in-
volves any change i n the way an animal t ypically behaves .
M emory is involved w hen a r at gives up eating gr ain because
he has sniffed somet hing s uspicious in grain pile . Me mory is
also involved when a si x year ol d ch ild learn s to swing a
baseball bat .
M emory exists no t only in hum ans and anim als bu t also
in some physical objects and m achines . Compu ters , for ex-
ample , con tain devices for storing data for later u se . It is in-
ter esting t o compa re t he m emory st or age capacity of a
・ 25 0 ・
compu ter wit h t hat of a h uman being . The instant access
memory of a large comp ute r may hold up to 100 000 "
w ords "——— ready for instan t use . A n aver age U .S . teenage r
probably recognizes t he m eaning of abou t 100 000 words of
Eng lish . H oweve r , t his is bu t a fr action of t he t ot al a moun t
of information w hich t he teenager has stored . Consider , for
example, t he number of faces and places t hat the teenage r
can recognize on sigh t .
T he use of words is t he basis of t he advanced problem
solvi ng in telligence of human beings . A large par t of a pe r-
son’ s me mory is i n t erms of words and combinations of
w ords .
11. Accordi ng t o t he passage, me mory is con sider ed t o be
.
( A) t he basis for decision making and problem solving
( B) an abilit y t o st ore expe riences for fut ure use
( C) an in telligence typically posses sed by human be-
ings
( D) t he data main ly consisting of words and combina-
tions of words
12. T he compa rison m ade between t he m emory capacity of a
large compute r and that of a human being shows t hat
.
(A) t he compu ter’s memory has a little bigge r capacit y
t han a teenager’s
(B) the compu ter ’s m emory capacit y is much sm alle r
・ 25 1 ・
 than an adult human being’s
( C) the compu ter ’s me mory capacity is much sm alle r
even than a teenager’s
( D) bo th ( A ) and ( B)
13. T he w hole passage imp lies t hat .
( A) only human beings have proble m solvi ng intelli-
gence
( B) a pe rson’s memory is diffe ren t from a comp ute r’s in
every res pect
( C) animals a re able to solve only very simple prob-
lems
( D) animals solve problems by instincts r ather t han
int elligence
14. T he phr ase "in term s of" in the last sen tence can best be
rep laced by .
( A) "in connection wit h" ( B) " expressed by"
( C) "consisting" (D) " by means of"
15. T he t opic of t he passage is:
( A) Wha t would life be like withou t m emory ?
( B) Me mory is of vital impor tance t o life .
( C) H ow is a person’s memory different from an ani-
mal’s or a compu ter’s ?
( D) What is contained in m emory ?

Passage D

P rices dete rmi ne how resour ces ar e to be used . They

・ 25 2 ・
ar e also t he m eans by wh ich products and services that a re in
limited s upp ly are r ationed among buyer s . The price syste m
of t he U nited States is a very complex netw ork composed of
t he prices of all the products bough t and sold in t he economy
as well as t hose of a myriad of services , i ncluding labor ,
professions , tr anspor tation , and pub lic utilit y services t he
inte rrelationship of all t hese prices make t he‘ system ’ of
prices . T he price of any pa rticula r product or service is
linked to a broad , complica ted syst em of prices in w hich
every t hing seem s to depend more or less upon every t hing
else .
If one we re to as k a group of randomly selected i ndivid-
uals to define‘ price’, m any would reply t hat price is an a-
mount of money paid by the buyer t o t he seller of a product
or service , or , in o t her w ord s , t hat price is t he money value
of a product or service as agreed upon in ma rket t ransaction .
T his definition is , of cour se , valid as fa r it goes . F or a com-
p lete understanding of a price in any pa rticula r t ransaction ,
much more t han the money involved must be know n . Bo th
t he buyer and seller should be familiar wit h not only t he
money a moun t , bu t wit h t he a moun t and quality of t he
product or service t o be exchanged , t he tim e and place at
w hich t he exchange will take place and payment will be
made, t he form of money to be used , the cr edit te rms and
discounts t hat apply t o t he t ransaction , guaran tees on t he
product or se rvice, delivery t erms , ret urn privilege, and
・ 25 3 ・
o t her factors . In ot her words , bo th t he buyer and selle r
should be fully awar e of all t he fact ors that compose t he to-
tal‘ package’being exchanged for t he asked for amount of
money i n order t hat t hey may evaluat e a given price .
16. What is t he best title for t he passage ?
( A) The Inher en t Weaknesses of the Price Sy ste m .
( B) The Complexities of t he P rice System .
( C) Cr edit Te rms in Transaction s .
( D) Resour ce Allocation and t he P ublic Sector .
17. Accordi ng t o t he passage , t he price system is relat ed
primarily t o .
( A) labor and education
( B) t ran spor tation and ins urance
( C) utilities and repairs
( D) products and services
18. Accordi ng t o t he passage , w hich of t he following is
NO T a fact or in t he comp lete understanding of price ?
( A) Inst ructions t ha t com e wit h a product .
( B) The quan tit y of a product .
( C) The quality of a product .
( D) Warr an ties that cove r a product .
19. In t he last sentence , t he word‘ they’refers to
.
( A) r et ur n privileges ( B) buye rs and sellers
( C) cash and cr edits ( D) all t he fact ors
20. T he par agraph follo wi ng t he pas sage most like discusses
・ 25 4 ・
 .
( A) u nusual ways t o adver tise products
( B) types of paym en t plans for se rvice
(C) t heories about how products affect diffe ren t levels
of societ y
( D) how cer tain elements of a 99 price‘ package’in-
fluence its market value

・ 25 5 ・
 Unit 26

Passage A

Befor e t he 1870’s tr ained nurses were vir t ually unknow n

in t he U nited States . H ospital nursi ng was an u nskilled oc-
cupation , taken up by w om en of the lower classes , some of
w hom wer e concrip ted ① from t he penitentiary ② or t he alms
hou se ③ . The move men t for r eform originated not wit h doc-
t or , bu t among upper clas s w om en , w ho had taken on t he
role of guardians of a new hygienic ④ orde r . Though some
doctors approved of the women’s desire t o establish a nurses
’ tr aining school, w hich w ou ld at tr act t he daugh ters of t he
middle class , o ther medical m en we re opposed . Plai nly
t hr eatened by the prospect , t hey objected t hat educated nur-
ses would not do as t hey were tol d———a rem arkable com-
m en t on t he stat us anxiety of nineteen t h cen t ury physi-
cian s . But t he women reforme rs did no t depend on t he phy-
sicians’ approval . When r esisted , as t hey we re at Bellevue in
effor ts t o install t rained nurses in t he m aternit y ⑤ wards ,

① conscrip t〔k n skrip t〕 招募

② p en it en t ia ry〔 pe ni te n ri〕 感化院
③ alm s house〔a∶ mz ha us〕 救济 院
④ hygie nic〔h ai d i∶ n ik〕 卫生学 的
⑤ mat e rni t y〔m t ∶ n it i〕 产科 , 产 院

・ 25 6 ・
t hey went ove r t he head s of t he doct or s t o men of t heir ow n
clas s of gr eate r powe r and au t hority . ( Florence Nigh tin-
gale, w ho had friends high in t he governm en t , had follo wed
exactly t he same course in reforming her coun t ry’s milit ary
hospitals .) Professional nursing , in shor t , em erged neit he r
from m edical discoveries nor from a progr am of hospital re-
form initiated by physicians ; outsiders saw t he need fir st .
1. Which of t he following is t he best title for t he passage ?
( A) Public H ygiene in the U nited Stat es .
(B ) Florence Nigh tingale : a N urse’s St ory .
(C) The Figh t for N ursing Educa tion in t he U nit ed
States .
(D) T he St at us A nxieties of Nineteen t h cen t ury P hy-
sicians .
2. According to t he passage, some doct ors object ed to t he
establis hmen t of nur sing schools because they believed
t hat .
( A) nursing was an ar t t hat could not be taught
(B ) additional m edical ca re from nurses was unneces sa-
ry
(C) volun teer nurses from t he upper clas s we re ade-
quat e
(D) educated nur ses w ould undermine t heir au t horit y
3. When meeti ng with opposition , t he w om en reforme rs
.
( A) turned to sympat hetic doctors for help
・ 25 7 ・
 (B ) sough t support from high r anking officials
( C) wen t t o t he heads of t he hospitals for s uppor t
(D) asked t heir hus bands t o inte rfer e
4. It can be inferred from t he pas sage t hat Bellevue was a
.
( A) universit y ( B) gove rnmen t agency
( C) hospital ( D) women’s peniten tia ry
5. Why does the au t hor m en tion Florence Nigh tingale ?
( A) T o descri be t he ca reer of a pioneer of nursing edu-
cation .
(B ) To show that w om en doct ors supported t he effor t
to upgrade nursing .
( C) To prove t ha t condition s differed in military and ci-
vilian hos pitals .
(D) To s ho w t he simila rit y of her tactics t o t hose used
by U nited States r eformer s .

Passage B

People c ry w hen t hey feel very bad . T hey cry w hen

somet hing terrib le happen s , like a deat h i n the family . They
cry w hen they feel ve ry sad or very angry . They cry w hen
t hey cannot do anyt hing about a prob le m , and t hey fell
helples s .
People also cry w hen t hey feel very good . They cry
w hen t hey have been very w orried abou t som ethi ng bu t find
ou t every t hing is all righ t . They cry w hen somet hing w on-
・ 25 8 ・
de rful happlens .
In t he U nit ed States un til lately , m en wer e not sup-
posed t o cry . Crying was weak and only for w om en . Men
wer e s upposed t o be st rong . Bu t t hings ar e changing . Men
ar e beginning t o realize that it is all righ t t o s ho w their feel-
ings . Women ar e lear ning that sometimes t hey can do some-
t hing about a problem instead of ju st crying . T hey t ry no t t o
cry in a pu blic p lace or in fron t of a fright ened child .
Chemists have been st udying w hy people cry . T hey say
t he body produces tw o kinds of tears . One kind cleans ou t
t he eye if it gets dir t in it . But w hen people cry because of
t heir feelings , t hese tear s have poison che micals in them .
T he body is get ting rid of chemicals produced by strong feel-
ings .
In t he U nited St ates m en have hea r t disease mor e oft en
t han women do . Doct ors say hea rt disease and some ot he r
diseases ar e related to t he pr ess ures of livi ng and working in
a modern societ y . Perhaps men suffer mor e from t hese dis-
eases because t hey do no t cry enough . A nd it is possi ble t hat
as mor e and more w om en work outside t he home, t hey will
also suffer from mor e pressur e, t hen eve ryone will need t o
cry more .
6. People cry w hen they feel bad and .
( A) w hen t hey feel good
(B ) w he t hey see a deat h
( C) when t hey fail t o con t rol t hemselves
・ 25 9 ・
 (D) w hen they wan t t o show t heir feelings
7. N ot un til recently .
( A) did m en realize the impor tance of cryi ng
(B ) did m en begi n t o cry
( C) were men supposed to cry
(D) we re m en supposed t o be st rong
8. Things ar e changing now because .
( A) men ar e supposed t o cry
(B ) w om en a re no t supposed to cry
( C) men ar e li kely t o cry if t hey cannot do anyt hi ng a-
bou t a problem
(D) women are learning no t to cry when they can do
somet hing about a prob lem
9. According t o chemists , .
( A) tea rs are poisonous
(B ) tear s produced by strong feelings contain poison
che micals
( C) chemicals in tear s ar e poisonous t o our eyes
(D) chemicals produced by t ea rs a re poisonou s
10. H ear t disease is related t o .
( A) t he pres sures of a modern societ y
( B) male worke rs (C) fem ale workers
( D) t hose working in fact ories

Passage C

Acting is such an over crow ded profession t hat t he on-

・ 26 0 ・
ly advice t ha t shou ld be given t o a young pe rson t hink ing of
going on t he stage is "Don’t !" Bu t it is useless to t ry t o dis-
courage som eone w ho feels t hat he must act , alt hough t he
chances of his becoming famous are sm all . T he norm al way
t o begin is to go t o a dra ma school . Usually on ly students
w ho show promise and talent are accep ted , and t he course
lasts tw o yea rs . T hen t he young act or or act ress takes up
w ork wit h a play company , us ually as assistan t stage man-
age r . T his m eans doing eve ryt hing t hat t he re is t o do in t he
t heat re : pain ti ng scenery , looking af ter the furnit ure , tak-
ing car e of t he clot hes , and even acting i n ve ry small par ts .
I t is ve ry ha rd w ork indeed , t he hours ar e long and t he sala-
ry is tiny . Bu t you ng actors with the stage in t heir blood are
happy , waiting for t he chance of w ork with a bet ter compa-
ny , or perhap s in film s or television .
Of course, som e people have u nusual chances w hich
lead to fam e and success withou t t his long and dull tr aining .
Connie P rat t , for examp le , was just an ordina ry girl w ork-
ing in a bicycle fact ory . A film producer happened t o catch
sigh t of her one morning waiting at a b us st op , as he drove
past in his big car . H e t old the driver t o st op , and he go t
ou t t o speak t o t he girl . H e asked he r if s he w ou ld like to go
t o t he film company t o do a test , and at fir st she t hought he
was joking . Then she got angry and said s he w ou ld call t he
police . It t ook t he producer t wen ty mi nutes t o tell Connie
t hat he was se rious . T hen an appoint ment was made for he r
・ 26 1 ・
t o go t o t he company t he nex t day . T he test was successful .
T hey gave her some neces sary lessons and wit hin a few
week s s he was p laying the leading par t in a film , w hich
made her well know n overnigh t t hroughou t t he coun try .
Of course, she was given a more dram atic nam e, w hich is
no w worl d fa mous . But chances like t his happen once i n a
blue moon !
11. T he mai n reason w hy young peop le should be discour-
aged from becoming act ors is t ha t .
( A) act or s a re very unus ual people
( B) t he cour se at t he dram a school lasts too long
( C) acting is ve ry hard work
( D) t he re are already t oo many act ors
12. An as sistant stage manage r’s job is difficult because he
has to .
( A) do all k inds of stage w ork
( B) work for long hours
( C) wait for a bette r oppor t unity
( D) have a talent for acting
13. " Young actors wit h t he stage in t heir b lood a re happy"
mean s .
( A) t hey don’t ca re if t heir job is ha rd
( B) t hey like t he stage nat urally
( C) t hey ar e bor n happy
( D) t hey are easily satisfied
14. Connie Pra tt t hought t he film producer was joking , for
・ 26 2 ・
 she .
( A) didn’t know w ho t he man was
( B) never wan ted to become an act res s
( C) couldn’t believe w ha t t he man said
( D) had no inte rest in ar t
15. T he p hrase " once in a bl ue moon " in t he last sen tence
mean s .
( A) imm ediately ( B) unexpectedly
( C) slo wly ( D) r arely

Passage D

Tim e spent in a book shop can be most enjoyable,

w het her you are a book lover or me rely you ar e t her e t o
buy a book as a pr esen t . Y ou m ay even have en tered t he
shop just to find shelte r from a sudden sho wer . Whateve r
t he reason , you can soon becom e to tally unawa re of your
surroundings . T he desire to pick up a book wit h an at t rac-
tive dust jacket is irresistable, alt hough t his met hod of se-
lection ough t not to be followed , as you might end up with a
rat he r dull book . Y ou soon become engrossed ① i n some
book or ot he r , and us ually it is only much la ter t hat you re-
alize you have spent far t oo much time there and must dash
off t o keep som e forgo tten appoint ment——— wit hout buying
a book , of course .

① engro ss〔in gr u s〕 使 全神 贯注

・ 26 3 ・
 T his oppor tu nit y t o escape t he r ealities of everyday life
is , I thi nk , t he main at tr action of a bookshop . T he re are
no t many places w here it is pos sible to do t his . A music
shop is very much like a bookshop . You can w ander round
such p laces to your hea r t’s cont en t . If it is a good s hop , no
assistan t will approach you wit h inevitable greeting : " Can I
help you , sir ?" You needn’t buy any t hing you don’t wan t . In
a bookshop an assistan t should rem ain in t he background
until you have fi nished browsing ① . T hen , and only t hen ,
ar e his services necessary . Of course you may wan t t o find
ou t w he re a par ticular section is , bu t w hen he has led you
t here , t he as sistant shoul d retire carefully and look as if he
is not in ter ested in selling a single book .
Y ou have t o be ca reful no t t o be a tt racted by the va riet y
of books in a bookshop . I t is very easy t o ente r t he s hop loo-
k ing for a book on ancien t coins and t o come out ca rrying a
copy of t he latest best selling novel and perhaps a book a-
bout brass rubbing———somet hing that had on ly vaguely in-
ter ested you up un til then . T his vol ume on t he sub ject ,
however , happened to be so well illu st ra ted and t he par t of
t he t ex t you r ead proved so inte resting t hat you just had t o
buy it . T his sort of t hing can be ve ry dangerou s . Apar t
from running up a huge accoun t , you can wast e a gr eat deal
of time wandering from section t o section .

① b rowse〔br a uz〕 浏览书 刊

・ 26 4 ・
16. " Dust jacket" in the first paragraph probab ly mean s
.
( A) a kind of clot hes
( B) protecti ng pape r cove r of a book
( C) book cover full of du st
( D) title of a book
17. Y ou may spend t oo much tim e in a books hop because
.
( A) t he dust jackets of some books a re very at t rac-
tive
( B) you st ar t r eading one of t he books
( C) it keep s raining ou tside
( D) you have t o m ake sure you don’t buy a dull book
as a pr esen t
18. In a good bookshop .
( A) nobody takes any notice of you
( B) t he as sistant greets you in a friendly way
( C) you feel as if you are in a music shop
( D) you find yourself satisfied wit h browsing
19. An as sistant’s help is needed .
( A) as soon as you have en ter ed t he s hop
( B) befor e you st ar t browsing
( C) only w hen you have finished browsing
( D) w hen you have determined your choice
20. Picking up books t hat vaguely in terest you can be dan-
gerou s because .
・ 26 5 ・
 ( A) you may forget abou t t he book you plan to buy
( B) you have t o give up t he best selling book
( C) it makes you br eak your appoin t men t
( D) it costs you too much money and time

・ 26 6 ・
 Unit 27

Passage A

N o meeti ng was at tended by more cont rove rsy before-

hand t han t he Mexico Ga mes . The m ajor prob lem was t he
high altit ude of M exico City——— ove r 2 134m . above sea
level——— w hich mean t t hat no middle or long distance
runner from a low altit ude count ry had any r eal chance of
beating the‘ men of moun tain s’. Au str alia’s Ron Clar ke, for
example, went to Mexico as a multip le record br eake r bu t
ca me close to collapse during t he final stages of the 10 000
met res and had t o be revived af ter wards wit h an oxygen
mask .
O n t he o t her hand , t he t hi n air was an advantage in e-
ven ts like t he short sprin ts and hurdles and the long and t ri-
p le j ump s .
I t wou ld be ungenerous , howeve r , t o deny the success
of t he African at hletes i n Mexico even though many of t he m
had benefited from having lived or tr ained at high altit ude .
Kipchoge Keino of Kenya, for exa mp le , r an in the 10 000 , 5
000 and 1 500 m etr es and his winni ng time of 3 min . 34 .9
sec . in the 1 500 met res was withou t doub t effectively bette r
t han t he t hen w orl d record , set at low altit ude , of 3 min .
33 .1 sec .
・ 26 7 ・
 Bu t the choice of M exico City for t he 1968 gam es mean t
t hat , to give t he mselves a fair chance, many of t he at hletes
had t o sacrifice even more of t heir time t o allow for special
high altit ude t raining . O ne coul d no longe r , it seem ed , af-
ford t o be a pa r ttimer in spor t .
1. This passage is abou t .
( A) a race meeting ( B) p laying ga mes
( C) an in ternational even t ( D) a m atch
2. The proble m that faced some of t he con testan ts was t he
.
( A) moun tainou s ar ea ( B) dept h of the sea
( C) r emotenes s of the ar ea ( D) heigh t of t he location
3. In w hich of t hese even ts wer e t he clim atic condition s a
disadvantage ?
( A) 10 000 m etr es . ( B) Long jump .
( C) 100 met res . ( D) H urdles .
4. In the 1 500 met res , Kipchoge Keino’s tim e .
( A) w as in side t he w or ld r ecord
(B ) equalled t he world r ecord at 3 min . 33 .1 sec
( C) was ou tside t he w or ld record by les s than t wo sec-
onds
(D) ou t did t he w or ld record by 1 .8 seconds
5. Owing t o t he loca tion , some at hletes wer e ob liged to
.
( A) tr ain pa r t time
(B ) change t heir rou tine
・ 26 8 ・
 ( C) provide specialist tr aining
(D) give up some t rai ni ng time

Passage B

In a fa mily w he re the roles of men and women ar e no t

sharply sepa rated and w he re m any hou sehold tasks are
shared to a greater or lesser ex ten t , no tions of m ale supe ri-
orit y a re ha rd t o m ain tai n . T he pat tern of sharing in tasks
and in decision s makes for equality , and t his in t urn leads t o
furt her sharing . In such a home , t he growing boy and girl
lear n t o accept t hat equalit y more easily t han did their pa r-
en ts and to pr epa re mor e fu lly for par ticipation in a w or ld
characterized by co operation rat he r t han by t he " bat tle of
t he sexes" .
If t he proces s goes too far and man’s role is regarded as
less impor tan t———and t ha t has happened in som e cases———
we ar e as badly off as befor e, only in reverse .
I t is tim e to reassess t he role of t he man in t he A me ri-
can fa mily . We ar e get ting a lit tle tired of " Momis m" ———
but we don’t want to exchange it for a " neo P opis m" . What
we need , rat her , is t he recognition t hat bringing up children
involves a par t ners hip of equals . T he re ar e signs t hat psy-
chiat rists ① , psychologists , social worke rs , and specialists
on t he family a re becoming more awa re of t he par t m en play

① p syc hia tris t〔sai k ai t ris t〕 精神 病医 生

・ 26 9 ・
and t hat they have decided that women should no t receive all
t he c redit———nor all t he bla me . We have almost given up
sayi ng t hat a w om an’s place is i n t he hom e . We ar e begin-
ning , howeve r , t o analyze men’s place in t he hom e and t o in-
sist t ha t he does have a place in it . N or is that place irrele-
vant to the healt hy development of t he ch ild .
T he family is a co ope rative en terprise for w hich it is
difficult t o lay do wn rules , because each fa mily needs t o
w ork ou t its ow n ways for solving its ow n proble ms .
Excessive aut horita rianism has unhappy con sequences ,
w het her it wear s skir ts or trousers , and t he ideal of equal
righ ts and equal responsibilities is con nected not on ly wit h a
healt hy democr acy , but also wit h a healt hy family .
6. This passage tells t he r eaders t hat A me rican social w or k-
e rs sho w more concern for t he role .
( A) w omen play in a family
(B ) childr en play in a fa mily
( C) men play in a family
(D) par en ts play in bringing up chil dr en
7. Who will benefit most from a family patt ern of sharing in
tasks and decisions ?
( A) Social workers . ( B) The man .
( C) The w oman . ( D) The ch ildren .
8. Par agraph 3 m eans to say that .
( A) a w om an’s place is in t he home
(B ) a m an shoul d have an equal sha re in family mat ters
・ 27 0 ・
 ( C) a man’s p lace is in t he home
(D) a woman needs t o have an equal right in fa mily
matte rs
9. A healthy family is based on .
( A) " Momism" ( B) "P opis m"
( C) au thoritarianis m ( D) co ope ration
10. T he w rit er of t his pas sage claims t hat .
( A) au t horita rianism is harmfu l t o t he fa mily
( B) a sharp separation of t he roles of m en and women
is decisive for a healt hy fa mily
( C) au thority p lus democracy produces a healt hy fa mi-
ly
(D) notion s of m ale superiorit y m ain tain a healt hy
fa mily

Passage C

A t hird of Brit on s a re over weigh t , stat es a report pub-

lished in January by t he Royal College of Physicians , t he re-
s ult of an 18 mont h long st udy . A bout five per cen t of
chil dr en weigh too much , and a re li kely to stay t hat way for
life; in the mid twenties age group t he propor tion of fat
people rises to a t hird , and of t he middle aged popu lation
half are over weigh t .
Fat people risk severe healt h prob lem s , says t he re-
port , including high b lood pressur e, breath less nes s , and va-
rious forms of hea rt disease . Smoking is pa rticularly risky
・ 27 1 ・
for overweight people .
T he safest way t o lose weigh t is to eat ce reals① , bread ,
fruit and vegetables , and cu t dow n on fatt y meats , bu tte r
and sweet foods . Fad ② diets do fa r mor e harm t han good ;
slimming machines t hat vibrate muscles have no t been
proved useful ; saunas ③ m erely remove a little body water ,
and healt h fa rms , says the r epor t , serves as expensive holi-
days .
Exercise is most import an t t o healt h , t he r eport e mpha-
sizes; t hough it doesn’t necessarily r educe weight ; it main-
tains the corr ect propor tion of body fat to body muscle . A nd
it isn’t only for t he young ; from middle age a minimum of 20
minutes of gentle physical jerk s s hou ld be practised t hr ee
times a week .
T he r epor t advocates ④ sever al public health meas ur es t o
combat t he high pr evalence ⑤ of over weigh t in t his coun try .
T hey include an increase of tax on alcohol t o r educe its in-
c reasi ng , and dangerou sly fa tteni ng con sumption ; and t he
provision of more s por ts facilities by local aut horities . Brit-
ain’s doct or s , t he repor t concl udes , must learn t o be more
sympat hetic and specific in t heir advice to t he overweight ,

① cer eal〔 si ri l〕 谷 类食物

② f ad〔f d〕 目前时 行的
③ saun as〔 sa un 〕 蒸气 浴
④ advocat e〔 dv k it〕 提倡
⑤ p re vale nce〔 pr ev l n t〕 流行

・ 27 2 ・
encour aging a change in ea ting habits on a long term basis ,
and t aking in to accoun t t he m any often complex——— r ea-
sons w hy fat people a re fat .
11. T he passage m ainly talks abou t .
( A) t he cause of Britons’ over weigh t
( B) how to avoid getting over weigh t
( C) Britons’ over weigh t problem
( D) t he r elations bet ween ove rweigh t and healt h prob-
lem s
12. Accordi ng to t he r epor t , a per son is most likely to st ay
fat for the whole of his life if he .
( A) gets fat in t he twenties
( B) gets fat in his middle age
( C) is born fat
( D) gets fat w hen he is a child
13. T he report th inks t hat exer cise .
( A) is a way t o r educe weight
( B) sometimes inc reases weigh t
( C) is a sur e w ay t o keep one healt hy
( D) can conve rt fat t o mu scle
14. T he report poi nts ou t t hat drinking too much alcohol
.
( A) will also cause one to get fat
( B) will cause one to do les s sports
( C) will make one forget t he fact t hat he is fat
( D) will lead one t o bad eating habits
・ 27 3 ・
15. Britain’s doctors , w hen tr eating t he overweight , s hou ld
.
( A) encourage a long term diet for eve ryone
( B) be mor e conside rate and give detailed advice
( C) first con sider w hy so m any people a re fat
( D) do all of the above

Passage D

Of all t he problems facing modern astronom ers , per-

haps t he most fasci nating is: " Can int elligen t life exist else-
w her e ?" Since t he ea rt h is an unimportant planet moving
round an unimpor tant st ar , it woul d be a pride on our par t
t o suppose t hat we ar e t he only in telligen t beings in t he uni-
ver se . Bu t t o ob tain proof is difficu lt .
T he m ain t rouble is t hat our neigh bour worlds , t he
bodies in t he Solar System appear to be u nsuitab le for ad-
vanced life forms . The Moon m ay be ru led ou t at once; it
has hardly any atmosphere . Venus is little bet ter ; t he sur-
face te mper at ure is ex tr emely high and t he at mospher e is
mostly carbon dioxide . Mar s with a ve ry t hin atmosphere
and a seve re shor tage of water , m ay well suppor t simple
plan t life b ut ther e see ms no hope of finding animals , while
t he at tr active Ma r tians of t he st ory tellers have long si nce
been given up .
Of course this has not stopped t he flow of brigh t ideas
for communicating wit h t he s upposed people on M ars . In
・ 27 4 ・
t he ear ly nineteen t h cent ury t he gr eat mat hematician Gauss
suggested plan ting t ree pat tern s i n Sibe ria, so t hat t he
M ar tian s w ould see t hem and rep ly suitab ly . Following up
t his idea , t he Au st rian scien tist Karl Lit t ro w proposed dig-
ging very wide ditches in t he Sahar a, t riangu la r in pat tern ,
and t hen filli ng t he m with petrol or some such s ubstance so
t hat , w hen lit , t he ditches woul d present Mar tian observers
with a " fla ming triangle" w hich would show t he existence
her e of intelligen t minds . Even bette r were t he plan s of
Char les Cros , a Fr ench writer of t he eight een seventies ,
w ho wanted t o build a la rge mirror t o r eflect t he sun’s rays
and concen t rate t hem on t he surface of Ma rs , ther eby mak-
ing a vast burning glass . By swinging t he mirror a round ,
Cros explained it would be practicab le t o w rit e w ord s in t he
M ar tian deser ts simply by burni ng t he sand . F or many years
he bomba rded t he F rench gove rnmen t with literat ur e abou t
t his plan and was very disappointed when no official in ter est
was s ho wn .
16. T he opinion of t he w rit er is t hat .
(A) t here may be o t her in telligen t beings in t he uni-
ver se
( B) t her e a re o t her in telligen t beings in t he universe
( C) people living on t he ea rt h ar e almost ce rtainly t he
only in telligent beings in t he universe
( D) people living on the ea rt h are definitely t he only
i ntelligen t beings i n t he universe
・ 27 5 ・
17. T he re is unlikely any life on Venus because .
( A) t he surface tempe rat ure is too ho t
( B) t he weat her is too col d
( C) it is seve rely shor t of wate r
( D) it has a very t hin at mospher e
18. It seem s t hat M ars .
( A) m ay be i nhabited by att ractive M ar tian s
( B) may have some vegetable life
( C) can have no life at all
( D) m ay have bot h vegetable and ani mal life
19. Gauss wanted t o establis h con tact wit h t he Ma rtians by
.
( A) p lanting tr ees in triangular shape
( B) filling wide ditches with oil
( C) building a la rge mirror
( D) m aking pat tern s with t rees
20. Cha rles Cros felt .
( A) angry w hen t he gove rnmen t paid lit tle attention
to his ideas
( B) pleased when the governm en t did take notice of
his p lan
(C) surprised t hat the officials were int erested in his
suggestion
( D) disappoin ted at t he lack of in ter est sho wn in his
plan

・ 27 6 ・
 Unit 28

Passage A

By fa r t he most common snake in Brit ain is t he adder ① .

In Scotland , in fact , t her e a re no ot her kinds of poisonous
snakes . It can be found almost any where , bu t it prefers
sunny hillsides and rough open count ry , incl uding h igh
ground . In Ireland there a re no snakes at all .
Most people rega rd s nake bit es as deadly , bu t no t all
bites ar e se riou s , and very few are deadly . Sometimes at-
temp ts at emergency tr eat m en t t urn out t o be mor e dange r-
ous t han t he bite itself , wit h someone heroically , bu t mis-
taken ly , trying do it yourself s urgery and o ther un neces-
sary measures .
All s nakes have s mall teet h , so it follo ws that all
snakes can bite , bu t only t he bite of t he adder presen ts any
dange r . British snakes a re shy animals and a re far more
fright ened of you t han you could pos sibly be of t he m . T he
adde r will attack only if it feels t hreatened , as can happen if
you take it by surprise and step on it accidentally , or if you
t ry t o catch it or pick it up , w hich it dislikes in tensely . If it
hears you coming , it will normally get ou t of t he way as

① add er〔 d〕 蝰蛇

・ 27 7 ・
quickly as it can , bu t adders cannot move ve ry r apidly and
may at tack befor e moving if you are very close .
T he effect of a bite va ries considerably . I t depends up-
on several t hings , one of w hich is t he body weigh t of t he
person bitten . The bigger t he person , t he less harmful t he
bite is li kely t o be , wh ich is why children suffer far more se-
riously from snake bites t han adults . A healt hy person will
also have bet ter resistance again st t he poison .
V ery few people act ually die from s nake bit es in Brit-
ain , and t hough t hese bites can make some people very ill,
t here a re probably just as m any cases of bites having little or
no effect , as t he re are of serious illnes s .
1. A dders ar e to be found .
( A) in many par ts of Britain and Ir eland
(B ) every wher e in Britai n excep t Sco tland
( C) on wild land t hroughou t Britain
(D) in shady fields in Scotland
2. If you are wit h someone w ho is bitten by an adder , you
should .
( A) try to catch t he adder
(B ) make no at temp t t o t reat t he bite by yourself
( C) not worry about t he victim
(D) operate on hi m as soon as possi ble
3. We ar e told t hat adders are .
( A) norm ally friend ly t owards people
(B ) unlikely to bite excep t in self defence
・ 27 8 ・
 ( C) fond of attacking anyone in their territory
(D) not afraid of human beings
4. If an adder hear s you approachi ng, it will usually .
( A) take no no tice of you at all
(B ) at tack you befor e moving away
( C) wait until you a re close and t hen att ack
(D) move ou t of your pa th
5. In general, British people t hink s nakes ar e .
( A) not very common in Britain
(B ) not all very dangerous
( C) capable of killing people by t heir bites
(D) no t hreat t o human bei ngs

Passage B

H oneybees canno t live alone . Their body struct ur e and

insti ncts① equip them for life in a colony or community ,
w he re t hey have a comp lex social organization and t he va ri-
ous duties ar e divided a mong t he individuals according t o
physical fit ness and age . A n individual w orker bee canno t
reproduce itself . While it m ay continue to live if forcib ly iso-
lated from its mates , it fails to car e for itself adequately ,
and soon dies . Most insects have t he abilit y t o hibernat e in
win ter , but t he honeybee seems to have lost t his .Since at
low temperat ures t he bee will die, it mu st have t he abilit y t o

① in st inc t〔 in st i k t〕 本能

・ 27 9 ・
make its o wn environm en t , so fa r as t emper at ure is con-
cerned . This makes a colony neces sary t o t he bees in win-
ter , so t hat t hey may collectively w arm each o ther . Efficien-
cy , if not neces sity , dem ands t hat t he w or k of t he colony be
divided , and such a division of labor tends to enhance ① t he
need t o mai ntain t he colony . T he physical st ruct ure of t he
honeybee is fur t he r suited for t he defense of the en tir e colo-
ny rat her than for its ow n defense . T he bee’s barbed ② sting
is used only once and is made mor e effective by t he fact t hat
it is left behi nd in t he victim ③ . Wit h t he los s of t he sting ,
however , t he bee dies . Th is kind of defensive weapon is no t
of service to t he individual , bu t t o t he communit y .
6. According to t he pas sage, bees ar e fit ted for communal
life by vir tur e of t heir .
( A) flexibilit y and i nitative
(B ) int elligence and sensitivit y
( C) independence and endurance
(D) instincts and form
7. It can be inferred from t he pas sage t ha t at one time bees
had t he abilit y to .
( A) incr ease their activit y in lower temperat ures
(B ) leave cold climates during win ter

① en ha nce〔i n h a∶ ns〕 加强
② b a rb〔ba∶ b〕 装倒刺 于
③ vic tim〔 vi k tim〕 受 害者

・ 28 0 ・
 ( C) re mai n inactive t hrough periods of cold weat he r
(D) constr uct in sulated hives
8. According to t he passage , bees diffe r from most ot he r
communities of i nsects in their need to .
( A) reproduce in large number s
(B ) cont rol the temperat ure w here t hey live
( C) divide the work of t heir colonies
(D) have a complex defense syste m
9. According to t he passage , t he honeybee’s sting is pa rticu-
larly effective because it .
( A) has m any po ten tial uses
(B ) can kill sever al victims at once
( C) is located i n t he rear of the bee’s body
(D) rem ains with t he bee’s victim
10. Which of the following is t he most appropria te title for
the passage ?
( A) The Communal Life of Bees .
( B) The St ruct ur e of t he Bee .
( C) The Organization of Insect Colonies .
( D) The Life of Social Insects

Passage C

T he A merican Revolu tion was not a r evol ution in t he

sense of r adical ① or t otal change . I t w as no t a sudden and

① ra dical〔 r di kl〕 根 本的

・ 28 1 ・
violent over t urning of t he political and social fra mework ,
such as later occurr ed in F rance and Rus sia , w hen bot h were
already independent nations . Significan t changes wer e us h-
ered ① in , bu t t hey were not breat htaking ②
. What happened
was accelerat ed evolu tion rat he r t han out righ t revolu tion .
During the conflict ③ itself people wen t on w orking and pra-
ying , marrying and playing . Most of them wer e no t se rious-
ly dist urbed by t he act ual figh ting , and many of t he more i-
solated communities scarcely k new t ha t a war was on .
A me rica’s War of Independence heralded ④ t he bir th of
t hr ee modern na tions . O ne was Canada , wh ich received its
first la rge infl ux of Eng lish speaking popu lation from t he
t housands of loyalists w ho fled ther e from t he U nit ed
States . A not he r was A ustr alia , which becam e a penal colony
no w t ha t A merica was no longer available for prisoners and
deb tors . T he t hird newcomer the U nited Stat es based it-
self squa rely on repu blican principles .
Yet even t he political over t urn was no t so revolu tionary
as one migh t suppose . In som e states , not ably Connecticu t
and R hode Island , t he wa r la rgely ratified a colonial selfr ule
already existing . British officials , everyw here ousted , were

① u sh e r〔 〕 展示 , 引 进
② b rea t h t ak ing〔 br e , tei ki 〕 激 动人 心的
③ conflict〔 k nfli k t〕 抵 触 , 冲突
④ he r ald〔 h er ld〕 预示… 来临

・ 28 2 ・
replaced by a hom e grow n governing clas s , w hich promp t-
ly sough t a local su bstit ut e for king and Parliam en t .
11. Which of t he followi ng w ould be t he best title for t he
passage ?
( A) The U nited States: A n Isolat ed Community
( B) Canada and t he A merican Revolu tion
(C) T he Am erican Revolu tion : Evol ution No t Revolu-
tion
( D) Br eat h taking Events During t he Am erican Revo-
lu tion
12. What does t he au t hor suggest abou t t he Fr ench and
Ru ssian Revolu tions ?
( A) They we re explosive and abrup t .
( B) They wer e ineffective .
( C) T hey i nvolved only t hose people living in urban
ar eas .
( D) They led t o t he release of all political prisoners .
13. In t he fist pa ragr aph , w hat does t he aut hor mean by "
people wen t on working and praying , m arrying and pla-
ying" ?
( A) People had more t han enough leisure time .
( B) Mor e people got ma rried t han divor ced .
( C) Life wen t on as u sual .
( D) The war cr ea ted new job s .
14. Accordi ng to t he pas sage, w hich of t he following stat-
m en ts is NO T t rue ?
・ 28 3 ・
 ( A) Som e of t he st ates had actually won independence
before t he Am erican Revolu tion .
( B) The British government began t o send its prison-
e rs to Au st r alia after t he A me rican Revol ution .
( C) All t he British officials in A merica wer e removed
ou t of office afte r t he Revolution .
( D) A me ricans chose a new king immediately af ter t he
Revolu tion .
15. It can be inferr ed from t he pas sage that t he loyalists
w ho escaped t o Canada wer e .
( A) Rus sian ( B) Fr ench
( C) British (D) A ustr alian

Passage D

T he compr ehension passages on th is course ar e de-

signed to help you incr ease your r eading speed . A highe r
reading rate , wit h no loss of compr ehension , will help you
in o t her subjects as well as English , and the gene ral princi-
p les apply t o any language . Nat ur ally , you will not read ev-
ery book at the sa me speed . Y ou w ou ld expect to r ead a
newspaper , for exa mple, much more rapidly t han a physics
or economics tex t book——— bu t you can r aise your aver age
reading speed ove r t he whole range of materials you wis h t o
cove r so t hat t he percen tage gain will be t he same whateve r
kind of r eading you ar e concerned wit h .
T he r eading pas sages wh ich follo w a re all of an aver age
・ 28 4 ・
level of difficulty for your stage of i nstruction . They are all
abou t 500 words long . T hey a re abou t topics of gene ral in-
ter est w hich do not r equire a great deal of specialized kno wl-
edge . Th us they fall between t he kind of r eading you migh t
find in your text book s and t he much less demanding kind
you will find in a newspape r or ligh t novel .If you read t his
kind of English , wit h understandi ng , at , say , 400 w ords pe r
minute , you migh t s kim t hrough a newspaper at perhaps
650 - 700 , w hile wit h a difficu lt tex tbook you migh t drop t o
200 or 250 .
Perhap s you w ould like to know w hat reading speeds
ar e common a mong native Englis h speaking universit y
studen ts and how those speeds can be improved . T ests in
Min neso ta, U . S . A ., for examp le , have show n t hat
studen ts wit hou t special tr aining can read English of aver age
difficult y , for example Tolst oy’s W ar an d P eace in tr ansla-
tion , at speeds of between 240 and 250 w .p .m . wit h abou t
70 % compr ehension . Minnesota claim s that after 12 half
hour les sons , one a week , t he reading speed can be in-
c reased , wit h no loss of compr ehension , t o around 500 w .p .
m . It is furt her claimed t hat wit h in tensive t raini ng ove r
seven teen weeks , speeds fo over 1000 w . p . m . can be
reached , but t his would be quite excep tional .
If you get to t he poin t w her e you can r ead book s of av-
erage difficulty at between 400 and 500 w .p .m . wit h 70 %
or mor e compr ehension , you will be doing quite well,
・ 28 5 ・
t hough of cour se any fur t her improvem en t of speed with
compr ehension will be a good t hing .
16. Accordi ng to the passage , a h igher reading rate depends
on .
( A) a large vocabulary
( B) learning ot he r subjects well besides Englis h
( C) a good comprehension of the reading tex ts
( D) differ en t reading speeds for different t ypes of
texts
17. Accordi ng to t he ar ticle, the r eadi ng pas sages on t his
course a re .
( A) mor e difficult t han a tex t book on a pa rticula r s ub-
ject
( B) easie r t han a ligh t novel
( C) more demanding t han news st ories
( D) of the sam e category as novels and newspapers
18. Y ou can expect to read your tex t books .
(A) more quickly than you r ead t he passages on t his
course
( B) more quick ly t han you r ead a newspaper
( C) more slowly than you r ead the passage on t his
cour se
( D) faste r t han any o t her k ind of ma terial
19. F or a book of average difficult y t he ave rage unt rained n-
ative speake r at the univer sit y of Minneso ta .
( A) r eads at 500 w .p .m .
・ 28 6 ・
 ( B) r eads at 400 w .p .m .
( C) reads at abou t 1 000 w .p .m .
( D) r eads at about 245 w .p .m .
20. An unt rained st udent’s reading speed can be
wit h in tensive t raining over twelve weeks .
( A) increased four tim es ( B) doub led
( C) t ripled (D) inc reased a little

・ 28 7 ・
 Unit 29

Passage A

A me rican cities ar e similar t o ot he r cities around t he

w or ld . In every coun try , cities r eflect t he values of t he cu l-
t ure . Cities con tain t he very best aspects of a soiciety : op-
port unities for education , employmen t , and ente rt ainment .
T hey also con tain t he very worst par ts of a society : violen t
crime , r acial conflict ① and pover ty . A merican cities are
changing , ju st as A me rican societ y .
A fter World Wa r II , t he popula tion of most large A-
m erican cities decreased ; however , the popula tion in many
Sun Belt cities incr eased . Los A ngeles and H ouston are cit-
ies where popula tion increased . These population shifts t o
and from t he city reflect t he changing val ues of A merican
societ y .
During th is time, in t he lat e 1940s and ea rly 1950s , cit y
residen ts became wealt hier , more prosperous . They had
more childr en . T hey needed more space .They moved out of
t heir apar t men ts in t he city to buy t heir ow n homes . They
bough t hou ses in the suburb s , a reas near a cit y w her e peo-
p le live . These ar e ar eas wit hou t many offices or factories .

① conflict〔’k nflik t〕 冲突 , 抵 触

・ 28 8 ・
During t he 1950s t he A merican " drea m" was to have a house
in t he sub ur bs .
N ow t hings ar e changing . The children of t he people
w ho left t he cities in t he 1950 s a re no w adu lts . They , un like
t heir pa ren ts , wan t to live in t he cities . Some con tin ue t o
move to cities in t he Sun Belt . Cities are expanding and t he
population is incr easing in such states as T exas , Florida,
and California . Ot he rs a re moving t o more estab lished cities
of t he N or t heast and Midwest , such as Bost on . Balti more
and Chicago .
M any young professionals , doctors , lawye rs , and exec-
u tives , a re movi ng back in t o t he cit y . They pr efer the cit y
t o t he suburb s because t heir job s ar e t here ; t hey a re afraid
of t he fuel shor tage; or they just enjoy t he excite men t and
oppor t unities w hich t he cit y offers . A new clas s is moving
int o t he cities a wealt hie r , more mobile class .
1 . What does t he passage mainly discu ss ?
( A) The Am erican " dr eam" .
( B) A new clas s of city residents .
( C) Racial conflict and pover ty .
(D) Cities in A merica .
2 . T he colon ( : ) is used twice in pa ragr aph 1 . What does
t he colon do ?
( A) It in troduces exa mples .
( B) It in troduces a conflicting idea .
( C) It in t riduces a false idea .
・ 28 9 ・
 (D) It in troduces a brigh t idea .
3 . A ccording t o t he passage , why did many people move t o
t he su burbs during t he period aft er World War II ?
( A) They wer e afraid of anot her world w ar .
( B) They wanted t o be free from violen t crime .
( C) They became richer and wanted t o have more living
space .
(D) They cou ld not bear t he air poll ution in t he cit y .
4 . According t o t he pas sage, w hy do many people wan t t o
live in t he city now ?
( A) They t hink t heir par en ts we re once cit y r esiden ts .
( B) They can not afford t he fuel for their t ransporta-
tion .
( C) They want to restore t he old cities .
(D) T hey love t he excitement and chances in t he cit y .
5 . In pa ragr aph 4 , t he w ords " mor e estab lished" cou ld best
be r eplaced by w hich of t he following ?
( A) more organized ( B) more official
( C) more famous ( D) olde r

Passage B

First , of cour se , it is p lain t hat in t he year 2000 every-

one will have at his elbow seve ral times more mechanical en-
ergy t han he has today .
Second , there will be advances in biological k no wledge
as fa r reaching as t hose t hat have been made in physics ,
・ 29 0 ・
We ar e only beginni ng t o learn t hat we can con t rol our bio-
logical environm en t as well as our physical one . Starvation
has been for etold twice t o a growing world population : by
M alt hu s abou t 1800 , by Crookes about 1900 . It was headed
off t he first time by taking agricu lt ur e to A me rica and t he
second time by using t he new fe rtilizers .In t he yea r 2000 ,
stavation will be headed off by t he con trol of t he diseases
①
and t he heredit y of plan ts and ani mals by s haping our
o wn biological environmen t .
A t t hird , I come back t o the hau nting t hem e of au toma-
tion . T he most common species in the fact ory today is t he
man w ho works or minds a simple m ach ine the oper ator .
By t he year 2000 , he will be as extinct as t he hand loom
weaver . T he repetitive t ask s of indust ry will be taken ove r
by t he machines , as t he heavy tasks were taken over long
ago ; and the men tal tediou sness will go t he way of physical
exhau stion . Today we still distinguish , even among repeti-
tive jobs , between t he sk illed and the uns killed ; bu t i n t he
yea r 2000 all r epetition will be unskilled . We simply waste
our time if we oppose th is change; it is i nevit able as the yea r
2000 itself .
6 . T his passage was chiefly w ritten t o .
( A) warn u s of t he comi ng sta rvation
( B) predict fu t ure happenings in h uman life

① he r edi ty〔h i’r edi ti〕 遗传

・ 29 1 ・
 ( C) oppose biological advances
(D) develop M alt hus’ theory
7 . According t o t he a rticle , advances in biological kno wl-
edge have .
( A) kept pace wit h advances in physics
( B) been respon sible for t he inven tion of new machi nes
( C) surpas sed t hose in physics
(D) lagged behind t hose in physics
8 . Which of t he follo wi ng is closest in meaning to t he phrase
" headed off " ?
( A) prevent ed ( B) advanced
( C) pu t for ward ( D) pu t off
9 . We learn from t his pas sage that by t he twent y - fir st ,
cen tury , simple machine operat ors .
( A) will be divided int o t he sk illed and t he unsk illed
( B) will be replaced by ot her machines
( C) will becom e mor e sk illed than t hey are now
(D) will suffe r no physical exhaustion
10 . Repetitive tas ks in indust ry lead to .
(A) physical exhaustion
( B) m en tal stimula tion
( C) mental tediouseness
( D) human ex tinction

Passase C

Most of u s have an image of s uch a normal or standa rd

・ 29 2 ・
Eng lish i n pronounciation , and very common ly in G reat
Britain t his is " Received P ronunciation " , oft en as sociat ed
with the public schools , O xford , and t he BBC . Indeed , a
pronouncia tion wit hin t his r ange has great pres-
tige ① t hroughou t t he w or ld , and for English taugh t as a for-
eign language it is more usually the ideal t han any ot her pro-
nounciation . A t t he sa me ti me, it must be r eme mber ed
t hat , so far as t he English speaki ng coun tries are con-
cerned , t his " Received Pronunciation" approaches t he stat us
of a " standard " almost only in England : educa ted Scots ,
Irish men , Am ericans , A ustr alians , and ot he rs have t heir
o wn differ en t im ages of a st anda rd form of English .
Even in Eng land it is difficult to speak of a standard in
pronunciation . P ronuncia tion is infinitely variab le , so t hat
even given t he will to adop t a single pronunciation , it w ou ld
be diffictu lt to achieve . The word dance may be pronounced
in a dozen ways even by people w ho do not th ink of t he m-
selves as dialect speakers : t he re is no sure way of any tw o
people saying t he sa me w ord wit h pr ecisely t he same sound .
In t his r espect pronunciation much more closely r esembles
handw riting t han spelling . In spelling , t he re ar e absol ute
distinctions wh ich can be lea rnt and imitated wit h comp lete
pr ecision : one can know at once whet her a word is spelt in a
" standa rd " way or not . But tw o persons’handw riting and

① p rest ig e〔p res’t i: 〕 威 信 ; 声望

・ 29 3 ・
pronunciation may bo t h be perfectly in telligible, yet have
obvious differ ences wit hou t our bei ng able t o say wh ich is "
bett er" or mor e " st anda rd" .
11 . W hat does t he passage m ainly discus s ?
(A) Eng lish pronunciation , spelling and handw riting .
( B) The stat us of Received Pronunciation in t he Eng-
lish - speaking coun tries .
( C) The difficu lty of achieving a standard in English
pronunciation .
( D) Variations in t he pronunciation of the w ord "
dance" .
12 . What can we lea rn abou t " Received Pronunciation " from
the passage ?
(A) I t is sub - standard form of t he English language .
( B) It is an ideal form of English pronuncia tion in
English - speaking count ries .
( C) I t is a standard form English pronunciation among
intellect uals eve ry w her e in t he world .
( D) It is a somew hat standa rd form of English pro-
nunciation in England .
13 . In what way is pronunciation mor e like hand writing
t han spelling according to t he pas sage ?
( A) T hey can bot h be learn t wit h comp lete precision .
(B ) T hey vary from i ndividual to individual .
( C) Neit he r of t he m is essen tial t o t he acquisition of
t he English language .
・ 29 4 ・
 (D) T hey can hardly be imitated .
14 . W hy is it so difficu lt t o achieve a single standard pro-
nunciation even in England ?
(A) Because most people do no t go t o public schools .
( B) Because t he re is a lot of con troversy ove r t he pro-
nunciation of t he word" dance" .
( C) Because no t wo people can be said t o pronounce
w ords i n exactly the sam e way .
( D) Becau se dialect speakers do not want to change
t heir pronunciation .
15 . W hat can be inferred from t he passage ?
(A) T her e is no such t hing as a single standard Eng-
lish i n pronunciation in t he English - speaking
w or ld .
( B) I t is neces sa ry for peop le to agree on a single Eng-
lish pronunciation in order t o avoid misunde r-
standi ng .
( C) The A merican model of pronuncia tion is gaining
higher pr estige i n the English - speaki ng coun-
t ries .
( D) Received pronunciation will disappear soon .

Passase D

T her e are tw o basic differ ences bet ween t he large and

・ 29 5 ・
t he small en terprise . In t he s mall ente rprise ① you ope rate
pri marily t hrough personal con tacts . In t he la rge ente rprise
you have established " policies " , " channels " of organization ,
and fairly rigid procedur es . In t he small en terprise you
have , mor eove r , imm ediate effectivenes s in a very s mall are-
a . You can see the effect of your w ork and of your decisions
righ t away , once you a re a lit tle above t he ground floor . In
t he large ente rprise even t he man at t he top is on ly a cog ② in
a big machine . T o be s ure, his actions affect a much greate r
ar ea than t he actions and decisions of the m an in t he small
organization , bu t his effectiveness is re mo te, indirect , and
difficult t o see at first sight . In a small and even in a middle
sized b usiness you a re normally exposed t o all kinds of ex-
periences , and expected to do a great many t hings wit hou t
t oo much help or guidance . In t he large organization you are
normally taugh t one t hing t horoughly . In t he s mall one t he
dange r of becoming a j ack of a ll tra des and master of
none .In t he large one it is of becoming t he man who kno ws
more and more abou t less and les s .
T her e is one ot he r importan t t hing to conside r : t o you
derive a deep sense of satisfaction from being a m ember of a
well k no wn organization———General Mo tors , the Bell T el-
ephone Sy ste m , t he gove rnmen t ? Or is it more impor tant t o

① en t e rprise〔’en t pr aiz〕 企 业单位

② cog 〔k g〕 嵌齿

・ 29 6 ・
you t o be a well know n and import an t figure wit hin your
o wn sm all pond ? T her e is a basic diffe rence bet ween t he
satisfaction t hat com es from being a member of a la rge,
po werful , and gene rally k no wn organization , and t he one
t hat com es from being a member of a family ; bet ween im-
personal grandeur ① and per sonal often much too per sonal
intimacy ② ; between life in a sm all office on t he top floor of a
skysc raper and life in a crossroads gas station .
16 . In a la rge ent erprise, .
(A) new technology is employed quick ly
( B) all people work efficien tly
( C) one’s effectivenes s is felt very slo wly
( D) one can get promotion easily
17 . In t he first par agraph , a "jack of all t rades" means
.
(A) a pe rson w ho doesn’t kno w anyt hing abou t busi-
nes s
( B) a person w ho is very capable as a busi nes sman
( C) a person who knows a lit tle bit of eve ry t hing
( D) a person w ho is very knowledgeable about tr ade
18 . We can concl ude from the first par agraph that the w rite r
.
(A) prefers t o work for a la rge en terprise

① gr a ndeu r〔’gr nd 〕 伟大
② in t imacy 〔’i n tim si〕 亲密

・ 29 7 ・
 ( B) does not men tion h is ow n prefer ence
( C) prefer to work for a small en terprise
( D) is again st anyt hing t hat goes t o its ex tr eme
19 . In t he second pa ragr aph , the con t rast between t he or-
ganization and t he family is e mp loyed to show
.
(A) how necessary a deep sense of satisfaction is
( B) w hat satisfaction means t o diffe ren t types of peo-
ple
( C) how fa milies m ay differ from one anot he r
( D) w hat large ente rprises can offer to ordina ry fa mi-
lies
20 . It see ms that the writer .
(A) is giving advice t o applicants for jobs
( B) is commen ting on t he coun t ry’s indust ry
( C) has writ ten t he pas sage from an economist’s view
( D) has been working for many en terprises

・ 29 8 ・
 Unit 30

Passage A

Generations of Am ericans have been brough t up t o be-

lieve t ha t a good breakfast is one of life’s es sentials . Eating
breakfast at the star t of t he day , we have all been t old , is as
necessary as pu tting gasoline in t he family car befor e star t-
ing a trip .
Bu t for many people t he t hough t of food first th ing in
t he morning is by no means a pleasure . So des pite all t he ef-
for ts , t hey still take no br eakfast . Between 1977 and 1983 ,
t he latest year for w hich figures a re available, t he number of
people w ho didn’t have breakfast increased by 33 percen t
from 8 .8 million to 11 .7 million according to t he Chicage
based Ma rket Research Corpor ation of Am erica .
F or t hose w ho feel pain of guilt abou t not eating break-
fast , however , there is some good news . Sever al st udies in
t he last few years indicate t hat , for adu lts especially , t here
may be not hing w rong wit h omitting br eakfast . " Going
withou t br eakfast does not affect performance ." said A rnold
E . Bender , forme r profes sor of nu trition at Q ueen Elizabeth
College in London , " nor does giving peop le br eakfast im-
prove performance ."
Scien tific evidence linking breakfast t o bette r healt h or
・ 29 9 ・
bett er perform ance is surprisingly i nadequate, and most of
t he r ecen t work i nvolves children , not adults ." The litera-
t ure , " say s one resea rcher , Dr , Ernest o P ollitt at the U ni-
ver sit y of T exas , "is poor ."
1 . T he pas sage is m ain ly concerned wit h .
( A) a st udy of t he Chicago based Ma rket Research
Corporation
( B) one of life’s essen tials
( C) latest figur es of people w ho don’t eat br eakfastc
(D) breakfast and hum an healt h
2 . F or t hose w ho do no t take breakfast , t he good news is
t hat .
( A) several st udies have been done in t he past few
yea rs
( B) not eating breakfast does no harm to one’s healt h
( C) adults have especially made st udies in this field
(D) eating little in t he morning may be good for health
3 . In t he t hird par agraph , " nor does giving people br eakfast
improve pe rform ance" means .
( A) anyone wit hou t breakfast does improve his peror-
mance
( B) not giving people br eakfast improves performance
( C) people having breakfast do improve their perform-
ance
(D) having breakfast does not improve pe rform ance,
eit he r
・ 30 0 ・
4 . T he word" lit erat ure"in t he last sent ence refer s t o .
( A) st ories abou t br eakfast
( B) written w or ks on a par ticular s ubject
( C) any print ed materials
(D) t he modern novels of A me rica
5 . Wha t is implied but NO T stated by t he aut hor is t hat
.
( A) no t eating breakfast migh t affect t he healt h of chil-
dren
( B) breakfast dose no t affect pe rform ance
( C) professor Bender once taught college courses in nu-
trition i n London
(D) people who don’t eat breakfast have increased

Passase B

I t is in ter esting to reflect how much we judge people by

t he clo t hes t hey wear . Long hair and patched blue jeans ? A
studen t , we say t o our selves instan tly , and not living at
hom e eit her , or he wouldn’t be going abou t wit h t hose holes
in his sweate r . A graceful lady in a close fitting dress ,
ca refully cu t nails and earrings ? Must be a foreigner , we
t hink , English women of t hat age don’t dress so sm ar tly , and
she probab ly has money , too , t hose s hoes weren’t bough t in
a chain store , A nd t hat m an walking along t he pave men t o-
ver t her e ? Well tailored suit , hat ju st at t he right angle a
business man , of cour se , and undoub tedly Englinsh , Why
・ 30 1 ・
Eng lish ? Well , it ’s raining , isn ’t it ? Only an Englis hman
w ou ld ca rry h is tr easur ed umbr ella , still perfectly rolled , in
t he rain .
I once read of a journalist w ho wen t int o an ex tr emely
expensive depar t men t st ore dr es sed in he r shabby clot hes .
She was eyed wit h suspicion as she examined t he goods on
display . When she fi nally decided on a sm all purchase, she
said she had forgot ten to bri ng enough money wit h her and
could she pay by cheque . T he assistan t polit ely told her t hat
cheques were not accep ted for goods of 2 or unde r , The nex t
day she wen t back , dr essed to kill, smelling of expensive
perfum e ① . S he selected an even cheaper ar ticle, tol d t he
sa me st ory and her cheque was accep ted wit hou t question . I t
only goes t o s ho w how easily we a re impressed by clot hes . I
w onder if Stone A ge M an selected his w om an by t he qualit y
of t he bearsk in she was wearing ?
6 . Why do we suppose t hat t he " st uden t" i n jeans is no t liv-
ing at home ? Becau se his .
( A) clot hes are unca red for
( B) clot hes a re badly mended
( C) jeans need mending
(D) hair needs cu tting
7 . T he graceful lady described in the passage appears to be
rich because .

① p e rfu me 〔’p : fju : m〕 香 水

・ 30 2 ・
 ( A) her dress fits her pe rfectly
( B) she is n’t dr essed like an English woman
( C) she takes car e of her nails
(D) her shoes a re of good qualit y
8 . T he w rite r suggests t ha t Englishmen .
( A) Pay no attention t o rain
( B) never go out wit hou t carrying t heir umbrellas
( C) take gr eat car e of t heir umbrellas
(D) a re t oo proud to unroll t heir umbrellas
9 . W hen t he journalist was not dressed in sm ar t clo thes , t he
s hop as sistan t .
(A ) unwillingly accep ted her cheque
(B) said t he good s we re no t for sale
( C) would only accept cash
( D) refu sed to sell her anyt hing
10 . The second time the journalist visited t he st or e, t he
t hing the bough t cost .
( A) jist ove r t wo pounds
( B) les s t han tw o pounds
( C) exactly t wo pounds
(D) les s t han she t hought

Passase C

Today , Ch inese cooking is fa mous all over t he world ,

but of course it did not become fa mou s s uddenly . China’s
civilization is very ancien t , and t he a rt of cooking developed
・ 30 3 ・
t ogether wit h it over m any t housands of years .
In t he distan t past , our ancest ors ar e raw meat . They
did not know how t o cook their food . When t hey k illed ani-
m als , t hey of ten did not even t ake t he skin off them before
t hey ate t he m . Some specialists believe t hat it was for est
fires t hat first i nt roduced man t o t he ar t of cook ing . For est
fires we re sometimes star ted by storms , and peop le ran a-
way from t he burning a reas and ret urned when the fires had
gone ou t . W hen t hey cam e back , t hey found that t he ani-
m als w hich wer e caugh t in t he fires and coul d no t escape
wer e " cooked" , and t hat t he cooked meat tasted much bette r
t han raw meat . F rom t his , man began to realize t hat cook-
ing made h is food mor e tasty . H e discover ed different m et h-
ods of m aki ng fire, and began to collect pieces of wood t o
burn .
G radually , t he cooking of food becam e a universally ac-
cep ted idea . T he Chinese w ord " peng " ( from " peng tiao " ,
meaning the a rt of cooking ) comes from t he use of fir e in
cooking .
So , in t his way people had lea rned how t o cook t heir
food . H owever , they still did not kno w how to flavour it .
H o w did man first lear n t o use salt on his food ?
O ne t heory is t hat many yea rs ago some people w ho
lived in a coastal a rea killed an anim al on t he sea-shor e .
T hey left t he dead animal t here for some tim e . The salt
from t he sea - wat er cove red the animal and w hen , later ,
・ 30 4 ・
t he meat was cooked it had a very good taste . In time , man
lear ned to collect salt t o flavour h is food . T he word " tiao"
of " peng tiao" mean s " flavouring " , which began wit h t he
use of salt .
T he discove ry of cooking and flavouring played a very
impor tan t par t in the developmen t of m an and of h uman so-
ciety . T he fact t hat man no longer are r aw m ea t m ade him
differ en t from ot her ani mals . Cooking and flavouri ng killed
bacteria in food and m ade it more healt hy . People began t o
eat meals at regu lar tim es of t he day . G radually , cooked
food helped people t o improve t he condition of their minds
and bodies , and finally it helped t hem to develop t heir pro-
ductive abilities , and t o move t owa rds a state of civilization .
11. Chinese cook .
( A) is know n all over t he w orl d
( B) became fa mous sudden ly all ove r t he world
( C) did not become famous all ove r t he w orld
( D) is not as fa mou s as befor e
12. O ur ancest ors ate t heir food raw because .
( A) r aw food was mor e tast y t han cooked food
( B) t hey did not know how t o cook
( C) they liked t o eat t he skin s of the anim als t hey kill-
ed
( D) t hey r an away from t he bur ni ng ar eas
13. Ear ly man found ou t that .
( A) r aw m ea t was much more tasty t han cooked meat
・ 30 5 ・
 ( B) his food tasted better w hen it was cooked
( C) it w as impossi ble t o cook wit hout t he help of for-
est first
( D) it was difficult t o learn ho w t o cook
14. Befor e man could cook his food he had to .
( A) take t he skin s off t he dead animals
( B) collect pieces of wood to hurn
( C) lear n how t o collect and u se salt
( D) learn ho w to make fire
15. Some peop le believe that man first lea rned t o use salt on
his food
( A) becau se it made t he m eat more healt hy
( B) when he cooked t he m eat from an ani mal killed in
a for est fire
( C) w hen he cooked an animal t hat had been in sea -
wate r
( D) w hen he cooked h is food on t he sea - shore

Passase D

Scien tists in t he food industry re mai n basically chem-

ists , or biochemists , or microbiologists or whatever . When
t hey ar e looki ng at production met hods for foodst uffs , t hey
will coope rate wit h engineer s . T oday , t hey are working on
tinned food , bu t t omorrow , it could be soapflakes .
F rom t he career’s angle , t he import an t feat ure of t his is
t hat young scien tists w ho ar e t hinking about en tering t he
・ 30 6 ・
food indust ry have no need t o fear t hat t hey ar e boxing
t hemselves in to a narrow occupational ar ea . O n t he cont ra-
ry , with most "food" emp loyees t her e is an open door in t o a
wide r ange of r esea rch and ot he r oppor t unities .
As a whole, it is fair to say t hat scientists in t his field
ar e e mployed i n t hese main ar eas: designi ng new processes
and improving existing proces ses; and in dealing with " ex-
ternal" limits and con trols such as meeting t he r equir ements
of new E EC ( European Economic Community) r egulations .
In under taki ng th is w ork , a wide range of subjects is
required . H o wever , by far t he most popular subject with
employer s is chemist ry , pa r ticularly wher e physical chemis-
t ry has been t he mai n s ubject st udied . Biochemists are also
needed to ma rry up ( join toget he r ) t he w ork of t he scien-
tists t o t he la rgescale production processes , St uden ts w ho
have t aken degrees in subjects like food science and technol-
ogy obvioisly en ter t he industry as well, bu t , rela tively
speak ing , t heir numbers a re not la rge . In shor t , it is by no
means neces sa ry t o have specialised in t he sub ject w hile at
college i n order t o en ter t he i ndu st ry in graduation .
16 . Scientists in food indust ry w ork .
(A) as foodst uff exper ts
( B) i n co operation with engineer s
( C) on tinned food only
( D) in a narrow occupational area
17 . U pon en tering food indust ry young scientists often have
・ 30 7 ・
 the fea r that .
( A) t heir fu tur e will be too limited
( B) food production is too demanding
(C) food processing pe rtains to a wide range of re-
sea rch
( D) t hey don’t have any experience in o ther occupa-
tional areas
18 . In order to ent er food indust ry , a college st uden t
.
(A ) must have st udied a wide r ange of subjects
(B) must be specialised in food science
( C) must have st udied t he m ain s ubject chemist ry
(D) must be ab le to ma rry up t he work of t he scien-
tists to t he massive production processes
19 . According to t he w riter , food indust ry is likey t o be
.
( A) the best ar ea a chemist ry st udent can en ter
( B) t he worst ar ea a college gr aduate w ould en te r
( C) an a rea t hat promises good oppor t unities
(D) an ar ea that requires les s specialised k no wledge
20 . This passage most probably talks of food indust ry
.
( A) in gener al ( B) in t he U nit ed States
( C) in Asia ( D) in Europe

・ 30 8 ・
短文阅读与问题回答

(Short Answer Question Passages)

Passage 1

A pilo t cannot fly a plane by sight alone . In m any con-

ditions , such as flying at nigh t and landing in dense fog , a
pilot must u se radar , an alternative way of navigati ng . Si nce
human eyes are no t ve ry good at determining speeds of ap-
proaching objects , radar can show a pilot how fast nearby
planes ar e moving . T he basic principle of radar is exemp li-
fied by w ha t happens w hen one shou ts in a cave . The echo
of t he sounds against t he walls hel ps a pe rson determine t he
size of t he cave . With radar , ho wever , t he waves ar e r adio
waves in st ead of sound waves . Radio waves t ravel at t he
speed of ligh t , about 300 , 000 k ilometers in one second . A
radar set sends ou t a shor t burst of r adion waves . Then it
receives t he echoes produced when t he waves bounce off ob-
jects . By determining t he time it takes for the echoes t o re-
t urn to t he radar set , a t rained tech nician can dete rmine t he
dist ance bet ween t he radar set and o ther objects . T he word
" radar " , i n fact , gets its na me from t he term " radio detec-
tion and ranging ." " Ranging " is the term for detection of
t he dist ance between an object and t he radar set . Basides be-
ing of critical importance to pilots , r ada r is es sen tial for air
・ 30 9 ・
t raffic con t rol , t racking ship s at sea , and for tr acking
weat he r systems and st orm s .
1. What is the main topic of this passage ?
2. According t o t he pas sage, w hat can radar det ect besides
location of objects ?
3. Which t ype of w aves does radar use ?
4. What does t he w ord "it" in line 12 refer t o ?
5. What does t he w ord " den se" in li ne 2 mean ?

Passage 2

Since t he w orld has becom e industrialized , t here has

been an i ncrease in t he number of animal species t ha t have
eit he r become ex tinct or have near ed extinction . Bengal ti-
ge rs , for i nstance, w hich once roam ed t he jungles i n vast
number s , now number on ly abou t 2 300 , and by the yea r 2
025 their pupulation is estimated to be do wn to zero . What
is alarming about t he case of the Bengal tiger is t hat t his ex-
tinction will have been cau sed almost en tir ely by poachers
w ho , according to som e sources , a re not int erested in mate-
rial gain bu t in per sonal gr atification . This is an exa mple of
t he callousness that is par t of what is causi ng t he proble m of
ex tinction . A nim als like t he Bengal tiger , as well as ot he r
endanger ed species , a re a valuable par t of t he worl d’s eco-
syste m . In term ational laws pro tecting t hese animals must be
enacted t o ensur e their s urvival, and t he survival of our
・ 31 0 ・
planet .
Coun tries a round t he w or ld have begu n to deal wit h t he
problem in various ways . Some coun tries , in order t o cir-
cumvent t he problem , have alloca ted la rge a moun ts of land
t o anim al reserves . They t hen cha rge admis sion to help de-
fr ay t he costs of maint aining t he parks , and they of ten must
also depend on world organizations for suppor t . W it h t he
money t hey get , they can invest in equipm en t and pat rols t o
pro tect the anim als . A no t her solu tion t hat is an atte mp t t o
stem the tide of animal ex tinction is an int ernational boycot t
of products made from endangered species . T his see ms fair-
ly effective, b ut it will no t , by itself , prevent anim als from
being hu nted and killed .
1. What is t he main t opic of t he passage ?
2. What does t he w ord " this" r efer t o in line 10 ?
3. Which lines in t his pas sage does t ht au t hor discuss a
cause of ex ti nction ?
4. The above passage is divided in t o tw o par agraphs i n orde r
t o con t rast .
5. What does t he w ord "ala rming" in line 7 mean ?

Passage 3

A balanced diet con tai ns prot eins , w hich ar e composed

of complex amino acids . There ar e 20 types of a mino acids ,
comprising about 16 percen t of t he body weigh t in a lean in-
・ 31 1 ・
dividual . A body needs all 20 t o be healt hy . A mino acids
can be divided in to t wo groups: es sential and nones sen tial .
T her e ar e 9 essential amino acids . T hese a re t he pro teins
t hat t he body cannot produce by itself , so a healt hy i ndivid-
ual must ingest t hem . The 11 nonessen tial amino acids , on
t he ot he r hand , are produced by the body , so it is no t neces-
sary to ingest t hem . P rotei ns are described as bei ng eit he r
high-qualit y or lo w-quahity , depending on how m any of t he
9 essen tial a mino acid s t he food con tains . High-quality pro-
tei ns , t ypically found in anim al meats , ar e pro teins t hat
have ample amounts of t he essen tial a mino acids . Low-quali-
t y prot eins are mainly plan t proteins and us ually lack one or
more of t he essen tial a mino acids . Since people who follow a
strict vegetarian diet are ingesting only low-quality proteins ,
t hey must make sur e t hat t heir diets con tain a va riet y of pro-
tei ns , in order t o ensure t hat w ha t is lack ing in one food is
available i n anot he r . T his proces s of selecting a va riety of
t he essen tial pro tein s is called pro tein complem en tation .
Since an ins ufficien t a moun t of protei n in t he diet can be
crippling , and prolonged absence of pro teins can cause
dea th , it is imperative t hat a vegetarian diet con tains an a m-
p le amount of t he essen tial protein s .
1. With w hat topic is t his passage prim arily concerned ?
2. What does t he w ord "lean" in line 3 mean ?
3. According t o t he pas sage, a vegeta rian coul d die from in-
sufficien t protein ingestion if he or s he .
・ 31 2 ・
4. What does t he w ord " prolonged" in li ne 23 m ean ?
5. What is low-qualit y pro tein according to this passage ?

Passage 4

Sharks have gained an unfair reput ation for being fie rce
pr edat ors of large sea anim als . H umanit y’s unfounded fea r
and hatr ed of t hese ancien t creat ures is leading t o a w orld-
wide slaugh ter that may result i n t he ex ti nction of many
coastal sha rk species . The s ha rk is t he victim of a warped
at tit ude of wild life pro tection ; we strive only to pro tect t he
beau tiful, non t hreatening par ts of our environm en t . A nd ,
in our effor ts to rest or e only non t hreatening pa rts of our
ear t h , we ignor e ot her impor tan t pa rts .
A pe rfect ill ustr ation of t his a ttit ude is t he cont r asting
at tit ude to ward anot he r la rge sea animal, t he dol phin . Dur-
ing t he 1980s , environm en talists in t he U nited States pro-
test ed t he use of drif tnets for t una fishing in t he Pacific O-
cean since t hese nets also caugh t dol phins . The environmen-
talists generated enough political and economic press ur e t o
pr even t t una companies from buying t una t hat had been
caugh t in drift nets . In con tr ast to t his effort on behalf of t he
dolphi ns , t hese sam e environm en talists have done very lit tle
t o help save the Pacific Ocean sha rks whose population has
decr eased nearly to t he poin t of ex tinction . Shark s are a-
mong t he oldest cr eat ur es on ear t h , having s urvived in t he
・ 31 3 ・
seas for mor e t han 350 million years . They ar e ex tr emely ef-
ficient animals , feeding on w ounded or dying animals , t hus
performing an impor tant role in nat ure of weedi ng ou t t he
weaker animals in a species . Just t he fact t hat species such
as t he G reat W hit e S ha rk have managed to live in t he oceans
for so many millions of years is enough proof of t heir effi-
ciency and adap tability to changing environmen ts . I t is time
for u s humans , w ho may not survive anot he r 1 000 yea rs at
t he rat e we a re dam aging t he planet , to cast away our fears
and begin conside ring the pro tection of sha rks as an impor-
tant pa rt of a progra m for protection of all our natur al envi-
ronment .
1. With w hat topic is t his passage prim arily concerned ?
2. H ow did environm en talists manage to protect dolphins ?
3. A bout how long have shark s lived on t he planet ?
4. In line 26 , t he ph rase " managed t o live" is used to infe r
t hat .
5. The au thor uses t he phr ase " weeding out " in li ne 24 t o
m ean .

Passage 5

F ranklin D . Roosevelt , t he 32 nd president of t he U nit-

ed St ates , was from a wealt hy , well-know n family . As a
chil d , he attended priva te school, had privat e t u tors , and
t raveled wit h his pa rents t o Europe . H e at tended H a rva rd
・ 31 4 ・
U niversit y , and afte rwa rd st udied law . A t age 39 Roosevelt
sudden ly developed polio , a disease t hat left him wit hout t he
full use of his legs for the r est of his life . Even t hrough t he
w or st of his illness , however , he continued his life in poli-
tics . In 1924 he appear ed at t he De mocr atic National Con-
ven tion t o nominat e Al Smit h for pr esident , and eigh t year s
afte r t hat he him self was nominated for the same office .
Roosevelt was elected to t he presidency during t he G reat De-
pr es sion of t he 1930s , at a time w hen mor e t han 5 000 banks
had failed and thousands of people we re ou t of work . Roose-
velt t ook action . First he declar ed a bank holiday t hat closed
all t he bank s so no more could fail; t hen he r eopened t he
banks littly by little wit h govenm en t suppor t . Roosevelt be-
lieved in using t he fu ll power of gover nmen t to help w hat he
called t he " forgot ten people" . And it was these worke rs ,
t he wage ea rner s , who felt t he st rongest affection towa rd
Roosevelt . T her e wer e o t her s , however , w ho felt t hat Roo-
sevelt’s policies were destroyi ng the Am erican system of
government , and t hey opposed him in the sam e in tense way
t hat o thers admired him .
In 1940 t he Democrats nominated Roosevelt for an un-
pr eceden ted t hird term . N o pr esiden t in Am erican history
had ever served t hree te rms , but Roosevelt felt an obligation
no t t o quit w hile the U nited States’en try in to World Wa r
Ⅱ was looming in the fut ur e . H e accepted t he nomination
and wen t on to an easy vict ory .
・ 31 5 ・
1. What does t he passage main ly discus s ?
2. The phrase " t ook action " in li ne 15 is uses t o illust rate
t he idea that Roosevelt .
3. As u sed line 17 , the phrase " lit tle by little" m eans t hat
Roosevelt .
4. Whe re in t he passage does t he aut hor discuss Roosevelt’s
r esponse to the Great Depression ?
5. It can be inferred from the pas sage t hat people who liked
Roosevelt best wer e .

Passage 6

Lead poisoning i n childr en is a major healt h concern .

Bot h lo w and high doses of pain t can have serious effects .
Ch ildren exposed t o high doses of lead often suffer perma-
nen t nerve da mage , men tal r etarda tion , blindnes s , and even
dea th . Lo w doses of lead can lead t o mild men tal r etarda-
tion , short at ten tion spans , dist racti bility , poor academic
performance , and behavior al problems .
T his is no t a new conce rn . As ear ly as 1904 , lead poi-
soning in children was linked t o lead-based pai nt . Micro-
scopic lead par ticles from pain t are absorbed int o t he b lood-
st ream when children ingest flakes of ch ipped pai nt , plas-
ter , or paint dust from sanding . Lead can also ente r t he
body through household dust , nailbiting , t humb s ucking ,
or chewing on toys and ot her objects pain ted wit h lead-based
・ 31 6 ・
pain t . Although A me rican pain t companies today must com-
p ly wit h strict regulation s r egarding t he amount of lead used
in t heir paint , t his source of lead poisoning is still t he most
common and most dangerou s . Ch ildren living in older , di-
lapidated houses a re par ticular ly at risk .
1. What is t he main t opic of t he passage ?
2. Which par t of the pas sage discus ses symp toms and conse-
quences of lead poisoning ?
3. What can we infer from t he passage for t he pain t compa-
nies ?
4. What does t he phrase " exposed to " in line 3 m ean ?
5. What does t he phrase " linked t o" in line 9 mean ?

Passage 7

T he rules of etiquette in A merican r estauran ts depend

upon a number of factors : t he physical location of t he res-
tauran t , e .g . rur al or urban ; t he t ype of restaur an t , e .g .
inform al or formal; and cer tain standards that ar e more uni-
ver sal . In o ther words , some st anda rds of etiquette vary
significan tly wh ile ot he r standa rds apply almost anyw her e .
Lea rning t he prope r etiquet te i n a pa r ticular t ype of r estau-
r an t in a par ticular ar ea m ay sometimes r equire inst ruction ,
but more commonly it simply requir es sensitivity and expe ri-
ence . For example, w hile it is accep tab le t o read a m agazine
in a coffee s hop , it is inappropriate to do t he sam e i n a more
・ 31 7 ・
luxurious setting . A nd , if you ar e eating in a very ru stic
set ti ng it may be fine to t uck your napkin i nt o your s hirt ,
but if you ar e in a sophisticated urban restaur an t t his behav-
ior w ould demonst rate a lack of m anne rs . It is safe t o say ,
however , t hat in virt ually eve ry restaurant it is unaccep table
t o indiscrimina tely thro w your food on t he floor . The con-
clusion we can most likely draw from t he above is t hat while
t he t ypes and locations of restaur an ts determine etiquette
appropriate t o t he m , some rules apply to all r estaurants .
1. With w hat topic is t his passage prim arily concerned ?
2. According to t he pas sage, w hat is t he universal rule of
etiquet te in nea rly eve ry r estauran t ?
3. What does t he w ord "it" refer to in line 9 ?
4. The au thor uses t he phr ase " safe to say" in lind 15 in or-
der t o de monst rat e that t he idea is .
5. What does t he w ord " manner s" in lind 15 mean ?

Passage 8

As hear t disease continues to be t he numbe r-one kille r

in the U nited Sta tes , resea rchers have become increasingly
inte rest ed in iden tifying t he poten tial risk fact or s t hat t rig-
ge r hear t a ttacks , H igh-fat diets and " life in the fast lane"
have long been know n to con tribu te t o t he high incidence of
hear t failure . But according to new st udies , t he list of risk
factors m ay be significan tly longer and quite s urprising .
・ 31 8 ・
 H ear t failur e, for exa mp le , appea rs t o have seasonal
and temporal pat tern s . A higher pe rcentage of hear t attacks
occur in cold w eat her , and more peop le expe rience hear t
failure on Monday t han on any o t her day of t he week . In ad-
dition , people ar e mor e suscep tible t o hear t attacks i n t he
first few hours afte r waking . Cardiologists fir st obse rved
t his morning phenomenon is t he mid-1980 , and have si nce
discovered a number of possib le causes . A n early-morning
rise in blood pressur e, hear t rat e, and concen t ration of hear t
stimu lating hormones , plus a r eduction of blood flo w t o t he
hear t , may all con tri bute to t he higher incidence of hea rt at-
tacks between t he hour s of 8∶00 A .M . and 10∶00 A .M .
In ot her st udies , bot h bir th days and bachelorhood have
been implica ted as risk factors . St atistics reveal t hat hear t
at tack r ates incr ease significan tly for bot h fe males and m ales
in t he few days immediately pr eceding and following t heir
birt hdays . A nd unma rried men a re mor e at risk for hea rt at-
tacks t han t heir married coun terpa rts . Though st res s is
t hought to be linked in some way t o all t he afore men tioned
risk fact or s , intense resea rch con tinues in t he hope of fur-
t he r compr ehending w hy and ho w hea r t fail ure is t rigger ed .
1. What does t he passage main ly discus s ?
2. In line 3 , what does t he word " pot en tial" mean ?
3. What does t he w ord " trigger " in li ne 3～4 m ean ?
4. What m ay cont ribu te t o the highe r incidence of hea rt at-
tacks between t he hours of 8 ∶ 00 A .M . and 10 ∶ 00 A .
・ 31 9 ・
 M .?
5. Give , at least , one example t hat is no t t he possib le cuase
of many hear t att ackes ?

Passage 9

O ver the past 600 yea rs , Englis h has grow n from a lan-
guage of few speake rs to become t he dominan t language of
inte rnational communication . English as we know it t oday
em erged a round 1 350 , after havi ng incorpor ated many ele-
m en ts of F rench t hat wer e int roduced follo wing t he Norman
invasion of 1066 . U n til t he 1600 s , English was , for t he
most pa rt , spoken only in England and had not ex tended e-
ven as far as Wales , Scotland , or Ireland . H owever , during
t he cour se of the nex t tw o cen t uries , English began t o
spread around t he globe as a r esu lt of exploration , t rade( in-
cluding slave t rade ) , colonization , and mis sionary work .
T hus , s mall enclaves of English speakers became estab-
lished and grew in va rious pa rts of t he world . As t hese com-
mun ties proliferated , English gr adually beca me t he prim ary
language of in ternational business , banking , and dip lom acy .
Curr en tly , abou t 80 per cen t of the inform ation stor ed
on compu ter syst ems world wide is in Englis h . T wo- t hirds of
t he world’s science writing is in Englis h , and Englis h is t he
main language of tech nology , adve rtising , media, in terma-
tional airpor ts , and air t raffic cont rollers . Today there are
・ 32 0 ・
more t han 700 million English use rs i n the w or ld , and ove r
half of t hese a re nonnative speake rs , constit u ting t he largest
number of nonnative users t han any o t her language i n t he
w or ld .
1. What is t he main t opic of t his passage ?
2. A pproxim ately w hen did English begin to be used beyond
England ?
3. According t o t he passage , approxima tely how many non-
native u ser s of English are t here in t he world today ?
4. As u sed in line 9 , w hat does t he w ord "course" m ean ?
5. What does t he w ord "e merged " mean in line 3 ?

Passage 10

T he Timber r attlesnake, once widespreak t hroughou t

t he eastern U nit ed Stat es , in now on t he endanger ed species
list and is ex tinct in t wo easte rn states in w hich it once
t hrived . Compa red t o its western cousi ns , t he T imber rat-
tlesnake may be especially vulnerable becau se of cer tai n be-
havior s adap ted for coping with t he cold cli mate in w hich it
lives .
Rattlesnakes ar e gene rally found in warm clim ates be-
cau se , like all r ep tiles , they canno t generate or regu late
t heir ow n body te mper at ur e inte rnally and must rely on t he
sun’s warm t h for heat . Bu t Timbe r r attles nakes migrat ed
int o colder nor t hern areas abou t 8 , 000 yea rs ago w hen glac-
・ 32 1 ・
iers r etr ea ted . In t hese nor thern regions , t he snakes devel-
oped a number of adap tive st rategies t o survive , bu t ulti-
m ately t hese behavior s make them mor e vul ner able t o h u-
m an predation , t heir main t hr eat .
O ne survival st ra tegy t he snakes have developed is h i-
bernation . For approxi mately eigh t mon t hs of t he yea r , t he
rattler s re main mo tionles s in deep frost-fr ee cr evices , with
t heir body temperat ure dropping as low as 40 degrees . In
t he spring when t hey e merge, t hey must wa rm their chilled
bodies by s unning for t hree or four days on rocks in t he
open . This behavior , coupled wit h the fact t hat Timber rat-
tlesnakes tend to concen t rate in large number s a t t heir win-
tering sites , makes t hem easy prey . Gestating fem ales are
par ticular ly vu lne rab le because t hey spend much of t heir
time basking in t he sun in order to produce live young from
eggs . In addition , females have ve ry long in terbir t h i nte r-
vals , produci ng live young only every t hree to five year s . If
a frost or col d spell com es late in t he year , t he en tir e litte r
of six t o t welve young may die .
Effor ts a re under way t o pro tect t he T imber rat tlesnake
and its habita t from fur t he r human depr edation , bu t in many
states it is already t oo late .
1. What is t he main t opic of t he passage ?
2. In w hat p laces migh t a pe rson be most likely t o find T im-
be r rat tlesnakes in the s pri ng ?
3. Rat tlesnake ar e gene rally found in warm climates because
・ 32 2 ・
 .
4. What does t he phrase " coupled wit h" i n line 23 mean ?
5. What does t he phrase " easy prey" i n line 25 mean ?

Passage 11

T housands of rem edies have been proposed for hiccup-

s ① each wit h its ent hu siastic backer s . Some seem t o work ,
o t her s do not . Resear ch in to know n cases indicat es t hat if a
suffere r firmly believes a pa rticula r t reat ment will succeed ,
more often t ha t no t it does . So doctors have been led to t he
conclu sion t hat t he cur e for hiccups is at least pa rtly psycho-
logical .
O ne widely held belief is t hat a sharp frigh t will end a
t roublesome bout ② of hiccups , bu t m any peop le pr efe r just
waiting for t hem to go away as t his " cure " is often w orse
t han t he ail men t itself .
Bet ween 1948 and 1956 Jack O’Leary , an A m erican ,
reckoned he hiccuped 160 million tim es . He tried 60 , 000
rem edies , all in vain . Finally , in despe ration , he prayed t o
St . J ude, pat ron of hopeles s causes . H is h iccuping stopped .
A not her victim was Heinz Isecke , a 55-year-old British

① hiccups 打呃
② bou t 回合

・ 32 3 ・
plumbe r ① , who hiccuped for eigh t mon t hs afte r an operation
in N ovembe r 1973 . Suggestion s pour ed in t o hime from all
over t he w orl d . H e tried t he m all, wit hout success . Doc-
t ors , alarmed by his failing st rengt h , operated again . Still
t he hiccups wen t on .
Eve rt ually , in despair , H einz dran k a " sec ret " herbal
mixt ure sen t by an anonymou s donor . By t he evening of t hat
day his hiccups had gone . Was it t he mix t ur e, or his fait h in
it , t hat cured him ? As yet , no one can say .
1. What is t he passage mai nly abou t ?
2. According t o t he first par agraph , w hat kind of re medy
for hiccups will be more likely t o w ork ?
3. Why don’t many people pr efe r " a sharp frigh t " as a "
cure" for t heir hiccups ?
4. Jack O’Leary’s pray cur ed h is hiccups probably because
of .
5. Why did doctors oper ate on H einz Isecke again ?

Passage 12

As k Steveland Morris and he’ll tell you t hat blindness

is no t necessarily disabling . Steveland was born pre mat urely
and to tally wit hou t sigh t i n 1950 . H e becam e Stevie Won-
de r—composer , singe r , and pianist . The winne r of ten

① p lu mb e r 管 子工

・ 32 4 ・
G rammy a wards , Stevie is widely acclaimed for his ou t-
standing con t ribu tions t o t he music world .
As a child , Stevie learned not to t hink about t he t hings
he could no t do , bu t to concen tr ate on t he t hings t hat he
could do . H is par en ts encouraged h im to join his sight ed
bro t her s in as many activities as possible . T hey also helped
him t o s ha rpen his sense of hearing , t he sense upon w hich
t he visually disab led are so dependen t .
Because sound was so impor tant to him , Stevie began at
an ea rly age t o experiment wit h different kinds of sound . H e
w ou ld bang t hings toget her and t hen imit ate t he sound wit h
his voice . Of ten r elying on sound for en ter tai nmen t , he
sang , beat on toy drums , played a t oy ha rmonica ① , and lis-
tened to the radio .
Stevie soon graduated from toy i nstrum en ts t o real in-
st ruments . H e fir st learned t o play the drums . H e t hen
mast ered t he ha rmonica and t he piano . H e beca me a m embe r
of t he junior ch urch choir and a lead singe r . In t he evenings
and on weekends , St evie w ould play differ en t in st ruments
and sing popu la r rhyt hm and blues t unes on t he front por-
ches of neighbors’hom es .
O ne of Stevis ’s sessions was overhea rd by Ronnie
White, a member of a popu la r singing group called The Mir-
acles . Ronnie immediat ely recognized Stevie’s talent and

① ha r monica 口琴

・ 32 5 ・
t ook him to audition ① for Be rry Gordy , t he president of
H itsville USA , a large recordi ng company now know n as
Mo tow n . St evie recorded his first smash hit " Fi nger tip s" in
1962 at age twelve, and the rest of Stevie’s story is music
history .
1. What kind of person did Steveland Morris finally be-
come ?
2. H ow did Stevie’s pa rents r eact t o his blindnes s ?
3. Why did Stevie begin t o sing and play in strum en ts w hen
he was very young ?
4. What did little Stevie of ten do i n t he evenings and on
weekends ?
5. What does " sm as h hit" in the last paragraph mean ?

Passage 13

M anufact ure rs have discover ed by t rial and error t hat

suga r sells badly in gr een w rappings , t hat blue foods are
consider ed unpleasan t , and t hat cosmetics② should never be
packaged in bro wn . These discoveries have grow n in to a
w hole discipline of colour p sychology that now finds applica-
tion in every thi ng from fashion to in terior decoration . Some
of our prefer ences a re clea rly psychological . Da rk bl ue is t he

① a ud it ion 试听
② cons met ics 化 装品

・ 32 6 ・
colour of t he nigh t s ky and t herefore associated wit h passivi-
t y and calm , w hile yellow is a day colour wit h associations
of ene rgy and incen tive① . F or primitive man , activit y during
t he day meant hun ting and at tacking , w hile he soon saw as
red , t he colour of blood and r age and t he heat t hat came
with effor t . A nd gr een is associated with passive defence
and self-pr eservation . Experiments have sho wn that col-
ours , par tly because of t heir physiological associa tions , also
have a dir ect p sychological effect . People exposed t o brigh t
red sho w an increase in hea rt beat , and blood pressur e, r ed
is exciting . Similar exposure t o pure b lue has exactly the op-
posite effect ; it is a calming colour . Becas ue of its exciting
conno tation s② , r ed was chosen as t he signal for danger , bu t
closer analysis shows t hat a vivid yellow can produce a more
basic sta te of aler t nes and ala rm , so fire engines and a mbu-
lances in som e advanced communities ar e now rushing a-
round in bright yello w colours t ha t st op t he t r affic dead .
1. What should manufact ur ers pay attention t o if t hey wan t
t heir goods t o sell well ?
2. What did t he red colour m ean for primitive man ?
3. Why was red chosen as the signal for danger ?
4. What effect does pure blue have on people exposed to t he
colour ?

① in cen ti ve 刺激
② conno t at ions 涵义

・ 32 7 ・
5. Why are fir e engines and ambu lances in some coun t ries
pain ted in brigh t yellow colour s ?

Passage 14

Eye con tact is a nonverbal technique t hat help s t he

speaker " sell" his or he r ideas t o an audience . Besides its
pers uasive power s , eye cont act helps hold listener i nte rest .
A s ucces sful speaker must maintain eye cont act wit h an au-
dience . To have good r appor t ① with listeners , a speake r
should maint ain direct eye con tact for at least 75 percen t of
t he time . Some s peakers focus exclusively on their notes .
Ot hers gaze over t he heads of t heir listeners . Bot h are likely
t o lose audience in ter est and esteem . Peop le who m ain tain
eye cont act wh ile speaking , w het her from a podium ② or
from acros s t he t able, a re " r egarded not only as excep tional-
ly well-disposed by their target bu t also as mor e believable
and ea rnest " .
To show t he po tency of eye con tact i n daily life, we
have on ly t o conside r how passers-by behave w hen t heir
glances happen t o meet on t he st reet . A t one ex tr eme are
t hose peop le who feel obliged t o s mile w hen they m ake eye
contact . At t he ot he r ex t rem e a re t hose w ho feel aw kwa rd

① ra pport 关系
② podiu m 演讲 台

・ 32 8 ・
and immedia tely look away . T o make eye con tact , it see ms ,
is to make a cer tain link wit h som eone .
Eye cont act wit h an audience also lets a speaker know
and monit or t he list ene rs . I t is , in fact , es sential for analy-
zing an audience during a s peech . Visual cues ① from audi-
ence members can indicate t hat a speech is dr agging , t hat
t he speake r is dwelling on a pa r ticular poin t for too long , or
t hat a par ticular poin t r equires fur ther explanation . As we
have poin ted out , visual feedback from listene rs should play
an i mpor tan t role in s hapi ng a speech as it is deliver ed .
1. What can eye con tact bri ng t o a speake r ?
2. If you wan t to be a succes sful speaker , w hat mu st you do
according to the pas sage ? A nd w hy ?
3. Who is likely t o lose audience int erest and estee m ?
4. If a speaker main tain s eye contact w hile speaki ng , what
will he or she be though t of as ?
5. Why should vis ual feedback from listeners play an impor-
tan t role in shaping a speech as it is delive red ?

Passage 15

A st udy of a rt hist ory migh t be a good way t o lea rn

more abou t a cult ure t han is pos sible to lear n in gener al his-
t ory classes . Most typical hist ory courses concent rat e on

① cu es 暗示

・ 32 9 ・
politics , economics , and war . Bu t ar t history focuses on
much more t han t his because ar t r eflects not only t he politi-
cal val ues of a people, b ut also r eligious beliefs , emotions ,
and psychology . In addition , inform ation abou t t he daily ac-
tivties of our ancest ors— or of people ve ry differ en t from our
o wn —can be provided by a rt . In shor t , ar t expr es ses t he es-
sen tial qualities of a tim e and a place, and a study of it clea r-
ly offers us a deeper understandi ng than can be found in
most hist ory books .
In hist ory books , objective information abou t the politi-
cal life of a coun t ry is presen ted ; t hat is , facts about politics
ar e given , bu t opinions ar e not expressed . A r t , on t he ot he r
hand , is s ubjective : it r eflects emotions and opinions . T he
gr ea t S panish painte r F rancisco Goya was perhaps t he first
t ruly " political " ar tist . In his well-kno wn pain tin T he
T hird of M ay , 1808 , he critcized t he Spanish gover nmen t
for its misu se of powe r over peop le . Over a h undr ed years
la ter , symbolic im ages wer e used in Pablo Picasso’s G ue rni-
ca to expr es s t he horror of wa r . Meanw hile, on anot he r
continent , t he powerfu l pain ti ng s of Diego Rivera , Jose Cle-
m en te Orozco , and David Alfaro Siqueiros— as well as t he
w ork s of Alfr edo Ra mos Ma rtinez— depicted t hese Mexican
ar tists’deep anger and sadnes s abou t social problems .
In the sa me way , a rt can r eflect a cu lt ur e’s religious
beliefs . F or h undr eds of year s i n Europe, r eligious ar t was
almost t he only t ype of ar t that existed . Chur ches and ot he r
・ 33 0 ・
religious buildings we re filled wit h pain tings t hat depict ed
people and st ories from t he Bible . Although most people
couldn’t read , t hey cou ld still under st and biblical stories in
t he pictur es on church walls . By con t rast, one of t he main
characteristics of a r t in t he Midd le East was ( and still is) its
ab sence of h uman and anim al images . This reflects t he Is-
lamic① belief t hat st atues ar e unholy .
1. In what way does ar t hist ory focus on much more t han
gener al hist ory ?
2. Why is a r t s ubjective ?
3. Who was the fir st ar tist to criticize t he government
4. H ow did ar tists in Europe s ho w a cult ure’s religious be-
liefs ?
5. Why is t he re an absence of h uman and animal images in
t he Isla mic a r t ?

Passage 16

A not her common type of reasoning is t he sear ch for

causes and results . We wan t t o know w hether ciga ret tes re-
ally do cause lung cance r , w hat causes malnu trition , t he de-
cay of cities , or t he decay of teet h . We are equally inte rest ed
in effects: w hat is t he effect of su lphur or lead i n the at mos-
phere , of oil spills and raw sewage in rivers and t he sea, of

① I slamic 伊斯 兰教的

・ 33 1 ・
staying up late on t he nigh t before an exa mination ?
Causal reasoni ng may go from cau se to effect of from
effect to cause . Eit her w ay , we r eason from w hat we know
t o w hat we wan t t o find ou t . Sometimes we r eason from an
effect to a cause and t hen on t o anot he r effect . T hus , if we
reason that because the ligh ts have gone ou t , the refrigera-
t or won’t work , we first relat e t he effect ( lights out ) to t he
cause ( pow er off ) and t hen r elate t hat cause to anot he r
effect ( r efrige rat or no t working) . Th is kind of r easoning is
called , for short , effect to effect . It is quite common t o r ea-
son t hrough an ex tensive chain of causal relations . When t he
ligh ts go ou t we migh t r eason in t he follo wi ng cau sal chain :
ligh ts ou t - po wer off - refrigerat or no t working - tempera-
t ure will rise - milk will sour . In ot her w ords , we diagnose
a succession of effects from t he power fail ure, each becom-
ing t he cause of t he nex t .
Causes a re clas sified as necessary , s ufficien t , or con-
t ribu tory . A neces sa ry cause is one w hich must be pr esen t
for t he effect t o occur , as combustion is neces sa ry t o drive a
gasoline engine . A sufficien t cau se is one w hich can produce
an effect unaided , though t here may be more t han one suffi-
cien t cause: a dead bat tery is enough t o keep a ca r from
star ting , bu t faulty spa rk pl ugs or an empt y gas tank will
have t he sa me effect . A con tribu t ory cause is one w hich
helps t o produce an effect bu t canno t do so by itself , as run-
ning th rough a r ed ligh t may help cau se an acciden t, t hough
・ 33 2 ・
o t her fact ors - pedest rians or ot her car s in t he in tersection -
must also be pr esen t .
In estab lishing or refuting a causal r elation it is usually
necessary to show t he process by wh ich t he alleged cause
produces t he effect . Such an exp lanation is called a causal
proces s .
1. What did t he au thor discuss i n t he previou s section ?
2. H ow do you do t he effect t o affect reasoning ?
3. What is t he necessary cause ?
4. What is called a sufficien t cause ?
5. What does t his passage m ainly discus s ?

Passage 17

Social change is mor e likely t o occur in societies w here

t here is a mixt ur e of differ en t kinds of people t han in socie-
ties w here people a re similar in many ways . T he simple r ea-
son for t his is t hat t he re ar e more differ en t ways of looking
at thi ng s presen t in the fir st kind of society . T he r a re more
ideas , mor e disagr eemen ts in in ter est , and more groups and
organizations wit h diffe ren t beliefs . In addition , t her e is u-
s ually a greater w or ldly in terest and gr ea ter toler ance in
mixed societies . All t hese factors t end to promot e social
change by opening mor e areas of life t o decision . In a societ y
w he re peop le a re quite simila r in many ways , t he re ar e fe-
wer occasion s for people t o see t he need or t he oppor tu nit y
・ 33 3 ・
for change because every th ing see ms t o be t he sam e . A nd
although conditions may no t be sa tisfactory , t hey ar e at
least customa ry and undispu ted .
Wit hin a societ y , social change is also likely t o occur
more fr equen tly and mor e readily in t he material aspects of
t he cu lt ur e t han in the non-mate rial, for examp le , in tech-
nology ra ther t han in val ues ; in what has been lea rned late r
in life rat her t han w hat was lea rned ear ly ; in t he less basic
and les s emotional aspects of society than in t heir opposi-
ties; in t he simple elem en ts r at her t han in t he comp lex
ones; in form r at her than in substance ; and in elements t hat
ar e acceptable t o t he cu ltur e rat he r t han in st range ele-
m en ts .
F ur thermore, social change is easier if it is gr adual . F or
example, it comes mor e radily in human rela tions on a con-
tinuou s scale ra ther t han one wit h sharp dichot omies ① . This
is one reason w hy change has not come mor e quick ly t o Back
A me ricans as compared t o ot her A merican minorities , be-
cau se of t he sha rp diffe rence in appea rance between t he m
and t heir w hite coun terpa r ts .
1. Which is t he t opic sentence of t he first par agraph ?
2. What is t he simple reason for changes in a mixed society ?
3. What does " greater t oler ance" refer to ?
4. In w hat aspect is socieal change likely to occur with in a

① d ic hot o m 一分成 二

・ 33 4 ・
 societ y ?
5. Why is social change less likely to occur in a societ y
w her e people are quite similar in many ways ?

Passage 18

A t hird of Brit on s a re over weigh t , stat es a report pub-

lished in January by t he Royal College of Physicians , t he re-
s ult of an 18-mon th-long st udy . A bou t five percen t of chil-
dren weigh t too much , and a re likely t o stay t hat way for
life, in the mid- twenties age group the propor tion of fat peo-
p le rises t o a t hird , and of t he middle- aged popula tion half
ar e ove rweigh t .
Fat people risk severe healt h prob lem s , says t he re-
port , including high b lood pressur e, breath less nes s , and va-
rious forms of hea rt disease . Smoking is pa rticularly risky
for overweight people .
T he safest way to lose weigh t is to eat cer eals , bread ,
fruit and vegetables , and cu t dow n on fatt y meats , bu tte r
and sweet foods . Fad ① diets do fa r mor e harm t han good ;
slimming machines t hat vibrate muscles have no t been
proved useful ; saunas ② m erely remove a little body water ,
and lealt h farms , says t he r epor t , serve as expensive holi-

① f ad 目前 时行的
② sun as 蒸气浴

・ 33 5 ・
days .
Exercise is most import an t t o healt h , t he r eport e mpha-
sizes; t hough it doesn’t neces sa rily r educe weigh t; it main-
tains the corr ect propor tion of body fat to body muscle . A nd
it is n’t only for t he young ; from middle age a minimum of
20 minu tes of gen tle physical jerk s should be practised t hr ee
times a week .
T he r epor t advocat es sever al public healt h measures t o
combat t he high prevalence of ove rweigh t in t his coun try .
T hey include an increase of tax on alcohol t o r educe its in-
c reasi ng , and dangerously fattening , consump tion ; and t he
provision of more s por ts facilities by local aut horities . Brit-
ain’s doctors , t he r epor t concludes , mu st lea rn t o be more
sympat hetic and specific in t heir advice to t he overweight ,
encour aging a change in eating habits on a long- term basis ,
and taking int o account t he many— often complex— reasons
w hy fat people are fat .
1. What does t his passage m ainly talk about ?
2. What is safest way to lose weigh t ?
3. What makes a person most likely t o st ay fat for t he w hole
of his life ?
4. What proble ms do fat people risk ?
5. What s hou ld Britain’s doct ors learn to do ?

・ 33 6 ・
 Passage 19

When we t hink of creative people t he names t hat proba-

b ly spring to mind ar e those of men such as Leona rdo da
Vince, Alber t Einstein , and Pablo Picasso , i .e ., gr ea t ar t-
ists , invent ors and scientists— a select and excep tionally
gifted body of m en with ra re talen t and genius . T he tenden-
cy t o r egard cr eativit y and imaginative t hinking as the ex-
clus sive provime of a l ucky few disrega rds t he cr eative and i-
m aginative aspects inherent in t he solu tion of many of t he
task s we regular ly have t o face— t he discovery and develop-
m en t of new m ethods and techniques , t he improvem en t of
old m ethods , existing inven tion s and products .
Eve ryone has creative abilit y t o some ex tent . Creative
t hinki ng involves posing oneself a problem and t hen origina-
ting or inven ting a solu tion along new and unconven tional
lines . I t i nvolves dr awi ng new analogies , discove ring new
combi nation s , and / or new applications of t hings that are
already know n . It follows , t hen , t ha t a cr eative pe rson will
exh ibit great in tellectual curiosit y and imagination . He will
be aler t and ob servan t with a great st or e of information
w hich he will be able t o sor t ou t and combine , in t he solu-
tion of prob le m . H e will be emotionally receptive t o new
and unconventional ideas and will be les s in ter ested in facts
t han in t heir implications . Most importan t of all he will be
・ 33 7 ・
ab le t o communicate uni nhibitedly and will no t be too con-
cerned abou t o t her peop le’s r eaction t o his apparently " cra-
zy" notion s . People called t he Wrigh t bro thers mad bu t it
did not st op t he m from becoming t he fir st men t o const ruct
and fly a heavier- t han-air craft .
1. What is needed in t he solu tion of many proble ms ?
2. What does creative th inking involve ?
3. H ow shoul d a c reative person look at facts ?
4. What does " unconven tional" means ?
5. H ow shoul d a pe rson deal wit h t he o t her’s r eaction ?

Passage 20

A n acid is a substance t hat releases hydrogen ions w hen

dissolved in wat er . St rong acids release many hydrogen i-
ons , and weak acids release only a few . Sulfuric acid is an
example of a strong acid . It can cause burns on skin , and it
can dis solve many metals . Citric acid is an example of a wea-
ker acid . I t is found i n cit rus fruits such as or anges , and it
can be taken int o t he body wit h no harm .
Acidit y refers to how st rong or weak an acid is . T he
measur e of acidit y is called p H . A p H of 7 is neu t ral— pure
wate r has a p H of 7 . A p H of more t han 7 is al kaline ( or
basic, as it is sometimes called ) . A p H of les s t han 7 is
acid . The lo wer t he p H , t he st ronge r t he acidity . A s ub-
stance wit h a p H of 1 is very st rong ly acidic . A substance
・ 33 8 ・
with a p H of 6 is on ly mildly acidic .
Rain occur s when w ater vapor condenses in clouds and
falls to ear t h . As it begins to fall, t he r ain is neu t ral— nei-
t he r acid nor alkaline . W hile it t ravels t hrough t he air , it
dissolves floating chemicals and brings do wn pa rticles t hat
ar e s uspended in the air . In clean air t he rain pick s up only
materials t ha t occur nat urally , such as dust , pollen , and
chemicals produced by volcanoes . These substances make
t he rain sligh tly acid , wit h a p H of about 5 .6 . This level of
acidit y is not considered dangerous .
Acid r ain is t he na me given t o rain wit h a p H of less
t han 5 .6 . Acid rain often makes soil and lakes and rivers
more acid t han normal . In badly affected regions , many
t ypes of plants and animals beging t o die .
H o w does acid r ain form ? When rain falls t hrough pol-
l uted air , it dissolves the che micals t hat are present . Among
t he chemicals fr equen tly occurring in pollu ted air ar e sulfur
oxides and nit rogen oxides . When wet , t hey become acids
and fall to ear t h as acid rain or , if t he temperat ure is below
freezing , as acid snow , Acid fog is formed when chemical
pollu tan ts a re dissolved in ve ry moist air . I t changes the p H
of t he air in the sa me way t hat acid r ain changes t he p H of
t he soil as well as t he wat er in lakes and rivers .
1. U nder w hat condition s does an acid release hydrogeni-
ons ?
2. H ow st rong is sulfuric acid ?
・ 33 9 ・
3. What s hall we call t he rain with a p H of les s t han 7 ?
4. What is t he bad effects of acid rain .
5. H ow does acid snow form ?

Passage 21

In t he past twent y yeats , ther e has been an i ncreasing

tendency for w or ker s t o move from one coun try t o ano ther .
While som e newly independen t coun t ries have under st and-
ably restrict ed most job s t o local people, o ther coun t ries
have at t ract ed and welcomed migran t ① workers . T his is pa r-
ticular ly t he case in the Middle East, w her e increased oil in-
comes have enabled many coun t ries t o call in ou tsiders t o
improve local facilities . T hus t he Middle East has at t ract ed
oil- worke rs from t he U .S .A . and Europe . It has brought in
construction w or ker s and technician s from m any count ries ,
incl uding Sou t h K orea and Japan .
In view of t he difficult living and working conditions in
t he Middle E ast , it is no t surprising that t he pay is high t o
at tr act s uitable workers . Many engineer s and technicians
can earn at least twice as much money in t he Middle East as
t hey can in t heir ow n count ry , and t his is a major at t rac-

① migr an t a. 移民 的

・ 34 0 ・
tion . A n allied ① benefit is the low taxation ② or comp lete
lack of it . T his i ncreases the net a moun t of pay received by
visiting w orker s and is very popular wit h t hem .
Som eti mes a disadvantage has a compensa ting advan-
tage . For exa mple , t he difficult livi ng conditions often lead
t o incr eased friends hip when workers have t o depend on each
o t her for safety and comfor t . In a simila r way , m any mi-
grant worke rs can save large sums of money par tly because
of t he lack of en te rtainment facilities . T he work is often
comp lex and fu ll of problem s bu t t his mer ely pr esen ts an in-
c reased challenge to engineers who pr efe r to fi nd solu tions
t o t he problems r ather t han do rou tine ③ work in t heir ow n
count ry .
O ne major problem w hich affects migr an t worke rs in
t he Middle E ast is t hat t heir jobs are te mpora ry ones . They
ar e nearly always on cont ract , so it is not easy for them t o
plan ahead wit h great confidence④ . T his is to be expected ,
since no cou nt ry welcom es a large numbe r of foreign w or k-
ers as perm anen t r esiden ts . In any case, migr an t w orkers
accept t his disadvan tage, along wit h ot he rs , because of t he
consider ab le fi nancial benefits w hich t hey r eceive .

① allie d a. 与此 相关的
② t a xa tion n. 税 , 税款
③ rou t in e a. 日常的
④ confid ence n. 信心

・ 34 1 ・
1. Why have the coun tries in t he Middle East welcom e mi-
grant worke rs ?
2. What at tr acts the visiting w or ker s most in t he Middle
E ast ?
3. Why have t he migr an t worke rs est ablished a friendly re-
lation s hip a mony t hemselves ?
4. What ki nd of work do engineers like t o do accordi ng t o
t he w riter ?
5. According t o t he last pa ragr aph , w hat is t he season w hy
t he migr an t w orkers ar e nea rly always on con t ract ?

Passage 22

O ne answer t o t he questions of land shor tage was sug-

gested by a committ ee some yea rs ago . A cit y was t o be
built at sea , housing 30 , 000 people .
T he suggestion was to shape the cit y like a ha rbour .
T he ou ter wall of t he harbour w ould stand on st eel columns
resting on t he sea - bed . N atur ally t his could on ly be w her e
t he w ater was fair ly shallow . T he people w ould live i n flats
in t he fifty - m et r e high ou ter wall . The flats would all face
inwa rds , and woul d be made of concr ete and glass . T he
glass would be specially m ade and coloured to con trol t he
heat and strong light from t he s un . T he planners called t his
wate r t he lake .
T he wat er i nside t his man - made ha rbour would be
・ 34 2 ・
calm . O n it woul d be floating islands carrying mor e b uild-
ings ; a hospit al , t wo thea ters , a mu seum , an ar t exhi bition
hall and a ch urch . O n one of t he islands w ould be a special
plan t, t o take the salt ou t of sea wate r and t urn it int o fr esh
wate r .
People living in t he city could move arou nd on small
boats driven by elect ricity , so t he re would be no air pollu-
tion from t he burning of petrol . T her e would be platforms
ou tside the main wall for ships bringing supplies . People
could also t r avel t o t he mainland by mo torboat or wate r
plane .
1. What was suggest ed abou t t he construction of a new cit y
at sea ?
2. H ow would fr esh wate r be s upplied t o t he city ?
3. Why w ou ld t here be no air pollu tion to the cit y ?
4. What problem is the suggestion made by t he commit tee
t o solve ?

Passage 23

When water is heated un til it boils , bubb les of gas ap-

pea r and rise t hrough t he ho t liquid . W hen an electric cur-
r en t passes t hrough wat er in a proces s called elect roly sis ,
bubbles of gas appear and rise through the liquid . Superfi-
cially , t he t wo events appea r t he same .
If t he gas from the boiling wate r is examined , its prop-
・ 34 3 ・
er ties are fou nd t o be the sam e as t hose of t he water . Thus
if t he stea m is cooled t o room te mpera tur e, a liquid is
form ed wh ich is indistinguishable from t he original water .
When , ho wever , t he gas from t he electrolysis equipmen t is
cooled t o room temperat ure , it r emains a gas rat her t han be-
coming a liquid . Nor will it , a t ze ro degrees cen tigr ade or
below , t urn t o solid , as will t he gas from boiling water .
T hese tw o proces ses , boiling and electrolysis , have clea rly
res ulted in products wit h quite different proper ties .
In boiling , t he gas does not repr esen t a new sub st ance,
but only a differ en t state of t he original sub st ance . Elect rol-
ysis , on the ot her hand , has gene rated a product w hich is a
new substance, or pos sibly a mix tur e of new substances . A
change in stat e as r epresented by going from a liquid t o a gas
withou t t he production of new substances is called a " physi-
cal change" , however , when a process takes place t hat pro-
duces new substances , t his is called a " chemical change" or
a " chemical reaction ." In a chemical r eaction , t he initial
substances are replaced by a new set of substances or prod-
ucts .
1. Which of t he following is t he best title for t his pas sage ?
2. According t o the passage , electrolysis and t he boiling of
water look t he sa me because t hey bot h .
3. A t a tempe rat ure slightly above zero degr ees centigrade,
w hich of t he follo wing is true of the gas produced by elec-
trolysis ?
・ 34 4 ・
4. A t a tempe rat ure below zero degrees cen tigr ade , t he gas
formed from boiling wa ter becomes a .
5. According to t he passage, whet her a change is physical or
che mical depends on .

Passage 24

In orde r to learn a foreign language well, it is necessary

t o over com e the fear of making mistakes . If t he primary goal
of language u se is communication , then mist akes ar e second-
ary consider ations t hat m ay be dealt with gr adually as
awar eness of t hose mistakes i ncreases . On t he o t her hand ,
studen ts shoul d no t ignore their mistakes . The language
lear ner m ay obse rve how na tive speaker s express t he m-
selves , and how native expr essions differ from the way t he
lear ner migh t say t hem . For example, a Spanish speake r
w ho has been saying " I do it" t o express willingness t o do
somet hing in t he imm ediate fut ure , could , by in ter acting
with native speake rs of English , observe that native speak-
ers act ually say " I’ll do it" . T he res ulting discrepancy can
se rve as a basis for t he studen t to modify his way of u sing
t he present tense in Englis h . Bu t a studen t who is unwilling
t o inte ract in t he first place would lose t his oppor tunit y t o
lear n by t rial and error .
1. According t o t he passage , t he pr esen t tense in English is
.
・ 34 5 ・
2. According t o t he passage , language learners can reduce
t he number of t heir mistakes by .
3. According t o t he passge , foreign language studen ts w ho
do no t inte ract wit h native speakers will NO T .
4. According to t he pasage, foreign language students
should no t w orry too much about making mistakes be-
cause .
5. The aut hor’s m ajor conclusion abou t t he function of mis-
takes in for eign language learning is t hat .

Passage 25

M anuel and Joe wer e t rade rs with the Paw nee Indians .
Each of t he m t ried to acquire by tr ade as m any furs as possi-
b le for himself , u sing w hatever means possible and wit hou t
showing mer cy to wards t he o t her . For t hat r eason , t hey of-
ten quarr eled . In order t o preven t such wr angles s they a-
greed t hat if a band of Indian s arrived at t heir t r ading posts
for t he purpose of exchange and bar ter , neither w ould at-
temp t to take advant age of t he ot he r . M anuel, ho wever ,
had no i ntention of t rading on honorable terms for any
lengt h of tim e; once when bot h of t he m expected a band of
Pawinee, he t ried t o circumvent Joe . While he order ed his
post supplied in secr et wit h commodities to ba rt er with t he
Paw nee, he went ove r t o see Joe in orde r t o put him off his
guard , by his ow n pr esence t he re t o hinder preparations ,
・ 34 6 ・
and t o see what was really going on in t he ot her st orehouse .
Joe played t he par t of uns uspecting host j ust as well as his
opponen t p layed his role . H e acted ju st as t hough he had al-
lo wed himself t o be r eally fooled . H e invited Manuel t o
drin k a glass of champagne to the s ucces s of prospective
t rade; but regretted t ha t on accoun t of his bad back he was
no t able t o st oop dow n and t herefore , wou ld have to ask
M anuel to fetch t he cask from t he cella r . T he lat ter oblig-
ingly raised the t rapdoor in the room and went dow n t he
steps . Joe let fall the door , rolled a cask upon it , wit h moc-
k ing w ord s left his opponen t imprisoned , then , wen t off t he
t rade alone with t he Paw nee .
1. Why did Manuel go to Joe’s ?
2. Why did Joe ask Manuel t o fetch t he champagne ?
3. H ow did Joe feel abou t Manuel’s visit ?
4. Why w re M anuel and Joe of ten quarr eling ?
5. According t o the st ory , how did Manuel regard t he a-
greement he made wit h Joe ?

Passage 26

A unique labora tory at the U nive rsity of Chicago is bu s-

y only at nigh t . I t is a dr ea m labor at ory w here r esearchers
ar e at w ork st udying dr ea mer s . T heir findings have revealed
t hat everyone dreams from t hree to seven times a nigh t , al-
t hough i n ordina ry life a per son may r emember none or only
・ 34 7 ・
one of his dreams .
While t he subjects - usually st uden ts - sleep , special
machines record t heir br ain waves and eye movemen ts as
well as t he body movem en ts that signal t he end of a dream .
Surprisingly , all subjects sleep soundly .
O bservers r epor t t hat a pe rson u sually fidgets befor e a
dr ea m . Once t he dream has sta rted , his body relaxes and his
eyes become more active, as if the curtain had gone up on a
show . As soon as t he m achine indicates t hat t he dr ea m is o-
ver , a buzzer wakens t he sleeper . H e sits up , records his
dr ea m , and goes back to sleep - pe rhap s to dream some
more .
Resea rchers have found that if t he drea mer is wakened
immediat ely af ter his dr ea m , he can usually r ecall t he entire
dr ea m . If he is allow ed t o sleep even five more minu tes , his
memory of the dream will have faded .
1. According t o t he selection , researcher s at the U niversit y
of Chicago ar e st udying .
2. Their findings have r evealed that .
3. The m achines being used in t he expe rimen t r ecord
.
4. J ust before a drea m a sleeper will us ually .
5. A person w ould be most likely t o r eme mber t he dr ea m
t hat .

・ 34 8 ・
 Passage 27

Investigat ors were testi ng t he effects of different col-

ored walls on two groups of visitors to an exhi bit of pain t-
ings . For t he first group the room was pain ted w hite; for
t he second , da rk brow n . Move men t of each group was fol-
lo wed by an elect rical system unde r the ca rpet . The expe ri-
m en t r evealed t hat t hose w ho en tered t he dark brow n room
walked more quick ly , covered mor e a rea, and spend less
time in t he room t han t he peop le in t he w hite envir onment .
Da rk brow n stimu lated more activity , but t he activity ended
soone r . A no t her expe rimen t presen ted t hr ee group s of s ub-
jects wit h t he sam e pho tographs , bu t each group was , in a
differ en t kind of room—an " ugly " room li ke a m essy store-
room , an average room , such as a nice office, a tast efully
designed living room wit h carpeting and dr apes ① . Resu lts
showed t hat t he su bjects in the beau tiful room tended t o
give higher ra tings to t he faces t han did t hose in t he ugly
room . Ot he r st udies suggest t hat st uden ts do bet ter on tests
taken in comfor tab le , a tt ractive room s t han in ordina ry- loo-
k ing or ugly rooms .
1. What can be concluded from t he tw o expe rimen ts ?
2. What will t he people in t he w hit e room do , compar ed

① dr a pes 窗帘

・ 34 9 ・
 wit h t he people in t he da rk brow n room ?
3. H ow will beautifu l rooms influence visit ors at an ex hibi-
tion ?
4. What does t he under lined word " subjects" m ean ?
5. What can be t he m ain idea of t he pas sage ?

Passage 28

Criticis m of resear ch lays a significan t foundation for

fut ur e investigative work , but w hen studen ts begin t heir
o wn projects , they ar e likely t o find t ha t the standards of
validity in fiel d w ork a re con sider ably more rigorous t han
t he standa rd s for most libr ary r esea rch ‘
. When studen ts are
faced with the concrete prob lem of proof by field de monst ra-
tion , t hey usually discover’t hat many of the "import an t re-
lation ships " t hey m ay have criticized ot he r resear che rs for
failing t o de mon st ra te a re ve ry el usive ( difficult to compre-
hend) indeed . They will find , if they submit an ou tline or
questionnaire t o t heir clas smates for criticism , t hat ot he r
studen ts make comments similar t o some they t he mselves
may have made in discus sing previously pub lished resea rch .
F or exa mple, st udent researcher s are likely t o begi n wit h a
gene ral question bu t fi nd t hemselves forced t o na rro w its fo-
cus . They may learn that question s w hoses meanings see m
perfectly obvious t o t he m are no t clear ly understood by o t h-
ers , or t hat questions wh ich see med entirely objective t o
・ 35 0 ・
t hem appear to be high ly biased t o someone else . They u su-
ally find t hat the formulation of good r esea rch questions is a
much more subtle and fr ustr ating t ask t han is generally be-
lieved by those who have not act ually atte mp ted it .
1. What does t he au t hor t hink abou t trying to fi nd weak nes-
ses in o ther people’s r esea rch ?
2. According t o the passage , w hat is one major criticism
st udents often m ake of p ublis hed resea rch ?
3. According t o t he passage , ho w do students in class oft en
r eact t o ano ther st udent’s resear ch ?
4. According to the pas sage, w hat do st uden t r esearchers
of ten learn when t hey discuss t heir w ork in class ?
5. What does t he au t hor concl ude about pr epa ring suitable
questions for a research project ?

Passage 29

To be a good teacher , you need some of the gifts of t he

good act or : you must be ab le t o hold t he attention and i nte r-
est of your audience ; you must be a clear speaker , wit h a
good , st rong , pleasing voice w hich is fully under your con-
t rol ; and you must be ab le t o act w hat you ar e teaching , in
order t o m ake its meaning clear .
Wa tch a good teacher , and you will see t hat he does no t
sit motionless before his clas s: he stand s t he w hole time he
is teachi ng; he walk s abou t, using his arms , hands and fin-
・ 35 1 ・
ge rs to help him in his explanations , and his face t o expr ess
feelings . Listen to him , and you will hear the loudness , t he
qualit y and t he musical no te of his voice always changing ac-
cording t o w ha t he is talki ng about .
T he fact that good teacher has some of t he gifts of a
good act or does not mean t hat he will indeed be able t o act
well on t he stage; for ther e are very importan t differ ences
between t he teache r’s w ork and t he act or’s . The act or has
t o speak w ords which he has learn t by hea r t; he has t o re-
peat exactly the sa me w ords each time he plays a cer tain
par t ; even his movem en ts and t he ways in w hich he uses his
voice ar e us ually fixed befor e . What he has t o do is t o make
all t hese ca refully lear nt w ords and action s seem nat ural on
t he stage .
T he good teacher w orks in quite a different way . His
audience takes an active pa rt in his p lay : t hey as k and an-
swer questions , t hey obey orders , and if t hey do no t unde r-
stand somet hing , t hey say so . The teacher ther efore has t o
suit his act t o t he needs of h is audience , w hich is his class .
H e can no t learn h is par t by hea rt , bu t mu st inven t it as he
goes along .
I have know n m any teachers w ho were fine actors in
clas s bu t we re unable to take par t i n a stage-play because
t heir brai ns w ou ld no t keep discipline: t hey could no t keep
strictly t o w hat anot her had writ ten .
1. What gifts of t he act or needed by a teache r does t he au-
・ 35 2 ・
 t hor men tion ?
2. What does a good teache r do wit h his voice as he is teach-
ing ?
3. What has an act or t o do w hen he is on t he stage ?
4. H ow does a teache r’s " audience" take par t i n his " play" ?
5. Why must a teacher invent as he goes along ?

Passage 30

Q uite soon after t he launching of Spu t nik I , m an dis-

cover ed t hat he had enough rocket prower to send a sat ellitc
away from t he ea rt h alt oget her , t owards t he moon and t he
planets . This w ork has caused much in ter est and excite-
m en t . G reat progress followed so quickly t ha t it is difficult
t o r eme mber t he orde r of t he discove ries .
As with the first Spu tni k , t he pace was set by t he Sovi-
et U nion . The first vehicle from ear t h to pas s nea r t he moon
was Lunik I , launched in Janua ry 1959 . T his Lunik missed
t he moon by 2 , 000 miles . Lunik Ⅱ , lunched in Sep tembe r
1959 , was t he first object to hit t he moon . No wadays it is
fairly easy to hit t he moon , but at that ti me it was a dra mat-
ic example of technology . A veh icle weighing a few hundr ed
pounds had been launched and t hen guided wit h such accura-
cy t hat it st ruck t he moon—a quar ter of a million miles a-
way .
A mon t h lat er , Lunik Ⅲ was launched . T he orbit of
・ 35 3 ・
t his Luni k was arranged so that , w hen it was fa rt hest from
t he ear t h , it passed a round the moon . In t his way t he Rus-
sian s wer e able t o obt ain t he first pho tograp hs of t he hidden
side of t he moon . La ter , one of t he Russian‘ Zond’ deep
space vehicles pas sed close t o t he moon’s hidden s urface and
sent back to ear t h som e much bet ter pho tograph s . T hese
vehicles w re not in orbit a round the moon : Lunik Ⅲ was in
a h uge orbit a round t he ear t h , Zond was in orbit around t he
sun . At one poin t on t heir journey s , t hey passed close t o
t he moon .
T he fir st luna r orbit was made by t he R ussian Luna 10
in A pril 1966 . This vehicle was cont rolled so t hat it was
caugh t by t he moon’s gravity and moved in an orbit around
it . Luna 10 did not ca rry cam eras . But in A ugust 1966 t he
A me ricans placed t heir Lu nar Orbiter One in orbit around
t he moon , and t his s upp lied a large number of close-up pho-
t ographs of the moon’s s urface .
1. What was rem arkable about Lunik Ⅱ ?
2. H ow big w as t he orbit of Lunik Ⅲ ?
3. Lunik Ⅲ t ook phot ographs of the moon . Why wer e t hese
pho tograph s of special in ter est ?
4. What did Zond have in common wit h Lunik Ⅲ ?
5. What did Luna 10 have in common wit h Luna r Or bite r
O ne ?

・ 35 4 ・
 参考答案

Unit 1

1 C 2D 3 C 4 A 5D 6 C 7D 8 A 9 A 10 A
11 B 12 B 13 C 14 C 15 A 16 A 17 C 18 D 19 C 20 D

Passage A : 虽然外国学 生对 和 他自 己年 纪 和地 位 相仿 的人 可 以叫 名
字 , 但对年纪显然 比 他大 的人 则 应该 称 之 为某 先 生 , 某 太
太 , 某小姐或某女士。
Passage B : 假如大量的农业人 口被吸 收进 入工 业行 业 , 土 地便 可以 用
现代的方法耕种而使产量大为增加。
Passage C : 水文学是一门与地球表面、土壤、岩石以及 大气层中水 的循
环、分布和性质有关的科学。
Passage D : 它给这些 ( 石油) 开采者带来的财富远远超过了掏金热 所带
来的财富。

Unit 2

1D 2B 3 D 4 A 5 C 6 B 7 A 8A 9D 10 C
11 D 12 B 13 C 14 B 15 D 16 A 17 C 18 B 19 C 20 C

Passage A : 这几次不同的火山喷发是以受到侵害的地方面积大小和喷
入空中的火山灰性质的不同而不同。
Passage B : 包括 Ruda ux 在 内的艺术天文 学家通过绘 画描绘激发 了人
们对外部空间的兴趣。而这些绘画最后也 显示出对这 些行

・ 35 5 ・
 星的准确的描绘。
Passage C : 这些规则仅适用语言 , 当新词汇进入一种语言 时 , 必须 奠定
这种规则。
Passage D : 即便是在国外度假 , 这些 已是中 产阶级 的大学 毕业 生更 倾
向把这种境外旅行称为受教育而不是为了完全的娱乐。

Unit 3

1D 2B 3 D 4 A 5 A 6A 7 A 8 C 9 C 10 B
11 C 12 C 13 B 14 D 15 A 16 D 17 B 18 A 19 B 20 A

Passage A : 这个过程始于 1873 年 , 当 时 , 人 们偶尔 发现硒 这种 元素 的

电阻值与照射在它上面的光强度成比例。
Passage B : 他( 总统 )在参议院 建议和 同意 下便 有权 签订 条约 , 只要 到
场的参议员有 2/ 3 同意。
Passage C : 尽管时代已经变了 , 但 是约会 在美 国仍 然像我 们父 辈时 代
一样是严守规则的。
Passage D : 虽然有可能通过鸟的外部传送方式到达夏威夷的植物 种子
变种要少于通过鸟的内 部传送 方法 达到 的植 物种子 变种 ,
但是已知更多的植物种子变种是适应于外部传送而不 是内
部传送。
Passage E : 鸟 , 蜜蜂和其它的一 些物种 都能在 不需 外部世 界的 感觉 提
示下把握住时 间 , 非常 明 显 , 这 种“生物 钟 ”便 构 成了 它 们
“方向感”的主要原因。

・ 35 6 ・
 Unit 4

1D 2 C 3 A 4B 5 B 6D 7 C 8 A 9 A 10 D
11 B 12 C 13 A 14 D 15 A 16 B 17 B 18 D 19 D 20 C

Passage A : 质疑和例常检查应当继续像计算机时代之前那样成为一种
良好工作习惯的组成部分。
Passage B : 部分替代品的观念 依然存 在 , 只是 人们 仍然瞧 不起 塑料 而
把它看成二流材料。
Passage C : 由于农业债务到期 , 他们是经常在收割后即刻 就卖掉麦子 ,
结果眼睁睁地看着麦价上涨让投机商人发财。
Passage D : 他在重复了这个实验许多次之后才得出这个结论。这 样他
就可以排除他的 (研究 ) 结果是由于偶然的因素的可能。

Unit 5

1 A 2 C 3 B 4D 5 B 6 A 7 B 8D 9 B 10 A
11 B 12 D 13 D 14 A 15 D 16 A 17 A 18 C 19 C 20 C

Passage A : 第二个节省成本开支 的革新 是一种 翻动木 头的装 置 , 这 样

便增加了到达木头堆的氧气量 , 从而导致更为充分的燃烧。
Passage B : 当第一批移民到达 这里时 , 这 个州 没有 多少面 积是 被森 林
覆盖 , 大约是在 1880 年 , 这 个 州原 来 的 森林 面 积 仅有 1/ 3
存留下来 , 也就是仅达这个州 77 000 平方英里面积的 1 % 。
Passage C : 它们的感觉器官便受到 干扰 , 这样 昆虫 便不知 道什 么时 候
正飞过潮湿的气流 , 或它们的感觉器官便发出错误的信号。
Passage D : 同样据计算 , 除了减少驾驶时间外 , 每年大约还可挽救 大约
16 000 个人的生命。

・ 35 7 ・
 Unit 6

1D 2 C 3 B 4A 5 B 6 B 7D 8A 9 A 10 C
11 B 12 D 13 D 14 B 15 A 16 A 17 D 18 D 19 C 20 D

Passage A : 通常的结论是这样的 , 由于 这些人 有着脆 弱的自 我价值 观

念而特别害怕失败 , 所 以他们 总是有 意准确 地推迟 他们 所
要干的事 , 这样便从未 留给自 己足够 的时间 以干好 他们 所
要干的事。
Passage B : 虽然它的成本较高 (与 13 500 镑相比它大约要 20 000 镑 ) ,
但在它长达 13 年的使用时间中 , 它的低维 修费用和燃 料成
本使它完全能与传统 柴油 发动 机汽 车竞争 , 这 还没 有考 虑
到对环境带来的益处。
Passage C : 这个现象当然不能使所 有的心 理学 家感 到满 意 , 而 这个 节
目也引起了他们的职业组织 (即 A P A )的关注。
Passage D : 他们工作了整整的一个夏天 , 在 9 月 17 日他们终于逐 字推
敲出这份 4 400 个单词的文件。

Unit 7

1 C 2 A 3 A 4 B 5 B 6 B 7 C 8D 9D 10 A
11 B 12 D 13 B 14 A 15 D 16 C 17 B 18 D 19 D 20 C

Passage A : 健康和稳定的政治条 件 , 没 有外部 的侵略 都能使 一个国 家

和平、持续地开发它的自然资源 , 从而比那种具有同样 富裕
资源但没有良好组织秩序的国家创造更多的财富。
Passage B : 就在你读这篇文章 时候 , 就有 数量 可观 的婴儿 出生 在这 个
世界上某个地方———每 1. 25 秒就有一个婴儿出生。

・ 35 8 ・
Passage C : 只有修满一定必修学分且成绩是优秀的全 日制学生才 有资
格申请学校宿舍的单身房间。
Passage D : 这种社会性需要和 平的聚 集 , 人 类的历 史主要 就是 人类 集
体性的发展过程 , 而这 种集体 性即 包括 了从游 牧部 落群 体
到大的和复杂的文明社会。

Unit 8

1 C 2 C 3 A 4 B 5D 6 C 7A 8 D 9D 10 B
11 C 12 B 13 C 14 C 15 D 16 B 17 B 18 D 19 D 20 C

Passage A : 人类的眼镜并不是对 所有的 光线都 敏感 , 而只是 对波长 在

380 纳米到 760 纳米之间的光敏感。
Passage B : 分贝单位是以 (纪念 ) Alexander G raham Bell 而命名 的 , Bell
是电话的发明者 , 同 时也 是对 声音 特性 有所成 就的 重要 的
研究人员。
Passage C : 英美两国人民对相互的对方国家都有一些流行的误解。
Passage D : 专家们相信 , 旋风 最大的 破坏力 存在于 这个漏 斗 ( 状 的风 )
之中 , 在这之中由于低气压便产生了真空。

Unit 9

1 B 2A 3 A 4 C 5D 6D 7 A 8 B 9D 10 B
11 B 12 A 13 A 14 C 15 D 16 D 17 C 18 D 19 B 20 B

Passage A : 并不是所有的风险其最后都包括在保险赔偿之中。
Passage B : 如果勘探人员知道要是他们受伤或患病只 需几个小时 就可
以用飞机送回医院的话 , 这将是十分令人欣慰的。

・ 35 9 ・
Passage C : 许多国家的人都很难理解绝大部分美国人 怎样在无需 公共
福利制度的支持下仍然能过着舒适的生活。
Passage D : 某些植物由于进化具有一些能有助于它们比它们中其 它种
类更好地适应环境的特性。

Unit 10

1 A 2B 3 D 4 C 5 C 6 B 7D 8 B 9 A 10 D
11 A 12 B 13 D 14 C 15 D 16 D 17 B 18 C 19 A 20 C

Passage A : 节目制作小组把这些 堆积如 山的新 闻分类 , 并决 定哪条 新

闻该收进节目中 , 以及每条新闻所需的时间。
Passage B : 美国土著人极其依 赖水牛 , 致 使他 们没 有去发 展其 它赖 以
生存的手段。
Passage C : 在美国的历史上 , 火 车所起 的作 用 , 与总 统、将 军们 所起 的
作用同等重要。
Passage D : 在东欧 , 吸烟的危 害似乎 并没引 起医生 及卫生 保健 人员 的
更大关注 , 部分原因是他们正竭尽全力劝人们少酗酒。

Unit 11

1D 2A 3 B 4 C 5 B 6 C 7 B 8D 9 B 10 A
11 B 12 D 13 A 14 B 15 B 16 D 17 B 18 B 19 B 20 B

Passage A : 工资增长缓慢以及不 太高雅 的行业 形象 , 使得许 多卡车 司

机放弃了方向盘而转入其它行业。
Passage B : 对默读历史发展的 种种因 素所 进行 的调 查说 明 , 默 读之 所
以成为大多数成年阅 读者 的一 种普 遍阅读 方式 , 是 因其 本

・ 36 0 ・
 身的特点发生了变化。
Passage C : 但如果你真正了解了一个重要而又有趣的问题 , 比如说 , 人
体的结构或两次世界 大战 的历 史 , 那么 向别人 解释 这一 切
会使你感到真正的快 乐 , 你会 喜欢 阅读 任何一 本关 于这 一
问题的新书 , 更乐于在向别人传授时学习。
Passage D : 据可靠的历史和考 古资料 证明 , 地球上 的人口 总数 大约 要
经过 80～100 万年的时 间才 能达 到 2. 5 亿 , 这 个数 字早 在
公元 1 世纪末已达到了。

Unit 12

1D 2A 3 C 4B 5 C 6 D 7 C 8 A 9D 10 C
11 C 12 B 13 D 14 B 15 A 16 C 17 B 18 D 19 A 20 A

Passage A : 即使是准备 最充 分 的学 生 , 如 果没 有掌 握 所谓 的“ 考试 技
巧”, 也照样会遭到失败。
Passage B : 即使她表现不错 , 大 家也 不会很 喜欢 她。而当 她表 现欠 佳
时 , 他们会以种种理由不失时机地贬低她。
Passage C : 气象科学的一个重要意 义 , 是 通过 进一 步的学 习研 究不 断
努力提高我们对大气 层的 认识 , 其 目的 在于提 高天 气预 报
的准确性。
Passage D : 如果一个母亲意识 到她对 孩子的 照顾有 多么 重要 , 她可 能
很容易地得出结论 : 她 可能挣 得的 额外 收入或 从外 出工 作
中得到的满足 , 与照顾好孩子相比 , 就不那么重要了。

・ 36 1 ・
 Unit 13

1 B 2D 3 C 4D 5 B 6 A 7 B 8D 9 D 10 C
11 C 12 B 13 D 14 A 15 A 16 D 17 D 18 D 19 D 20 C

Passage A : 日常生活中的许多情况可以证明这一点。但心理学家 们尤
为感兴趣的是人们的判断力与观点在多大程度上受小 组压
力的影响。
Passage B : 我们这一 代 人忘 记了 我 们所 继承 的 真 正的 精 神 财富 与 美
德。这种财富与美德远远超出我们现在所 高谈阔论的 价值
和观念。
Passage C : 现在 , 如果不取得布莱克・彼得的信任 , 他 的一切计划 就会
落空。
Passage D : 由于现代化的交通 方式 , 我们可 以进行 比以住 任何 时候 都
更容易、更迅速的旅行 , 但语言障碍问题却依然存在。

Unit 14

1 C 2 A 3 C 4 C 5 C 6 C 7B 8 B 9D 10 A
11 C 12 B 13 A 14 D 15 D 16 C 17 A 18 C 19 D 20 C

Passage A : 晚起的人到 10 点钟才开始上班 , 但他们必须一直工作 到晚

上 6 点。
Passage B : 我们现在掌握的许多关于地球内部的情况 都是通过地 震了
解的 , 因为地震产生的地震波通过地球而传播 , 并在传 播过
程中载有地层内部地质的各种信息。
Passage C : 尽管有几个老人康复组 织办得 不错 , 但 绝大多 数对 老人 来
说只不过是个处理垃 圾的场 所 , 因为 在这 儿“照顾 ”老人 的

・ 36 2 ・
 工作人员工资低 , 工作强度大 , 而且没有技能。
Passage D : 太勒不是那种封闭 保守的 人 , 他 对父亲 偏爱独 处的 特点 感
到不可理解。但他多少能察觉出父亲种树的真正目的。

Unit 15

1 C 2 A 3 B 4D 5 B 6 B 7 C 8D 9 C 10 D
11 B 12 C 13 C 14 D 15 C 16 A 17 A 18 B 19 D 20 C

Passage A : 对大部分日本人来说 , 欧美 人常见 的三至 四周休 假仍是 一

个遥远的梦 , 他们常常带着自豪和失望的复杂情感 , 看 待欧
共体官员给他们的绰号“工作狂”。
Passage B : 例如 , 在 80 年代 , 越来越多的年青 人愿意与父 母同住 , 而不
是像许多 70 年代的青年人那样另立门户。
Passage C : 这个实验还表明 : 把孩 子抱在 左边 的一 组母亲 自孩 子出 生
以后从未与其分开过。
Passage D : 当然 , 我们中一些人甚至连门牌号码及邮政编 号都忘掉了 ,
但这无关紧要 , 因为在 分检邮 件的 每个 阶段都 有人 工进 行
检查。

Unit 16

1 C 2D 3D 4C 5 C 6D 7D 8 D 9 A 10 A
11 B 12 D 13 A 14 C 15 B 16 B 17 C 18 A 19 C 20 D

Passage A : 此后 , 司机们不断地按动喇叭 , 像从前那样射灭罗马式 的烟

火 , 小心谨慎地驱车前进。
Passage B : 一位海湾水利官员这 样说 “
: 如 果石 油枯竭 了 , 我们 可能 会

・ 36 3 ・
 变穷 ; 但如果水找不到了 , 我们将再也无法生存。”
Passage C : 目前 , 众多商家竞争者 为满足 老客 户对 商品种 类和 价格 的
要求 , 纷纷对超级市场进行了大幅度的改进。
Passage D : 只有当我们开始思 考之时 , 才意 识到我 们穿衣 服有 许多 原
因 , 而这些原因与气候以及保暖需求根本无关。

Unit 17

1 B 2 B 3 B 4 B 5 C 6 C 7 A 8D 9 C 10 A
11 C 12 B 13 A 14 B 15 D 16 C 17 C 18 C 19 B 20 A

Passage A : 享利有关绝缘体的实验促使他试着把磁力转化成电力。
Passage B : 不管怎样 , 我们却 不由自 主地 对那 些奇 怪梦景 感到 迷惑 不
解 , 而我们发现这些梦景来源于心灵深处 , 是我们无意 识创
造出来的作品。
Passage C : 前不久 , 一家大型保险公司解雇了一名计算机 软盘管理员 ,
其原因涉及本人的私生活 , 而与工作状况无关。
Passage D : 技术的进步在某些 医学领 域引起 了很大 的发 展 , 其 中包 括
科学麻醉治疗领域。

Unit 18

1 C 2 C 3 D 4 C 5D 6 A 7B 8 A 9 C 10 C
11 A 12 D 13 D 14 C 15 A 16 B 17 B 18 C 19 A 20 D

Passage A : 那位售货员开始用高深技术术语滔滔不绝地解释各种音响
装置的优点 , 而 Robinson 先生没有一句能听得懂。
Passage B : 我记得在我的航海 中 , 即 使是 我们 的目 的地只 是远 处水 中

・ 36 4 ・
 能够看得很清楚的一 个岛 屿 , 也要 求我 正规地 标绘 出我 们
的航线。
Passage C : 他们得出这样的结论 : 这类微粒有数种 , 每 种构成一种 不同
的物质 , 用不同的方式使这些物质结合在一起 , 还会产 生其
他物质。
Passage D : 结果证明 : 在幕后 牵线的 该智力 竞赛节 目制作 人事 先把 答
案透露给了最有名气的参赛者。

Unit 19

1 A 2D 3 A 4 C 5 B 6 C 7 C 8 B 9 A 10 C
11 B 12 B 13 A 14 D 15 D 16 C 17 A 18 C 19 B 20 D

Passage A : 以一种能够对辨论和推理做出反映的方式培养长大的中产
阶级的孩子 , 能够比劳动阶层的孩子更好地应付课堂活动 ,
这些劳动阶层 的 孩子 常常 不 知道 怎 样理 解老 师 讲话 的 含
义。
Passage B : 这样 , 通过计算声音及其反射 (即回声 ) 之间的 时间间隔 , 你
就可以估算出到达障碍物的距离。
Passage C : 快速济览一下任何一种 新娘杂 志 , 都会 发现大 量有 诱惑 力
的商品和服务项目构成了婚礼赤字的一个因素。
Passage D : 尽管食品医药管理 局再三 努力控 制这些 做法 , 但是 这些 行
为却仍在继续。

Unit 20

1D 2B 3 D 4D 5 B 6D 7 C 8 C 9 A 10 C

・ 36 5 ・
11 C 12 D 13 A 14 B 15 C 16 B 17 B 18 B 19 C 20 A

Passage A : 这些歌曲在家庭范围 内流传 下来 , 没有办 法使这 些歌曲 闻

名整个国家 , 或者真正成为民族文化的一部分。
Passage B : 由于怕事情会现差 错和主 人 ( 丈夫 ) 回到 家时 会发脾 气 , 妻
子会说她是多么地忧虑 ; 她 知道 他 ( 丈 夫 ) 可能 会严 厉地 向
她大喊大叫 , 或者在有些情况下 , 特别是如 果他在下班 回家
途中又喝了几杯酒的话 , 他甚至会打她。
Passage C : 1955 年 , 这个 20 世纪 50 年代颇具典型的年份 , 也许能够有
代表性地说明该年代经济快速增长的情形。
Passage D : 其中许多仍然质地 良好的 那些小 油轮可 以被 改造成 货船 ,
以用于运输食糖、煤碳或矿石。

Unit 21

1D 2A 3 D 4 B 5 C 6D 7 B 8A 9 C 10 A
11 C 12 A 13 D 14 A 15 D 16 A 17 C 18 D 19 B 20 A

Passage A : 实际上 , 压力并不像人 们常常 想像的 那样是 一件坏 事。一

定量的压力对 于 提供 动力 和 赋予 生 活意 义都 是 至关 重 要
的。
Passage B : 在一定程度上 , 我们的智力在我们一出生就赋 予我们了 , 而
且 , 没有任何程度的 特别 教育 能够 把一 个天生 智力 低下 的
孩子造就成天才。
Passage C : 在那以后的几周里 , 这种疼痛更加频繁 , 细 眯着眼睛已 经成
为她脸上常见的一种表情。
Passage D : 昆虫没有表现出学习的才能或在学习基础上发展社会 传统
的能力。

・ 36 6 ・
 Unit 22

1 B 2D 3 A 4 B 5D 6 C 7D 8B 9 A 10 A
11 A 12 C 13 B 14 D 15 B 16 D 17 B 18 B 19 C 20 C

Passage A : 这样 , 如果把蒸汽冷却到室内温度 , 便会形成一种与原 先的

水无法区别的液体。
Passage B : 然而 , 当暴露在“雪光”里几 小时 后 , 无论戴 不戴 墨镜 , 他 们
都会发现自己出现了头痛、流泪甚至雪盲等症状。
Passage C : 这样做也许有用 , 但我 还是坚 决主 张在 年青人 当中 加强 营
养方面的教育。
Passage D : 面对这类需要考虑 的问题 , 一个 发达国 家的政 府可 能更 愿
意看到一个缓慢增长 , 而不是一个稳定或下降的人口。

Unit 23

1D 2 C 3 B 4A 5 C 6 D 7 C 8 B 9 C 10 B
11 C 12 B 13 C 14 A 15 B 16 D 17 A 18 C 19 B 20 A

Passage A : 100 家最大的国外投资公司 在 1977 到 1979 两年 间的总 投

资额猛增了 40% , 而这个数额还在继续稳步增长。
Passage B : 从这些方面获得的 信息不 同于 从书 本文 章中 获得的 信息 ,
这主要是因为其中的理论部分———对事物起因 的解释———
往往是些奇谈怪论。
Passage C : 一位叫希赫里兹的内科医生从理论上说明 人体内存在 着四
种液体 , 或者叫体液 , 他认 为与 每一 种体液 相对 应 , 也存 在
着一种特定的性格。
Passage D : 这些包括固定不变 的自然 资源 , 工业对 自然环 境可 能产 生

・ 36 7 ・
 的负面影响以及持续增长的世界人口。

Unit 24

1 C 2 B 3 C 4 C 5 C 6 C 7B 8 A 9D 10 C
11 A 12 C 13 B 14 C 15 C 16 A 17 B 18 D 19 D 20 D

Passage A : 亚当看到了这一点 , 但他也 固执地 认为劳 动分工 本身就 是

经济增长发展的原因 , 也说明 了经济 发展和 停滞之 间的 差
别。
Passage B : 如今 , 教师和家长倾向于注重个人的责任 , 强调学生接 受教
育的目的应放在他们 今后 的工 作上 , 而 不是为 他们 提供 普
通的高等教育。
Passage C : 这种情况不仅在贝克斯 特开始 毁坏 植物 时会 发生 , 而且 在
他杀死诸如昆虫这类生物时也会发生。
Passage D : 现在我们不得不承 认 , 在 宇宙的 星球中 很可能 存在 着有 生
物的世界 , 他们同我们 的关系 就如 同我 们同蚂 蚁的 关系 一
样。

Unit 25

1 C 2D 3 C 4 A 5 B 6 C 7 C 8 B 9B 10 B
11 B 12 C 13 C 14 B 15 B 16 B 17 D 18 A 19 B 20 D

Passage A : 影响我们肤色的因素 不仅仅 是遗传 , 我们 出生后 的居住 地

和生活方式也很重要。我们的肤色在很大程度上取决 于吸
收了多少阳光。
Passage B : 因此 , 除了加班加 点以 外 , 一个 侦探 还得 不分 昼夜地 外出 ,

・ 36 8 ・
 询问目击者 , 通常还 要在 危及 他们 利益 的情况 下说 服他 们
为他提供帮助。
Passage C : 数以千计的日常观念的含义 , 我们做出决定的 依据、习 惯和
技能的根源都能在过 去的 经历 中找 到 , 这些经 历都 由记 忆
带到了现在。
Passage D : 任何一个特定产品的价格和服务费用都同一个庞大而 复杂
的价格体系有关 , 在这个体系中 , 任何一样东西都或多 或少
地依赖于另一样东西。

Unit 26

1 C 2D 3 B 4B 5 D 6 A 7 C 8D 9 B 10 A
11 D 12 A 13 B 14 C 15 D 16 B 17 B 18 D 19 C 20 D

Passage A : 改革运动并非始自于医生而是由上流社会中的一些妇女发
起的 , 这些妇女在此之 前一直 起着新 卫生工 作保护 者的 作
用。
Passage B : 在美国 , 人们一直到最近才认为男人们应该哭泣。
Passage C : 但是快活是年轻的戏剧 演员们 生来 就具 有的 特性 , 他们 在
等待机会到更好的剧 团工 作 , 也可 能在 影片或 电视 中扮 演
角色。
Passage D : 进书店去买一本有关古代硬币的书 , 可是离开 书店时 , 你很
容易买上一本最新最畅 销的小 说 , 也可 能买一 本有 关拓 印
图的书 , 这只是你刚刚才有点儿感兴趣的事。

・ 36 9 ・
 Unit 27

1 C 2D 3 A 4C 5 B 6 C 7D 8 B 9D 10 C
11 C 12 D 13 C 14 A 15 B 16 A 17 A 18 B 19 D 20 D

Passage A : 但是否认非州运动员在墨西哥 ( 奥运会上 ) 取得的成功 是不

公正的 , 虽然许多非州 运动员 受益于 居住在 海拔高 的地 区
或在高海拔地区接受训练。
Passage B : 在一个男人和女人 的职责 没有 明显 分工 的家 庭 , 在 一个 许
多家务劳动或多或少 有所 分担 的家 庭 , 大男子 主义 的观 念
是难以立足的。
Passage C : 该报告强调说 , 锻炼对身体非常重要 , 虽然 锻炼身体未 必能
减轻体重 , 但是锻炼身体 可以 使人 体脂 肪与人 体肌 肉的 比
例保持匀衡。
Passage D : 奥地利科 学家 Ka rl Lit trow 借 鉴了 这个 主意 , 他 建 议在 撒
哈拉沙漠 , 挖出很宽的 沟渠 ; 其 沟渠 呈三角 形状 , 然 后在 沟
内装满汽油或类似汽油的物质 , 当这些渠沟被 点燃时 , 他们
就会给火星上的观察者 们展现 出燃 烧着 的三 角形 , 这将 表
明在地球上有智能生命的存在。

Unit 28

1 C 2 B 3 B 4D 5 C 6D 7 C 8 C 9D 10 A
11 C 12 A 13 C 14 D 15 C 16 C 17 C 18 C 19 D 20 B

Passage A : 蝰蛇只有在感到受到了威胁时 , 才会发起攻击 , 蛇会咬 你假

如你突如其来地出现在 它的面 前 , 或 者你没 注意踩 了它 或
者你想抓它 , 或者你想把它拎起来 , 这是它极其厌恶的事。

・ 37 0 ・
Passage B : 由于在低温下 , 蜜 蜂会 死去 , 因 此就 温度而 言 , 蜜蜂 必须 具
有创造自己环境的能力。
Passage C : 美国革命不是一个突发的用暴力推翻政治 和社会框架 的革
命 , 譬如在后来发生 在法 国和俄 国那 样的 革命。因 为在 哪
时候 , 法国和俄国早已是独立的国家了。
Passage D : 在阅读难度一般的书时 , 你能够每分钟读 400 字到 500 字 ,
其理解的准确率 为 70 % 或 更 高 , 假如 你 能做 到这 一 点 , 那
么你的阅读能力已经相当不错了。但是如果你能在阅 读速
度上和理解力上再有所提高 , 那自然是好事。

Unit 29

1D 2A 3 C 4D 5D 6 B 7D 8A 9 B 10 C
11 C 12 D 13 B 14 C 15 A 16 C 17 C 18 B 19 B 20 A

Passage A : 城 市与 郊区 相比 , 青 年人 更喜 欢城 市 , 因为他 们在 城市 工
作 ; 他们害怕燃料短缺 , 或者说他们喜欢城市带给他们的刺
激和机会。
Passage B : 工厂重复性的工作 将由机 器来 承担 , 这 就像很 久已 前机 器
承担了繁重的工作一 样 , 以后 代替 繁重 的体力 劳动 的将 是
枯燥乏味的脑力劳动。
Passage C : 但是两个人的字迹和发 音可能 都非 常清 晰易 懂 , 然 而他 们
却有着明显的差 异 , 而 且 我们 也 无 法说 哪 一 种 ( 笔迹 和 发
音 )更好或更标准。
Passage D : 在小型企业甚至在 中等企 业 , 你 一般都 有接触 各种 工作 的
经历 , 而且人们也希望 你在没 有过 多的 帮助和 指点 下干 许
多工作。

・ 37 1 ・
 Unit 30

1D 2B 3 D 4 B 5 A 6A 7 D 8 C 9 C 10 B
11 A 12 B 13 B 14 D 15 C 16 B 17 A 18 C 19 C 20 D

Passage A : 最近几年的一些研究表明 , 尤其对成年人来说 , 不吃早 餐可

能不会对身体造成不良的影响。
Passage B : 一位仪态优雅身着 紧身衣 的女 士细 心地 修剪 指甲和 耳环 ,
我们想她一定是个外 国人 , 因 为像 她那 般年纪 的英 国妇 女
不会穿得那么时髦 , 她可能也很有钱 , 因为 那鞋不是在 连锁
商店买的。
Passage C : 当他们回来时 , 他们发 现那些 遇到 火灾 而又没 有逃 脱的 动
物被烤熟了 , 而烤熟的肉比生肉吃上去要好吃多了。
Passage D : 从职业的角度考虑 , 食品 工业的 重要特 点是那 些要 从事 食
品工业工作的青年科学 家没有 必要 担心 , 他们 把自 己困 在
一个研究范围狭窄的领域里。

Suggested Answers for the short answer question passages

Passage 1
1. T he main topic of th is passage is abou t the nat ur e of ra dar .
2. T he passage states th at rada r ca n show how fast ot her planes a re
moving . So it can detect the speed of objects .
3. It is stated in th is passage t hat r adar uses radio waves .
4. T he word "it" r efe rs to t he radar set .
5. T he word " dense" means thick her e .

Passage 2

・ 37 2 ・
1. T he main topic of t he pas sage is abou t one e ndanger ed species, t he
Bengal tiger .
2. T he word " t his " he re means poachers who wa nt per sonal gratifica-
tion , no t just money .
3. In lin es 8 - 10 th e au t hor discus ses poach ers as one of th e ca uses of
t he decreasing num bers of tigers .
4. A problem a nd a solu tion . T he first pa ragra ph pr esents th e problem
of endager ed species, using th e e xample of t he tiger . T he second
pa ragraph describes so me solu tions to t he problem .
5. T he word "ala rming" her e means disturbing or t roubling .

Passage 3
1. T he main topic for this passage is about t he heal thy diets for vegetar-
ia ns .
2. T he word " lean" her e mea ns t hin . It also used t o refer to meat , often
beef , th at is lacking in fat .
3. If he or she did no t follow a va ried and prope rly pro tein- co mplemen-
ted diet .
4. T he word " prolonged" he re means ex tend or just leng t hen or contin-
ue .
5. T he low - qualit y proteins are mainly plant proteins and usually lack
one or more of t he es sen tial amino acids .

Passage 4
1. Sha rks ill ustr ate a problem in wildlife protection .
2. T he pas sa ge states tha t environmen talists help protect th e dolph in by
put ting political and economic pressure on tuna comp anies .
3. T he sha rks have bee n around for abou t 350 million years .

・ 37 3 ・
4. " Managed t o live" mea ns that someone or something , alt hough faced
with difficulies, was ab le t o survive . I t also mea ns th at surviving
was difficult .
5. "Weeding ou t" he re mea ns t o get r id of something t hat one doesn’t
wan t or t o discourage so met hing t hat is wea k in orde r for anot her
st ronger t hing to exist .

Passage 5
1. T he main idea is about t he political aspects of Roosevelt’s life .
2. " T ook action" means t o take ch arge of someth ing , usually a task tha t
needs to be don e . In th is case , t he action was th at Roosevelt respon-
ded t o t he problem of bank failure .
3. "Little by little" h ere means opened the banks a few at a time .
4. Lines 15 - 16 say t hat Roosevelt "t ook action" by closing t he b ank s .
5. T he aver age people .

Passage 6
1. T he main topic for t his pas sage is a bou t th e lead poisoning in chil-
dr en .
2. Lines 1 - 7 discus s th e physical and behavioral sy mp toms a nd effects
of high and low doses of lea d poisoning .
3. Paint co mpanies m ust limit t he amoun t of lead used in th eir pain t .
4. T he phr ase "exposed t o" means in contact wit h somet hing .
5. T he phr ase "linked t o " means associated wit h .

Passage 7
1. T he topic in this pas sage is prima rily concerned with th e va riab le and
unive rsal standards of etiquette in restauran ts .

・ 37 4 ・
2. In virt ually every restauran t it is unaccep table t o indiscriminately
t hrow your food on the floor .
3. T he word "it" r efe rs to learning the proper etiquette .
4. T he phrase " safe t o say" means t hat proba bly no one will disagree or
one is sure of wha t is said .
5. T he word "manner s" refers t o having politenes s .

Passage 8
1. T he pas sa ge mainly discuss abou t t he risk factors in hea r t at tacks .
2. T he work " po tential" h ere means pos sible .
3. T he word "t rigger" here ma ns to cause or t o ca use somet hing t o be-
gin .
4. Ear ly- morning rise in blood pressur e, h ear t ra te, concent ration of
hear t stimulating hor mones , plus a reduction of blood flow t o t he
hear t .
5. Lowe r hear t rate .

Passage 9
1. T he main topic for th is passage is a bout t he expansion of E ng lish as
an in ternational la nguage .
2. T he p as sage sta tes that E nglis h began to spr ead b eyond England dur-
ing t he two cen turies afte r 1 600 .
3. About 350 million nonna tive users of English .
4. T he word "course" here means time .
5. T he word "emerged" he re mea ns a ppear ed .

Passage 10
1. T he main topic for this passage is why Timbe r rat tlesnakes are en-

・ 37 5 ・
 dang ered .
2. In t he open a reas , w here the rat tlesnak e can get direct sun .
3. Beca use , like all rep tiles , th ey canno t g enera te or r egulate t heir own
body tempe rat ur e in ternally and m ust rely on t he sun’s war mt h for
heat .
4. T he phrase " coupled with " here mea ns combin ed with or joined
with .
5. T he phrase "easy prey" he re means victims or a n animal t hat may be
easily k illed by anot her animal .

Passage 11
1. Remedies for hiccups .
2. One th at a suffere r fi rmly believes .
3. Beca use t his "c ur e" is often worse th an th e ailmen t itself .
4. His fait h in it .
5. Beca use h e failed t o stop his h iccuping for eigh t mon t hs afte r a n op-
er ation

Passage 12
1. He became a composer , a singer , a pianist , and the winner of ten
Gr ammy awa rds .
2. T hey encouraged him to join his sigh ted brot her s in as many activi-
ties as pos sible , and helped him t o sharpe n his sense of hear ing .
3. Beca use sound was very impor tan t t o h im a nd he relyed .

Passage 13
1. T he colour of t he goods .
2. Red mea nt th e colour of b lood and rage and th e h eat t hat came with

・ 37 6 ・
 effort .
3. Beca use of its exciting connotations .
4. It may calm people .
5. Beca use a vivid yellow can produce a more basic state of aler t ness and
alar m .

Passage 14
1. It can h elp a spea ker " sell" his or her ideas t o an aodience and let a
sp eak er know and monitor th e listen ers .
2. You m ust remain eye con tact wit h an audie nce . Because eye con tact
has pe rsuasive powers and helps hold listene r’s inte rest .
3. T hose who focus exclusively on t heir no tes .
4. He or s he will be rega rd ed not only as excep tionally well-disposed by
t heir ta rget bu t also as more believable and ea rnest .
5. Vis ual cues from audience members can indicate th at a sp eec h is
dragging , t hat th e sp eak er is dwelling on a p ar ticular point for too
long , or t hat a pa rticula r poin t requi res fur the r explanation .

Passage 15
1. It focuses not only on politics, economics and war but also on reli-
gious beliefs , emotions , a nd psychology .
2. It r eflects emo tions and opinions .
3. Fra ncisco Goya .
4. T hey pain ted r eligious pict ur es in Chur ches and ot her religious build-
ings .
5. Beca use statu es ar e consider ed t o be unholy .

・ 37 7 ・
Passage 16
1. Some ot her common t ypes of reasoning .
2. From effect to cause and on to effect .
3. One which must be prese nt for th e effect to occur .
4. One which can produce an effect unlaid , t hough t here may be more
t han one sufficien t ca use .
5. Va rious t ypes of r eanoning .

Passage 17
1. T he fi rst se ntence is t he topic sentence .
2. T he re a re more differ ent ways of looking a t things presen t in a mixed
society .
3. It r efers t o "m ore respect for differ ent opinions a nd beh avior .
4. It is more likely to occur more fr equen tly and readily in t he mate rial
aspects of th e cu lture tha n is t he non-mater ial .
5. T he re are fewer occasions for people to see t he need or the oppor tu-
nity for cha nge because every thing seems to be t he same .

Passage 18
1. Britons’overweight problem .
2. T o eat ce reals , brea d , fruit and vegitables , a nd cut down on fatt y
meats , but ter a nd s weet foods .
3. Getting fat when he is a child .
4. T hey risk severe healt h problems .
5. T he doctors should learn t o be more sym pat hetic a nd specific in th eir
advice to t he over weigh t .

・ 37 8 ・
Passage 19
1. Cr eative t hinking .
2. Finding t he problem and originating a solution .
3. For what t hey imply .
4. Not ordinary .
5. Not be too concerned a bout it .

Passage 20
1. It r eleases hydrogen ions when dis solved in water .
2. It can cause burns on skin a nd dis solve many metals .
3. Acid rain .
4. It ofe rn makes soil a nd rivers m ore acid , or even mak es ma ny typ es
of plants and a nimals begin to die .
5. Whe n t he rain dis solves t he sulfur oxides and nit rogen oxides , th ey
beco me acids and fall to t he ea rt h as snow if t he tem pera ture is below
freezing .

Passage 21
1. T hey wan t the imigra nt workers to help to improve t hei r facilities .
2. T he high pay wit h low ta xation .
3. T hey have to hel p each ot her to cope with difficult living conditions .
4. Com plicateil work .
5. No coun try would like to have too ma ny foreign work es as per manen t
r esiden ts .

Passage 22
1. T he buildings of the cit y wou ld rest on a floceting island .
2. By t reating sea wa ter .

・ 37 9 ・
3. People in t he city did no t burn oil or coal .
4. T he re is not e nough space for building cities on la nd .

Passage 23
1. Physical a nd Chemical Cha nges .
2. produce a gas fro m wate r .
3. It does not beco me liquid .
4. solid
5. w heth er a new substance is produced .

Passage 24
1. no t used to expr ess a desire to do someth ing in t he immediate fu tur e .
2. com paring th eir speech with t hat of native spea kers .
3. take advan tage of availab le language models .
4. comm unication is t he prima ry goal of la nguage lea rning .
5. making mistak es can h elp t he lea rn er discover t he rules of the lan-
guag e .

Passage 25
1. He wan ted t o hinde r Joe’s t rading pr epara tions .
2. Joe wa nted to t rap Ma nuel .
3. He knew the real reason for it .
4. Beca use t hey com peted mer ciles sly wit h each o the r .
5. He never intended to keep it .

Passage 26
1. dreame rs while t hey dr eam .
2. eve ryone dr eams eve ry night .

・ 38 0 ・
3. t he s ubject’s brain waves and eye movement .
4. fidget
5. was of m ost inte rest to him and occurr ed immedia tely af ter he wen t
to sleep .

Passage 27
1. Differ ent colours and roo ms will stimulate diffe ren t reactions .
2. T hey will spend longer time .
3. T hey will make visitors appreciate th e e xhibits more .
4. Subjects refe r to people involved in an e xpe rimen t .
5. T he effects of a roo m’s g eneral appea rances a nd its wall colour on
visit ors .

Passage 28
1. It can be useful in pla nning fu ture research .
2. T he r esea rcher s did no t adequa tely establish the relationships in-
volved .
3. T hey r eact t he way t hey do to any ot her resea rch .
4. Some studen ts do not unde rstand t he mea ning of t he resea rche rs’
questions .
5. It is more difficult tha n t he st uden t research may realize .

Passage 29
1. A teache r must be able to hold th e a tten tion and in terest of his audi-
ence; he must be a clea r speaker ; and he must be a ble t o act what he
is teaching .
2. His voice is alwa ys cha nging according to wh at he is talking abou t .
3. Whe n an actor is on t he sta ge, he has t o make all his carefully learn t

・ 38 1 ・
 words a nd actions seem natural .
4. T hey ask and ans we r questions, t hey obey ord ers and if t hey do no t
unde rstand something , t hey say so .
5. Beca use h e has t o suit his act to the needs of his audience , which is
his class .

Passage 30
1. It struck t he moon .
2. It was more t han a qu ar ter of a million miles .
3. T hey s howed t he hidden side of t he moon for the fi rst time .
4. T heir orbits t ook t hem nea r th e moon .
5. T hey ha d not hing in common .

・ 38 2 ・